
Class 
Book 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 



A FRENCH GRAMMAR 



FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 



BY 

M. M. BEEBE, Ph.D. 

Professor of French in John Crouse College 
Syracuse University 



* 



NEW YORK 
THE IVES-BUTLER CO. 

1911 






COPYKIGHT, 1911, BY 

IVES-BUTLER CO. 



#i 



Press of J. J. Little & Ives Co. 
New York 



©CIA2956«» 



PREFACE. 

The aim of the author in preparing this textbook 
has been twofold: first, to bring the student into touch 
with the conversation of French daily life; second, to 
teach French grammar as it is taught in France. 

To carry out the first aim more satisfactorily, the con- 
versational exercises of the fifty elementary lessons were 
largely written while living in the home of a professor in 
Paris and were submitted to three French authorities: 
one in the Sorbonne, one an examining professor in the 
public schools of Paris, and the third a private instructor. 
To carry out the second aim, "La Grammaire Francaise 
Complete" by Brachet et Dussouchet, the grammar used 
in the public schools of Paris, has been adopted as the 
chief authority in the present work. 

The vocabularies, carried through twenty-nine lessons, 
have also been planned with a special aim. Finding from 
experience in teaching French that a student remembers 
words more easily when they are classified on some logical 
basis, I have tried to have a definite scheme running- 
through each vocabulary. For instance, the first vocab- 
ulary is devoted to familiar nouns, the masculine being 
on the left, the feminine on the right, and words easily 
confused placed opposite each other. The second is de- 
voted to adjectives, the third to prepositions, etc. Far- 
ther on, as the student is taken into the country, the 
scheme running through the vocabulary of Lesson XIV 
is names of animals, Lesson XV fruits, XVI flowers, XVII 
insects and forest trees, etc. 



IV PREFACE 

An effort has been made to bring the book into line 
with the most recent demands for French instruction, 
whether in the secondary schools or in colleges. Supple- 
mented by French texts, it should furnish material for 
two years' work, and Part II, it is hoped, may serve as a 
book of reference even after that. 

Aside from Brachet et Dussouchet, I wish to name, 
among the grammars I have consulted, Fraser and Squair, 
Chardenal, Grandgent, Wall, Plattner, Larive et Fleury, 
and Littre. 

The three authorities in Paris to whom I submitted my 
work are Monsieur Jean C. de Bardy, Secretaire du 
Bureau de Renseignements Scientifiques de FUniversite 
de Paris; Monsieur Alcide Betrine, Professeur de Lettres, 
Membre des Jurys d'Examens de la Seine, Officier de 
1'Instruction publique; and Mademoiselle L. Jouault de 
Parigny. I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to 
them, as well as to Professor A. S. Patterson, Ph. D., and 
Professor Charles W. Cabeen, Ph.D., Professors of French 
in Syracuse University; to Professor Irene Sargent of the 
same institution; to Professors William Schaffrath and 
L. F. D. Briois of the Syracuse Central High School, and 
to Miss Harriet Goodyear of the Goodyear-Burlingame 
School. 

M. M. B. 

Syracuse, April 12, 1911. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Introduction 1 



PART I. 

Elementary Lessons I-L 13 

PART II. 

The Verb 181 

The Noun . 248 

The Article 265 

The Adjective 276 

The Pronoun 295 

The Adverb 308 

The Preposition 319 

The Conjunction . . . 323 

The Interjection 326 

Homonyms 327 

Vocabularies 329 

Index 397 



INTRODUCTION 

§ 1. The Alphabet (L' Alphabet) 

The French alphabet consists of the same twenty-six 
letters as the English, but they are pronounced as fol- 
lows : 

l -A ah 

B bay 

C say 

D day 

E a 

F eff 

G zhay 

H ash 

I ee 

J zhee 

K kah 

L ell 

M emm 

Notes. — 1. The French vowels, unlike the English, have each a 
simple, pure sound. In English, a is usually pronounced as if it 
were made up of a + e, i as if it were i+e, o as if it were o+uh, but 
one of the beauties of the French language is the purity of its vowel 
sounds. The vowel a in French then is not ah+uh, but simply the 
first of these two sounds; e is not a + e, but simply a. So also the 
consonants b, c etc., are not ba+e (or ba+uh\ ca+e (or ca+uh), 
but are each a single sound, bay, say etc. 

2. The r is pronounced more distinctly than in English and is best 
mastered by practice in trilling it. 

3. The sound of u is that of the modified u (u) of the German, 



N 


enn 








P 


Pay 


Q 


ku 


2 R 


err 


S 


ess 


T 


tay 


3 U 


ti 


V 


vay 


4 W 


double' vay 


X 


iks 


Y 


ee grec 


Z 


zed 



I INTRODUCTION [§ 2 

or nearly that of the u in " student." Fix the lips as if about to 
whistle, then make a sound half way between e and u. 

4. The w is not properly a French letter, since it occurs only in 
words of foreign origin. 

§ 2. Orthographic Signs (Signes Orthographiques). 

1. There are five kinds of orthographic signs in French: 
the accents (les accents), the diaeresis (le trema), the 
cedilla (la cedille), the apostrophe (P apostrophe), and 
the hyphen (le trait d'union). 

2. The accents are three in number: the acute (l'ac- 
cent aigu), the grave (l'accent grave), and the circumflex 
(l'accent circonflexe). 

3. The acute accent ( ' ) is used only over the letter e. 

4. The grave ( " ) accent is used chiefly over the letter 
e. It occurs, however, in a few other instances where its 
purpose is not to affect the sound but usually to distin- 
guish between words which might otherwise be confused. 
Thus it distinguishes a. (to) from a (has), la (there) from 
la (the), ou (where) from ou (or) and des (from, since) 
from des (some). 

5. The circumflex accent (") may occur over any 
vowel. It indicates ordinarily the suppression of a letter 
which, in disappearing from the Old French or Latin word, 
had the effect of prolonging the preceding vowel. Thus 
the Latin word festa becomes the French fete (feast, holi- 
day), testa becomes tete (head). 

6. The diaeresis (") is placed over the vowels e, i, u, 
when, in immediate contact with another vowel, they 
should be pronounced separately : No-el (Christmas) , ha-ir 
(to hate), Sa-ul (Saul). E after gu indicates that the u is 
pronounced while the e remains silent : eigne = ci-gu 
(hemlock). 



§ 3] VOWELS 3 

7. The cedilla (,) is placed under the letter c before a, 
o or u, when the c should have the soft or s sound : frangais 
(French), legon (lesson), regu (received). 

8. The apostrophe indicates the dropping of a final 
vowel, usually a, e, or i, before a word beginning with a 
vowel or with silent h. Thus la epee = l'epee (the sword), 
je aime =f aime (I love or like), si il = s'il (if he, if it), le 
homme = Vho?nme (the man). 

9. The hyphen (-) is used as in English: arc-en-ciel 
(rainbow) . 

§ 3. Vowels (Voyelles). 

1. In French the distinction between long and short 
vowels is not the same as in English. In English we say 
that a is long in "hate," short in "hat," broad in "arm," 
but in French the only distinction between long and short 
vowels is in the length of time taken in pronouncing them. 
Hence a sound pronounced quickly is short (bref), pro- 
longed a little it is medium (moyen), and prolonged still 
more it is long (long). 

2. On the other hand, the different sounds of the same 
vowel in French are usually divided into two classes: the 
open sound (ouvert), and the closed sound (ferme), so 
named from the position of the vocal organs in pronounc- 
ing them. Thus a in "hat" is open, while a in "arm" 
is closed. 

3. The following "Figurative Table of Pronunciation" 
is adapted from "Le Dictionnaire General de la Langue 
Franchise" by Hatzfeld and Darmesteter, whose work 
has been revised and completed by Monsieur Thomas, 
Professor of Philology in the University of Paris. We 
use this table in explaining the different sounds but insert 



INTRODUCTION 



:§3 



afterward the table of symbols of the International Pho- 
netic Association, and, since the latter system is probably 
more familiar to American teachers of French, we shall 
use it to indicate pronunciation throughout the present 
work. The English equivalent given for each of the 
sounds which follow must of course be taken with the 
qualification mentioned in Note 1 under the Alphabet. 

TABLEAU FIGURATIF DE LA PRONONCIATTON. 
I. Vowels (Voyelles). 
A. Pure Vowels (Voyelles Pures). 



long : 

1. A ouvert { moyen : 

(a in " hat ") - { bref : 

f long : 

2. A ferme I moyen : 

(a in " arm ") [ bref : 

f long : 

3. E ouvert \ moyen : 

(e in " met ") [ bref : 

j" long : 

4. E ferme \ moyen : 

(a in " hate ") I bref #; 



5. I 



iee in " meet ") 



EXAMPLES. 

vague 
lame 
: acte 



long : 
\ moyen : 
( bref : 

f long : 

6. O ouvert < moyen : 

(Between short o and [ bref : 
short u) 



7. O ferme . . 
(o in " rose ") 



long : 
moyen : 
bref : 



pate 
pas 
not used 



tUe 

proces 

secte 

not used 

ete 

not used 

dire 

dit 

dite 

mort 

homme 

poste 

hole, rose 
beau 
not used 



§3] 



VOWELS 



8. Ou 



(00 in " choose ") 



9. Eu ouvert 

(nearly u in "run") 

10. Eu mi(half) -ouvert . . 




douze 

doux 

douce 

neuve 
not used 

neuf 

{ tres bref : me, le, de, venir 



(half way between 9 and 11) 
f long 



11. Eu ferme 

(nearly u in " burn ") 



12. U 



(See note 3, §1) 



moyen 
bref 

long 

moyen 

bref 



9 ii 
heureuse 

heureux 
not used 

dur 

du 

due 



Notes on the Pure Vowels. 

1. Of the two sounds of a and of o, the ouvert is much more com- 
mon, the ferme generally occurring, however, when the vowel has the 
circumflex accent, when followed by s or by tion: pate, pas, nation; 
hote, nos, notion. 

2. E (e avec 1' accent aigu) always has sound 4; e (e avec l'accent 
grave) has sound 3; e (e avec l'accent circonflexe) has sound 3 pro- 
longed. 

3. E without any accent (e sans accent, called " e feminin " or 
" e muet ") is subject to the following rules: 

a. When final in a word of more than one syllable it is silent: 

acte, pate. 

(1) Yet some French authorities sound this e lightly in order 

to avoid ending a word abruptly with a consonant. 

(2) Final es in a word of two or more syllables is usually 

silent: paries. 

b. In monosyllables and elsewhere when pronounced, its sound 

is generally that of 10 (above) : me, le, venir. 
(1) In the body of a word, it is silent after a single or dpuble 
consonant (elever = eTver, appeler = ap'ler), but sounded 
lightly after the two different consonants (justement). 



INTRODUCTION 



[§3 



(2) E = e (4) in final ed, ef , er, ez if the consonant is silent 
{-pied =pie, clef = cle, parler = parle, parlez = parle) but 
e=e (3) before a pronounced r (mer, perdre). 

B. Nasal Vowels (Voyelles Nasales). 

Aside from the above mentioned twelve pure vowel 
sounds, the French has four nasalized vowels, having no 
exact equivalent in English. Each one, it will be noticed, 
consists of some vowel followed by m or n, yet the con- 
sonant must not be pronounced; it simply makes itself 
felt by nasalizing the vowel. These nasal vowels are 
represented by the following combinations of letters: 



i. am 

an 

em 

*en 

2. im 
in 
aim 
ain 
eim 
ein 
ym 

yn 

3. om 

on 

4. um 

un 



nasal of 
ferme (2) 



nasal of 
e ouvert (3) 



long : tante, chambre, science 
moyen : sang, champ, empereur 



long 



limbe, tinte, sainte, Reims 



moyen : faim, saint, vin, rien, sympho- 
nic, syndic 



Nasal of / long : bombe, honte, onze 
o jouvert (6) \ moyen : bon, bombarder 

\ Nasal of / long : humble 

j eu ouvert (9) \ moyen : commun 

Notes on Nasal Vowels. 

1. The nasal vowels are long when followed in the same syllable 
by a consonant that is pronounced; they are medium in the contrary 
case, but are never short. 



* Note. — When preceded by i, en frequently has the sound of 
the second 'nasal instead of the first-: bien, rien. 

f Other authorities make this the nasal of o ferme (7). 



§ 4] COXSOXAXTS 7 

2. The nasal effect in any of the above combinations is destroyed: 

a. When the consonant m or n is doubled: bon, bonne. 

b. When m and n are united: amnistie. 

c. When followed by a vowel: brun, brune. 

C. Digraphs (Digrammes) . 

A digraph is a combination of two letters having but 
a single sound. The following deserve attention: 

1. ai = e ouvert (3), as in aimais, jamais, except when 
final in verbs. Then it has sound 4 (e ferme): aimai. 

When followed by 1 or 11, ai does not ordinarily form a 
single sound, but the letters are separated, the a having 
sound 1 (a ouvert) while the i has the sound of y (explained 
below, §4, 4): taille. 

2. au = o ferme (7): chaud. The trigraph eau also has 
sound 7: bateau, chapeau. 

3. ei = e ouvert (3): Seine, reine. 

D. Diphthongs (Diphthongues). 

A diphthong, in distinction from a digraph, is a combina- 
tion of two separate sounds, pronounced however with a 
single emission of the voice. There are three classes of 
diphthongs in French: 

1. The sound of y or i (5) + a vowel: viande, papier. 

2. The sound of u (12)+ a vowel: ltd, muet. 

3. The sound of w or ou (8) + a vowel: out, moi. 
Note.— The diphthong oi, it will be seen, belongs to the third 

<Tass. being equivalent to wa: oiseau (wa-zo), Mademoiselle (mad- 
mwa-zel) . 

§ 4. II Consonants (Consonnes). 

Most consonants have approximately the same sounds 
in French as in English. The following, however, should 
be noticed : 

1. C and g are soft (that is, c = s and g = zh) before e, 



8 INTRODUCTION [§ 4 

i, y, hard before a, o, u. When the soft sound of these 
consonants must be preserved before the latter vowels, 
a cedilla is placed under the c (g) and an e (not to be 
pronounced) is inserted after g: frangais, mangeons. 

2. His never sounded in French. It is silent when it 
does not make itself felt in the pronunciation: V habitude 
(l'abitude), Vhomme (l'om). It is breathed or aspirate 
when it prevents elision or liaison (see §§ 6, 7): 
la haine (la|en), les heros (lejero). 

3. J has the sound of zh, or of s in " pleasure ": je, 
jamais. 

4. L or 11. Ill not initial and il when final are usually 
pronounced like y after a vowel and like iy after a con- 
sonant. This sound is known as " liquid 1," or " 1 mou- 
ille": briller (bri-ye) , famille (fa-miy), Ver smiles (Ver- 
say), Marseilles (Mar-sey), B astille (Bas-tiy), travail 
(tra-vay), deuil (deuy). 

Note. — Yet some exceptions occur where I has its regular sound, 
others where it is silent: mille (mil), pupille (pu-pil), tranquille 
(tran-kil), ville (vil), village (vi-laj), Jusil (fu-si). 

5. Gn, known as " liquid, n " or "n mouille," has a 
sound approaching ny, such a sound as we have in the 
English words mignonette, union: signal, regne. 

6. Qu sometimes has the sound of kw, as in English: 
quadrupede ; sometimes that of k alone : qui, quel. 

7. S between two vowels has the sound of z, otherwise 
that of sharp s: roseau (ro-zo), but seau (so). 

8. Th is pronounced simply as t : theatre, theme. 

9. W, as stated in note 4, page 2, is used only in words 
of foreign origin. In those coming from the German, it 
is pronounced like v, while in those from the English it 
has the sound of ou or w. A Frenchman, however, usu- 



§5] 



CONSONANTS 



ally calls " whist " oaist and " whig " oaig, because he 
finds it difficult to pronounce wh. 

10. Y is regarded sometimes as a vowel, sometimes as 
a semi-consonant. 

a. Alone or before a consonant, it has the sound of ee, 
hence is a vowel : II y a, Yvonne. 

b. Before a vowel, it has the sound of y as in " you," 
and is called a semi-consonant or semi-vowel: crayon 
(kre-yon) . 

Note. — When between two vowels in a word, y = ii. The first i 
unites with the preceding vowel to form a digraph or diphthong, 
while the second i has the sound of y: crayon = crai-ion= kre-yon; 

14 

voyez = voi-iez = vwa-ye. 

§ 5. Table of International Phonetic Symbols. 

Sound Symbol Example I Sound Symbol Example 



1. 


a ouvert 


a acte (akt) 


b 




b 


beau (bo) 


2. 


a ferine 


a pas (pa) 


d 




d 


dame (dam) 


3. 


e ouvert 


8 secte (sekt) 


f 




f 


fort (fo : r) 


4. 


e ferme 


e ete (ete) 


g hard 


g 


gant (ga) 


5. 


i 


i dire (di : r) 


h as 


pirate 


h 


hero (hero) 


6. 


o ouvert 


mort (mo:r) 


k 




k 


car (kar) 


7. 


o ferme 


o rose (ro: z) 


1 




s 


long (15) 


8. 


ou 


u doux (du) 


m 




m 


mon (m5) 


9. 


eu ouvert 


a neuf (naf) 


n 




n 


non (n5) 




\ eu mi-ouvert / „ 










10. 


| (e muet) 


-<> me (me j 


n liquid 


P- 


signe (sip) 


11. 


eu ferine 


creux (kro) 


P 




P 


pas (pa) 


12. 


u 


y dur (dyr) 


r 




r 


par (par) 


13. 


first nasal 


a tante (ta:t) 


s 




s 


si (si) 


14. 


second nasal 


§ faim (fe) 


sh 




s 


chose ($o: z) 


15. 


third nasal 


5 bon (b5) 


t 




t 


theme (tern) 


16. 


fourth nasal 


a humble (5: bl) 


V 




V 


vin (ve) 


17. 


f first 
1 diphthong 
J second 


1 

> j viande (vja:d) 

J 

1 


z 




z 


zone (zo:n) 


18. 


) diphthong 


> q lui Qui) 


zh 




3 


je (33) 




f third 












19. 


\ diphthong 


> w oui (wi) 


sign 


of length 





10 INTRODUCTION [§§ 6~8 

§ 6. Elision (Elision). 

Elision is the dropping of a final vowel, usually a, e, or 
i, before a word beginning with a vowel or with silent h. 
This omission, indicated by an apostrophe, occurs, as a 
rule, only in monosyllables; a is dropped only in the 
word la, i only in si before il or Us: la epee = I'epee, je 
a,ime=j > aime, le homme = rhomme, si i\ = s'il. 

Note. — In reading poetry, any final vowel is elided before a word 
beginning with a vowel or with silent h, but such elision is not indi- 
cated by an apostrophe. 

§ 7. Linking (Liaison). 

When one word ends with a consonant and the next 
begins with a vowel or with silent h, the final consonant 
is usually carried over to the following word, if closely 
connected in sense. This binding together of sounds is 
called the liaison (lj t-zo): vous_avez, lesjiommes. 

Note 1 . — Final s or x carried over has the sound of z, d has that 
of t, and g that of k. 

Note 2. — The t in et (and) is never carried over. 

Note 3. — When not carried over.in liaison, final consonants are 
ordinarily silent, except the four: c, f, 1, and r, and even these are 
sometimes silent. 

§ 8. Syllables (Syllabes). 

1. In reading French, each syllable if possible begins 
with a consonant sound: I|l a| ma|l a|la|tete. He has 
headache. 

2. In dividing a word into syllables, s single consonant 
between two vowels ordinarily goes with the second: ja- 
mais. 

3. If there are two consonants, they are usually sep- 
arated; but if the second is 1 or r (the first being some 



§§ 9-10] PUNCTUATION 11 

other consonant), or if the two are gn, ch, ph or th, both 
consonants go with the following vowel: al-ler, ou-vri-er, 
a-gneau. 

Note. — Every French word, then, has as many syllables as it 
has vowels, digraphs, or diphthongs. Even " silent e," which in 
prose is not sounded, is regarded as forming a syllable and in poetry 
is pronounced. Thus aime = ai-me, pronounced in prose tm but in 
poetry e-md. 

§ 9. Capitals (Majuscules). 

Capital letters are used in general as in English with 
the following exceptions: 

1. The pronoun je (I) is not capitalized: Si je vais, If 
I go. 

2. Proper adjectives are capitalized only when used 
substantively, referring to people: 

(Test un Frangais. He is a Frenchman. 
II parle /rancais. He speaks French. 

3. Names of the days of the week and of the months 
are not capitalized: merer -edi (Wednesday), Janvier (Jan- 
uary). 

4. Names of the various religions, and of the different 
schools of philosophy are not capitalized: bouddhisme 
(Buddhism), catholicisme (Catholicism); sto'iciens (Stoics). 

Note. — Of course these exceptions do not hold in a word that 
begins a sentence. 

§ 10. Punctuation (Ponctuation) . 

The punctuation marks, which are used substantially 
the same as in English, are: la virgule (,), le point (.), le 
point-virgule (;), les deux points (:), le point d'interroga- 
tion (?), le point d'exclamation ( !) , les points de suspension 
(. . . .)) les parentheses [( )], les guillemets (gij-nu) (" "), 
and le tiret ( — ). 



PART I. 



LESSON I. 

§ 11. Gender (le genre). 1. All French nouns are either 
masculine (masculin) or feminine (feminin). 

2. Names of male beings are masculine and names of 
female beings are feminine as in English. Names of ob- 
jects as well must be either masculine or feminine. 

§ 12. Number (le nombre). There are in French the 
same two numbers as in English: the singular (le singu- 
lier) and the plural (le pluriel). 

§ 13. Definite Article (Particle defini). The definite 
article, "the," has the following forms: 

Singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

le (la). la (la). . 

Plural (both genders). 

les (le). 

§ 14. Negation (la negation). With verbs, "not" is 
made up of two particles, ne . . . pas, the verb being 
placed between them: II ne parle pas (He is not speaking.) 

§ 15. Interrogation (^interrogation) . In asking a di- 
rect question, the subject, if a personal pronoun, is usu- 
ally placed after the verb as in English: II est ici (He is 
here). Est-il ici? (Is he here?) 



14 



LESSON I 



§15 



Vocabulary. 



le livre (li:vr), the book 
le crayon (krejo), the pencil 
le papier (papje), the paper 
le tableau (tablo), the black- 
board 
le mur (myr), the wall 
le plancher (pla$e), the floor 
le plafond (plafo), the ceiling 
oui (wi). yes 
ce (sa), this, it 
que (ka) interrog. pron., what 

Que'est ce que ce'est? (kes- 
is? = What is this? 



la regie (regl), the rule, ruler 

la craie (kre), the chalk 

la plume (plym), the pen, 

feather 
la table (tabl), the table 
la porte (port), the door 
la fenetre (fanertr), the window 
la chaise ($e:z), the chair 
non (no), no 
est (e), is 
que (ka) rel. pron., which, thai 

ka-se). What is this that this 



EXERCISE I. 

1. Que'est ce que ce'est? 2. Ce'est le' livre. 3, 
Qu'est ccque c'est? 4. C'est la regie. 5. Est-ce la regie? 
6. Oui, c'est la regie. 7. Est-ce le crayon? 8. Ncn, ce 
n'est pas le crayon, c'est la regie. 9. Qu'est-ce que c'est? 
10. C'est le plancher. 11. Est-ce le plancher? 12 = Oui, 
c'est le plancher. 13. Est-ce le plafond? 14. Non, ce 
n'est pas le plafond, c'est le* plancher. 15. Est-ce la fe- 
netre? 16. Oui, c'est la fenetre. 17. Est-ce la table? 18. 
Non, ce n'est pas la table, c'est le tableau. 19. Est-ce 
le mur? 20. Non, ce n'est pas le mur, c'est la porte. 



For Oral or Written Work. 

1. What is this? 2. It is the chair. 3. Is this the chair? 
4. Yes, it is the chair. 5. Is it the table? 6. No, it is not 
the table, it is the chair. 7. Is this the chalk? 8. Yes. it 
is the chalk. 9. Is it the pencil? 10. No, it is not the 
pencil, it is the chalk. 11. Is this the paper? 12. No, it 
is not the paper, it is the pen. 



$§16-20] LESSON II 15 



LESSOX II. 

§ 16. Feminine Gender (le genre feniinin). 1. The cor- 
responding feminine forms both of nouns and of adjec- 
tives are ordinarily made by adding an unaccented e to 
the masculine: le marquis, la marquise (the marquis ; the 
marchioness); brim, brune (brown). 

2. If the masculine already ends in e, there is no 
change for the feminine: le Russe, la Russe (the Rus- 
sian), jaime, jaune (yellow). 

§ 17. Plural Number (le nombre pluriel). 1. The gen- 
eral rule for forming the plural is the same in French as 
in English, namely. Add s to the singular: le livre, les 
livres: jaune, jaunes. 

2. If the singular ends in s, x, or z, there is no change 
for the plural: le fils (fis) (the son), les fils; la voix (the 
voice), les voix; le nez (the nose), les nez. 

§ 18. Agreement of Adjectives. An adjective, whether 
used attributively or predicatively, should agree in gender 
and in number with the noun it modifies: le crayon vert 
(the green pencil); les plumes vertes (the green pens). 

Xote. — If it modifies two nouns of different genders, the adjec- 
tive will be masculine: La regie et le livre sont noirs. The ruler 
and the book are black. 

§ 19. Position of Adjectives. Descriptive adjectives 
more often follow the noun to which they belong: le 
livre noir, the black book. 

§ 20. Interrogative Adjective (l'adjectif interrogatif ) . 
The interrogative adjective, " which," " what/' has the 
following; forms : 



16 



Masculine. 

quel (kel) 
quels (kel) 



LESSON II 
Singular. 

Plural. 



[§21 



Feminine. 

quelle (kel) 
quelles (kel) 



§ 21. Interrogation. In asking a direct question, the 
subject, if a noun, comes first, and a personal pronoun 
agreeing with the subject in gender and number follows 
the verb: 

Le livre est-il sur la table? Is the book on the table? 

La table est-elle brune? Is the table brown? 



Vocabulary. 



Mas. Fern. 

noir (nwa:r), noire (nwa:r), black 

blanc (bid), blanche (bla:$), 

white 
vert (ve:r), verte (vert), green 
bleu (ble), bleue (bio), blue 
gris (gri), grise (gri:z), gray 
brun (bra), brune (bryn), brown 
rouge (ru:3), red 
jaune (30 :n), yellow 
la couleur (kulo:r), the color 
de (cte), of, from 
et (e), and 
mais (me), but 
la boite (bwa:t), the box 



Mas. 



Fern. 



long (lo), longue (L5:g), long 
court (ku:r), courte (kurt), short 
large (lars), wide, broad 
etroit (etrwa), etroite (etrwat), 

narrow 
epais (epe), epaisse (epes), thick 
mince (me :s), thin 
haut (ho), haute (ho:t), high 
bas (ba), basse (ba:s), low 
grand (gra), grande (gra:d), large 

(surfaces) ; tall, great (persons) 
gros (gro), grosse (gro:s), large 

(persons or objects) 
petit (pati), petite (pa tit), small 



EXERCISE II. 

1. Qu'est-ce que c'est? 2. C'est la boite. 3. Est-ce la 
boite? 4. Oui, c'est la boite. 5. Est-ce le papier? 6. 
Non, ce 'n'est pas le papier, c'est la boite. 7. De quelle 
couleur est la boite? 8. Elle est blanche. 9. La boite 



§§22-23] lesson in 17 

est-elle blanche? 10. Oui, elle est blanche. 11. La boite 
est-elle jaune? 12. Non, elle n'est pas jaune, elle est 
blanche. 13. La boite blanche est-elle longue? 14. Non, 
elle n'est pas longue. 15. Est-elle large? 16. Non, elle 
n'est pas large, elle est etroite. 17. La boite est elle 
epaisse? 18. Non, elle n'est pas epaisse, elle est mince. 

19. La boite blanche est courte, etroite, et mince, elle est 
petite; mais le livre noir est long, large, et epais, il est 
gros. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. What is this? 2. It is the book. 3. Is this the book? 
4. Yes, it is the book. 5. Is it the chalk? 6. No, it is not 
the chalk, it is the book. 7. Of what color is the book? 
8. It is red. 9. Is the book red? 10. Yes, it is red. 11. 
Is the book green? 12. No it is not green, it is red. 13. 
Is the red book long? 14. Yes, it is long. 15. Is the blue 
book long? 16. No, it is not long, it is short. 17. Is the 
red book broad? 18. Yes, it is broad. 19. Is it thin? 

20. No, it is not thin, it is thick. 21. Is the red book 
large? 22. Yes, the red book is large but the blue book is 
not large, it is small. 

(Similar conversations concerning any object men- 
tioned thus far may be introduced by the teacher.) 



LESSON III. 

§ 22. Indefinite Article (l'article indefini). The indefi- 
nite article, " a " or " an," has the following forms: . 

Masculine. Feminine. 

un (o) une (yn) 

§ 23. Ici, La. The adverb ici = " here," ld = " there." 



18 



LESSON III 



§§24-25 



§24. Void (vwasi) is made up of voi, " see "-\-iei, 
" here," hence means " Here is " or " Here are." 

Voila (vwala) is made up of voi, " see ,,J rla, " there," 
hence means " There is " or " There are." 

§ 25. Demonstrative Adjectives (les adjectifs demon- 

stratif s) . 

1. The demonstrative adjective, " this " or " that," is 
declined as follows: 

Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

ce (sa), *cet (set) cette (stt) 

Plural (both genders) 

ces (sf) 

2. If it is necessary to make a distinction between " this 
book" and -"that book," the ci of id and la are bor- 
rowed and attached to the modified noun by a hyphen. 
Thus: 

ce livre-ci = this book here = this book, 
ce livre-la = that book there = that book. 



Vocabulary. 



ou (u), or 

oii (u), where 

qui (ki), who 

autre (otr), other 

avec (avek), with 

sans (sfi), without 

sur (syr), on 

sous (su), under 

devant (dava), before, in front of 

derriere (derje:r), behind 

dans (da), in, into 



entre (a:tr), between 

a cote de (a ko:te da), at the side 
of, beside 

pres de (pre da), near 

vous (vu), you 

Jean (5a), John 

Jeanne (3an), Jane, Joan 

Charles (Sari), Charles 

Marie (mari), Mary 

le professeur (profesa:r), the pro- 
fessor 



* Cet is used instead of ce before a vowel or silent h. 



)25] 



LESSON III 



19 



> eleve (elev), a pupil 
une J 

debout (dabu), standing 

assis (asi), assise (asi:5), sitting 

aussi (osi), as, also, too 

assez (ase), rather, enough 



le corridor (korido:r), the hall 
le tiroir (tirwarr), the drawer 
la salle (sal), the room 
la salle de classe (kla:s) the 

classroom 
la chambre (Sfibr), the bedroom 



EXERCISE III. 

1. Voici un crayon rouge. 2. Voila un crayon noir. 
3. Le crayon rouge est sur la table mais le crayon noir est 
sous la table. 4. Le crayon noir est-il dans une boite? 
5. Non, il est avec la craie dans ce tiroir. 6. Qui est de- 
vant le tableau? 7. C'est le professeur. 8. Le professeur 
est-il assis? 9. Non, il est debout. 10. Ou est-il debout? 

11. II est debout devant le tableau et derriere la table. 

12. Qui est assise, a cote de la table? 13. C'est une eleve. 
14. Quelle eleve est-ce? 15. C'est Marie. 16. Jean est-il 
aussi a cote de la table? 17. Non, voici Jean entre cette 
fenetre-ci et cette fenetre-la. 18. Est-il dans le corridor? 
19. Non, il est dans la salle de classe, mais voila Charles 
et un autre eleve dans le corridor. 20. Ou est Jeanne? 
Est-elle dans le corridor ou dans cette salle? 21. Elle est 
dans cette salle. 22. Le corridor est-il long ou court? 
23. II n'est pas court, il est assez long. 



For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Here is a ruler. 2. There is a book. 3. Of what 
colour is this ruler? 4. It is yellow. 5. And of what colour 
is the book? 6. It is gray. 7. Where is the yellow ruler? 
8. It is in the gray book. 9. And where is the pen? 10. 
It is between the book and the box. 11. Is the box in the 
drawer? 12. No, it is on the chair near the table. 13. 
Who is behind the table? 14. It is John. 15. Is John 



20 



LESSON III 



[§§26-27 



standing. 16. Yes, he is standing behind the table and 
in front of the blackboard. 17. Is Mary beside John? 
18. No, here is Mary, sitting between the window and the 
door. 19. Where is Jane? 20. She is here with Mary but 
she is not sitting, she is standing. 21. Is Charles also in 
this class-room? 22. No, he is in the hall with the other 
pupils. 



LESSON IV. 



§ 26. Present Indicative of avoir, 
etre, " to be' 7 : 



to have," and of 



avoir (avwa:r) 
je' ai (3e), I have 

tu as (tya), you have 

il a (ila), he has 

elle a (ela), she has 

nous avons (nuzavo), we have 
vous avez (vuzave), you have 
f ils ont (ilzo), they have 

{ elles ont (elzo), they have 



etre (e:tr) 

je suis (3a sqi), I am 

tu es (ty e), ' you are 

il est (ile), he is 

elle est (ele), she is 
nous sommes(nusom),we are 

vous etes (vuze:t), you are 

ils sont (ilso), they are 

elles sont (elso), they are 



Note 1. — As tu is used only in addressing most intimate friends, 
vous of the plural is commonly used for the singular as well. The 
verb will then also be in the plural, but an adjective modifying vous 
will be in the singular: Paul, vous etes sage, Paul, you are good. 

Note 2. — When, in asking a question, the pronoun of the third 
person singular is placed after a verb ending in a vowel, a t, coming 
from the corresponding form of the Latin word, is inserted between 
the verb and pronoun. Being used merely to improve the sound, it 
is called the " euphonic t ": 

Jean a-t-il le crayon? Has John the pencil? 

Marie a-t-elle le livre? Has Mary the book? 

§ 27. La, Y. Both Id and y are adverbs meaning 
" there." but with this distinction: 



§27] LESSON IV 21 

1. La is used without reference to anything preceding, 
as in, 

II est la. He is there. Etes-vous la? Are you there? 

2. Y refers to some place mentioned or implied before, 
frequently being used as substitute for a prepositional 
phrase or for an adverb in a preceding question: 

Le livre est-il sur la table? Is the book on the table? 
Oui, il y est. Yes, it is there. 

Etes-vous assis devant la fenetre? Are you sitting in front of 
the window? 

Non, je ne'y suis pas. No, I am not there. 

Note a. — Y may be translated " here " if the context requires it: 
Charles est-il ici? Is Charles here? 

Xon, il n'y est pas. No, he is not here. 
Note b. — La follows the verb, y precedes it. 

Vocabulary. 



alors (alo:r), then 
aujourd'hui (osurdul), to-day 
le banc (ba), the bench, seat 
le cahier (kaje), the note book 
le dictionnaire (diksione:r), the 

dictionary 
difficile (difisil), difficult 
facile (fasil), easy 
la grammaire (grame:r), the 



la lecon (laso), the lesson 

maintenant (metna), now 

malade (malad), sick 

le morceau (morso), the piece 

parce que (parska), because 

pourquoi? (purkwa), why? 

plusieurs (plyzja:r), several 

tres (tre), very 

trop (tro) (end of sentence, tro), 



grammar I too, too much. 

EXERCISE IV. 

1. Le professeur et les eleves sont dans la salle de classe. 

2. Jean est assis pres de la porte, et il a un dictionnaire. 

3. Marie, qui a une grammaire, est debout devant la 
fenetre. 4. Jeanne est a cote de, Marie, niais elle est 
assise sur un banc. 5. Elle a un morceau de papier et un 
crayon. 6; Le professeur est derriere la table et il a un 



22 LESSON IV [§27 

cahier. 7. Ou sommes-nous maintenant? 8. Nous som- 
mes dans la salle de classe. 9. Sommes-nous dans le cor- 
ridor? 10. Non, nous n'y sommes pas. 11. Ou etes-vous, 
Marie? 12. Je suis debout a cote de Jeanne. 13. Etes- 
vous devant la fenetre? 14. Oui, j'y suis. 15. Et qu'- 
avez-vous, Marie? 16. J'ai une grammaire. 17. Avez- 
vous un dictionnaire ? 18. Non, c'est Jean qui a le dic- 
tionnaire. 19. Qu'est-ce que j'ai ? 20. Vous avez un 
cahier et une plume. 21. Et Jeanne qu'a-t-elle? 22. Elle 
a un morceau de papier et un crayon. 23. Ou est Jean 
et qu'est-ce qu'il a? 24. II est pres de la porte et il a un 
dictionnaire. 25. Avons-nous une lecon aujourd'hui? 
26. Oui, nous avons une lecon et elle est tres facile. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Here are the professor and the pupils. 2. They have 
several books. 3. Jane, have you a grammar? 4. No, it 
is Mary who has the grammar, but I have a piece 
of paper and a pencil. 5. What book has John and 
where is he? 6. He has a dictionary and he is near 
the door. 7. Have we a note book? 8. Yes, you have a 
note book. 9. There is the note book on the table, 10. 
Then where are the pens? 11. They are in the drawer of 
the table. 12. Mary, where are you? 13. I am standing 
in front of the window. 14. Are you behind the black- 
board? 15. No, I am not there, I am in front of the 
window and beside Jane. 16. Is Jane sitting? 17. Yes, 
she is sitting on a bench. 18. Is Charles here? 19. No, 
he is not here now. 20. Why is he not here? 21. Because 
he is ill to-day. 



§§28-29] lesson v 23 



LESSOX V. 



§ 28. Possessive Adjectives (les adjectifs possessifs) 


The possessive 


adjectives 


are: 


Plural 




Masculine. 


Feminine. 


(both gene 




mon 


ma 




mes 


my 


ton 


ta 




tes 


your, thy 


son 


sa 




ses 


his, her. its 


notre 


notre 




nos 


our 


votre 


votre 




vos 


your 


leur 


leur 




leurs 


their 



Xote 1. — It must be borne in mind that the adjective agrees in 
gender as well as number with the noun which it modifies, regardless 
of the sex of the possessor. Thus his book = son livre. and her 
book = son livre. since livre is masculine; the context must show 
which of the two is meant. 

Xote 2. — For the sake of euphony mon, ton. and son are used 
instead of ma. ta, and sa when before a word beginning with a 
vowel or with silent h : mon epee (fern.), not ma epee = my sword. 

Xote 3. — Just as the pronoun vous you is used instead of tu 
except when speaking to intimate friends, so the possessive voire, 
votre. vos is used instead of ton. ta. tes in ordinary discourse: votre 
chapeau. your hat. 

Xote 4- — Possessive adjectives are generally repeated before each 
noun to which they refer: mon pere et ma mere, my father and 
mother. 

Xote o. — The definite article is frequently used for the possessive 
adjective when there is no uncertainty as to the possessor: J'ai un 
crayon dans la main. I have a pencil in my hand. 

§ 29. Possessive Nouns. French nouns have no case 
endings. Hence the relation of possession, instead of 
being indicated by a possessive -s as in English, is ex- 



24 



LESSON V 



\29 



pressed by the preposition de: Mary's hat = le chapeau 
de Marie. 

Vocabulary. 



le bras (bra), the arm 
le chapeau ($apo), the hat 
les cheveux (^ovo), m. pi. 

hair 
droit (drwa), droite (drwat), 

right 
Pencre (a:kr), f., the ink 
le gant (ga), the glove 
gauche (go:$), adj., left 
la main (me), the hand 



the 



adj. 



le mouchoir (mu$wa:r),the hand- 
kerchief 

le parapluie (paraplip), the um- 
brella 

une personne (person), a person 

la poche (po$), the pocket 

la robe (rob), the dress 

la tete (te:t), the head 

c'est bien (sebje), that is well or 
right 

*n'est-cepas ? (nes pa), Is it not ? 



EXERCISE V. 

1. Quelle lecon avons-nous aujourd'hui? 2., Nous avons 
les adjectifs. possessifs. 3. C'est bien. Qu'est-ce que 
c'est? 4. C'est votre tete. 5. Qu'est-ce que c'est? 6. 
C'est (or ce sont) vos cheveux. 7. De quelle couleur sont 
mes cheveux? 8. lis sont noirs. 9. Les cheveux de Marie 
sont noirs aussi, n'est-ce pas? 10. Non, ses cheveux sont 
bruns. 11. Jeanne, qu'avez-vous sui* la tete? 12. J'y ai 
mon chapeau. 13. Jean a-t-il un chapeau sur la tete? 
14. Non, son chapeau est sur une chaise. 15. Qu'est-ce 
qu'il a dans la main? 16. II a ses gants. 17. Les autres 
eleves ont-ils leurs gants ici? 18. Mes gants sont dans 
ma poche, mais les gants de Charles sont avec son para- 
pluie dans le corridor. 19. Ou est le mouchoir de Charles? 
20. Voila son mouchoir dans sa main droite. 21. Qu'avez- 
vous dans la main gauche? 22. J'y ai mon cahier et ma 
plume. 23. Dans quel livre est notre lecon? 24. Elle est 
dans la grammaire. 25. Alors vos grammaires sont-elles 
ici? .26. Oui, elles y sont. 

* Asks assent to any statement and must be translated accord- 
ingly. . 



§30] LESSON VI 25 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Several persons are in this room. 2. These persons 
are my pupils. 3. Mary has her hat on her head. 4. Her 
hair is long and brown. 5. Her dress is brown also. 6. 
John's hair is short and black. 7. His hat is on the 
chair. 8. He has his left hand in his pocket, and in his 
right hand he has his umbrella. 9. Mary and John have 
their books on the bench. 10. I have my pen, my ink, 
and my notebook on the table. 11. We are sitting in 
our class-room. 12. The class-room is very large. 13. 
Our pupils have a lesson in the grammar to-day. 14. 
Their lesson is rather difficult, because they have the 
possessive adjectives. 15. Charles is ill and is not here 
to-day. 16. Jane who is near the window has Mary's 
dictionary. 17. She has my pencil in her pocket. 18. 
Jane's handkerchief is on the floor beside her chair. 19. 
Her dress, her hat, and her gloves are white. 20. The 
person who is behind the table and who has a piece of 
chalk in his hand is the professor. 



LESSON VI. 

§ 30. Cardinal Numeral Adjectives. The cardinal 
numerals are pronounced as follows when used alone, 
as in counting: 



1. un, une (5, yn) 


9. neuf (nef) 


2. deux (do) 


10. dix (dis) 


3. trois (trwa) 


11. onze (o:z) 


4. quatre (katr) 


12. douze (du:z) 


5. cinq (se:k) 


13. treize (tre:z) 


6. six (sis) 


14. quatorze (katorz) 


7. sept (set) 


15. quinze (ke:z) 


8. huit (qit) 


16. seize (se:z) 



26 



LESSON VI 



[§30 



17. dix-sept (disset) 70. 

18. dix-huit (diz qit) 71. 

19. dix-neuf (diz naf) 

20. vingt (ve) 72. 

21. vingt et un (vet e 5) 

22. vingt-deux (ved do) 80. 

23. vingt-trois (\ et trwa) 81. 

30. trente (trait) 82. 

31. trente et un (trait e 5) 

32. trente-deux (trait do) 90. 

40. quarante (karait) 

41. quarante et un (kare:te§) 91. 

42. quarante-deux (karait do) 

50. cinquante (sekait) 92. 

51. cinquante et un (sekait e 5) 

52. cinquante-deux (sakait do) 100. 

60. soixante (swa salt) 101. 

61. soixante et un (swasait e 5) 500. 

62. soixante-deux (swa salt do) 1000. 



soixante-dix (swa salt dis) 
soixante et onze (swa sa it e 

oiz) 
soixante-douze 

(swasait duiz) 
quatre-vingts (katr ve) 
quatre-vingt-un (katr ve a) 
quatre- vingt-deux 

(katr ve do) 
quatre-vingt-dix 

(katr ve dis) 
quatre-vingt-onze 

(katr ve 5:z) 
quatre-vingt-douze 

(katr veduiz) 
cent (sa) 
cent un (sa a) 
cinq cents (se sa) 
mille (mil) 



Notes on Pronunciation. 

1 . Six and dix are pronounced as follows : 

a. Alone or at the end of a sentence x = s: Six (sis), dix (dis). 

b. Followed by a vowel or by silent h, x = z isix amis (sizami), 

six friends; dix hommes (dizom), ten men. 

c. Followed by a consonant, the x is silent: six chaises (si$ez). 

2*. The final consonant of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 17, 18, 19 is silent 
before an initial consonant or aspirate h of a word multiplied by 
them, not elsewhere: cinq livres (se liivr), but le cinq mai (la seik 
me), the fifth of May. 

3*. No elision or liaison occurs before huit or onze : le huit (la qit), 
les huit livres (le qi liivr) ; le onze (la 5:z), les onze francs (le 5:z fra). 

4*. The t is sounded in vingt in 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 
becomes d in 22, is silent from 81 to 99, is silent in cent un, deux 
cent un etc. 



* Quoted from Fraser and Squair. 



§§31-33] wesson vi 27 

§ 31. Vingt and cent, as a general rule, take an s when 
preceded by another number which multiplies them: 
quatre-vingts, deux cents; but they drop the s when fol- 
lowed by still another number: quatre-vingt-trois, deux- 
cent trente. 

§ 32. Mille is invariable: dix mille. But it may be 
written either mil or mille when it occurs in the date of 
the year: mil neuf cent dix (1910). 

§ 33. Nouns of Number. Million (miljo), and milliard 

(milja:r), " billion," are regarded as nouns instead of 
adjectives, since they must be connected by de with the 
noun which they modify and may be plural: 

deux millions d'hommes, two million men. 
un milliard de francs, a billion francs. 

Vocabulary. 
beaucoup 1 (boku), much, many une fois (fwa), one time, once 



combien? 1 (kobje), how much? 

how many ? 
une ecole (ekol), a school 
ensemble (asa:bl), together 



font (fo), 3rd pi., make 
plus (ply), plus (+), more 
si (si), if, so 



Note 1. — Beaucoup and combien cannot modify a noun directly 
but must be connected with it by the preposition de : beaucoup de 
crayons = many of pencils = many pencils; combien de crayons = 
how many of pencils = how many pencils. 

Note 1.— Combien is always an adverb of quantity; beaucoup 
sometimes an adverb, sometimes a masculine noun. 

EXERCISE VI. 

1. Combien font un et un? 2. Un et un font deux. 
3. Deux et deux font quatre. 4. Quatre et trois font sept. 
5. Cinq et huit font treize. 6. Huit et neuf font dix-sept. 
7. Combien font deux fois six? 8. Deux fois six font 



28 LESSON VI [§33 

douze. ' 9. Trois fois six font dix-huit. 10. Quatre fois 
six font vingt-quatre. 11. Cinq fois six font trente. 12. 
Marie a trois crayons dans la main gauche et deux dans 
la main droite, combien de crayons a-t-elle? 13. Voici 
sept carriers sur la table et neuf sur la chaise, combien 
de cahiers avons-nous? 14. J'ai cinq plumes dans cette 
boite et dix dans le tiroir, combien ai-je de plumes? 
15. Jean, si vous avez huit grammaires et trois diction- 
naires, combien de livres avez-vous? 16. Sept fenetres 
et six fenetres font combien de fenetres? 17. Onze portes 
et neuf portes font combien de portes? 18. Combien 
font quatre fois douze chaises? 19. Combien font cinq 
fois huit parapluies? 20. Nous avons beaucoup de 
personnes dans cette ecole, trente-sept professeurs et cinq 
cent quatre-vingt-dix-neuf eleves. Combien de personnes 
avons-nous dans Tecole? 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. How many are (make) two and four? 2. Two and 
four make six. 3. How many are two times four? 4. 
Two times four are eight. 5. How many are 6 + 5? 
6 + 5 = 11. 6. How many are 6X5? 6X5 = 30. 7. How 
many are 9+8? 10+13? 14+11? 17+15? 8. How 
many are two times ten pupils? 9. Two times ten pupils 
are twenty pupils. 10. If I have seven handkerchiefs in 
a box and nine in the drawer, how many handkerchiefs 
have I? 11. Jane has three pens in her right hand and 
five in her left hand, how many pens has she? 12. We 
have eight books on the chair and six on the table, how 
many books have we? 13. If Mary has nine pencils and 
John has thirteen, how many pencils have they together? 
14. They have twenty-two pencils. 15. Read the following 
numbers: 47, 76, 84, 93, 101, 333, 555, 1776, 1898, 1910. 



§§34-35] lesson vii 29 

LESSON VII. 

§ 34. Ordinal Numeral Adjectives. 1. The ordinal 
adjectives, indicating order or rank, as " first," " second," 
" third," etc., are usually formed by adding ieme to the 
corresponding cardinal adjectives: trois (three), troisieme 
(third); vingt, vingtieme. 

2. When the cardinal adjective ends in a silent e, that 
e is suppressed or elided before the ieme : quatre, qua- 
trieme. 

Neuf changes its / to v : neuf , neuvieme. 
Cinq takes a u before ieme : cinq, cinquieme. 

3. The first ordinal instead of being unieme is premier, 
yet unieme is employed in compounds formed with tens: 
vingt et unieme, twenty-first; trente et unieme. 

Deuxieme may also be replaced by second, but only, 
as a rule, when not more than two persons or things are 
considered: J'ai deux livres; le premier est rouge, le 
second est noir. 

4. Ordinal adjectives are used as in English with two 
exceptions : 

a. The number of the day of the month, and 

b. The number of sovereigns bearing the same name 
are usually expressed by cardinal adjectives, not by or- 
dinals : 

Januar\ r 4 = le quatre (not quatrieme) Janvier. 
Louis XIV = Louis quatorze (quatorzieme). 

Note 1 . — Yet premier is used instead of un. 

Note 2. — It will be noticed that the French omit " of " in giving 
the day of the month. 

§ 35. Fractions. Fractions are expressed as in Eng- 



30 



LESSON" VII 



[§35 



lish, the numerator being a cardinal number, the denomi- 
nator an ordinal. 

" Half " as a noun = la moitie ; as an adjective = demi. 

Demi before a noun is invariable and usually attached 
by a hyphen; after a noun, it agrees: 

une demi-heure, a half hour; but une heure et demie, an hour 
and a half. K=un tiers; j^=un quart. 

Vocabulary. 



dimanche (dima:$), Sunday 
lundi (Iadi), Monday 
mardi (mardi), Tuesday 
mercredi (merkradi), Wednes- 
day 
jeudi (30di), Thursday 
vendredi (vcidradi), Friday 
samedi (samdi), Saturday 
Janvier (3&vje), January 
fevrier (fevrie). February 
mars (mars), March 
avril (avril), April 
mai (me), May 
juin (3t[e), June 
juillet (sqije), July 
aout (u), August 
septembre (septa :br), September 
octobre (»kto:br), October - 
novembre (novarbr), November 
decembre (desa:br), December 
le printemps (preta), spring 
l'ete (ete), summer 
Pautomne (oton), autumn 
l'hiver (ive:r), winter 

un an (a) 

v a year 



a day 



une saison (sezo), a season 
un mois (mwa) , a month 
une quinzaine (keze:n), a fort- 
night 
une semaine (s&me:n), a week 
un jour (3u:r) 
une journee (3urne) 
une heure (a :r) , an hour 
une minute (minyt), a minute 
une seconde (sagord), a second 
le matin (mate), the morning 
la matinee (matine), the fore- 
noon 
midi (midi), noon 
Papres-midi (apremidi), the af- 
ternoon 

le soir (swa:r) 1 ,. 

, , , , . ) the evening 

la soiree (sware) J 

la nuit (nip), the night 

minuit (minqi), midnight 

dernier (dernje), derniere (der- 

nje:r), last 

prochain (proo^e), prochaine 

(protein), next 

moins (mwe), less 

une annee (ane) 

Note 1 . — Names of the days, the months, and the seasons are all 

masculine except automne, which may be either mas. or fem. 

Note 2'— One says en hiver (in winter), en automne (in autumn), 

en ete (in summer), but au printemps (in the spring) 



§35] LESSON VII 31 

EXERCISE VII. 

Voici les jours de la semaine: dimanche, fundi, mardi, 
mercredi, jeudi, vendredi, samedi. Quel est le premier 
jour? C'est dimanche. Quel est le cinquieme? C'est 
jeudi. Quel est le troisieme? C'est mardi. Quel est le 
sixieme? C'est vendredi. Quel est le deuxieme? C'est 
lundi. Quel est le quatrieme? C'est mercredi. Et quel 
est le dernier? C'est samedi. Quel jour est-ce aujour- 
d'hui? Aujourd'hui c'est vendredi, le quatorze juillet. 
Quelle heure est-il maintenant? II est midi {or douze 
heures); il est midi cinq; il est une heure huit; il est 
deux heures dix; il est trois heures et quart {or trois 
heures quinze); il est quatre heures vingt; il est quatre 
heures vingt-cinq; il est cinq heures et demie {or cinq 
heures trente); il est -six heures moins vingt-cinq; il est 
sept heures moins vingt {or six heures quarante); il est 
huit heures moins le quart {or sept heures quarante-cinq) ; 
il est neuf heures moins dix {or huit heures cinquante); 
il est dix heures; il est onze heures; il est minuit? Dans 
quelle saison sommes-nous maintenant? Nous sommes 
en ete, au mois de juillet. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Here are the months of the year: January, Febru- 
ary, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, 
October, November, December. 2. Which is the first 
month? It is January. 3. Which is the last? It is 
December. 4. Which is the fifth? It is May. 5. Which 
are the months of summer? They are June, July, and 
August. 6. Which are the months of winter? They are 
December, January, and February. 7. In what season 
are we now? We are in spring. 8. And in what month 
are we? We are in the month of April. 9. What time is 



32 lesson viii [§§36-37 

it? It is twelve o'clock. 10. Is it noon or midnight? It 
is noon. 11. How many seconds make a minute? 12. 
Sixty seconds make a minute. 13. Sixty minutes make an 
hour. 14. Twenty-four hours make a day. 15. Seven 
days make a week. 16. Fifty-two weeks or three-hundred- 
sixty-five days make a year. 

LESSON VIII. 

§ 36. Etre. II y a. Although etre is equivalent to the 
English yerb " to be," the idiom " there is," " there are " 
is II y a : 

Le livre est sur la table. The book is on the table. 

Les crayons sont-ils sur la table? Are the pencils on the table? 

Vos plumes sont-elles sur la table? Are your pens on the table? 

II y a un livre sur la table. There is a book on the table. 

II y a six crayons sur la table. There are six pencils on the table. 

Y a-t-il deux plumes sur la table? Are there two pens on the table? 

§ 37. II y a. Voila. It will be noticed that in contrast 
to the indefinite II y a, voila, which is also translated 
" there is," " there are," indicates definitely where: 

II y a un livre sur la chaise. There is a book on the chair. 

Voila mon livre. There is my book. 

YOCABULABY. 

contre (k5:tr), against 



a (a), to, by, in, at 

* a qui (a ki), to whom, whose 

une aiguille (egui : j ) , a needle 

une bague (bag), a ring 

une bobine de fil (bobin da fil), 

a spool of thread 
une bourse (burs), a purse 
une brosse (bros), a brush 
un canif (kanif), a penknife 
une casquette (kasket), a cap 
une chose <($o:z), a thing 

* Le livre de Jean = John's book, but Le livre est a Jean = Thc_ 
book is John's. 



une cravate (kravat), a tie 
un de (de), a thimble 
une epingle (epe:gl), a pin 
un eventail (evata:j), a fan 
une montre (mo:tr), a watch 
un objet (abse), an object 
un peigne (pe:n), a comb 
une pendule (padyl), a clock 
un ruban (ryba), a ribbon 



§37] LESSON VIII 33 

EXERCISE VIII. 

II y a plusieurs choses sur la table. Qu'y a-t-il? II y 
a un de, une bobine de fil, une aiguille, une epingle, un 
eventail, une cravate. Ma cravate est-elle sur la table? 
De quelle couleur est votre cravate? Elle est rouge. 
Alors votre cravate n'y est pas, mais voici une cravate 
noire. Y a-t-il un ruban sur la table? Oui, il y a un 
ruban, une bague, une brosse, un peigne, et plusieurs 
autres objets. Combien de livres y a-t-il? II y a deux 
livres et un cahier. Quels sont ces livres? C'est un dic- 
tionnaire et une grammaire. C'est la grammaire de Jean, 
n'est-ce nas. et voila sa montre? Oui, c'est sa grammaire 
et sa montre. Quelle heure est-il a cette montre? II est 
dix heures moins le quart. II y a aussi une pendule dans 
cette salle, mais la pendule n'est pas sur la table, elle est 
contre le mur. A am est cette bourse? Elle est a diaries 
et voici la casquette. et le canif de Charles. Avez-vous 
un canif, Marie? Oui, mais mon canif est dans ma poche. 
Jean, qu'est-ce qu'il y a dans votre poche? Oh il y a 
beau coup de choses, parce que j'ai dix-sept poches. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. What is there on the table? 2. There is a comb, a 
spool of thread, a fan, and a purse. 3. Whose (to whom) 
is the purse? 4. It is Mary's. 5. Where is Mary's note- 
book? 6. There is her note-book on the table. 7. There 
are two books on the table also, are there not? 8. Yes, 
there are a grammar and a dictionary. 9. Is your diction- 
ary on the table? 10. No, it is on the chair, but here is 
John's dictionary. 11. Where is his cap? 12. His cap, 
his umbrella, and his gloves are in the hall. 13. Has 
John a watch? 14. Yes, his watch is in his pocket. 15. 
What time is it by your watch, John? 16. It is twenty- 



34 lesson ix [§§38-39 

five (minutes) past noon. 17. Is there a clock in this 
class-room? 18. Yes, there is the clock on (against) the 
wall. 19. What time is it by this clock? 20. It is half- 
past noon. 



LESSON IX. 

§ 38. Contraction. The following contractions occur 
in French: . 

a+le (mas. of def. art.)=au 
a+les (pi. of def. art.)=aux 
de+le =du 

de+les =des 

§ 39. Partitive Constructions. 1. " Some " or " any " 
before a noun is generally expressed in French by de-\- 
the definite article: 

Avez-vous du pain? Have you some bread? 

Avez-vous de la craie? Have you some chalk? 

Avez-vous des livres? Have you some books? 

2. Article Omitted. The. article is ordinarily omitted 
and de alone used with the noun: 
a. In a general negation: 

Je n'ai pas de pain. I have no bread. 

Vous n'avez pas de livres. You have no books. 

*b. When an adjective precedes the noun: 

Avez-vous de bon beurre? Have you some good butter? 
Avez-vous de bonne craie? Have you some good chalk? 

c. When a noun is understood after an adjective: 
De mauvais livres et de bons. Bad books and good. 



* Yet the article may occur even when an adjective precedes the 
noun: Avez-vous du bon beurre? 



139] 



LESSON IX 



35 



d. After a word of quantity: 
Combien de craj^ons avez-vous? 

you? 
Une tasse de the. A cup of tea. 

Vocabulary. 



How many pencils have 



Passiette (asjet), f., the plate 
le beurre (ba:r), the butter 
le cafe (kafe), the coffee 
la cafetiere (kaftje:r), the coffee- 
pot 
la carafe (karaf ), the water bottle 
le chocolat (Sokola), the choco- 
late 
la chocolatiere ($okolatje:r), the 

chocolate pot 
le couteau (kuto), the knife 
la creme (kre:m), the cream 
cuiller (kifije:r), or cuillere 
(kqije:r), the spoon 

la cuiller a the (te), v 



la 



la 



spoon 
the small 



spoon 



petite cuiller, 

l'eau (o), f., the water 
la fourchette (fur Set), the fork 
le lait (le), the milk 
le pot au lait (potole), the milk 
pitcher 



la moutarde (mutard), the mus- 
tard 

la nappe (nap), the table cloth 

le pain (pe), the bread 

le plat (pla), the dish 

le poivre (pwa:vr), the pepper 

lapoivriere (pwavrije:r), the pep- 
per box 

la salle a manger (salam&se), the 
dining-room 

le sel (sel), the salt 

la saliere (salje:r), the salt shake 

la serviette (servjet), the napkin 

le rond de serviette (ro), the 
napkin ring 

la soucoupe (sukup), the saucer 

le sucre (sykr), the sugar 

le sucrier (sykrije), the sugar 
bowl 

la tasse (ta:s), the cup 

le the (te), the tea 

la theiere (teje:r), the tea pot 

le verre (ver), the glass 



EXERCISE IX. 

Plusieurs personnes sont dans la salle a manger. Sur 
la table il y a une nappe, des serviettes, des fourchettes, 
des assiettes, des cuillers et un plat. II y a du the dans 
la theiere, du cafe dans la cafetiere, et du chocolat dans 
la chocolatiere mais il n'y a pas d'eau dans la carafe. 
Jean a une serviette dans son rond de serviette, il a aussi 
un couteau, mais Charles n'a pas de couteau. Y a-t-il 



36 LESSON X [§40 

du sucre dans le sucrier? Oui, et il y a du lait dans le 
pot au lait, mais nous n'avons pas de creme aujourd'hui. 
J'ai une tasse, une soucoupe, et une cuiller a the, parce 
que j'ai du the; Marie a un verre, parce qu'elle n'a pas 
de the, elle a de l'eau. Jeanne a une tasse de chocolat au 
lait et du pain. A-t-elle de bon beurre sur son pain? 
Non, elle n'a pas de beurre. Qu'est-ce qu'il y a devant 
l'assiette de Jeanne? II y a du sel dans une saliere et 
devant Jean, il y a du poivre dans une poivriere. Qui a 
la moutarde? II n'y a pas de moutarde sur la table. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Where is the dining-room? 2. There is the dining- 
room behind you. 3. Is there a table in the dining-room? 
4. Yes, and on the table there are a table-cloth and some 
dishes. 5. There is a plate in front of Charles. 6. He has 
also a cup, a saucer, and a knife. 7. Are there some forks 
and some small spoons on the table? 8. There are small 
spoons and large (spoons), but there are no forks. 9. 
Where are the napkins? 10. Here are the napkins in the 
rings beside the plates. LI. John has no napkin. 12. 
What has he? 13. He has a cup of coffee and some 
bread. 14. Has he any butter on his bread? 15. Yes, 
he has some good butter. 16. What is there in John's 
coffee? 17. There is some sugar and some cream. 18. 
Has Mary any coffee? 19. No, she has no coffee, she has 
chocolate with (au) milk. 20. Jane has a glass of water. 



LESSON X. 

§ 40. Le, En. 1. The personal pronoun le, la, les 
(having the same form as the definite article) is used as 



§41] LESSON X 37 

direct object of a verb and may mean " him," " her," 
"it," " them." It takes the place of a noun modified 
by the definite article, by a possessive adjective, or by 
any word that points out definitely : 

Avez-vous le livre? Have you the book? 

Oui, je le'ai. Yes, I have it. 

Marie a-t-elle vos gants? Has Mary your gloves? 

Non, elle ne les a pas. No, she hasn't them. 

2. On the other hand, the indefinite personal pronoun 
en, meaning " of it," " of" them," " some," is used, for 
masculine or feminine, singular or plural, to take the 
place of a noun modified by the indefinite article, or in 
place of any expression of number or quantity: 

Avez-vous du pain? Have you some bread? 
Oui, je'en ai. Yes, I " of it " have=Yes, I have some. 
Avons-nous des crayons? Have we some pencils? 
Non, nous ne'en avons pas. No, we " of them " have not = No, 
we have none. 

Combien de livres avez-vous? How many books have you? 
Je'en ai trois. I "of them " have three= I have three of them. 

Note. — These pronouns precede the verb except in the imperative 
affirmative. 

§ 41. Present indicative of donner (done), " to give ": 

ie donne (don), <^ give, am giving, i noug Mormons (dono), 
j v /f \ or do give, [ v n 

tu donnes (don), vous donnez (done), 

il donne (don). ils donnent (don). 

Note 1. — When the order is inverted for a question, the final e of 
the first person singular takes the acute, accent bu^is pronounced 
as if it had the grave: Donne- je (done: 5), Do I give? Am I giving? 

Note 2. — Like donner are conjugated the regular verbs of the first 
conjugation. 



38 



LESSON X 



;§4i 



Vocabulary. 



le monsieur (mosjo), the gentle- 
man 
Monsieur (masjo), Mr. 
le pere (pe:r), the father 
le frere (fre:r), the brother 
le fils (fis), the son 
le mari (mari), the husband 

> enfant (afa), a child 
une J 

le courrier (kurje), the mail 

arriver (arive), to arrive, happen 

garder (garde), to keep, guard 

chaque ($ak), each 

encore (ako:r), yet, again, still 

pour (pur), prep., for, to, in order 

to 

Note.— 



la dame (dam), the lady 
Madame (madam), Mrs. 
la demoiselle (domwazel), the 

young lady 
Mademoiselle (madmwazel), 

Miss 
la mere (me:r), the mother 
la sceur (sa:r), the sister 
la fille (fi : j ) , the daughter, girl 
la femme (fam), the woman, wife 
la lecture (lekty:r), reading 
une 1 ttre (letr), a letter 
qu ;kci), when 
souvent (suva), often 
toujours (tu3u:r), always 



French 
Abbreviation. 
mon (my) +sieur (sir or lord) = Monsieur, Mr. . . . M. 
pL mes (my)+sieurs (lords or gentlemen) = Messieurs . . MM. 

ma (my) +dame (lady) = Madame, Mrs Mme. 

pi. mes (my) + dames (ladies) =Mesdames Mmes. 

ma (my) + demoiselle (young lady) = Mademoiselle, Miss Mile. 
pi. mes (my) ■+ demoiselles (young ladies) = Mesdemoiselles Miles. 

^EXERCISE X. 

Mademoiselle Y, avez-vous une lettre? Oui, Madame, 
voici une lettre. Donnez-vous la lettre a Monsieur X? 
Non, Madame, je ne la donne pas a Monsieur X, je la 
garde. Pourquoi ne la donnez-vous pas a Monsieur X? 
Parce que c'est une lettre de ma mere. Quand arrivent 
les lettres de votre mere? Le courrier arrive toujours 
a dix heures du matin et a cinq heures du soir. Tres 
souvent -il y a des lettres de ma mere dans le courrier. 
Combien de lettres avez-vous, Madame S? J'en ai trois, 



$41] LESSON X 39 

une de mon mari, une de ma sceur, et une de mon fils. 
Avez-vous des filles? Oui, j'en ai deux. L'une est femme 
d'un professeur dans une ecole; l'autre est encore une 
enfant de dix ans. Ou est cette petite fille? Elle est 
avec son pere maintenant. Donnez-vous des lecons a 
votre fille ou est-elle a l'ecole? Elle n'y est pas encore, 
mais c'est mon mari qui donne des lecons a notre fille. 
Donne-t-il des legons dans la grammaire? Oui, il en 
donne souvent, mais il donne chaque jour une lecon de 
lecture. 

For O: ' or Written Work. 

1. Mr. X, how many letters have you? 2. I have two 
(of them), one from my mother and one from my father. 
3. Have you a letter from your brother? 4. I have not 
any yet. 5. When does the mail arrive? 6. It arrives at 
eleven o'clock in (of) the morning and at seven o'clock 
in the evening. 7. There is the mail now. 8. Here is a 
letter for you and I have one (of them) also. 9. Have 
you the letter from your brother? 10. Yes, I have it. 
11. Who has the other letters? 12. Mary has them; she 
has four of them. 13. Is Mary giving one of her letters 
to Charles? 14. No, she is not giving any to Charles, 
she is keeping them. 15. Why is she keeping them? 16. 
Because they are from her father, from her mother, from 
her brother, and from her sister. 17. How many sisters 
has Mary? 18. She has three (of them). The first is wife 
of a professor, the second is in a school, and the third is 
a little girl of four years. 19. Has Mary a husband? 
20. No, she has none. 21. Is she still at school? 22. Yes, 
she is there. 23. Has Mary a reading lesson to-day? 
24. No, she hasn't any, but she has a grammar lesson. 



40 lesson xi [§§42-43 



LESSON 


XI 




§ 42. Present indicative 


of 


faire, "to do" 


make," and of aller, " to go 


" . 






faire (fe:r) 






aller (ale) 


je fais (fe) 






je vais (ve) 


tu fais (fs) 






tu vas (va) 


il fait (f e) 






il va (va) 


nous faisons (fezo) 






nous allons (alo) 


•vous faites (f et) 






vous allez (ale) 


ils font (f 5) 






ils vont (vo) 



or "to 



§ 43. Est-ce que. Instead of the interrogative forms 
explained in §§ 15 and 21, a question may be made by 
prefixing Est-ce que (Is it that?) to a declarative sentence. 
Do not translate the Est-ce que; simply make a question 
of what follows: 

Kst-ce que vous chantez? Do you sing? 

Est-ce que le livre est sur la table? Is the book on the table? 

VUt'ABL'LAKY 



allemand 1 (alma), German 

anglais (agle), English 

beau 2 (bo), belle (bel),' adj., 

beautiful 
bon (bo), bonne (bon), adj., good 
bien (bje). adv., well, very 
capable (kapa:bl). capable 



francais (frase), French 
la geographie (seografi), geogra- 
phy 
grec (grek), Greek 
un homme (om), a man 
Jacques (5a :k), James 
italien (italje), Italian 



une eglise (egli:z), a church j jeune (son), young 

enseigner 3 (asene), to teach j une langue (lag), a language, 

environ (aviro), adv., about j tongue 

espagnol (espanol), Spanish latin (late). Latin 

etudier (etydje), to study | longtemps (lota), adv., long, a 

une etude (etyd), a study | long while 

un etudiant (etydja), a student ! les mathematiques (matematik), 

mathematics 



§43] 



LESSON XI 



41 



meme (mem), adj., same, self; 

adv., even 
on (5), indef. pron., one, they 
par (par), prep., by, through, a 
parler 1 (parle), to speak 
presque (presk), adv., almost 
que (ka), conj., that, as, than 
le repos (rapo), rest, repose 



seul (sol), adj., alone, single, only 

seulement (solma), adv., only, 
merely 

un sujet (syse), a subject 

trouver (truve), to find 

Puniversite (yniversite), the uni- 
versity 



Note 1 . — With the verb parler, the use of the article (le) is optional 
in connection with the name of a language but with any other verb 
it must be used: Parlez-vous francais? or Parlez-vous le francais? 
but Etudiez-vous le francais? 

Note 2.— Bel is used instead of beau before a masculine noun 
beginning with a vowel or with silent he un bel enfant. 

Note 2. — Verbs given in this vocabulary are conjugated like 
donner. 



EXERCISE XI. 

Que faites-vous aujourd'hui, Jacques? Je vais a l'ecole 
ce matin. Qu'est-ce qu'on fait a l'ecole? Le professeur 
donne des lecons aux eleves. Qui est votre professeur? 
C'est Monsieur Durand. Est-ce que c'est un homme 
capable? Oui, c'est un bon professeur; il enseigne tres 
bien. Et qu'est-ce que vous etudiez a l'ecole? J'y 
etudie beaucoup de choses, la grammaire, la geographie, 
les mathematiques, la lecture. Trouvez-vous ces sujets 
difficiles? Je les trouve assez difficiles. J'etudie long- 
temps chaque legon. Est-ce que vous allez a Fecole 
chaque jour de la semaine? Non, j'y vais seulement cinq 
jours par semaine; le samedi et le dimanche sont des 
jours de repos. Vos soeurs vont-elles a la meme ecole 
que vous? Non, elles vont a une ecole pour les jeunes 
filles. Est-ce qu' elles font les memes etudes que vous? 
Oui, elles etudient presque les memes sujets. Que fait 
votre frere? II va a l'universite. Qu'est-ce qu'il fait a 



42 LESSON XII [§44 

l'universite? II y etudie des langues: le grec, le latin, le 
frangais, l'allemand, et F anglais. II etudie plusieurs 
langues, n'est-ce pas? Oui, mais il n'etudie pas encore 
l'italien et Tespagnol. Est-ce qu'il y a beaucoup d'etu- 
diants dans l'universite? Oui, il y en a environ quatre 
mille. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Where are we going to-day, Charles? 2. We are go- 
ing to (the) church. 3. Are Mary and James going there 
too? 4; No, they are going to school. 5. What does one 
do at school? 6. One studies lessons there, ?. Who is 
it who gives the lessons? 8. It is the professor, Mr. 
Durand. 9. He is a very capable man; he teaches well. 
10. Does Mary go to the same school as James? 11. No, 
she goes to a school for (the) young ladies (girls). 12. 
What do James and Mary study? 13. They study math- 
ematics, geography, reading, and many other subjects. 
14. Does your brother go to the university? 15. Yes, and 
he studies languages there. 16. Does he find the lan- 
guages difficult? 17. No, he finds them rather easy. 
18. How many languages does he speak? 19. He speaks 
three of them: Spanish, German, and French. 20. The 
French is a beautiful language, is it not? 21. Yes, it is 
a very beautiful language. 22. Does not your brother 
speak English? 23. No, he does not speak it. 24. Is 
English spoken (Does one speak English) here? 25. Yes, 
here English is spoken. 



LESSON XII. 

§ 44. Correlatives. 1. Neither — nor. Just as with 
verbs " not " is made up of the two particles ne . . . pas, 



§45] LESSON XII 43 

the verb if finite being placed between them, so " neither 
— nor " consists of the particle ne before the verb with 
ni before each of the nouns, adjectives, or other words 
correlated : 

Je ne donne ni le livre ni le crayon. I am giving neither the book 
nor the pencil. 

Le livre n'est ni bleu ni rouge, il est brun. The book is neither 
blue nor red, it is brown. 

2. Either — Or. The correlatives "either — or " consist 
merely of the repetition of ou, " or ": 

Je vais ou a Test ou a 1'ouest. I am going either east or west. 

§ 45. Negatives. The following are perhaps the most 
frequently used negatives: 

ne — pas (pa), not ne — jamais (same), never 

ne — point (pwe), not ne — aucun (oko), none, not any 

ne — que (ko), only ne — rien (rje), nothing 

ne — guere (ge:r), scarcely ne — personne (person), no one 

ne — plus (ply), no longer 

Note. — In each case the verb comes between the two particles. 
When the sentence is incomplete and no verb occurs, the negative, 
as a general rule, consists of the second particle alone: 

Pas du tout. Not at all. 

Qui est la? Personne. Who is there? No one. 

Qu'avez-vous la? Rien. What have you there? Nothing. 

§ 45 (bis). Oui, Si. Oui is used to mean " yes " after 
a question put affirmatively, si after one put negatively: 

Allez-vous a l'eglise? Oui. Are you going to church? Yes. 

N'allez-vous pas a l'eglise? Si. Are you not going to church? 
Yes (I am going). 

Note. — Si is also used to urge or insist upon anything: Je n'y 
vais pas. Si, si. I am not going there. Yes, yes (you must). 



44 



LESSON XII 



§45 



Vocabulary. 



d'abord (dabo:r), adv., first, at 

first 
acheter (a$te), to buy 
au moins (mwe), at least 
au plus (ply) , at most 
les bagages (baga:5), m., the 

baggage 
le billet (bije), the ticket 
le boulevard (bulva:r), the boule- 
vard 
le bout (bu), the end 
le bureau (byro), the office, desk, 

bureau 
le bureau de renseignements 

(rasenma) , the information 

office 
chercher ($er$e), to search, look 

for 
demander (demade), to ask, ask 

for 
enfin (afe), adv., at last, finally 
enregistrer (arsistre), to register, 

enroll, check 
ensuite (asqit), adv., afterward, 

then 
entrer (atre), to enter 
un escalier (eskalje), a staircase 
en bas (a ba), down stairs 
en haut (a o), up stairs 
au nord (no:r), to the north 
au sud (syd), to the south 
a Pest (est), to the east 
a l'ouest (west), to the west 
[ Je vous remercie, I thank you 
\ Merci bien, Thank you very 
much 



la gare (ga:r), the station 

le guichet (gi$e), the small win- 
dow (of ticket office) 

un indicateur (edikato:r), a time 
table, railway guide 

jusque (a) [5ysk(a)], as far as, 
until 

la ligne (lin), the line 

lourd (lu:r), heavy 

la malle (mal), the trunk 

monter (m5te), to go up, get on, 
bring up 

payer (peje), to pay 

puis (pqi), adv., then 

la rue (ry ) , the street 

la salle d'attente (atci:t), the 
waiting-room 

la salle des bagages, the baggage- 
room 

le train (tre), the train 

tourner (turne), to turn 

la ville (vil), the city 

a droite (drwat), to the right 

a gauche (go: 5), to the left 

tout droit (tu drwa), straight 
ahead 

par ici (par isi), this way 

par la, that way 

s'il vous plait = if it pleases you 
= if you please 

Je vous demande ) 
pardon 

Pardon 



I beg 
your pardon 



§45] LESSON XII 45 

EXERCISE XII. 

Pardon, Monsieur. Pour aller a la gare, s'il vous plait? — 
A quelle gare, Madame? — Combien de gares y a-t-il dans 
la ville? — II y en a au moins cinq ou six: Gare du Nord 
pour les trains qui vont au nord, Gare de l'Est pour les 
trains de Test, Gare Saint Lazare et Gare Montparnasse 
pour les lignes de l'ouest et deux gares pour les lignes du 
sud. Maintenant allez-vous au nord au au sud? — Je ne 
vais ni au nord ni au sud, je vais a l'ouest. — Alors vous 
cherchez, Madame, ou la Gare Saint Lazare ou la Gare 
Montparnasse. Ne cherchez-vous pas la Gare Montpar- 
nasse? — Si, Monsieur. — Eh bien, vous allez tout droit 
jusqu' a la Rue de Rennes, puis vous tournez a gauche. 
La Gare Montparnasse est au bout de la Rue de Rennes. — 
Je vous remercie beaucoup, Monsieur. Nous arrivons a 
la gare, nous montons l'escalier, parce que la salle d'at- 
tente est en haut. D'abord nous entrons dans le Bureau 
de Renseignements pour demander l'heure du train, parce 
que nous n'avons pas d'indicateur. Ensuite nous allons 
au guichet pour avoir nos billets. Dans la salle des 
bagages nous faisons enregistrer nos malles; nous n'avons 
rien a payer parceque nos bagages ne sont pas trop lourds. 
Et enfin nous montons dans le train. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Mr. and Mrs. Durand are going to the station. 2, 
Are there many stations in the city? 3. Yes, there are- 
several of them : one for the trains which go to the south 
and two for the lines of the west. 4. But they go neither 
south nor west, they go to the east. 5. Then they are 
looking for the station of the east. 6. To go to the sta- 
tion, if you please, sir. 7. One goes to the Boulevard de 
Sebastopol and then straight ahead. 8. This way? 9. 



46 LESSON XIII [§46 

No, that way, to the right. 10. They arrive at the sta- 
tion. 11. Mrs. Durand enters (into) the waiting-room. 
12. Mr. Durand goes first to the ticket-window to get 
(have) the tickets. 13. Afterward he registers (makes to 
register) their baggage in the baggage-room. 14. Their 
trunks are not very heavy. 15. They have nothing to 
pay. 16. They do not ask at the Bureau of Information 
the time of the train, because they have a time-table. 
17. The train arrives in a quarter of an hour. 18. Is there 
no one. in the waiting-room? 19. Yes, there are many 
persons. 20. There is the train at last. 21. Now Mr. and 
Mrs. Durand get on (mount into) the train. 



LESSON XIII. 

§ 46. There are in French four* conjugations of verbs, 
distinguished by the ending of the present infinitive. 
This infinitive ends as follows: 

I conjugation in er : aimer 
II " * : " ir : finir 

III . " " oir : recevoir 

IV " re : rompre 



* In spite of the fact that most of the grammars published in 
America make but three conjugations of French verbs, I prefer to 
take the position of the schools and grammars in France and make 
four. All grammarians, so far as I am aware, use the endings of 
the present infinitive as basis for classification, and since there are 
just four possible endings for that infinitive, the French schools 
always teach four conjugations of verbs. Surely if etre with all its 
irregularities has a right to belong to the conjugation in re, recevoir 
and the other verbs in oir have a right to belong somewhere, — 
M. M. B. 



§47; 



LESSON XIII 



47 



§ 47. The four conjugations of verbs have the follow- 
ing forms in the present indicative : 

II. 



I. 

aimer (erne), to love, to like 

je' aim e (em) 

tu aim es (em) 

il aim e (em) 

nous aim ons (emo) 

vous aim ez (erne) 

ils aim ent (em) 

III. 

recevoir (ras9vwa:r), to receive 
je reg ois (raswa) 
tu reg ois " 
il reg oit 
nous recev ons (rssavo) 
vous recev ez (rasave) 
ils regoiv ent (raswav) 



finir (fini:r), to finish 
je fin is (fini) 
tu fin is (fini) 
il fin it (fini) 
nous fin iss ons (finiso) 
vous fin iss ez (finise) 
ils fin iss ent (finis) 

IV. 

rompre (ropr), to break 
je romp s (r5) 
tu romp s " 
il romp t " 
nous romp ons (ropo) 
vous romp ez (rope) 
ils romp ent (rop) 



Note 1. — The stem is obtained by cutting off the ending of the 
present infinitive. 

Note 2. — All four conjugations have the same endings in the 
plural, namely, ons for the first person, ez for the second, and ent 
for the third. This ent is silent in pronunciation. Verbs of the 
second conjugation, if regular like finir, insert an iss in the plural 
between the stem and the endings. 

Note 8. — If the stem ends in c, d or t, in the fourth conjugation, 
the t is dropped in the third singular: attendre, il attend. 

Vocabulary. 



agreable (agreabl), pleasant, 
agreeable 

un agrement (agremd), a pleas- 
ure 

un ami (ami) 1 „ . , 
. , . N ) a friend 
une amie (ami) J 

un arbre (arbr), a tree 



attendre (ata:dr), to wait (for), 
expect 

bientot (bje:to), adv., soon 

le ble (ble), the wheat, grain 

le bois (bwa), the wood 

la campagne (kapan), the coun- 
try 



48 



LESSON XIII 



i47 



un canard (kana:r), a duck 
un champ (§&), a field 
le chemin (Jame), the road, way 
le chemin de fer (fe:r), the rail- 
road 
un cheval ($aval), a horse 
chez ($e), prep., at the home of 
une colline (kolin), a hill 
comme (kom), adv., how! like, as 
comment (koma), adv., how? 

indeed 
la cordiaUte (kordjalite), cor- 
diality 
couper (kupe), to cut 
dehors (dao :r), adv., out of doors 
desagreable (dezagreabl), disa- 
greeable 
en (5), prep., on, in, of 
en ville, in the city, in town 
un erabte (erab), a maple tree 
un etang (eta), a pond 
la farine (farin), the flour 
le fer (fe:r), iron 
une f erme (f erm) , a farm 
une feuille (fa:j), a leaf 
ie feuillage (foja:3), the foliage 



une grange fgra:3), a barn 
habiter (abite), to live in (on\ to 

reside 
imposant (epoza), imposing, 

stately 
loin (lws), adv., far 
une imunon (mezo), a houue 
la moirson (mwaso), the harvest 
mur (rir:r), adj., ripe 
murir ( "ivri:r), to ripen 
non (no), not 
nous (itu), us 
une oJfj iwa), a goose 
l'ombre (5:br), f., the shaoe, 

shadow 
un poisson (pwaso), a fish 
quitter (kite), to quit, leave 
rester (reste), to remain 
tant (ta), adv., so much, so many 
transporter (trasporte), to tian»- 

port. ^arry 
travaili^r (travaje), to work 
la vie (vi), the life 
une voiture (vwaty:r), a carriage 
le voyage (vwaja:5), the journey 
voyager (vwaja3e), to travel 



EXERCISE XIII. 

Apres plusieurs heures de voyage en chemin de fer, 
no as quittons le train. Une voiture avec un beau cheval 
noir nous attend, et bientot nous arrivons chez nos amis 
a la campagne. lis nous recoivent avec beaucoup de 
cordialite. Nos amis habitent une ferme, et comme nous 
aimons a y etre! En ville nous sommes presque tou jours 
dans la maison, mais a la campagne nous restons dehors. 
II y a tant d'agrements dans la vie de campagne. Devant 
la maison, qui est sur une colline, il y a des arbres, des 



§47] LESSON XIII 49 

erables grands et imposants. L'ombre de leur feuillage 
est bien agreable par un jour d'ete. Non loin de la 
maison est le bois, et dans ce bois il y a un etang ou on 
trouve des poissons. Sur l'etang il y a aussi des canards 
et des oies. Des hommes travaillent dans un champ a 
cote du bois. Nous sommes en ete et ils font la moisson. 
Le ble mur, les hommes le coupent et le transport ent dans 
la grange. C'est avec du ble qu'on fait de la farine, et 
avec la farine on fait le pain. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. We travel several hours on (the) railroad. 2. Then 
the train arrives at a station in the country. 3. When 
we leave the train, we find a horse and carriage which 
are waiting for us. 4. Soon we arrive at a farm where 
our friends live.- 5. They receive us with much cordiality. 
6. How we love the country! 7. We go there very often. 
8. What pleasures there are in country life! 9. Our 
friends live in a white house on a hill. 10. In front of 
the house, there are some trees tall and stately. 11. 
These trees are maples. 12. The shade of their foliage 
is agreeable in summer. 13. There is a pond in the 
woods behind the house. 14. One finds there ducks and 
geese. 15. In the pond there are fish. 16. Some men are 
harvesting (making the harvest) in a field near the house. 
17. They are cutting the wheat, which is ripe. 18. They 
transport it into the barn. 19. The flour is made from 
(with the) wheat. 20. How is the bread' made? 21. One 
makes the bread of (with) the flour. 



50 lesson xiv f §548-50 



LESSON XIV. 

§ 48. Plural Forms. As an exception to the general 
rule that the plural of nouns and of adjectives is formed 
by adding s to the singular, observe: 

1. Nouns ending in the singular in s, x, z, and adjec- 
tives in s or x remain unchanged in the plural (§ 17, 2): 

le fils, les fils; la voix, les voix; le nez, les nez; un homme gros, 
des hommes gros; une homme heureux, des hommes heureux. 

2. Nouns ending in the singular in au or eu and adjec- 
tives in eau take x in the plural : 

un bateau, des bateaux; un feu, des feux; beau, beaux; nouveau, 
nouveaux. 

3.' The majority of nouns and adjectives ending in al 
in the singular change that al to aux in the plural: 

un cheval, des chevaux; loyal, loyaux. 

4. Special Plurals. Ciel (sky) makes its plural ordi- 
narily cieux; ceil (eye), yeux; and toufa (all, every), 
tous. 

a. Tout is declined then* as follows: 

• Singular. 
Mas. Fern. 

tout toute 

Plural. 
tous toutes 

§ 49. The General Noun. A noun used in a general 
sense takes the definite article in French, though not 
ordinarily in English: 

La vie de campagne. Country life. 

L'hornme est mortel. Man is mortal. 

Le sucre est doux. Sugar is sweet. 

§ 50. Pouvoir, to be able, can; vouloir, to wish, to be 



§50] 



LESSON XIV 



51 



willing; voir, to see; and savoir, to know, irregular verbs 
of the third conjugation, have the following forms in the 
pres. indie: 



-pouvoir 
i je peux 
1 je puis 
tu peux 
il peut 
nous pouvons 
vous pouvez 
ils peuvent 



vouloir 
je veux 

tu veux 

il veut 

nous voulons 

vous voulez 

ils veulent 



je vois 

tu vois 

il voit 

nous voyons 

vous voyez 

ils voient 



je sais 

tu sais 

il sait 

nous savons 

vous savez 

ils savent 



Vocabulary. 



un agneau (ano), a lamb 

un animal (animal), an animal 

un berger (berse), a shepherd 

chanter (Sate), to sing 

un chat (Sa), a cat 

un chien (Sje), a dog 

couler (kule), to flow 

un dindon (ded.5), a turkey 

doux (du), sweet, mild 

un ecureuil (ekyra:j), a squirrel 

une f amille (f ami : j ) , a family 

fidele (fidel), faithful 

une foret (fore), a forest 

une guepe (ge:p), a wasp 

une haie (e), a hedge 

l'herbe (erb), f., the grass 

heureux (aro), happy 

interessant (eteresa). interesting 

un insecte (esekt), an insect 

joli (30 li), pretty 

un lapin (lape), a rabbit 

malheureux (malaro), unhappy, 

unfortunate 
malheureusement (malarozma), 

unfortunately 
un moineau (mwano), a sparrow 
une mouche (muS), a fly 



un moustique (mustik), a mos- 
quito 
un mouton (muto), a sheep 
partout (partu), adv., everywhere 
pendant (pada)j prep., during 
pendant que, conj., while 
un pre (pre), a meadow 
un poulailler (pulaje), a hen 

house 
une poule (pul), a hen 
un poulet (pule), a chicken 
une rose (ro:z), a rose 
un rouge-gorge (rigors), a 

robin 
un ruisseau (rcpso), a brook, 

stream 
sauvage (sova:3), wild 
un sejour (se3u:r), a sojourn, 

stay 
un sentier (satje), a path 
une sorte (sort), a sort, kind 
surtout (syrtu), adv., above all, 

especially 
une vache (vaS), a cow 
un veau (vo), a calf, veal 
vrai (vre), true 
vraiment (vrema), truly, indeed 



52 LESSON XIV [§50 

EXERCISE XIV. 

Pendant notre sejour a la campagne, nous voyons 
beaucoup de choses interessantes. Nous aimons surtout 
les animaux, les chevaux, les vaches qui ont les yeux si 
beaux et si doux. Nous allons au poulailler pour voir les 
poules, les poulets, et les dindons. lis font vraiment une 
grande famille. Dans le pre nous voyons les moutons 
avec les agneaux. Comme les petits sont jolis! Un 
grand chien de berger les garde et il esttoujours si fidele. 
Dans le pre coule un ruisseau ou les animaux peuvent 
avoir de l'eau, et l'herbe du pre est si verte qu'ils y sont 
tres heureux. Quand nous voulons, nous pouvons aller 
au bois par un sentier bien joli. De chaque cote de ce 
sentier, il y a une haie avec des roses sauvages. Dans le 
bois, quelle vie! Des ecureuils, des lapins, des oiseaux 
partout. Non seulement des moineaux et des rouge- 
gorges, mais des oiseaux de toutes sortes; et comme ils 
chantent bien! Mais malheureusement il y a aussi dans 
la foret des insectes que nous n'aimons pas, surtout des 
mouches, des moustiques et des guepes. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Our sojourn in the country is agreeable, because we 
see there many interesting things. 2. We especially like 
cows and horses. 3. A cow has beautiful and mild eyes. 
4. We often go to the hen house, where we see turkeys, 
hens, and chickens. 5. There is really a large family of 
them. 6. Sheep and lambs are in a meadow beside the 
house. 7. How pretty the little lambs are! 8. A shep- 
herd dog, always faithful, takes care of (guards) them. 
9. The animals can get (have) water from a stream which 
is in the meadow. 10. They like the green grass too. 
11. One goes to the woods by a path. 12. There is a 



§51] LESSON XV 53 

hedge on each side of this path. 13. In the hedge there 
are wild roses. 14. Rabbits, squirrels, and birds of all 
kinds live in the woods. 15. One sees sparrows every- 
where. 16. How we love the robins! 17. They arrive 
in the spring and they remain until winter. 18. Unfor- 
tunately we find mosquitos in the woods. 19.. Flies and 
wasps are not agreeable insects. 20. You see that there 
are some disagreeable things in country life. 



LESSON XV. 

§ 51. Feminine of Nouns. The feminine gender of 
French nouns is distinguished from the corresponding 
masculine in three ways: 

A. By changing the ending of the masculine: 

lion, lioime. 

B. By using a special word to distinguish the female 
from the male: 

pere, mere; cheval, jument (mare). 

C. By adding to the noun a descriptive adjective which 
determines its gender: 

l'aigle (the eagle) male, l'aigle femelle. 

A. General Rule. The corresponding feminine form is 
ordinarily made by adding an unaccented e to the mascu- 
line: 

marquis, marquise; cousin, cousine (cousin). 

Special Rules. 1. Nouns in er and in ier, besides add- 
ing this e, take a grave accent on the e before the r: 

berger, bergere; jardinier (gardener), jardiniere; fermier (far- 
mer), fermiere. 



54 LESSON XV [§51 

2. The majority of nouns ending in n or t double the 
final consonant before adding the e: 

baron, baronne (baroness); paysan (peasant), paysanne. 

3. Nouns in ain, in, and some in an are, however, 
exceptions to the preceding rule: 

Romain, Romaine (Roman); orphelin, orpheline (orphan); Per- 
san, Persane (Persian). 

4. A score of nouns form their feminine in esse : 

negre (negro), negresse; hote (host), hotesse.| 

5. Nouns in eur form their feminine: 

a. In euse : 

pecheur (fisherman), pecheuse. 

b. In ice: 

mediateur (mediator), mediatrice. 

c. In esse: 

pecheur (sinner), pecheresse. 

B. 1. As in English, entirely different words are some- 
times used to distinguish the two sexes: 

Masculine » Feminine 

homme, man femme, woman 

pere, father mere, mother 

frere, brother soeur, sister 

oncle, uncle tante, aunt 

neveu, nephew niece, niece 

gendre, son-in-law bru, daughter-in-law 

parrain, godfather marraine, godmother 

coq, rooster poule, hen 

2. Words such as auteur (author), ecrivain (writer), 
peintre (painter), professeur, which designate professions 
more often followed by men, have no feminine form. One 
says then, for the feminine, une femme auteur, etc. 



(52] 



LESSON XV 



00 



C. Most animals have only one name, in some instances 
masculine, in others feminine, to designate both male 
and female, thus: le rossignol (the nightingale), la girafe. 
It becomes necessary then, in making a distinction, to 
say le rossignol male, le rossignol femelle; la girafe male, 
la girafe femelle. 

§ 52. Present indicative of boire, to drink (irreg.) : 



je bois 




nous buvons 


tu bois 




vous buvez 


il boit 


Vocabulary. 


ils boivent 



un abricot* (abriko), an apricot 
un ananas (anana), a pineapple 
autant (otci), adv., as (so) much, 

as (so) many 
une banane (banan), a banana 
la cave (ka:v). the cellar 
une cerise (sari:z), a cherry 
un citron (sitr5), a lemon 
les confitures (k5fity:r), i\, pre- 
serves, jam 
conserver (koserve). to preserve 
une datte (dat). a date 
delicieux (delisjo), dehcious, de- 
lightful 
demeurer (damare). to live 
une espece (espes), a species, 

kind 
une figue (fig), a fig 
frais (fre), fraiche (fre:§), fresh 
une fraise (fre:z), a strawberr} r 



rasp- 



fruit 



une framboise (frdbwa:z), a 

berry 
un fruit (frqi), a fruit 
fruitier (frqitje), adj.. fruit, 

bearing 
les groseilles (groze:j), f.. cur- 
rants, gooseberries 
inviter (evite), to invite 
manger (incise), to eat 
un melon (mol5), a melon 
une orange (01x1:5), an orange 
ordinairement (ordinerma), or- 
dinarily 
un parent (para), a parent, rela- 
tive 
passer (pose), to pass 
le pays (pei), the country, local- 
ity 
une peche (pe:$), a peach 
le plaisir (plezi:r), the pleasure 



* The name of a fruit tree is usually formed by adding ier or 
ar to the name of the fruit : un abricot, un abricotier (apricot 
tree); un cerisier (a cherry tree); un pommier (apple tree); un 
poirier, un pecher. 



56 



LESSON XV 



§52 



une poire (pwa:r), a pear 
une pomme (pom), an apple 
un pot (po), a jar, crock, pot 
pousser (puse), to push, grow 
une prune (pryn), a plum 
un pruneau (pryno), a prune 
quelque (kelka), adj., some, any 
quelque chose ($o:z), something 
quelquefois (kelkafwa), some- 
times 



quelque part (parr), somewhere 
quelque temps (ta), some time 
quel qu'un (§), some one 
les raisins (reze), m., grapes 
un verger (verse), an orchard 
vers (ve:r), prep., toward, about 
un vignoble (vinobl), a vine- 
yard 
le vin (ve), wine 



EXERCISE XV. 

Nous passons quelques semaines a la campagne, et j'ai 
des parents qui demeurent non loin de nous. Ma tante 
nous invite souvent et nous y allons avec grand plaisir. 
Mon oncle a un verger avec toutes especes d'arbres frui- 
tiers et nous pouvons manger autant de fruits que nous 
voulons. II y a des pommes, des peches. des- poires, des 
prunes, et des abricots. Dans le vignoble, nous trouvons 
des raisins delicieux. On fait le vin avec les raisins, et 
quelquefois mon cousin et meme ma cousine en boivent. 
Mais je ne bois pas de vin, je ne l'aime pas. Dans la 
saison on trouve aussi chez mon oncle des fraises, des 
framboises, des cerises, des groseilles, et des melons. 
Ordinairement on peut -y manger des fruits frais toute 
l'annee, meme en hiver, parce que mon oncle en garde 
beaucoup dans la cave. Et puis ma tante fait des confi- 
tures tres delicieuses qu'elle conserve dans des pots et 
que nous mangeons a table. Vers le sud du pays poussent 
les ananas, les bananes, les citrons, les oranges, les dattes 
et les figues, mais pas dans le verger de mon oncle. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. We have relatives who live in the country. 2. When 
my aunt invites us we go there with pleasure. 3. Some- 



§53] LESSON XVI 57 

times we pass several weeks there. 4. It is very pleasant 
to go into my uncle's orchard. 5. One finds there all 
kinds of fruit trees. 6. There are apricot trees, cherry 
trees, apple trees, and peach trees. 7. One can eat as 
much fruit as one wishes. 8. We always have delicious 
fruits in summer. 9. I especially like strawberries. 10. 
My mother makes preserves of them. 11. She keeps these 
preserves in jars. 12. We also eat strawberries fresh with 
sugar and cream. 13. My father keeps apples in the 
cellar all winter. 14. It is difficult to (de) keep pears 
and peaches. 15. Bananas, lemons, and figs grow in 
the south. 16. Do you like fresh figs? 17. Some one 
who lives near us has a vineyard. 18. In this vineyard 
one finds delicious grapes. 19. (The) wine is made from 
(with) (the) grapes. 20. Do you drink wine? 21. Some- 
times but not ordinarily. 



LESSON XVI. 

§ 53. Feminine of Adjectives. The general rule for 
forming the feminine of adjectives is the same as that 
for the feminine of nouns, namely, add an unaccented e 
to the masculine unless that already ends in e (§ 16) : 

noir, noire; grand, grande; (but) large, large. 

Special Rules. 1. Adjectives in el, eil, ol, ul, en, on, 

et, ot and those ending in s usually double the final con- 
sonant before adding the e : 

cruel, cruelle (cruel) pareil ; pareille (like, equal) 

mol, molle (soft) mil, nulle (no) 

ancien. ancienne (ancient, old) bon, bonne 
muet, muette (mute, silent) sot, sotte (stupid) 

gros, grosse 



58 LESSON XVI [§53 

2. Adjectives in er, ier, and the six adjectives complet 
(full), concret (concrete), discret (discreet), inquiet (anxi- 
ous), replet (corpulent), and secret do not double the 
final consonant but take a grave accent on the e which 
precedes the r or the t: 

etranger, etrangere (foreign); altier, altiere (haughty); complet, 
complete etc. 

3. Adjectives ending in x regularly change x to se: 

heureux, heureuse; (but) 

a. Faux (false) becomes fausse; roux (reddish, russet), rousse; 

b. Vieux (old) becomes vieille; doux (sweet, mild), douce. 

4. Adjectives in f change /to ve: 

neuf, neuve (new); bref, breve (short); craintif, craintive (timid). 

5. a. Some adjectives ending in c pronounced change 
the c to que: 

public, publique; turc, turque (Turkish). 

Grec retains the c and adds que: 
grec, grecque (Greek). 

b. But more often adjectives ending whether in silent 
c (blanc) or in c pronounced (sec) change the c to che in 
the feminine: 

blanc, blanche; sec, seche (dry). 

6. Adjectives ending in g, like long, oblong, add ue: 
long, longue. 

7. Adjectives in eur form the feminine in four ways: 

a. Simply add e to the masculine: 
majeur, majeure (major). 

b. Change eur to euse : 
trompeur, trompeuse (deceitful). 

c. Change eur to eresse: 

vengeur, vengeresse (revengeful). 



§§54-55] 



LESSON XVI 



59 



d. Change teur to trice: 

conducteur, conductrice (leading). 

8. Irregular Feminines. Beau has for its feminine 



belle ; 
jumeau, jumelle (twin) 
fou, folle (insane) 
benin, benigne (benign) 
favori, favorite 



nouveau, nouvelle (new) 
mou, molle (soft) 
malin, maligne (malicious) 
tiers, tierce (third) 



§ 54. Position of Adjectives. Descriptive adjectives 
more often follow the noun to which the}' belong (§ 19): 
le livre noir. 

1. The following adjectives of common use, however, 
ordinarily precede the noun: 

beau grand joli mediant (wicked; naughty) 

bon gros long petit 

court jeune (young) mauvais (bad) vieux 

2. The meaning of an adjective frequently depends 
upon whether it precedes or follows the noun: 

un homme grand = a tall man. 
un grand homme = a great man. 

§ 55. Present indicative of conduire, to conduct, escort, 
drive; and of connaitre, to know, to be acquainted with 
(irreg.) : 

je conduis nous conduisons . je connais nous connaissons 

tu conduis vous conduisez tu connais vous connaissez 

il conduit ils conduisent il connait ils connaissent 

Vocabulary. 



l'air (err), m., the air 

arroser (aroze), to sprinkle, to 

water 
autour de (otu :r) , around, about 
un bluet (blye), a corn flower 



border (borde), to border, line 
un bouton d'or (but-5do:r), a but- 
ter cup 
un buisson (bqiso), a bush 
la bruyere (bryje:r), heather 



69 



LESSON XVI 



§55 



une capucine (kapysin), a nas- I 

turtium 
un chardon ($ard5), a thistle 
un chevrefeuille ($£vr8fa:j), a 

honeysuckle 
un coquelicot (kokliko), a poppy 
un dahlia (dalja), a dahlia 
un dent-de-lion (dadaljo), a dan- | 

delion 
embaumer (abome), to perfume I 
fier (fje:r), proud 
une fleur (no:r), a flower 
une fougere (fuserr), a fern 
une foule (ful), a crowd, lot 
un fuchsia (fyksja), a fuchsia 
un geranium (seranjom), a gera- 
nium 
le ghi (gi), mistletoe 
grimper (grepe), to climb 
un hortensia (ortasja), a hydran- 
gea 
une jacinthe (3as£:t), a hyacinth 
un jardin (sarde), a garden 
le lierre (lje:r), the ivy 
un lilas (lila), a lilac 
un lis (li:s), a lily 
magnifique (manif ik) , magnifi- 
cent 
une marguerite (margarit), a 

daisy 
une mauvaise herbe (movezerb), 

a weed 
montrer (m5tre), to show 
le muguet (myge), the lily of the 
valley 



unmyosotis (mjosotirs), a forget- 
me-not 

un narcisse (narsis), a daffodil, 
narcissus 

un nenuphar (nenyfa:r), a water 
lily ' 

nulle part (nyl par), nowhere 

l'odeur (odo:r), f., the odor, fra- 
grance 

l'ceillet (aje), m., a pink, carna- 
tion 

une pensee (pose), a thought; a 
pansy 

peu (po), adv., little 

peut-etre (pate:tr), perhaps 

une plante (pla:t), a plant 

une primevere (primve:r), a 
primrose, cowslip 

un reseda (rezeda), a mignon- 
ette 

une rose tremiere (tremje:r), a 
hollyhock 

tard (ta:r), late 

un tournesol (turnasol), a sun- 
flower 

un trefle (trsfl), a clover 

une tulipe (tylip), a tulip 

varie (varje), variegated 

la verge d'or (vendor), the gold- 
en rod 

une verveine (verven), a ver- 
bena 

une violette (vjolet), a violet 

un volubilis (volybilis), a morn- 
ing glory 



EXERCISE XVI. 

Nos amis ont un grand jardin et quelquefois le vieux 
jardinier nous y conduit pour nous montrer les jolies 



§55] LESSON XVI 61 

fleurs. Je ne connais nulle part un jardin pareil. Le 
jardinier arrose les plantes tous les soirs et il est tres 
fier d'avoir des fleurs nouvelles dans toutes les saisons. 
Au printemps on y voit des primeveres, des narcisses, 
des tulipes, des jacinthes, des lilas, et des violettes; un 
peu plus tard peut-etre, du muguet, des myosotis, des 
pensees, des lis, et des oeillets. Dans le pre, de l'autre 
cote du mur, pousse une foule de fleurs sauvages, des bou- 
tons d'or, des marguerites, des bluets, des trefles, des 
coquelicots, et meme de mauvaises herbes, comme des 
chardons et des dents-de-lion. Au mois de juin nous 
trouvons dans le jardin de belles roses de toutes les 
couleurs, et leur odeur embaume Fair. En aout, les 
fuchsias, les geraniums et les hortensias sont presque 
aussi hauts que les buissons. Les verveines et les resedas 
sont de jolies petites fleurs. Les dahlias, les verges d'or, 
les tournesols, les roses tremieres, et les fougeres bordent 
le mur. Tout le jardin est magnifique et varie comme les 
jardins publics de France. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. We are going into the garden to-day to see the 
flowers. 2. The old gardener escorts us there often. 
3. Do you know a garden like it? 4. No, there isn't one 
anywhere. 5. Cowslips, tulips, and violets grow there in 
the spring. 6. Yellow daffodils and white hyacinths 
are there also. 7. A little later one sees lilies-of-the- 
valley, forget-me-nots, and pinks. 8. Do you like the 
wild flowers? 9. Yes, I like them very much. 10. There 
is a lot of them in the meadow behind the house. 11. 
Buttercups, daisies, and clover blossoms grow there in 
the grass. 12. Are there many weeds in the garden? 13. 



62 LESSON XVII [§56 

No, there are not many of them. 14. June is the month 
of flowers. 15. What flowers do you find in the garden 
in the month of June? 16. We find there especially roses 
of all colors. 17. Their fragrance perfumes all the gar- 
den. 18. The fuchsias and the geraniums in the public 
gardens of France are almost as high as small trees. 19. 
There is no heather in the garden; that is always a wild 
plant. 20. The mignonette and the verbena are small 
flowers; the sunflower and the hydrangea are large 
(flowers). 21. Ferns are always beautiful in a garden. 



LESSON XVII. 

§ 56. Comparison of Adjectives. 1. French adjectives 
have the same three degrees of comparison as the English, 
namely, the positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 
They are never compared, however, as are many English 
adjectives, by adding suffixes (as, in tall, taller, tallest) 
but rather by adverbs placed before the positive. 

2. The comparative degree is formed by prefixing: plus 
(ply), " more," to indicate superiority: 

Le mur est plus long que le tableau; 

moins (mw?), " less," to indicate inferiority: 

Le tableau est moins long que le mur; 

*aussi, " as," to indicate equality: 
Le plafond est nussi long que le plancher. 

3. The superlative degree is formed by prefixing the 



* Not properly the comparative degree, although so classed in 
French grammars. 



§§57-58] lesson xvn 63 

definite article (or the possessive adjective) to the com- 
parative : 

Voici beaucoup de crayons; Voire crayon est le plus Jong. La 
robe de Marie est la plus jolie de toutes. 

Note a. — As in English, some adjectives are compared irregularly: 

bon, good meilleur, better le meilleur, best 

. , , f pire, (or) f le pire, (or) 

mauvais, bad < . < , , . 

plus mauvais, worse I le plus mauvais, worst 

„ { moindre, (or) / le moindre, (or) 

petit, small < , ' v .. < , , ' „ 

plus petit, smaller { le plus petit, smallest 

Xote b. — " Than " is ordinarily que, but with an expression of 
number of quantity it is de: Vous etes plus grand que Jean, You are 
taller than John; (but) II a plus de trois mille francs, He has more 
than three thousand francs. 

§ 57. Comparison of Adverbs. Adverbs are compared 
as are adjectives, by prefixing plus or moins to the posi- 
tive to form the comparative, but the le of the superlative 
is invariable. 

Note. — Some adverbs are irregular in their comparison: 



bien (bje), well: mieux (mjo), better: 


le mieux, best 


mal (mal). badly; pis (pi), worse; 


le pis, worst 


beaucoup, much: plus, more: 


le plus, most 


peu, little; moins, less; 


le moins, le ■: st 


§ 58. Present indicative of mettre, to put, to place; 


and of prendre, to take (irreg.) : 




je mets nous mettons je prends 


nous prenons 


tn mets vous mettez tu prends 


vous prenez 


il met ils mettent il prend 


ils prennent 



Note. — Apprendre. to learn, and comprendre, to understand, are 
conjugated like prendre; entendre, to hear, and vendre, to sell, like 
rompre, except that / is omitted in the 3rd Sing. 



64 



LESSON XVII 



§58 



Vocabulary. 



une abeille (abe:j), a bee 
un acacia (akasja), a locust tree 
une araignee (arejie), a spider 
un bouleau (bulo), a birch 
un chataignier ($atejije), a chest- 
nut tree 
un chene (^e:n), an oak 
une chenille (§ani:j), a cater- 
pillar 
une cigale (sigal), a grasshopper 
le cceur (ka:r) the heart 
un coup d'ceil (kuda:j), a glance 
un crapaud (krapo), a toad 
le depart (depa:r), the departure 
un essaim (ese), a swarm 
faible (fe:bl), weak 
fort (fo:r), strong 
forestier (forestje), adj., forest 
une fourmi (furmi), an ant 
gracieux (grasj 0) , graceful ; cour- 
teous 
le grand chemin (gramme) | 
la grande route (gradrut) J 

highway 
une grenouille (granu:j), a frog 
un grillon (grijo), a cricket 
c'est dommage (doma:5), It is a 
pity, too bad 



jeter (sate), to throw, cast 
laborieux (laborjo), laborious, 

busy 
le miel (mjel), honey 
la nature (naty:r), nature 
une noix (nwa), a nut, walnut 
un noyer (nwaje), a walnut-tree 
un oraie (orm), an elm 
un papillon (papijo), a butterfly 
un peuplier (paplie), a poplar 
pur (py:r), pure 
un rameau (ramo), a bough, 

branch 
le regret (ragre), regret 
une riviere (rivje:r), a river 
un sapin (sape), a fir tree 
un saule (so:l), a willow 
une sauterelle (sotrel), a grass- 
hopper 
sembler (sable), to seem, appear 
un son (so), a sound 
un tilleul (tijol), a linden-tree 
travailleur (travaj a :r) , adj . , hard- 
working 
un tronc (tro), a trunk (of tree) 
les vacances (vaka:s), f., vaca- 
tion 



EXERCISE XVII. 



C'est notre dernier jour a la campagne, et nous voyons 
arriver avec regret l'heure de notre depart. J'aime 
mieux la campagne que la ville, surtout en ete. II me 
semble que Fair y est plus pur, que le ciel y est plus bleu, 
et assurement on y est plus pres du cceur de la nature. 
Les meilleurs jours de l'annee sont les jours de vacances 



§58] lessox xvii 65 

a la campagne. Nous prenons im voiture aujourd'hui 
et allonspour jeter un dernier coup d'ceil part out. De 
chaque cote du grand chemin sont des ormes avec des 
rameaux tres gracieux. Les grands vieux ehenes, qui 
ont plus de cent ans, et qui ont des troncs les plus forts 
de tous les arbres, les tilleuls, les bouleaux, les acacias 
les sapins toujours verts, les peupliers, les saules, qui 
bordent la riviere, les chataigniers, et les noyers, avec les 
noix que nous mangeons en hiver — tous les arbres fores- 
tiers, je les aime. On entend partout les sons de la 
campagne; les abeilles,*si laborieuses, qui font leur miel, 
les cigales, les grillons, les sauterelles, les grenouilles dans 
l'etang. Meme la fourmi, toujours travailleuse, Taraignee 
la chenille, et le papillon, le plus joli de tous les insect es 
nous interessent, et c'est dommage de les quitter. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. With regret we see our last day in the country arrive. 
2. Do you like the city better than the country? 3. I like 
it better in winter but not in summer. 4. It seems to me 
that I am nearer to the heart of nature when I am in the 
country. 5. Vacation days are the best of the year. 6. We 
always si ay in the country during vacation. 7. 1 especially 
like the large forest trees. 8. We have some oaks that are 
(have) more than a hundred years (old). 9. They are the 
strongest of allthe trees. 10. The willow is weaker. 11. 
The most graceful tree is the elm. 12. There are poplars 
on each side of the highway. 13. I do not think (find) 
them very beautiful. 14. Do you like nuts? 15. There 
are (black) walnut and chestnut trees in the woods. 16. 
We can get (have) nuts in the fall. 17. We eat walnuts 
in winter when they are dry. 18. Do you eat honey? 
19. No, I do not like it; it is too sweet. 20. That is a 



66 lesson xviii [§§59-60 

pity, because we have some delicious honey. 21. Do you 
sell any of it? 22. Yes, we sell a good deal (much) of it; 
we have forty swarms of bees. 

LESSON XVIII. 

§ 59. Reflexive Verbs. Reflexive verbs are much more 
commonly used in French than in English. They include: 

1. Verbs that are reflexive in English and that may be 
used with a reflexive meaning or not : 

Je me bats, I strike myself; (or) Je bats mon frere, I strike my 
brother. 

2. Verbs that are essentially reflexive, that is, verbs 
which in French can never occur without a reflexive pro- 
noun: 

Je me repens.. I repent (myself). 

3. Reciprocal verbs of the English, a mutual action 
being accomplished: 

Jean et Louis se battent, John and Louis strike each other. lis 
se rencontrent dans la rue, They meet (each other) in the street. 

4. A large class of verbs in which there often seems to 
be no action whatever expressed, but which the French 
idiom puts in the reflexive form: 

Ou se trouve la Rue de Rennes? Where finds itself (where is) the 
Rue de Rennes? Comment se porte madame votre mere? How 
carries herself (how is) your mother? 

Remark. — The reflexive construction is frequently used in place 
of the English passive voice : Cela se dit partout, That is told every- 
where. 

§ 60. Pres. indie, of se lever, to rise (lever = to raise), 
and of se repentir, to repent (irreg.) : 

je me leve nous nous levons je me repens nous nous repentons 
tu te leves vous vous levez tu te repens vous vous repentez 

il se leve ils se levent il se repent ils se repentent • 



§§61-62] lesson xviii 67 

§ 61. Verbs which have an unaccented e (e muet) in 
next to the last syllable of the infinitive, the penult, 
change that e into e ouvert when in the conjugation it 
occurs before a silent syllable. To indicate this change 
two methods are used: 

1. Most verbs whose infinitive ends in eler or eter, as 
appeler, to call, and jeter, double the I or t before a silent 
syllable but elsewhere retain the single letter as in the 
infinitive : 

je jette, tu jettes, il jette, nous jetons, vous jetez, ils jet tent. 

2. Verbs which have this e muet and whose stem does 
not end in I or t, as lever, semer (to sow), take a grave 
accent on the e, instead of doubling the following con- 
Sonant : 

je seme, tu semes, il seme, nous semons, vous semez, ils sement. 

Note a. — Even some of the verbs in eler and eter take this grave 
accent instead of doubling the consonant: j 'achete, tu achete , il 
achete, nous achetons, vous achetez, ils achetent. 

Note b. — In the same way, many verbs which have an e ferme (e) 
in next to the last syllable of the infinitive, as esperer, to hope, 
change the e to e before a silent syllable: j'espere, tu esperes, il 
espere, nous esperons, vous esperez, ils esperent. 



§ 62. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 1. A conjunc- 
tive personal pronoun is one " joined to " the verb either 
as direct or as indirect object. Except in the imperative 
affirmative it should precede the verb of which it is object: 

Pouvez-vous me voir? Can you see me? Youlez-vous me donner 
le livre? Will you give (to) me the book? 

iVote.— As the name indicates, this class of pronouns technically 
includes as well all pronouns used as subject to a verb. 



68 lesson xviii [§§63-64 

2. The conjunctive personal pronouns are: 

me first person singular, direct or indirect object. 

nous " " plural, " " 

te second " singular, " " 

vous " " or plural, direct or indirect object, 

se* third " " " " " " 

le (mas.), la (fem.), third person singular, direct object. 



les (m. or f.), 

lui (m. or f.), 

leur (m. or f.), 

en (m. or f.), 

y (m. or f.), 



plural " " 

singular, indirect object, 
plural, " 

singular or plural. (See below.) 



§ 63. Pronominal Adverbs. En and y are sometimes 
adverbs, sometimes pronouns, hence are called pronominal 
adverbs. En has been explained (§ 40.2). It is usually 
spoken of as equivalent to the genitive case of the Latin: 

Avez-vous des crayons? Oui, j'en ai plusieurs. Have you 
any pencils? Yes, I have several of them. 

Y as a pronoun is ordinarily equivalent to the dative 
case of the Latin: 

L'affaire est importante; j'y donne toute mon attention. The 
matter is important; I am giving to it all my attention. 

En indicates motion from, y motion toward or place 
where (§27.2): 

Venez-vous de chez vous? Oui, j'en viens. Do you come from 
home? Yes, I come from there. — Allez-vous chez vous? Non, je 
n'y vais pas. Are you going home? No, I am not going (to) there. 
— Le livre est-il sur la table? Oui, il y est. Is the book on the table? 
Yes, it is there. 

§ 64. Position of Conjunctive Personal Pronouns.! 

1. As already stated (§ 62), conjunctive personal pro- 



* Always reflexive. 

f Rules as given by Prof. A. S. Patterson. 



i65] 



LESSON XVIII 



69 



nouns, whether direct or indirect object, precede the 
verb, except in the imperative affirmative: 

II nous donne les livres. He gives us the books; (but) 

Donnez nous les livres. Give us the books. 

2. The third person comes next to the verb: 
Je vous le donne. I give it to you. 

Donnez le nous. Give it to us. 

3. If there are two third person objects, lui or leur will 
follow le, la, les: 

Je le lui donne. I give it to him. 
Donnez le lui. Give it to him. 

4. Moi and toi are used instead of me and te in the im- 
perative affirmative, except when followed by y or en: 

Donnez le moi. Give it to me. 

Donnez me'en un autre. Give me another of them. 

5. En follows y, which follows all other pronouns. 



§ 65. The preceding rules for the position of personal 
pronoun objects and pronominal adverbs coming before 
the verb are admirably summed up in the following table, 
quoted from Fraser and Squair : 



me 




' le 


te 






se 


1 before < 


la 


nous 






vous 




les 



lui 

before <! \ before y} before en. 

leur I 



Vocabulary. 



aise (c:z), adj., glad, pleased 
une avenue (avny), an avenue 
bonjour (b.55u:r), good morning, 

good day 
bonsoir (b.5swa:r), good evening 
un cabinet (kabine), a study, 

office, private room 



un cabinet de consultation (ko- 
syltasjo), a doctor's office 

C'est cela (sesala), It is that. All 
right 

un coin (kwe), a corner 

comme d'habitude (abityd), f., 
as usual 



70 



LESSON XVIII 



i65 



descendre (desa:dr), to go down 
la direction (direksjo), the direc- 
tion 
le docteur (dokta:r), the doctor 

(as a title) 
ecrire* (ekri:r), to write 
en ce moment (mama), just now 
en face de (fas), prep., opposite 
en tout cas (ka), at any rate, 

anyway 
l'espoir (espwa:r), m., hope 
un etage (eta 13), a story (of a 

house) . 
fache(e) (fafe), sorry; angry 
un fleuve (flo:v), a river (flowing 

into the sea) 
une riviere (rivje:r), a river, 

stream (branch of un fleuve) 
guerir (geri:r), to cure 
une guerison (gerizo), a cure 
habiller (abije), to dress 
un lit (li), a bed 



unmedecin (medse), a physician 
la medecine (medsin), the medi- 
cine 
un nom (no), a name, noun 
un numero (nymero), a number 
un pare (park), a park 
passe(e) (pase), past, last 
penser (pase), to think 
un pont (po), a bridge 
porter (parte), to carry; wear 
se promener (promne), to walk 

(go) for pleasure 
prononcer (pronose), to pro- 
nounce 
un quai (ke), a quay, wharf, plat- 
form 
une question (kestjo), a question 
sur (sy:r), sure 
triste (trist), sad 
tromper (trope), to deceive 
se tromper, to be mistaken 
visiter (vizite), to visit, call 



EXERCISE XVIII. 

Bonjour, Monsieur. Comment vous portez-vous ce 
matin? — Je me porte tres bien, je vous remercie, Madame. 
Et vous? — Comme d'habitude, Monsieur. Comment se 
porte Madame votre mere?— Elle se porte un peu mieux 
en ce moment. — J 'en suis bien aise. Et Monsieur votre 
pere? — II ne se trouve pas bien du tout. II est vraiment 
tres malade. — Oh Monsieur, j'en suis bien fachee. Est-ce 
qu'il garde tou jours le lit? — Pas tou jours. Quelquefois il 
se leve, il s'habille et se promene un peu dans le jardin, 
mais le medecin ne nous donne pas d'espoir de guerison. 



*j'ecris, 
ecrivent. 



tu ecris, il ecrit, nous ecrivons, vous ecrivez, ils 



§65] LESSON XVIII 71 

— Ah comme c'est triste! Comment s'appelle le medecin 
de votre pere? — II s'appelle Laycock. — Je ne connais pas 
ce nom. Comment s'ecrit-il? L-a-i-c-o-q-u-e, n'est-ce 
pas? — Non, Madame, vous vous trompez. II s'ecrit 
L-a-y-c-o-c-k. C'est un nom, il me semble, qui ne se 
prononce pas comme il s'ecrit. — Ou demeure ce Docteur 
Laycock? — II demeure au numero 54 Rue de Belfort, je 
pense, je n'en suis pas sur; mais en tout cas son cabinet 
de consultation se trouve au coin du Boulevard Saint- 
Michel et de la Rue Soufflot. On descend le boulevard 
dans la direction du quai, mais pas si loin que le pont. 
La rue en question est en face du pare et le cabinet du 
docteur se trouve au troisieme etage. — C'est cela. Je 
comprends, Monsieur. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Good evening, Miss . How do you do? 2. I 

am very well, I thank you. And you? 3. Very well also. 
4. How is Mademoiselle your sister? 5. Unfortunately 
she is sick in -(au) bed. 6. Oh, I am very sorry. Does a 
doctor visit her? 7. Yes, it is a doctor by the name of 
(who calls himself) Laycock. 8. Do you know this 
name? 9. No, how is it spelled (written)? 10. It is not 
written as it is pronounced. 11. Where is (finds itself) 
Dr. Laycock's office? 12. It is at the corner of the Rue 
de Belfort and of the Avenue des Gobelins. 13. Is his 
office far from the bridge? 14. It is in the direction of 
the river but rather far from the quai. 15. He lives 
opposite the park. 16. Does the doctor hope to cure 
your sister? 17. Yes, he hopes (to) but he is not at all 
sure of it. 18. At any rate, she is better to-day than last 
week. 19. Now she can get up, dress, and walk about 
(h}) the house a little. 20. I am very glad of it. 21. It 
seems to me that she is really much better. 



72 



LESSON XIX 



[§§66-67 



LESSON XIX. 



§ 66. Imperative Mode. 1. As in English, the impera- 
tive mode is used to express a command: 
va, go (sing.); allez, go (plu.). 

In the plural, a first person, which expresses rather 
an exhortation than a command, occurs and is trans- 
lated by "Let us": 

allons, Let us go. 

2. In all four conjugations, the forms of the present 
imperative are usually (not always) identical with the 
corresponding forms of the present indicative: 



*aime(s) 

aimons 
aimez 



finir 

finis 

finissons 
finissez 



recois 



recevons 
recevez 



rompre 

romps 

rompons 
rompez 



§ 67. Present Indicative of venir, to come; partir, to 
depart; dire, to say, to tell; lire, to read (all irreg.): 



je viens 

tu viens 

il vient 
nous venons 
vous venez 

ils viennent 



je pars 

tu pars 

il part 
nous partons 
vous partez 

ils partent 



je dis 

tu dis 
ildit 
nous disons 
vous dites 

ils disent 



je lis 

tu lis 

il lit 

nous lisons 

vous lisez 

ils lisent 



Note. — Revenir, to come back, is conjugated like venir; soriir, to 
go out, and sentir, to smell (reflex to feel), like partir. 



*The final s of the indicative second person singular, first conju- 
gation, drops in the imperative, except before enor y: Chante une 
chanson. Sing a song ; (but) Chante-s-en une partie. Sing a part 
of it. 



§67: 



LESSON XIX 



73 



Vocabulary. 



l'adresse (adres), the address 
l'affaire (afe:r), f., the affair, 

business 
un homme d'affaires, a business 

man 
une lettre d'affaires, a business 

letter 
aimable (emabl), amiable, kind 
apporter (aporte), to bring 
a temps (ta), in time 
un bateau (bato), a boat 
bete (be:t), stupid 
un bureau (byro), a desk, office 
cacheter (ka$te), to seal 
car (ka:r), conj., for, because 
commencer (komase), to begin 
la date (dat), the date 
deja (desa), already 
depecher (depe$e), to hurry 
en route (5 rut), on the way 
une enveloppe (avlop), an en- 
velope 
un garcon (garso), a waiter, boy, 

bachelor 
important (eporta), important 
un instant (est 5), a moment, 

instant 
un journal (surnal), a news- 
paper 
justement (cystoma), exactly 
la-bas (laba), adv., down there, 

over there 
Londres (l5:dr), London 



nerveux (nervo), nervous 

oublier (ublie), to forget 

le papier a lettres, the letter 

paper 
le papier buvard (byva:r), the 

blotter 
(or) le buvard 
perdre (perdr), to lose 
plier (plie), to fold, bend 
possible (posibl), possible 
la poste (post) ) the post 

le bureau de poste / office 
presse(e) (prese), pressed, in a 

hurry 
prier (prie), to pray, beg of 
une raison (rezo), a reason 
regarder (ragarde), to look 
retourner (raturne), to go back 
de retour, back, returned 
une tache (taS), a spot, stain, 

blot 
un timbre (te:br), a stamp 
tot (to), adv., soon 
tout a fait, entirely 
tout a l'heure, just now, pres- 
ently 
tout de suite, immediately 
tout a coup, suddenly 
tout d'un coup, all at once 
tout de meme, all the same 
vite (vit), adj. and adv., quick, 

quickly 
volontiers (volotje), adv., gladly 



EXERCISE XIX. 



Gargon, pouvez-vous me donner du papier a lettres et 
des enveloppes? — Oui, Monsieur, je peux vous en don- 



74 LESSON XIX [§67 

ner. — Alors apportez m'en tout de suite, je vous prie, 
parceque j'ai une lettre d'affaires a ecrire ce matin. 
Cherchez moi aussi une plume et de l'encre, car je n'en 
ai pas. — Oui, Monsieur, en voici. — Merci bien. Revenez 
dans un instant ou restez maintenant, s'il vous plait. 
Je n'ai qu'une lettre a ecrire, mais elle est tres importante. 
Voulez-vous la mettre a la poste? — Volontiers, Monsieur. 
— Bien, je commence. Dites moi ; quelle date sommes- 
nous aujourd'hui? — Nous sommes samedi. sept. — C'est 
cela. Voila dejaune tache d'encre. Donnez moi du papier 
buvard. Depechez vous! Vite! — Regardez, Monsieur. 
Votre buvard est justement devant vous sur le bureau. — 
Oh oui, je le vois. Comme je suis bete! Ecrivez moi la 
lettre, je vous prie; je suis trop nerveux pour l'ecrire. 
Finissez la aussi tot que possible, pliez la et mettez la 
dans l'enveloppe. N'oubliez pas le timbre. Voulez-vous 
la cacheter maintenant et la porter a la poste. Demandez 
leur la-bas si elle est a temps pour le bateau qui part ce 
soir. J'ai des affaires importantes a Londres et pour cette 
raison je suis bien presse. Ne la perdez pas en route et 
ne la mettez pas dans votre poche. Un homme qui met 
une lettre dans sa poche n'y-pense plus. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Waiter, bring me some writing-paper and some 
envelopes. 2. Can you find me some ink and a pen too? 
3. Yes, sir, I can find some for you. 4. All right, give me 
some immediately, because I am in a great hurry. 5. 
I am writing a business letter which is very important. 
6. There is a blot already. 7. Get me a blotter, I beg of 
you. 8. Hurry up. 9. You have a blotter on the desk 
directly in front of you, sir. 10. Oh yes, thank you. 11. 
Now write the address on the envelope. 12. Finish the 



§§68-69] lesson xx 75 

letter and carry it to the post-office as soon as possible. 

13. Don't forget to (de) seal it and to put on (y) a stamp. 

14. Ask them down there if there are any letters for me. 

15. If you find any, don't lose them on the way. 16. It 
is better if you put them in your pocket. 17. Ah, there 
you are back already. 18. What have you for me? 19. 
I have three letters and two newspapers. 20. Give them 
to me, if you please. 21. I give them to you gladly, sir. 
22. I thank you very much. You are very kind. 



LESSON XX. 

§ 68. Principal Parts of Verbs. Every French verb, 
unless defective, has three* principal parts on which the 
various forms in the conjugation are built. They are: 

1. The present infinitive (Finfinitif present) which ends 
in er for the first conjugation, ir for the second, oir for 
the third, and re for the fourth (§ 46). 

2. The present participle (le participe present) which 
always ends in ant, just as in English the pres. part, ends 
in ing. 

3. The past participle (le participe passe) which for the 
first conjugation always ends in e, and for the other three 
conjugations (if regular) in i for the second, u for the 
third and fourth. 

§ 69. Past indefinite (parf ait indefini) . A French verb 
has five past tenses in the indicative mode, but the one 
most commonly used in conversation is the past indefinite, 



* Some grammarians give five principal parts, the three men- 
tioned above and in addition the first person singular of the present 
indicative and of the past definite. 



76 



LESSON XX 



[§69 



a compound tense, formed by adding the past participle 
of the verb conjugated to the present indicative of the 
auxiliary : 



donner 
y ai donne nous avons donne 
tu as donne vous avez donne 
il a donne ils ont donne 



dormir (to sleep) 
j' ai dormi nous avons dormi 
tu as dormi vous avez dormi 
il a dormi ils ont dormi 



Note a. — The past indefinite is primarily considered as equiva- 
lent to the present perfect of the English: j'ai donne, I have given; 
j'ai dormi, I have slept; but it more frequently occurs where it 
must be translated without " have " as a simple past: I gave, I 
slept. 

Note b. — When a compound tense of a verb is used negatively, 
the ne stands before the auxiliary and the pas between the auxiliary 
and the participle: 

Vous n'avez pas dormi. You have not slept. 

N'avez-vous pas dormi? Have you not slept ? 

Note c. — The past participle of some of the verbs given in the 
preceding lessons are as follows: avoir, eu; etre, ete; aimer, aime; 
finir, fini; recevoir, recu; rompre, rompu; pouvoir, pu; vouloir, 
voulu; voir, vu; savoir, su; faire, fait; alter, alle; boire, bu; con- 
naitre, connu; dire, dit; ecrire, ecrit; mettre, mis; prendre, pris; 
lire, lu; partir, parti; venir, venu. 

Vocabulary. 



actif (aktif), active 

aider (ede), to aid 

arranger (ara3e), to arrange, set 

in order 
assister (asiste), to be present at 
assurement (asyrema), surely 
balayer (baleje), to sweep 
un balai (bale), a broom 
un bas (bet), a stocking 
une bonne (bon), a maid 
cependant (sapada), however; 

meanwhile 



certainement (sertenma), cer- 
tainly 

un concert (kose:r), a concert 

la cuisine (kqizin), the kitchen; 
cooking 

faire la cuisine, to cook 

debarrasser (debarase), to clear 

de bonne heure, early 

le dejeuner (depone), lunch, 
breakfast 

le petit dejeuner, breakfast 

le diner (dine), dinner 



LESSON LX 



to play 
the piano 



en meme temps, at the same 

time 
f rotter (frote), to rub, polish 

(dust) 
hier (je:r), adv., yesterday 
jouer du piano 

(pjano) 
toucher le piano 
laisser (lese), to leave, let, allow 
laver (lave), to wash 
laver la vaisselle (vesel), to wash 

the dishes 
Maman (mama), Mamma 
le menage (mena:s), household, 

house work 
mettre la table 
mettre le couvert 

(kuve :r) 
un meuble (mabl), 

furniture 
des meubles, furniture 
un ameublement (amabtema), a 

set of furniture 
un musee (myze), a museum 
un petit pain, a roll 



to set the 
table 

a piece of 



paresseux (pareso), lazy 
pendre (pcirdr), to hang, hang 

up 
raccommoder (rakomode), to 

mend, patch 
repriser (reprize), to darn 
un repas (rapa), a meal, repast 
un salon (salo), a drawing-room, 

parlor 
sans dessus dessous, topsy- 
turvy 
secouer (sakwe), to shake 
une sieste (sjest), a siesta, after- 
noon nap 
faire une sieste, to take a nap 
souffrant (sufra), ailing, ill 
un tapis (tapi), a carpet, rug; 

table spread 
le travail (trava:j), work 
travailler (travaje), to work 
vetir (veti:r), to clothe 
un vetement (vetma) , a garment ; 

pi. clothes 
un violon (vjolo), a violin 



EXERCISE XX. 



Qu'avez-vous fait hier, Suzanne? — Hier j'ai passe une 
journee tres active mais tout de meme bien agreable. 
Le matin de bonne heure j'ai pris mon petit dejeuner, 
une tasse de cafe et des petits pains. Ensuite j'ai aide 
ma mere a faire le menage, parceque la bonne a ete 
souffrante. J'ai lave la vaisselle en meme temps que 
Maman a arrange le salon. Elle a balaye le plancher, 
secoue les tapis, frotte les meubles. La vaisselle finie, 
j'ai fait les lits. Malheureusement j'ai laisse ma chambre 
sans dessus dessous, mais apres le petit dejeuner, j'ai 



78 LESSON XX [§69 

pendu mes robes et arrange mes affaires. J'ai raccommode 
mes vetements, reprise mes bas et lu le journal jusqu'a 
onze heures et demie, puis j'ai fait la cuisine pour le repas 
de midi, le dejeuner. — Assurement vous n'avez pas ete 
paresseuse. — Certainement non. — Avez-vous travaille tout 
l'apres-midi? — Non, apres que j'ai debarrasse la table, 
j'ai fait une sieste et puis j'ai visite le musee avec une de 
mes amies. J'ai joue du piano pendant une heure avant 
le diner, et le soir j'ai assiste au concert. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Did you pass an agreeable day yesterday. 2. Yes, 
I thank you, I passed a very agreeable day, but all the 
same I worked. 3. One is always happy when one works, 
if the work is pleasant. 4. At what time in (of) the morn- 
ing did you take your breakfast? 5. I took it at quarter 
of eight. 6. What did you do afterward? 7. I straight- 
ened up (arranged) the drawing-room at the same time 
as the maid washed the dishes. 8. I dusted (polished) 
the furniture, but the maid shook the rugs and swept the 
floor. 9. Who made the beds? 10. I made my bed and 
Mamma made the others. 11. I hung up my dresses but 
Mamma darned my stockings and mended my clothes. 
12. Have you ever left your room topsy-turvy? 13. It 
is always the boys who leave their rooms like that (ga). 
14. My brother slept until nine o'clock. 15. Then he read 
the newspaper until lunch (time). 16. However, he worked 
all the afternoon. 17. I set the table. 18. We ate heartily 
(well). 19. Afterward the maid cleared the table. 20. 
Mamma took a nap after lunch. 21. Sister visited a 
museum with one of her friends. 22. (In) the evening, 
my brother played the violin while I played the piano* 



§§70-71] lesson xxi 79 



LESSON XXI. 

§ 70. Auxiliary Verbs (verbes auxiliares). 1. A large 
majority of French verbs use avoir as auxiliary: 

j'ai parle, I have spoken, I spoke; j'ai fini, I have finished, I 
finished. 

2. But reflexive verbs and some intransitive verbs use 
etre: 

je me suis leve, I have risen, I rose; je suis venu, I have come, I 
came. 

a. As stated by Chardenal, the ten most common in- 
transitive verbs using etre as auxiliary are: aller, to go; 
partir, to depart; sortir, to go out; venir, to come; deve- 
nir, to become; revenir, to come back; arriver, to arrive, 
to happen; entrer, to enter; r ester, to remain; and to?nber, 
to fall. It would be well to add naitre, to be born, and 
mourir, to die. 

§ 71. Agreement of Past Participle. 1. When a verb 
is conjugated with avoir as auxiliary, the past participle 
in compound tenses remains invariable in the masculine 
singular, except when a direct object precedes the verb. 
Then the participle agrees with that object: 

j'ai donne; elles ont donne; (but) Les fleurs que j'ai coupees, 
The flowers which I cut. 

2. When a verb is conjugated with etre as auxiliary, the 
participle, like a predicate adjective, agrees with the 
subject in gender and number : 

je suis alle(e), tu es alle(e), il est alle, elle est allee, nous sommes 
alle(e)s, vous etes alle(e)s, ils sont alles, elles sont allees. 

a. Reflexive verbs, which are always conjugated with 
etre, have the past participle agree with the reflexive ob- 



80 



LESSON XXI 



[§71 



ject or remain invariable in the masculine singular, 
according as that reflexive object is direct or indirect: 

Elles se sont levees, They raised themselves, They rose; (but) 
Elles se sont coupe les doigts, They cut the fingers to themselves, 
They cut their fingers. 

Vocabulary. 



ailleurs (aja:r), adv., elsewhere 

d'ailleurs, besides 

(aller) se coucher (ku$e), to go to 

bed 
aussitot (osito), adv., immedi- 
ately 
avant-hier (avaje:r), adv., day 

before yesterday 
baigner (bene), to bathe 
la benediction (benediksj.5), the 

benediction 
le bord (bo:r), the shore, bank, 

edge 
un cantique (katik), a hymn 
ceux (so), pron., those 
une chanson ($Ss5), a song 
un chapitre (vapitr), a chapter 
choisir ('*wazi:r), to choose 
concourir (kokuri :r) , to contrib- 
ute, compete, work toge'ther 
la consolation (kosolasjo), conso- 
lation 
content (kota), pleased, happy 
corinthien (kore :t j e) , Corinthian 
devoir (davwa:r), to awe; must, 

ought 
Dieu (djo), God 
en avance (ava:s), beforehand 
en retard (ratair), behind hand 
une epitre (epitr), an epistle 
une experience (eksperja:s), an 
experience 



fatiguer (fatige), to tire, fatigue 
le gazon (gazo), the turf, grass 
les gens (5a), m. pi., the people 
juste (syst), adj., adv., just 
le lac (lak), the lake 
un ministre (ministr), a minister 
L'Oraison Dominicale (lorezJ 

dominikal), The Lord's Prayer 
par hazard (pa :razar), by chance 
une partie (parti), a part 
un pasteur (pcsto:r), a pastor 
la pelouse (palu:z [or]plu:z), the 

lawn 
pleuvoir (plavwa:r), to rain 
pleurer (plsre), to weep 
plutot (plyto), adv., rather 
plus tot, sooner 
un preche (pr£:$), a sermon 

(Prot.) 
un sermon (sermo), a sermon 

(Cath.) 
la quete (ke:t), the collection 
raconter (rakote), to relate, 

tell 
se rencontrer (rakotre), to meet 
rentrer (ratre), to reenter, return 
repeter (repete), to repeat 
reposer (rapoze), to rest, repose 
reveiller (reveje), to awaken, 

rouse 
se reveiller, to wake up 
romain (rome), Roman 



§71] LESSON XXI 81 

roman (roma), Romance, Ro- un texte (tekst), a text 

manesque la toilette (twalet), the toilet, 

le service (sends), the service dress 

sur-le-champ (syrte$a), adv., tin tour (tu:r), a turn, a trip 

immediately, at once faire un tour, to take a turn, a 

tandis que (tcidi(s)ka), while walk 



un temple (ta:pl), a temple, 

church (Prot.) 
le temps (tci), the weather, 

time 



tout le monde (tubmJ:d), every- 
body 

un verset (verse), a verse (of the 
Bible) 



EXERCISE XXI. 

Suzanne nous a raconte ses experiences d'hier. Qu'- 
avez-vous fait avant-hier, Germaine? — Avant-hier, di- 
manche, je me suis levee un peu plus tarcl qu'ordinaire- 
ment. Alors je me suis baignee, je "me suis habillee, et 
je suis descendue juste a temps pour le petit dejeuner. 
En quittant la table, j'ai fait un petit tour dans le jardin, 
tandis que ma soeur est allee se vetir. Je me suis coupe 
une belle rose et, la toilette de ma sceur faite, nous 
sommes parties aussitot pour l'eglise (le temple). Nous 
y sommes arrivees un peu en retard, ou peut-etre qu'on 
a commence un peu plus tot. En tout cas nous y 
sommes entrees apres qu'on a chante le premier cantique. 
On a lu un chapitre de la Bible, ensuite on a prie Dieu 
et tout le monde a repete ensemble L'Oraison Dominicale. 
Avant le preche on a fait la quete. Le pasteur a choisi 
comme texte une partie du vingt-huitieme verset du 
huitieme chapitre de Tepitre de Saint Paul aux Romains: 
" Xous savons d'ailleurs que toutes choses concourent au 
bien de ceux qui aiment Dieu." II a parle des tristes 
experiences de la vie, et ses mots ont du porter de la 
consolation aux gens qui ont souffert. Apres la benedic- 
tion tout le monde est sorti de Feglise. Xous sommes 
rentrees chez nous. L'apres-midi nous sommes allees 



82 LESSON XXI [§71 

nous promener au bord du lac. Etant fatiguees, nous 
nous sommes reposees sur un banc qu'on y a mis. Le 
gazon de la pelouse la-bas est, touj ours frais et vert en 
ete et on est bien content d'y rester quelque temps. 
Mais tout a coup il a commence a pleuvoir et nous sommes 
parties sur-le-champ pour la maison. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Germaine and Suzanne went to church together last 
Sunday. ■ 2. They rose an hour later than (on) the other 
days of the week. 3. Then they bathed, dressed, and 
went down to breakfast. 4. After breakfast they carried 
the flowers which a friend gave them to an old lady who 
was ill. 5. They arrived at church a little ahead of time 
(beforehand). 6. The service began just after they en- 
tered. 7. Then prayer was offered. 8. A chapter of the 
Bible was read. 9. The collection was taken up before 
the sermon. 10. The minister chose as text the fourth 
and fifth verses of the thirteenth chapter of the First 
Epistle of St. Paul to the Corinthians. 11. After the last 
hymn the pastor pronounced (gave) the benediction. 12. 
Then all the people went out of the church. 13. We re- 
turned home just in time for lunch. 14. After lunch we 
went to walk with some friends. 15. By chance we met 
on the shore of the lake. 16. Everybody came there to 
walk last Sunday. 17. We rested there (for) some time. 
18. When it began suddenly to rain, we started at once for 
the house. 19. Being very tired, we went to bed early. 
20. We slept well during the night and awoke early this 
morning. 



§§72-74] 



LESSON XXII 



83 



LESSON XXII. 

§ 72. Idiomatic Present. The present indicative is used 
idiomatically in certain phrases to indicate what has been 
and still continues to be: 

Depuis quand etes-vous ici? Since when are you here? How 
long have you been here? — Je suis ici depuis quatre jours. I am 
here since four days. I have been here four days. 

§ 73. Idioms with avoir. The French use avoir with a 
noun in certain idioms where the English use " to be " 
with an adjective: 

J'ai faim =1 have hunger =1 am hungry. 

J'ai soif = I have thirst = I am thirsty. 

J'ai froid =1 have cold = I am cold. 

J'ai chaud =1 have warmth = I am warm. 

J'ai raison =1 have right =1 am right. 

J'ai tort =1 have wrong =1 am wrong. 

J'ai peur =1 have fear =1 am afraid. 

J'ai honte =1 have shame = I am ashamed. 
"'J'ai sommeil=I have sleep =1 am sleepy. 

§ 74. Idioms with faire. The French also use faire in 
certain idioms, as: 

1. In describing the weather: 

Quel temps fait-il? What kind of weather is it? 

II fait bien froid ce matin. It is very cold this morning. 

II fait un temps pluvieux. It is rainy (It makes a rainy time). 

2. In ordering anything to be done: 

Faire venir un medecin=to cause to come (to call) a doctor. 

Faire venir une voiture = to call a carriage. 

Faire faire un costume =to cause to make (to order) a suit. 



Vocabulary. 



a peine (pen), scarcely 

au contraire (kotre:r), on 

contrary 
boueux (buo), muddy, dirty 



the 



briller (brije), to shine, sparkle 
changer ($&3e), to change 
le climat (klima), the climate 
un coup (ku), a blow, stroke, clap 



84 



LESSON XXII 



;74 



couvert (kuve :r) , covered, cloudy 
croire (krwa:r), to believe, think 
croire a, to believe in, expect 
dangereux (dasre), dangerous 
un eclair (ekler), a flash of light- 
ning 
eclairer (eklere), to light up, 

lighten 
l'enfance (dfa:s), childhood 
entendre (ata:dr), to hear 
fort (fo:r), adj., and adv., strong, 

hard 
geler (sale), to freeze 
glisser (glise), to slip, slide 
glissant (glisTi), slippery 
il y a (ilia), ago 

inconstant (ekosta), change- 
able 
lourd (lu:r), heavy, sultry 
mais (me), but; why! 
marcher (mar.$e), to walk, go 
le marcher, the walking 
naturellement (natyrelma), nat- 
urally 
la neige (ne:5), the snow 
neiger (ne^e), to snow 



un orage (ora:.5), a storm, thun- 
derstorm 
par consequent (par koseka), 

consequently 
par fois (parfwa), at times 
un patin (pate), a skate 
patiner (patine), to skate 
le pave (pave), the pavement 
la pluie (plqi), the rain 
pourtant (purtu), however 
remarquer (romarke), to remark, 

notice 
le soleil (solerj), the sun 
se souvenir de (suvni:r), to re- 
member 
suivre (sqirvr), to follow 
tenement (telma), in such a 

manner; so, so much 
tonner (tone), to thunder 
le tonnerre (tone:r), the thunder 
un traineau (treno), a sleigh 
aller en traineau, to go sleigh 

riding 
tremper (trdpe), to drench, soak 
le trottoir (trotwa:r), the side- 
walk 
le vent (va), the wind 



EXERCISE XXII. 

Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui? — II fait un temps su- 
perbe ce matin mais hier comme il a fait mauvais temps! 
II a commence a pleuvoir environ a quatre heures de 
l'apres-midi et il a plu toute la nuit. — Fait-il tres froid 
ici en hiver? — Quelquefois il fait bien froid, mais vraiment 
j'aime le temps froid; on se sent mieux et on peut mieux 
travailler. Ce que je n'aime pas du tout, pourtant, c'est 
le vent. Surtout au mois de mars, il fait tellement du 
vent parfois, qu'on peut a peine marcher dans les rues. — 



§74] LESSON XXII 85 

Avez-vous froid maintenant, Mademoiselle? — Non, Ma- 
dame, je vous remercie. II fait chaud dans cette salle et 
j'ai assez chaud maintenant, mais j'ai eu froid quand je 
suis entree. — Dans notre climat le temps est tres incon- 
stant; un jour il fait bien chaud et le jour suivant il fait 
froid. — Oui, regardez comme il commence deja a neiger! 
Quand il tombe de la neige ou de la pluie et quand en 
meme temps il gele, il fait bien glissant sur les trottoirs 
et sur le pave. — Savez-vous patiner? — Oh oui, j'ai des 
patins depuis mon enfance et je patine chaque hiver. 
J'aime aussi une promenade en traineau. Mais comme 
le temps change ! II a fait du soleil il y a un instant, mais 
maintenant le soleil ne donne (ne brille) plus, il fait un 
temps couvert. II me semble que le temps est a la pluie 
(that it looks like rain). — Aimez-vous a sortir par la 
pluie? — Mais non, quand il pleut, il fait bien boueux 
dans les rues et naturellement il fait mauvais marcher. 
Hier soir j'ai ete trempee, car il a plu si fort, lorsque je 
suis sortie. Avez-vous remarque comme il a tonne et 
eclaire? — Non, j'ai eu sommeil et par consequent je suis 
allee me coucher de bonne heure. J'ai tres bien dormi 
pendant la nuit. Cependant, je me souviens d'avoir 
entendu une fois un coup de tonnerre. — Avez-vous peur 
des eclairs? — Peut-etre que j'ai tort d'avoir peur et vrai- 
ment j'ai honte de le dire, mais je n'aime pas voir les 
eclairs. — Au contraire, vous avez tout a fait raison, parce 
que les eclairs sont dangereux. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. How beautiful it is this morning! 2. It rained dur- 
ing the night but now the sky is blue. 3. Is it usually 
cold here in winter? 4. It isn't very cold but it snows 
often. 5. Do you like to go sleigh riding? 6. Yes, but 



86 LESSON XXIII [§75 

I like skating better. 7. That does me good (Ca me fait 
dubien). 8. I have skated every winter for years. 9. 
When it rains and when it freezes at the same time, it is 
very slippery. 10. Is it windy where you live? 11. Yes, 
at times it is so windy that one can scarcely walk in the 
streets. 12. Are you afraid of the wind? 13. Yes, when 
the wind is very strong, I am afraid of it. 14. It seems to 
me that we have a good deal (much) of cold weather this 
year. 15. You are right, I think. 16. But surely it is 
warm enough to-day. 17. It is sultry rather than warm. 
18. One does not feel well such weather (par un temps 
comme ga). 19. One is warm and exhausted (on n'en 
pent plus). 20. It looks like rain. 21. We may expect a 
thunder-shower presently. 



LESSON XXIII. 

§ 75. Imperfect Indicative (Pimparfait de Pindicatif). 
As its name implies, the imperfect indicative is used to 
express an incomplete, a continued, or an accustomed past 
action: 

Je lisais quand vous etes entree I was reading when you came in. 

The endings of this tense are the same for every verb 
in the French language, namely, ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, 
aient. 

dormer . finir recevoir vendre 

je donn ais je fin iss* ais je recev ais je vend ais 

tu donn ais tu fin iss ais tu recev ais tu vend ais 

il donn ait il fin iss ait il recev ait il vend ait 

nous donn ions nous fin iss ions nous recev ions nous vend ions 

vous donn iez vous fin iss iez vous recev iez vous vend iez 
ils donn aient ils fin iss aient ils recev aient ils rend aient 



* As in the plural of the present indicative, iss is inserted in the 
regular verbs in ir between the stem and the endings. 



§75] 



LESSON XXIII 



87 



Vocabulary. 



Page (0:5), m., the age 
allumer (alyme), to kindle, light 
Pardeur (ardorr), f., ardor, eager- 
ness 
une aventure (avcity:r), an ad- 
venture 
un bibelot (biblo), a trinket 
bizarre (biza:r), odd, strange . 
une bougie (bu5i), a candle 
un cadeau (kado), a present 
causer (koze), to chat, talk; to 

cause 
une centaine (sdten), a hundred 
chacun (\aka), each one 
la cheminee (famine), the chim- 
ney ; fireplace ; mantel piece 
un conte (k5:t), a story, tale 
decouvrir (dekuvri:r), to dis- 
cover, solve 
demain (dame), adv., to-morrow 
deviner (davine), to guess 
distribuer (distribqe), to distrib- 
ute 
le dos (do), the back 
une enigme (enigm), an enigma 
envelopper (civlope), to wrap up 
un evenement (evenma), an 

event 
une fee (fe), a fairy 
ficeler (fisle), to tie up (with 

string) 
une ficelle (fissl), a string 
une flute (flyt), a flute 
un gateau (gato), a cake 
une grand'mere (grame:r), a 

grandmother 
un grand pere (gra pe:r), a grand 
father 



une histoire (istwa:r), a history, 
story 

illuminer (ilymine), to illumi- 
nate 

une image (ima:5), an image, 
picture 

la joie (5wa), joy 

joyeux (swajo), merry, joyful 

un jouet (3W8), a toy 

le lendemain (lcidme), the day 
after 

un lieu (ljo), a place 

avoir lieu, to take place 

une machine a coudre (ma\lna- 
kudr), a sewing machine 

une machine a ecrire, a type- 
writer 

le Noel (no el), Christmas 

du papier de soie, tissue paper 

un paquet (pake), a package 

un pays (pei), a country 

une poupee (pupe), a doll 

rire (ri:r), to laugh 

un sandwich (sddwit$), a sand- 
wich 

la sante (sate), the health 

sauter (sote), to jump 

la soie (swa), silk 

souhaiter (swete), to wish 

le souper (supe), supper 

la Suisse (sqis), Switzerland 

surprendre (syrpra:dr), to sur- 
prise 

une tartine de beurre (tartin da 
bo:r), a slice of bread and 
butter 

un traineau d' enfant, a sled 

la veille (ve:j), the eve, day be- 
fore 



88 LESSON XXIII [§75 

EXERCISE XXIII. 

C'etait la veille de Noel et nous etions chez notre 
grand'mere en Suisse, ou nous passions l'hiver. Per- 
sonne n'etait dans les eglises ce soir-la, mais dans chaque 
maison du pays il y avait un arbre de Noel. Je me 
souviens si bien de l'arbre chez grand'mere. II brillait 
avec une centaine de petites bougies, de bibelots, et de 
jouets de toutes sortes. Sous l'arbre se trouvaient les 
cadeaux, chacun bien enveloppe dans un morceau de 
papier de soie et flcele d'un ruban rouge. Je regardais 
ces paquets avec ardeur; je me demandais s'il y en avait 
pour moi; je ne pouvais guere attendre pour le savoir. 

Mais nous commencions avec le souper de Noel. Pen- 
dant que les bougies de l'arbre illuminaient la salle a 
manger, nous mangions des tartines de beurre, des sand- 
wiches, des gateaux, et nous buvions du cafe. Le repas 
fini, nous chantions des chansons de Noel et enfin on a 
distribue les cadeaux. Ah comme j'etais content! Je 
riais, je battais des mains, je sautais de joie. II me 
semblait bizarre comment Saint Nicolas pouvait savoir 
ce que j'aimais, mais tout de meme il devinait bien juste. 
Une poupee pour ma sceur; une flute, un livre d'images, 
un traineau d'enfant pour moi; meme une machine a 
coudre pour Maman — comment Saint Nicolas, a-t-il pu 
descendre par la cheminee avec tant de choses sur son dos? 
C'etait une enigme que je ne pouvais pas decouvrir a cet 
age-la. 

Nous causions; grandpere nous racontait des contes de 
fees et des histoires d'aventures que son grandpere lui 
avait racontees (had told), lorsqu'il etait petit. Enfin 
ayant sommeil, nous sommes alles nous coucher. Mais 
c'etaient les enfants qui se levaient les premiers le lende- 



§76] LESSON XXIV 89 

main, parce que nous voulions surprendre les autres de la 
famille avec un " Je vous souhaite un joyeux Noel." 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. We were at Grandma's Christmas Eve. 2. Grandma 
lived in Switzerland. 3. We were passing some time there. 
4. All the family stayed at the house that evening. 5. 
There was a beautiful Christmas tree in the dining-room. 
6. It was covered with (de) toys, trinkets, and little can- 
dles. 7. These candles lighted the whole room. 8. The 
presents were under the tree. 9. Each package was 
wrapped in tissue paper. 10. I could not see the names 
on the packages. 11. But I could hardly wait to know if 
there was any for me. 12. I kept looking at them with 
eagerness. 13. We ate the Christmas supper first. 14. We 
began with bread and butter but afterward we had cakes 
and coffee. 15. We sang Christmas songs and told Christ- 
mas stories until midnight. 16. How happy we were! 
17. How did Santa Claus know just what we liked? 18. 
And how was he able to come down (par) the chimney 
with a sled on his back? 19. But we were sleepy and went 
to bed. 20. The next morning we rose early and went to 
Mamma's room to (pour) wish her a Merry Christmas. 
21. A Happy New Year (une heureuse annee) and good 
health to all. 



LESSON XXIV. 

§ 76. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. A disjunctive 
pronoun is one " disjoined," separated from the verb, 
and may be used in any of the following ways: 



90 lesson xxiv [§§77-78 

1. Alone or in an emphatic way: 

Qui est la? Moi. Who is there? I. 

Moi, je n'aime pas ce livre. As for me, I do not like this book. 

Note. — To give greater force to an expression, the adjective 
meme (self) may be added to a disjunctive pronoun: Je le fais 
moi-meme. I do it myself. 

2. After a preposition: 

Ma sceur est avec moi. My sister is with me. 

3. In predication with etre (to be) after ce (it) : 
C'est moi. It is I. 

4. In a compound subject or object: 

Son frere et lui sont malades. His brother and he are sick. 

Remark. — Often the compound subject or object is summed up 
by a single conjunctive pronoun, especially when the component 
parts are unlike in person: Vous et moi (nous) so mines ici. You 
and I are here. 

§ 77. The disjunctive pronouns are: 
moi, first person singular 
toi, second person singular 
elle, third person singular feminine 
lui, third person singular masculine 
soi, third person singular (see below) 
nous, first person plural 
vous, second person singular or plural 
elles, third person plural feminine 
eux, third person plural masculine 

§ 78. Soi is used in place of lui or elle: 

1. After an indefinite pronoun: 

On ne doit jamais parler de soi. One ought never to speak of 
himself. 

. 2. After an impersonal verb or an infinitive: 
II faut penser a soi. It is necessary to think of oneself. 
Etre toujours content de soi est une sottise. To be always satis- 
fied with oneself is a folly. 



)78] 



LESSON XXIV 



91 



3. With the name of a thing or quality (neuter noun) 
in the singular: 

Cette faute entraine apres soi beaucoup de regrets. This fault 
draws after it many regrets. 

If the noun is in the plural soi cannot be used. 
Ces fautes entrainent apres elles beaucoup de regrets. 

Remark. — Soi is used sometimes even with a definite subject 
when one wishes to avoid equivocation: L'avare qui a un fils 
prodigue n'amasse ni pour soi ni pour lui, The miser who has a 
prodigal son hoards up neither for himself nor for him (the son). 



Vocabulary. 



un achat* (a$a) \ a 

une emplette (aplet) j purchase 
l'argent (arsa), m., money, sil- 
ver 
arreter (arete), to stop 
attrayant (atreja), attractive 
une banque (ba:k), a bank 
un banquier (bakje), a banker 
un bijou (bi-u), a jewel 
un bijoutier (bisutje), a jeweler 
une broche (bro$), a brooch 
une chaine (Se:n), a chain 
un cheque (^ek), a check 
un chevreau ($avro), a kid 

un coiffeur (kwafa:r) ] a hair - 

un barbier (barbje) j a barber 

un collier (kolje), a necklace 
depenser (depose), to spend 
un diamant (djama), a diamond 
emprunter (aprate), to borrow 
etant (eta), (pres. part, of etre), 

being 
un gantier (gatje), a glover 



un grenat (gran a), a garnet 

un hotel (otel), a hotel; man- 
sion. 

une lorgnette (lor net), (or) des 
jumelles (3ymel), f., an opera 
glass 

un lorgnon (lor no), (or) un 
pince nez (pesne), eye 
glasses 

des lunettes (lynet), f., spec- 
tacles 

obliger (oblise), to oblige 

un opticien (optisje), an opti- 
cian 

l'or (o:r), m., gold 

une paire (pe:r), a pair 

une perle (perl), a pearl 

la pointure (pwetu:r), the size (of 
gloves or shoes) 

pret (pre), ready 

preter (prete), to lend 

raser (raze), to shave 

un rubis (rybi), a ruby 

tous les deux, both 



* un achat is usually a larger purchase than une emplette. 



92 LESSON XXIV [§78 



tous les trois, all three 

la vitrine (vitrin), the shop win- 
dow, show case 

aller faire des emplettes, to go 
shopping 

toucher de l'argent, to get some 
money 



toucher de l'argent contre un 
cheque, (or) faire changer un 
cheque, to get a check cashed 
se mettre en route, to start out 
Je les ai paye(e)s un dollar la. 
paire, I paid a dollar a pair for 
them 



EXERCISE XXIV. 

Ma mere, mon frere, et moi, nous sommes arrives en 
ville hier soir. Nous sommes restes dans un hotel pen- 
dant la nuit et aujourd'hui nous sommes alles tous les 
trois faire des emplettes. D'abord moi, je suis alle a une 
banque pour toucher de l'argent. On aime a avoir de 
son argent a soi quand on a des achats a faire, sans etre 
oblige d'en emprunter des autres. Quand je suis parti 
pour la banque, mon frere est entre chez un coiffeur (un 
barbier) pour se faire raser. Tout le monde pret, nous 
nous sommes mis en route. Nous nous sommes arretes 
quelques instants devant la vitrine d'un bijoutier, pour 
y regarder les jolis bijoux. Les diamants, les rubis, les 
grenats, les colliers de perles*, les broches, les montres en 
or avec leurs chaines — nous trouvions tout tres attrayant. 
Le cabinet d'un opticien etant a cote, nous y sommes 
entres. Moi, je prefere un lorgnon (un pince-nez) mais 
Maman porte toujours des lunettes, et elle a fait changer 
ses lunettes. Mon frere a achete une lorgnette (des 
jumelles) pour lui-meme. En sortant de chez l'opticien, 
nous sommes alles chez un gantier pour acheter des 
gants. Naturellement la premiere question qu'il nous a 
faite a ete, " Quelle pointure portez-voiis? " Moi j'ai 
achete deux paires de gants de chevreau et je les ai 
payees cinq francs vingt sous la paire. 



§79] LESSON XXV 93 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. My mother and brother came with me to the city 
last night. 2. I went to the bank without them this 
morning. 3. One likes to spend his own (d soi) money. 
4. We had some purchases to make for ourselves. 5. /, I 
do not like to borrow money. 6. Consequently I went to 
the bank to get a check cashed. 7. My brother went to 
get shaved. 8. I did not go with him. 9. Finally every- 
body started out shopping. 10. We found the show- 
window of a jeweler very attractive. 11. We stopped 
there some time to look at the magnificent diamonds. 
12. My brother has a gold watch and chain of his own 
(d lui-meme). 13. It is he who has bought the pearl 
necklace for my sister. 14. Is there anyone of your 
family who wears eye-glasses? 15. Yes, it is I. 16. 
Then is it your mother who wears spectacles? 17. Yes, 
it is she. 18. Mamma had her spectacles changed to- 
day. 19. From the optician's (de chez Vo-pticien) we 
went to the glover's. 20. Guess how much we paid a 
(the) pair for gloves. 21. Oh, you paid a dollar a pair. 
22. What size do you wear? 23. I wear number six and 
a half. 

LESSON XXV. 

§ 79. Demonstrative Pronouns (les pronoms demon- 
stratifs). 1. The demonstrative pronoun "this one," 
" that one," " the one " is declined as follows: 

Singular. 
Masculine Feminine 

ce, celui celle 

Plural. 
ceux celles 



94 LESSON XXV [§79 

2. Ce is considered by some authorities as neuter, 
even though there are ordinarily but two genders in 
French. It is invariable and may take the place of a 
masculine or feminine, singular or plural noun, and with 
different context may be translated " this," " these," 
" that," " those," " he," " she," " it " or " they ": 

Qui est ce garcon? C^'est mon frere. 

Qui est cette fille? C^'est ma soeur. 

Qui sont ces hommes? Ce sont Messieurs X et Y. 

Qu'est-ce que c/'est? C^'est le livre. 

Note a.—Ce, the demonstrative pronoun, must not be 
confused with ce, the demonstrative adjective (§ 25). 

CY'est mon chapeau. This is my hat (demons, pron.). 
Ce chapeau est noir. This hat is black (demons, adj.). 

3. As in the case of the demonstrative adjective, ci 
and la. are resorted to in order to distinguish " this One " 
from " that one," but are attached directly to the pro- 
nouns : 

Singular. Plural. 

" This one " " That one " " These " " Those " 

Masculine celui-ci celui-la ceux-ci ceux-la 

Feminine celle-ci celle-la celles-ci celles-la 

Neuter ceci eela (ca) 

4. Celui is usually followed by a relative clause or by 
a de phrase, since a demonstrative pronoun should not 
be followed directly by an adjective or by a participle: 

Celui que nous aimions est mort. He whom we loved is dead. 
Ma cravate est noire, celle de mon frere est rouge. My tie is black, 
the one of my brother is red. 

Ceux qui cherchent trouvent. Those who seek find. 

5. Celui-ci. Since celui-ci and celui-la distinguish 



§79] 



LESSON XXV 



95 



" this one " from " that one," they usually refer to 
persons or to things mentioned before: 

J'ai deux montres; celle-ci est en argent, cella-la en or. I have 
two watches, this one is (made) of silver, that one of gold. 

Note a. — Celui-ci is often translated " the latter," celui- 
la " the former ": 

Demosthene et Cioeron etaient deux grands orateurs; celui-la 
etait Grec, celui-ci Romain. Demosthenes and Cicero were two 
great orators; the former was Greek, the latter Roman. 

6. Ceci and cela (contracted in familiar language to 
ga) are ordinarily used to denote something pointed out 
or indicated but not named: 

Je n'aime pas cela (or ca). I don't like that. 

Aimez-vous ceci? Do you like this? 

Vocabulary. 



cheap 



une agrafe et porte (agraf), a j 

hook and eye 
ayant (eja), pres. part, of avoir, 

having 
bon marche (bo mar^e) \ 
a bas prix / 

une botte (bot), a (man's) boot 
une bottine (botin), lady's boot, 

high shoe 
une boucle (bukl), a buckle 
une boutique (but ; k), a shop 
un bouton (but 5), a button 
une brosse a cheveux, a hair 

brush 
une brosse a dents, a tooth 

brush 
une brosse a habits (abi:), a 

clothes brush 
une ceinture (sety:r), a belt 
la chaussure 0~osy:r), footwear 
un chef ($ef), a chief, head 



un chef de rayon (rejo), a floor- 
walker, head of department 

cher ($e:r), dear 

le cirage (sira:3), the blacking 

les ciseaux (sizo), m. pi., scissors 

uncol(kol) 1 

un faux-col J 

une commission (komisjo), an 
errand 

un comptoir (kot wa :r) , a counter 

un cordonnier (kordonje), a shoe- 
maker 

un crochet (kro^e), a hook 

le cuir (kxri:r), leather 

un cure-dent (kyrda), a tooth- 
pick 

la dentelle (datel), the lace 

, \ besides 
en plus j 

durer (dyre), to last 

une echarpe (e^arp), a scarf 



96 



LESSON XXV 



79 



un employe (dplwaje), a clerk, 
employee 

une epingle a cheveux, a hair pin 

une eponge (ep5:3), a sponge 

fin (fe), adj., fine 

un foulard (fula:r), a silk hand- 
kerchief 

fournir (furnirr), to furnish 

une guetre (ge:tr), a gaiter 

un lacet (lase) . 

, ,. a shoe 

un cordon de Soulier } , . 

(korcte) J Strmg 

la lingerie (legri), linen goods 
un magasin (magaze), a store 
un magasin de nouveautes (nu- 

vote), a dry goods store 
une manche (ma: 5), a sleeve 
une manchette (ma$et), a cuff 
un manchon (md$5), a muff 
un marchand (mar$a), a mer- 
chant 
la mercerie (mersori), notions 
montant (mota), adj., high- 
necked, " stand up " 



monter a cheval, to ride horse- 
back 

une ombrelle (obrel), a fancy 
(lace) parasol 

un parasol (parasol), a sun um- 
brella 

une pantourle (patufl), a slipper 

la peau (po), the skin 

une pelote a epingles (plot), a 
pin cushion 

poli (poli), adj., polite 

la poudre dentifrice (pudr dciti- 
fris), tooth powder 

rabattu (rabaty), turn-down 

un rayon (rejo), a department 
(of store) ; a shelf 

un Soulier (sulje), a (low) shoe 

utile (ytil), adj., useful 

un voile (vwal), a long veil 

une voilette (vwalet), a little 
veil 

je veux dire, I wish to say, I 
mean 



EXERCISE XXV. 

N'ayant pas fait toutes*nos commissions hier, nous 
sommes sortis encore aujourd'hui. D'abord nous som- 
mes entres chez un cordonnier pour chercher des chaus- 
sures. Celle que ma mere porte ce sont des bottines; 
celle de mon frere, des souliers. Moi, j'ai achete une 
paire de bottes, parceque j'aime a monter a cheval. Le 
cuir en doit durer longtemps, parceque c'est de la peau 
de veau. En plus nous nous sommes fourni des guetres, 
des pantouffles, des lacets, des crochet a boutons, et du 
cirage. — De chez le marchand de chaussures, nous som- 
mes alles a un grand magasin de nouveautes, celui de 



§79] LESSON XXV 97 

Monsieur Chauchard. Un chef de rayon nous a rencontre 
pres de la porte pour nous donner des renseignements. 
Ma mere et mon frere sont alles au rayon de lingerie; 
celui-ci pour acheter des manchettes et des faux-cols, 
celle-la des mouchoirs. II a trouve les cols montants bon 
marche, mais il me semble qu'il a paye cher les cols 
rabattus. Tous les employes dans ce magasin sont bien 
polis, surtout celui qui nous a montre les dentelles et les 
voiles. Ma mere a choisi plusieurs violettes et au comp- 
toir a cote, elle a achete une ombrelle et un parasol. 
En passant devant le rayon des soies, nous avons choisi 
une jolie echarpe et un foulard comme cadeaux, celle-la 
pour ma sceur, celui-ci pour mon pere. A la mercerie 
nous avons vu tant de petites choses utiles, des bobines 
de soie, des epingles a cheveux, des ciseaux, des brosses a 
habits, des brosses a dents avec de la poudre dentifrice, 
des cure-dents, des agrafes et des portes, des boucles, des 
ceintures, des eponges, des pelotes a epingles et mille 
autres choses. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. To-day we went to the shoemaker's. 2. We supplied 
ourselves with (des) foot wear. 3. That of my mother 
was cheaper than that of my brother. 4. She wears low 
shoes but he {lid) high shoes. 5. A man wears boots 
when he rides horseback. 6. Kid is a fine leather and it 
wears (lasts) quite a long time. 7. My brother bought 
some blacking, my mother some shoestrings and I gaiters. 
8. There is a large dry goods store, that of Mr. Chauchard, 
near the shoe store. 9. My brother and mother left me, 
the former to go to the linen department, the latter to 
the lace counter. 10. Mother paid too much (dear) for a 
lace parasol, but she bought some little veils very cheap. 



98 



LESSON XXVI 



$0 



11. My brother looked for cuffs and turn-down collars. 

12. By chance, we all three met in the same department, 
that of silks. 13. We selected a pretty silk handkerchief 
and a scarf, the former as present for my father, the latter 
for my sister. 14. One finds so many useful little things 
at the notion counter. 15. I like this very much but I 
do not like that at all. 16. Here are hair brushes, combs, 
pincushions, and all that which (ce que) one can wish. 

17. Do you not think that all the employees of this store 
are polite, especially the one who gave us information? 

18. Yes, but I like better those whom we found at the 
shoe-merchant's. 19. Have we not finished all out er- 
rands now, I mean those which we had at the dry-goods 
store? 20. I think so (le). 21. Then let us go. 



LESSON XXVI. 

§ 80. Possessive Pronouns (les pronoms possessifs). 
The possessive pronouns are: 







Singular. 


Plural. 








Mas. 


Fern. 


Mas. 


Fern. 




I 


pers. 


: le mien 


la mienne 


les miens 


les miennes, 


mine 
/ thine 
1 yours 
I his 
\ hers 


II 


a 


: le tien 


la tienne 


les tiens 


les tiennes 


II 


a 


: le sien 


la sienne 


les siens 


les siennes 


I 


" 


: le notre 


la notre 


les notres 


les notres 


ours 


II 


u 


: le votre 


la votre 


les votres 


les votres 


yours 


II 


(i 


: le siens 


la sienne 


les siens 


les siennes 


theirs 



Note a. — As in the case of the personal pronouns and 
possessive adjectives, the possessive pronouns of the 
second person plural are ordinarily used in the singular 
as well. 

Note b. — After etre, simple ownership is frequently ex- 



§80] 



LESSON XXVI 



99 



pressed by a with a disjunctive personal pronoun: Le 
livre est a moi, The cook is mine. But a distinction in 
ownership is brought out more emphatically by the 
possessive pronouns: Ce livre-ci est le mien, celui-la est 
le votre, This book is mine, that is yours. 

Vocabulary. 



suitable 



abimer (abime), to spoil, soil 

admirer (admire), to admire 

approprie . , 

f . N appropriate 

(apropne) 

convenable 

(kovenabl) 
un chapeau de feutre (i0:tr), a 

felt hat 
un chapeau de paille (pa:j), a 

straw hat 
un chapeau haut de forme 

(odoform), a tall (silk) hat 
un chapelier ($apalje), a hatter 
clair (kle:r), light (tint of color) 
concerner (koserne), to concern 
la consideration (kosiderctsjo), 

the consideration 
couter (kute), to cost 
le devant, the front 
le derriere, the back 
dur (dy:r), stiff, hard 
envoyer (avwsje), to send 
etonner (etone), to astonish 
fonce (fose), dark (hue of color) ■ 
une idee (ide), an idea 



s'interesser (eterese), to be in- 
terested 
je m'y interesse, I am interested 

in it 
l'intention (etasjo), the intention 
la mode (mod), the style, the 

fashion 
a la mode, in style 
passe de mode, out of style 
une modiste (modist), a milliner 
mou (*mol), molle (mu, moi), 

soft 
Popera (opera), the opera 
preferer (prefere), to prefer 
le prix (pri), the price 
quant a (kata), as for 
le resultat (rezylta), the result 
sans doute (scidut), without 

doubt, of course 
tacher (ta^e), to stain, spot 
tacher (ta$e), to try 
le theatre (teo:tr), the theater 
Cela (or ce) m'est egal, That is 

all the same to me 
C'est a dire, That is to say 
en attendant, In the meanwhile 



EXERCISE XXVI. 



Mon frere et moi avons ete chez le chapelier ce matin 
et voila le resultat, deux beaux chapeaux neufs, un cha- 



Before a masculine noun beginning with a vowel or silent h. 



100 LESSON XXVI [§80 

peau de feutre et un chapeau cle paille; celui-ci est le 
sien, celui-la le mien. — J'admire le votre beaucoup. C'est 
un feutre mou, n'est-ce pas? — Oui. Comment le trouvez- 
vous quant a sa couleur? — Oh j'aime bien un gris fonce; 
ga ne tache pas, ga n'abime pas facilement, et de plus 
c'est tout a la mode en ce moment. Mais n'avez-vous 
pas achete un chapeau haut de forme? — Bien sur, je l'ai 
fait envoyer a Fhotel et il n'est pas encore arrive, mais 
j'ai Pintention de le porter a l'opera ce soir. 

En attendant, ce matin apres que mon frere et moi 
sommes sortis, ma mere est entree chez une modiste. — • 
Alors ce joli chapeau de dentelle, de ruban, et de plumes 
est a votre mere? — Oui, c'est a elle. Devinez, quel en 
est le prix? — Oh je n'en sais rien, je n'ai jamais la moin- 
dre idee de combien coutent les toilettes des dames. 
Mais cela m'est egal, si je ne suis pas oblige de les payer. 
— Vous m'etonnez vraiment, car moi je m'y interesse 
beaucoup. Sans doute vous n'allez jamais avec votre 
mere chez la modiste, mais nous y allons avec la notre 
sou vent. Avez-vous une mere comme la mienne? Toutes 
les meres ? je crois, s'interessent a tout ce qui concernent 
les leurs (c'est a dire leurs families) et nous leur devons la 
meme consideration. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Here are two hats; that one is yours, this is mine. 
2. Yours is a felt hat, mine is (of) straw. 3. I like yours 
better than my brother's. 4. He also has a new felt hat, 
but his is brown. 5. I prefer yours as to its shape and as 
to its color. 6. Yours is a soft felt and (of a) light gray, 
his is a stiff hat and dark brown. 7. Yours is more suit- 
able for spring, his for fall and winter. 8. His neither 
-pots nor soils easily 9. (The) light gray, however, is 



§§81-83] LESSON XXVII 101 

more in style just now. 10. I bought a silk (high) hat 
last night. 11. I haven't it yet because I ordered it sent 
home. 12. I want it to wear to the theater this evening. 

13. Sister has a fine new hat of ribbon, lace and feathers. 

14. Hers has a large buckle on the front. 15. Ladies' hats 
always cost more (dear) than those of men, yet (they) 
do not last so long. 16. But the style changes, and natu- 
rally a lady cannot wear a hat out of style. 17. Are you 
much interested in the (subject of) style? 18. Why yes, 
of course. 



LESSON XXVII. 

§ 81. Relative Pronouns (les pronoms relatifs). The 
relative pronouns are qui, que, quoi, dont, which are all 
indeclinable, and lequel, which is made up of le-\-quel 
and declined as follows: 

Singular. Plural. 

Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. 

lequel laquelle lesquels lesquelles 

(de+le) duquel de laquelle (de+les) desquels desquelles 

(a+le) auquel a laquelle (a+les) auxquels auxquelles 

§ 82. Agreement. A relative pronoun, whether variable 
or invariable, is of the same gender, number, and person 
as its antecedent. 

§ 83. Use of the Relative Pronouns. 

1 . Qui as a relative pronoun is ordinarily used as sub- 
ject, que as direct object, both referring to persons, to 
animals, or to things: 

L'enfant qui est la. The child who is there. 

Le chien qui aboie. The dog which is barking. 

La cruche qui est cassee. The pitcher which is broken. 



102 LESSON XXVII [83§ 

L'enfant que je loue. The child whom I praise. 
Le chien que vous voyez. The dog which you see. 
La plume que vous avez. The pen which you have. 

2. Qui may also be used after a preposition, but then 
it refers only to persons or to things personified : 

Le monsieur avec qui vous voyagez. The gentleman with whom 
you are travelling. 

La dame a qui vous donnez le livre. The lady to whom you are 
giving the book. 

3. Quoi (which, what) refers only to things (Eng. 
neuter). It is generally used after a preposition and 
with a vague or indefinite antecedent, sometimes ex- 
pressed, sometimes understood: 

Ce a quoi nous pensons. That of which we are thinking. 
Dites moi en quoi je peux vous servir. Tel me in what I can 
serve you. 

4. Dont (of whom, of which, of what) is equivalent to 
the genitive case of the Latin and may be used in place 
of de qui, de quoi, duquel, etc., applying to persons, to 
animals, or to things. 

Les soldats dont on cite les noms. The soldiers of whom one 
is giving the names. 

Les choses dont nous parlons. The things of which we are 
speaking. 

Note. — Dont cannot be use'd after a noun which is preceded by a 
preposition. In such a case, one must use de qui or duquel, etc.: 
C'est une entreprise au succes de laquelle (not don!) je ne puis 
esperer. It is an enterprise in the success of which I cannot hope. 

5. Lequel, laquelle, etc., may refer to persons, to ani- 
mals, or to things. Since qui, que, and dont are invariable 
and either masculine or feminine, singular or plural, it 
frequently becomes necessary to use lequel for the sake 
of clearness. Thus to avoid the ambiguity in the sen- 
tence " La mere de mon ami a qui je parlais " (The 



583] 



LESSON XXVII 



103 



mother of my friend to whom I was speaking), we can 
use a laquelle if the mother is referred to, auquel if the 
friend. 

6. Ou. The French consider as a relative pronoun the 
adverb ou, which serves to indicate place and time. It 
refers only to things and may be preceded by the prepo- 
sitions par (by, through), de (from), jusque (to, until). 

Le but oil je tends. The goal to which I am tending. 

Le pays d'oii je viens. The country from which I come. 

Les villes / or oil il passe. The cities through which he passes. 

Remark. — The relative pronoun, often omitted in English, is 
never omitted in French: Le preche que nous avons entendu di- 
manche. The sermon we heard Sunday. 

Vocabulary. 



adapter (adapte), to adapt. 

ainsi (esi), so, thus 

apparaitre (apare:tr), pp. ap- 
paru, to appear 

un appartement (apartomd), a 
flat, suite of rooms, apartment 

apprendre (apra:dr), to learn 

appendre par cceur (ko:r), to 
learn by heart 

un ascenseur (ascise:r), an ele- 
vator 

une baignoire (benwa:r), a bath- 
tub 

le besoin (bezwe), the need 

une bibliotheque (bibliotek), a 
library 

un calorifere (kalorifeir), a fur- 
nace 

un calorifere a vapeur (vaparr), a 
boiler 

chauffer (Sofe), to heat 



le chauffage ($ofa:3), the heat- 
ing, fuel 
le chauffage a vapeur, steam 

heat 
le chauffage a l'eau chaude, hot 

water heating 
un citadin (sitade), a resident of 

a city 
composer (kopoze), to compose 
compter (kote), to count 
un ( concierge (kosjers), a jani- 
une \ tor 

consentir (kosati:r), to consent 
decider (deside), to decide 
j'ai decide de J I have de- 

je me suis decide a \ cided 
demenager (demenase), to move 

(out) 
desirer (dezire), to desire 
detailler (detaje), to relate mi- 
nutely, detail, retail 



104 



LESSON XXVII 



§83 



une devise (deviz), a motto 
devouer (devue), to devote 
s'emmenager (amenase), to 

move into 
enchanter (a$ate), to delight 
un escaiier (eskalje), a staircase 
fermer (fsrme), to close 
un four (f u :r) , an oven 
un fourneau (furno), a range, 

cook stove 
frapp er (frape), to rap, strike 
installer (estale), to install, put 

in 
louer (lwe), to rent; to praise 
moderne (modern), modern 
ouvrir (uvri:r), to open 
une piece (pjes), a room 



un proprietaire (propriete:r), an 

owner, proprietor 
un quartier (kartje), a quarter, 

part 
rarement (rarma), rarely 
une reclame (rekla:m), an adver- 
tisement 
repondre (rep5:dr), to reply 
le rez-de-chaussee (red$ose), the 

ground floor 
une salle de bains (be), a bath 

room 
sonner (sone), to ring, sound 
le systeme (sisterm), the system 
un tramway (tramwe), a street 

car 
vivre (pres. part., vivant; pp., 

vecu), to live 



EXERCISE XXVII. 

Mon pere, qui est en ville depuis quelques semaines, 
aime tellement la vie de citadin qu'il a decide de quitter 
la campagne, ou se trouve sa ferme et de louer un ap- 
partement ici. Nous avons lu dans le journal, que j'ai 
achete ce matin, une reclame d'un appartement, qui est 
dans un bon quartier, mais dont nous avons desire des 
renseignements plus detailles. Alors mon pere a pris le 
tramway qui passe par la, et il est alle voir l'apparte- 
ment. En sonnant, un jeune gargon a apparu a la porte 
auquel mon pere a dit, " Est-ce que je puis parler a la 
concierge? " " Oui, Monsieur, c'est ma mere que vous 
cherchez,' ; a repondu le gargon. " Entrez, je vous prie." 
— -Mon pere est entre au rez-de-chaussee ou demeurait la 
famille de la concierge. — " Bon jour, Madame, j'ai lu 
dans le journal que vous avez un appartement a louer 
et je viens le voir." — " C'est vrai, Monsieur, nous en 



§83] LESSON XXVII 105 

avons un, tres convenable. Voulez-vous monter l'escalier 
par ici pour le visiter? " — " A quel etage est-il, Ma- 
dame? "— " Au cinquieme, Monsieur." — " Et vous n'avez 
pas d'ascenseur dans la maison? " — " Non, dans cette 
ville on ne trouve que tres rarement des ascenseurs." — 
" Dites-moi, s'il vous plait, de quoi se compose cet ap- 
partement." — " II se compose de huit pieces; un salon, 
une bibliotheque, une salle a manger, une cuisine, et 
quatre chambres a coucher, sans compter la salle de 
bains, qui a une baignoire tout a fait moderne." — " Com- 
ment chauffe-t-on la maison?" — II y a une cheminee dans 
chaque piece et un fourneau dans la cuisine, mais le 
proprietaire a l'intention d'installer le system de chauf- 
fage a vapeur." — " Je suis enchante d'apprendre cela, et 
comme je trouve que c'est un appartement qui est adapte 
aux besoins de ma famille, je me suis decide a le pren- 
dre." 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. My father who is tired of country life has decided 
to move into the city. 2. Mother prefers the country 
where she has always lived. 3. But she likes better the 
schools which one finds inthe city. 4. Consequently, for 
(the sake of) her children to whom she devotes herself, 
she gladly consents to (de) change. 5. Tell me of (en) 
what life consists anyway. 6. Is not he the happiest (he) 
who takes for (his) motto " Everything for (the) others, 
nothing for himself "? 7. Father read in a newspaper 
which was in the morning mail an advertisement of an 
apartment of which he desired more detailed informa- 
tion. 8. So he left for the city by the next train. 9. 
When he rapped, a young boy opened the door. 10. Is 
the janitor here? 11. Yes, come in, if you please. 12. 



106 LESSON XXVIII [§84 

My father went in and the boy closed the door. 13. I 
came to look at the apartment which you have to rent. 
14. Will you take the elevator, sir? This way. 15. On 
what floor is the apartment? 16. On the second (Au 
deuxieme (or) au seconde). 17. Will you tell me of what 
it is composed, please? 18. It is composed of six rooms, 
two bedrooms, a kitchen, a dining-room, a library, and a 
drawing-room. 19. There is also a bath room in which is 
a modern bath tub. 20. The apartment is heated by a 
furnace (au calorifere). 21. Do you find that it is an 
apartment which is suited to the needs of your family? 
22. Yes, and I like the part (quarter) of the city where it 
is situated. 



LESSON XXVIII. 

§ 84. Interrogative Pronouns (les pronoms interroga- 
ns). With the exception of dont, the relative pronouns 
are also used as interrogative pronouns. 

1. Qui as an interrogative pronoun refers only to per- 
sons, but maybe subject, object, or follow a preposition: 

Qui est la? Who is there? 

Qui voyez-vous? Whom do you see? 

De qui parlez-vous? Of whom are you speaking? 

A qui est ce livre? To whom is this book? Whose book is this? 

Note. — It will be observed that with qui relative, the 
main point to consider is its relation in the sentence, it 
standing usually as subject but referring to persons, to 
animals, or to things. Qui interrogative, on the other 
hand, must refer to persons but may stand in any relation 
in the sentence. 



§84] LESSON XXVIII 107 

2. Que interrogative applies only to things (Eng. 
neuter). It may be used as object or in predication: 

Que demandez-vous ? What do you ask? 
Q^'est-ce? What is this? (This is what?) 

Note. — Que used in indirect questions is usually followed by the 
infinitive: Je ne sais que dire. I do not know what to say. 

3. Quoi is also neuter (Eng.) and has in common with 
disjunctive pronouns the two following uses: 

a. Alone, in an emphatic way: Quoi? What? 

b. After prepositions : De quoi parlez-vous? Of what 

are you speaking? 

4. Lequel may be subject, object, or after a preposi- 
tion: 

Lequel de ces eleves est le plus studieux? Which of these pupils 
is the most studious? 

Lequel preferez-vous? Which do you prefer? 

Avec lequel des deux etes-vous venu? With which of the two 
did you come? 

5. Ou is used interrogatively with or without a prepo- 
sition : 

Ou allez-vous? Where are you going? 
De'ou venez-vous? From where (whence) do you come? 
Par oil avez-vous passe? Through where (which way) have you 
passed? 

6. Quel, quelle. Besides the interrogative pronouns, 
there exists the interrogative adjective, given in Lesson II 
(§20). 

De quelle couleur est le livre? Of what color is the book? 
Quel est votre livre? Which is your book? 



108 



LESSON XXVIII 



;§84 



Vocabulary. 



acajou (aka3u), m., mahogany 
une armoire (armwa:r), a cup- 
board, linen closet 
un bois de lit, a bedstead 
une boite a savon, a soap dish 
la cave (ka:v), the cellar 
la chambre d'amis, the guest 

chamber 
un chiffonnier ($ifonje), a bu- 
reau, chiffonier 
coudre (kudr), to sew 
une courtepointe (kurtapwe:t), a 

quilt 
une couverture (kuverty:r), a 

blanket 
une cruche (kry\), a jug, pitcher 
le cuivre (kirkvr), brass, copper 
une cuvette (kyvet), a wash 

bowl 
un dessus de lit, a bed spread 
un drap (dra), a sheet 
un edredon (edrsdo), an eider- 
down quilt 
en train de, in the act of 
une garde-robe (gardarob), a 

wardrobe 
la garniture (garnity:r), the fur- 
nishings, trimming 
le gout (gu), the taste 
le grenier (granje), the garret; 
granary 



un invite (evite), a guest 

unlavabo (lavabo), a washstand 

le linge (le:3), the linen 

un matelas (matlct), a mattress 

necessaire (nesese:r), necessary 

un oreiller (oreje), a pillow 

le papier a tapisser (tepise), wall 

paper 
la plupart (plypa:r), the major- 
ity, greater part 
un pot a eau, a water pitcher 
un rideau (rido), a curtain 
rose (ro:z), m. (color), pink 
le savon (savo), soap 
un service de toilette (servis), a 

toilet set 
une serviette de | a bedroom 

toilette [ towel 

un essuie-main f a kitchen 

(esijime) J towel 

un essuie-pieds, a door-mat 
essuyer (esqije), to wipe 
un sommier (somje), a spring 

mattress 
une taie d'oreiller (te), a pillow 
* case 
une table de toilette, a toilet 

table 
le ton (to), the tone 
un traversin (traverse), a bolster 
une vente (vci:t), a sale 



EXERCISE XXVIII. 



Comme nous aimons notre joli appartement ! Et de 
plus nous avons eu tant de plaisir en allant chez les 
marchands partout pour choisir des meubles, Parce qu'en- 
fin nous avons decide, en quittant la ferme, de faire une 



§84] LESSON XXVIII 109 

vente d'une partie de nos affaires et d'en acheter de 
neuves. Voila maintenant Maman et son amie, Madame 
Durand, en train de regarder nos achats.— Chez qui avez- 
vous achete vos meubles? — J'en ai achete la plupart chez 
Labarre et Compagnie. On trouve chez eux tout ce qui 
est necessaire pour meubler une maison du grenier jus- 
qu'a la cave. — En quel bois sont vos ameublements de 
chambres a coucher? — La chambre d'amis est en acajou, 
la mienne en cerisier, mais pour ma fille j'ai achete un 
lit de cuivre et pour les garcons des lits de fer. — Ou est la 
chambre d'amis? — Par ici. Commencons par la la visite 
de l'appartement. — Ah, comme c'est joli! Le papier a 
tapisser, les rideaux, le dessus de lit — le ton de toute la 
chambre est d'un jaune clair et j'aime cela. — Le ton de 
ma chambre est rose; lequel preferez-vous? — C'est diffi- 
cile a dire. Je les aime tous les deux. — Mais regardons les 
garnitures de lit. Le bois de lit, le sommier, le matelas, 
le traversin, les oreillers, les couvertures, les courtepointes, 
l'edredon, meme les draps et les taies d'oreiller, tout cela 
a ete achete chez Labarre et Cie, et a un prix assez bas. — 
Alors pourquoi coudre et faire ces choses soi-meme, 
quand on peut les acheter si bien faites que 9a? Le 
service de toilette sur le lavabo, la cuvette, le pot a eau, 
la boite a savon est de chez Labarre aussi, n'est-ce pas? 
— Oui, et naturellement le chiffonnier, la table de toilette, 
et la garde-robe. — Quel est la difference entre une garde- 
robe et une armoire? — Une armoire a des rayons pour 
mettre du linge; une garde-robe a des crochets pour 
pendre des robes. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Who does not like to move into a new apartment? 
2. Where did you buy your furniture? 3. We bought the 



110 LESSON XXIX [§85 

most of it at Labarre and Company's. 4. What did you 
buy there? 5. We bought a set of bedroom furniture. 
6. Of what is a set of bedroom furniture composed? 7. 
It is composed of a bedstead, a dressing-table, a wash- 
stand, a bureau, and a wardrobe. 8. Which do you like 
better,* mahogany or cherry? 9. Naturally everybody 
prefers mahogany but it costs more (dear). 10. With 
whom is your mother talking? 11. She is talking with her 
friend, Mrs. Durand, to whom she is showing our apart- 
ment. 12. Are all the beds in the house of (en) mahog- 
any? 13. No, mother's is (of) cherry, sister's is (of) 
brass, and mine is a white iron bed with brass trimmings 
(des boules de cuivre). 14. The wall paper, the curtains, 
and the bedspread in my room are light green and white. 

15. Which of the two is prettier, (du) green or (du) pink?* 

16. That depends on (de) the taste of the person. 17. As 
for me, I prefer (le) pink but many people prefer green. 
18. Mother bought all the bed furnishings ready made, 
even the sheets, pillow cases, and quilts. 19. She has 
forgotten to put towels in the guest room. 20. There are 
plenty (many) of them, however, in the linen closet, 
where a guest can help (serve) himself. 



LESSON XXIX. 

§ 85. Indefinite Adjectives (les adjectifs indefmis). 
The indefinite adjectives are: 



* In comparisons like these the partitive form is used: Aimez- 
vous le cafe? Do you like coffee? (but) Aimez-vous du cafe 
mieux que du the? Do you like coffee better than tea? 

Names of most of the colors used as nouns are masculine. 



186] 



LESSON XXIX 



111 



quel (what, which) 
quelque (some, any) 
tout (all) 



aucun (any) autre (other) certain a (certain) 

chaque (each) maint (many a) meme (same, self) 

nul (not any) plusieurs (several) 

quelconque (whatever) 

tel (such) 

Note a. — Certain is an indefinite adjective when it means "some " 
or "a": un certain homme, a certain man; but it is qualificatif 
(descriptive) when it means "sure": J'en suis certain, I am cer- 
tain of it. 

Note b. — Quel is interrogative but is classed by French gram- 
marians with the indefinite adjectives. 

§ 86. Indefinite Pronouns (les pronoms indefinis) . The 
indefinite pronouns are : 

1. Autrui (others, one's neighbor), on or Ton (one, 
"they"), personne (no one), plusieurs (several), qui- 
conque (whoever), and rien (nothing) which are inde- 
clinable. 

2. The following, which vary in gender and number 
with the noun they represent: 



Masculine 






Feminine 


SING. 


PLU. 




SING. 


PLTJ. 


aucun 


aucuns 




aucune 


aucunes (anyone) 


autre 


autres 




autre 


autres (an other) 


certain 


certains 




certaine 


certaines (a certain one) 


chacun 






chacune 


(each one) 


Pun 


les uns 




l'une 


les unes (the one) 


1' autre 


les autres 




l'autre 


les autres (the other) 


Pun l'autre 


les uns les autres l'une l'autre les unes les autres \ 










(each other) J 


nul 






nulle 


(no one) 


quelqu'un 


quelques- 


uns 


quelqu'une quelques-unes 1 










(some one) J 


tel 


tels 




telle 


telles (such a one) 


tout 


tous 




toute 


toutes (all) 


Note a.- 


—Aucun, 


autre, 


certain, 


nul, plusieurs, tel, and 



tout are sometimes indefinite adjectives, sometimes in- 



112 LESSON XXIX [§87 

definite pronouns. They are adjectives when accom- 
panied by a noun or pronoun, otherwise are pronouns: 

Tout ce qui brille. All that which glitters (adj.); (but) Tout est 
perdu. All is lost (pron.). 

Note b. — Autrui is never subject of a verb, but may be 
used as direct object or after a preposition: 

Pour consumer autrui le monstre se consume. To consume 
others, the monster consumes himself. — Dans le bonheur d'autrui, 
je cherche mon bonheur. In the happiness of others, I seek my 
happiness. 

Note c— Personne is a pronoun and masculine when it 
is accompanied neither by an article nor by an adjective: 

Personne n'est venu. No one has come; 

but it is a noun and feminine when modified by an 
article or by an adjective: 

Ces personnes sont obligeantes. These persons are obliging. 

Note d. — Rien is a pronoun when accompanied neither 
by an article nor by an adjective: 
Je n'ai rien vu. I have seen nothing; 

but it is a noun and masculine when modified by an 
article or by an adjective: 

Un songe, un rien, tout lui fait peur. A dream, a nothing, every- 
thing frightens him. 

§ 87. Present indicative of s'asseoir, to be seated, to 
sit (irreg.): 

je m'assieds nous nous asseyons 

tu t'assieds vous vous asseyez 

il s'assied ils s'asseyent 



§87] 



LESSON XXIX 



113 



Vocabulary. 



un abat-jour (aba5u:r), a lamp- 
shade 

ajouter (asute), to add 

une allumette (alymet), a match 

assurer (asyre), to assure 

l'avis (avi), opinion 

la batterie de cuisine (batri) 
kitchen utensils 

un bassin (base), a dish pan 

un bee (bek), a beak, jet 

la boue (bu), mud, dirt 

une bouilloire (bujwa:r), a tea 
kettle 

bruler (bryle), to burn 

un buffet (byfe), a sideboard 

un cadre (kadr), a frame 

un canape (kanape), a sofa 

une casserole (kasrol), a stew- 
pan 

une chaise a bascule (baskyl), a 
rocking chair 

une chaise cannee (kane), a cane 
seated chair 

le charbon ($arbo), coal 

une clef (kle), a key 

confortable (kofortabl), comfort- j 
able 

un coussin (kuse), a cushion 

le desordre (dezordr), disorder 

different (difera), different 

dore (dore), adj., gilt, gilded 

drole (dro:l), droll, funny 

l'electricite (elektrisite), f., elec- j 
tricity 

etrange (etra:5), adj., strange, 
odd 

un etranger (etrase), (or) une 
etrangere (etr&5e:r), a for- 
eigner, stranger 



evidemment (evidama), evi- 
dently 

un evier (evje), a sink, drain 

un fauteuil (foto:j), an armchair 

un fer a repasser (rapase), a fiat- 
iron 

un fourgon (furgo), a poker 

le gaz (ga:z), gas 

general (seneral), general 

une glace (glas) 

. . , . . ) a mirror 

un miroir (mirwa:r) J 

un gueridon (gerido), a center 

table, stand 
indiquer (edike), to indicate 
une lampe (la:p), a lamp 
une lumiere (lymje:r), a Hght 
un lustre (lystr), a chandelier 
la maniere (manje:r), the man- 
ner 
un membre (ma:br), a member 
une natte (nat), straw matting 
l'ordre (ordr), the order 
un paillasson (pajaso), a door 

mat 
un paravent (parava), a folding 

screen 
parfait (parte), perfect 
un peintre (pe:tr), a painter 
une peinture (pety:r), a painting 
une pelle (pel), a shovel 
une pelle aux ordures (ordy:r), a 

dust pan 
le petrole (petrol), petroleum, 

oil 
un plumeau (plymo), a feather 

duster 
un poele (pwa:l), a (heating) 

stove 
une poele, a frying-pan 



114 



LESSON XXIX 



}87 



un portemanteau (portmato) 

hall rack 
un portrait (portre), a portrait 
la poussiere (pusje:r), the dust 
propre (propr), neat, clean 
reluire (rolu;i:r), to shine, glitter 
une ressemblance (rosabla:s), a 

resemblance 
ressembler (rosable), to resem- 
ble 
un robinet (robine), a faucet 
sculpter (skylte), to carve 
un sculpteur (skylte :r), a sculp- 
tor 
la sculpture (skylty:r), sculpture 
un seau (so), a pail, bucket 
un sofa (sofa), a couch, otto- 
man 



a sous la main, ] 



handy, 



convenient 



commode 

(komod) 
le style (stil), the style 
supporter (syporte), to support 
une table a rallonges (ral5:3), an 

extension table 
une tablette (tablet), a shelf 
un tabouret (tabure), a foot stool 
la tapisserie (tapisri), tapestry 
en tapisserie, upholstered 
un tire-bouchon (tirbu^o), a cork 

screw 
un torchon (tor §5), a dish cloth, 

duster 
un tuyau (tyijo), a pipe, tube 
un vestibule (vestibyl), a vesti- 
bule, hall 



EXERCISE XXIX. 



Tous vos meubles de salon sont en tapisserie, n'est-ce 
pas? — Oui, asseyez-vous sur le canape et voyez comme il 
est confortable. — Ah, c'est bien. Je ne connais nulle part 
un ameublement plus joli. Aimez-vous des chaises a bas- 
cule dans un salon? — Je sais que quelques-uns preferent 
les fauteuils, mais chacun son gout. Moi j'aime voir 
plusieurs chaises a bascule dans chaque piece de la 
maison. — Je suis du meme avis, Madame. — Quelle est 
cette peinture a droite de la glace? — Vous voulez dire 
celle qui est dans un cadre dore? — Oui, Madame. — C'est 
le portrait de ma grand'mere. — Vous lui ressemblez beau- 
coup. — Le pensez-vous? C'est drole, certaines de mes 
amies m'ont dit qu'il y a une telle ressemblance entre 
nous deux, mais moi je n'en trouve aucune. — Les diffe- 
rent^ membres de la meme famille se ressemblent les uns 
les autres d'une maniere generale, n'est-ce pas? — Quelque- 



§87] LESSON XXIX 115 

fois, mais pas toujours. — Vous avez de telles jolies choses, 
Madame; pardon si je regarde autour de moi. Le gueri- 
don avec la lampe et F abat-jour de soie, les tabourets, le 
paravent, les coussins, les tableaux, tout cela indique un 
gout parfait, je vous assure. — Merci^bien, mon amie. 
Mais allons a la salle a manger. La table a rallonges, les 
chaises cannees, le buffet sont en vieux chene sculpte, et 
le portemanteau dans le vestibule est du meme style. 
Dans la cuisine j'ai fait mettre une natte sur le plancher. 
Oui, et j'ai remarque en entrant un paillasson devant la 
porte pour essuyer les pieds; cela fait moins de travail 
pour la bonne, moins de boue et de poussiere dans la 
maison. Vous avez une bonne tres propre, je crois, car 
la batterie de cuisine reluit comme un miroir. La bouil- 
loire, les casseroles, la poele, les seaux, meme Tevier, les 
robinets, et les tuyaux a eau sont bien frottes. 

For Oral or Written Work. 
1. Have you any upholstered furniture? 2. Yes, all 
my parlor furniture is upholstered. 3. Seat yourself in 
this arm chair. 4. Is it not comfortable? 5. Yes, but 
many (maintes) persons prefer rocking chairs. 6. A cer- 
tain man whom I know even sits in a rocking chair at 
(the) table. 7. Any one who does that is surely lazy. 
8. Every one (to) his taste, but as for me I always prefer 
a straight chair. 9. How do you light your apartment, 
by (a) electricity or by oil (petroleum)? 10. We use 
neither the one nor the other; we like gas better. 11. 
We have a gas jet in each bed room and a chandelier in 
each of the other rooms. 12. In the range we burn coal. 
13. Have you hot and cold water in the kitchen? 14. 
Yes. Do you not see the pipes and the faucets over the 
sink? 15. The maid has no idea of order. 16. Look at 
this shelf. 17. Here are flat irons, matches, keys, the 



116 



LESSON XXX 



[§§8&-89 



poker, a corkscrew, the dish cloth and a feather duster. 
18. It is strange that she did not add the dust pan and the 
dish pan. 19. Everything handy and nothing in its place 
is evidently her motto. 20. I cannot endure such disorder 
longer. 21. I intend to look for another maid at once. 



| - LESSON XXX. 

§ 88. Future Tense (le futur). The future tense of all 
four conjugations is formed in the same way, namely, by 
adding to the present infinitive of the verb conjugated 
the present indicative of the verb avoir. The av in the 
first and second plural of avoir is dropped, making the 
future endings: ai, as, a, ons, ez, ont. 

finir 

je finir ai 

tu finir as 

il finir a 



aimer 

* j 'aimer ai 
tu aimer as 

il aimer a 
nous aimer ons 
vous aimer ez 
ils aimer ont 

* I shall love, 



nous finir ons 
vous finir ez 
ils finir ont 
etc. 



recevoir 

je recev(oi)r ai 
tu recevr as 
il recevr a 
nous recevr ons 
vous recevr ez 
ils recevr ont 



rompre 

je rompr ai 

tu rompr as 
il rompr a 
nous rompr ons 
vous rompr ez 

ils rompr ont 



Note a. — In the third conjugation, the oi of the infinitive is 
dropped for the sake of euphony or of ease in pronunciation and 
recevoirai becomes recevrai. In the fourth, the final e of the infini- 
tive is elided before the vowel endings and rompreai becomes 
romprai. 

Note b. — In the irregular verbs avoir and savoir, the v changes to 
u and the oi is dropped as in recevoir, making their future: j'aurai, 
tu auras, il aura, nous aurons, vous aurez, ils auront; je saurai, etc. 

Note c. — The future of alter is irai; of etre, serai; of envoy er, 
enverrai; of faire, ferai; of pouvoir, pourrai; of vouloir, voudrai; of 
voir, verrai; and of venir, viendrai. , 

§ 89. Future Perfect Tense (le futur anterieur). The 
future perfect is formed by adding the past participle of 
the verb conjugated to the future of the auxiliary: 

j 'aurai fini, I shall have finished ; je serai arrive, I shall have arrived. 



[§90 LESSON XXX 117 

§ 90. II faut. The French have no verb exactly equiva- 
lent to " must " of the English; instead they use the 
impersonal verb, il faut (it is necessary), followed either by 
an infinitive or by the subjunctive mode (§101, II, A, 3): 

11 me faut aller chez moi, It is necessary for me to go home, 
I must go home. 

The future of il faut is il faudra, the past indefinite, 
il a fallu. £ 

EXERCISE XXX.* 

Qu'aurez-vous a faire demain? — Demain j'aurai beau- 
coup a faire, je serai occupe toute la journee. — Que ferez- 
vous? — D'abord je me leverai de bonne heure, je prendrai 
une tasse de cafe et des petits pains a sept heures du 
matin, a huit heures j'irai a l'universite ou je resterai 
jusqu'a midi. — Ne dejeunerez-vous pas chez nous a une 
heure? — Si, je vous remercie, je dejeunerai chez vous 
avec grand plaisir, mais il me faudra partir bientot apres 
le dejeuner. — Qa sera dommage, mais je vous excuserai, 
parce que je sais comme vous etes occupe. — Merci bien, 
je vous verrai alors a une heure demain. Au re voir! A 
demain! — Maintenant, ma mere, je dois te quitter. Je 
rencontrerai mon ami, Charles, a deux heures moins le 
quart et nous irons ensemble au laboratoire. — Y resteras- 
tu tout l'apres-midi? Quand te reverrai-je? — Je saurai 
plus tard, quand j'arriverai la-haut. Tout dependra de 
notre professeur. — Reviendras-tu ici direct ement de l'uni- 
versite? — Je crois que non. J'aurai des courses a faire en 
ville, mais si cela ne te derange pas, j'amenerai Charles 
avec moi pour le diner. — C'est bien. Je serai tres con- 
tente de re voir ton ami. Je le trouve bien agreable. — Ce 
soir nous assisterons a une conference faite par Monsieur 



* For any new words used in this and the following lessons, the 
student is referred to the vocabularies at the end of the book. 



118 LESSON XXX [§9' 

le Professeur Berard ou peut-etre nous irons ail concert 
Nous nous deciderons a diner. — Mais ne voudras-tu pas 
retenir tes places d'avance? — Qa sera mieux, sans doute. 
Eh bien, nous irons au concert et naturellement nous ne 
te laisserons pas chez toi toute seule; tu iras avec nous. 
— Ah, c'est tres aimable de ta part, je serai heureuse de 
t'accompagner, mon fils. Tu es toujours attentif pour 
moi. — Merci beaucoup pour le compliment. Nous re- 
viendrons ici, alors, a six heures et quart pour le diner et 
nous partirons pour le concert a huit heures moins vingt. 
Je prendrai des billets cet apres-midi. Au revoir, ma 
mere. — A tout a l'heure, mon fils. 

For Oral or Written Work. 
1. We shall go to church to-morrow, because to-morrow 
(it) will be Sunday. 2. Will your sister go with us? 3. 
No, she will not be able to go (there), because she will 
not be at home. 4. What will you have to do in the 
afternoon? 5. After dinner I shall rest (myself) a little 
while, afterwards I shall write to my mother. 6. At four 
o'clock in (of) the afternoon, there will be a service at 
the university to which I shall go. 7. Will you be very 
busy next Monday? 8. Yes, Monday I shall have much 
to do, I shall be busy all day long. 9. What will you do 
Tuesday morning? 10. After the first lecture, I shall 
come home, and I shall study for an examination which 
I shall have Tuesday afternoon. 11. How long will the 
examination last? 12. It will last two hours but I shall 
probably remain at the university until six o'clock. 13. 
The examination finished, I shall work in the laboratory.- 
14. Will you dine at home? 15. Yes, and I shall bring my 
friend Charles whom I have invited to (d) dine with us. 
16. In the evening we shall attend the concert. 17. 
When will the university close for the vacation? 18. It 



§§91-92] 



LESSON XXXI 



119 



will close a week from to-day (d'aujourd'hui en huit). 
19. And will you remain in (the) city all summer? 20. 
Oh no, I shall pass the month of July in the country and 
the month of August at the seashore. 

LESSON XXXI. 

§ 91. Mode (le mode). French verbs have five modes; 
the indicative (Pindicatif), the conditional (le condition- 
al), the imperative (Pimperatif), the subjunctive (le 
subjonctif), and the infinitive (Pmfinitif). 

1. As in English, the indicative mode is used to express 
a fact, the imperative a command. 

2. The conditional mode is used to express what would 
take place if a certain condition were fulfilled : Je sortirais, 
s'il faisait beau. I would go out, if it were pleasant. 

Remark. — It will be observed that the conditional mode is rarely, 
if ever, used in the subordinate or conditional clause but rather in 
the principal clause, while either the indicative or subjunctive mode 
will occur in the subordinate clause. 

§ 92. The conditional mode has two tenses : the pres- 
ent (le present), and its compound the perfect (le parfait 
or passe). 

1. The present conditional uses the same stem as the 
future indicative, namely, the present infinitive of the 
verb conjugated, to which it adds the endings of the im- 
perfect indicative : 



(I should like, 
you would \ 
like, etc.) j 
j' aimer ais 
tu aimer ais 
il aimer ait 
nous aimer ions 
vous aimer iez 
ils aimer aient 



(I should 
finish) 

je finir ais 

tu finir ais 

il finir ait 



(I should 
receive) 

je recevr ais 

tu recevr ais 

il recevr ait 



nous finir ions nous recevr ions 
vous finir iez vous recevr iez 
ils finir aient ils recevr aient 



(I should 
break) 

je rompr ais 

tu rompr ais 

il rompr ait 

nous rompr ions 

vous rompr iez 

ils rompr aient 



120 . LESSON XXXI [§93 

Note a. — In avoir, etre, and all irregular verbs, the same change 
in stem occurs for the conditional as for the future and the present 
conditional becomes: j'aurais, je serais, etc. 

2. The perfect conditional is formed by adding the past 
participle of the verb conjugated to the present condi- 
tional of the auxiliary : 

j'aurais aime, I should have loved; nous aurions fini, we should 
have finished; ils auraient vendu, they would have sold. 

§ 93. Conditional Sentences : 

A. S'il fait beau, je sors (or sortirai). If it is pleasant, 
I am going (or shall go) out. 

B. S'il fait beau demain, je sortirai. If it is pleasant 
to-morrow, I shall go out. 

C. S'il faisait beau maintenant, je sortirais. If it were 
pleasant now, I would go out. 

D. S'il faisait beau demain, je sortirais. If it should be 
pleasant to-morrow, I would go out. 

Explanations. 

1. It will be observed that in A and B (above), the condition 
expresses something admitted as possible, while in C and D the con- 
dition is contrary to fact or at least doubtful. 

2. In A, a present condition a*dmitted as possible, the present 
indicative is used in the subordinate clause and the present (or 
future) indicative in the principal clause. 

3. In B, a future condition admitted as possible, the present 
indicative is still used in the subordinate clause while the future 
indicative must occur in the principal clause. 

4. In C, a present condition contrary to fact, and in D, & future 
condition contrary to fact or at any rate doubtful, the imperfect 
indicative is used in the subordinate clause, the present conditional 
in the principal clause. 

(For conditional sentences using the subjunctive mode, see Les- 
son XXXIV.) 



§93] LESSON XXXI 121 

EXERCISE XXXI. 

Voulez-vous faire ime promenade avec moi? — S'il fai- 
sait beau, j'irais avec plaisir, mais il a plu toute la journee 
et si nous sortions, nous serious trempes jusqu'aux os. — 
Peut-etre il ne pleuvra pas demain. — Alors, s'il ne pleut 
pas, j'irai avec vous demain volontiers. — En attendant, 
que pouvons-nous faire aujourd'hui, par un temps pareil? 
— J'aimerais lire quelque chose de bon, si cela vous est 
agreable. Xous pourrions nous asseoir dans la biblio- 
theque devant la cheminee. Surtout quand il fait mau- 
vais temps dehors, j'aime a regarder le feu dans une 
cheminee; cela donne un air de bien-etre. — Bon, ca me 
convient parfaitement. Qu'avez-vous d'interessant a 
lire? — II y a tant de livres et de journaux ici dans la bi- 
bliotheque; n'aimeriez-vous pas jeter un coup d'ceil sur 
ce que nous avons et choisir quelque chose a votre gout? 
— Si (suppose) nous lisons ensemble une comedie, ou 
peut-etre une petite histoire de Daudet. — C'est bien. 
Nous trouverions " Tartarin de Tarascon " assez amu- 
santj n'est-ce pas? Ou si vous preferez une comedie, 
nous pouvons lire " Le voyage de Monsieur Perrichon." 
Cela ne prendra pas beaucoup de temps. — Mais regardez! 
La pluie commence deja a cesser. J'espere que nous 
aurons une belle journee demain. — Moi aussi. S'il fait 
beau, je serai bien aise, parce que j'aurai des courses a 
faire demain, et naturellement j'aimerais mieux sortir 
par un beau temps que par la pluie. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. How would you like to go to (en) California this 
winter? 2. I would like to go there very well if I had 
the time but I am too busy in (a) school. 3. If I should 
go, I could not finish my studies this year. 4. What 



122 lesson xxxii [§§94-95 

would your parents say if you should go? 5. Probably 
they would say nothing but all the same they would not 
like it. 6. And I surely would not like to go, if they did 
not wish it. 7. If you took your books, you could study 
there. 8. If I knew my lessons to-day, I would be hap- 
pier. 9. If I am not mistaken, we have no school to-day. 
10. I would like to know why. 11. Because to-day (it) is 
the twenty-second of February, Washington's birthday. 
12. That is true. If it is pleasant we shall go skating on 
the pond this afternoon, shall we not? 13. Yes, I shall 
be delighted to go, if nothing hinders. 14. However, if 
mother should go shopping, I could not go with you, be- 
cause I have promised to accompany her. 15. But if to- 
day is Washington's birthday, all the stores are closed, 
are they not? 16. Of course, and naturally she could not 
buy anything, even if she desired to (it). 17. Would you 
(voudriez-vous) tell me then at what time I ought (dois) 
to expect you? 18. If we lunch at noon as usual, I will 
be at your house at half-past one. 19. We shall have 
then a long afternoon for skating. 

LESSON XXXII. 

§ 94. The infinitive mode has two tenses, the present, 
and its compound, the perfect: donner, to give; avoir 
donne, to have given. 

§ 95. Some of the more common uses of the infinitive 
are: 

1. Substantively, as a noun: 

" Tous les etres sont animes ou inanimes." All beings are ani- 
mate or inanimate. 

a. Prepositions, except en, are followed by the infini- 
tive, instead of by the participle as in English: 

Vous parlez sans ouvrir la bouche. You speak without opening 



§95] LESSON XXXII 123 

the mouth; (but) Nous causerons en marchant. We shall chat while 
walking. 

2. Certain verbs are followed by the infinitive without 
any preposition: desirer, vouloir, pouvoir, savoir, devoir, 
falloir, alter, faire, laisser, and verbs of perceiving such 
as entendre, voir, ecouter, regarder, etc. 

Voulez-:VOus faire une promenade? Will you take a walk? 

Pouvez-vous me dire etc.? Can 3 r ou tell me — ? 

Je dois avoir une lettre. I ought to have a letter. 

II faut aller chez moi. I must go home. 

Faites venir un medecin. Make to come (call) a doctor. 

Je vais chercher la medecine. I am going to get the medicine. 

Laissez lui faire cela. Let him do that. 

3. Preceded by de, the infinitive is used: 

a. After many verbs expressing emotion (joy, regret, 
etc.): 

Je regrette de ne pas vous avoir vu. I am sorry not to have 
seen you. 

b. After many nouns: 

Je vous demande pardon de vous avoir fait attendre. I beg your 
pardon for having made you wait. 

L'idee de faire cela est absurde. The idea of doing that is absurd. 

c. After most adjectives: 

Est-il correct de dire cela? Is it correct to say that? 

Je suis bien aise de vous voir. I am very glad to see you. 

Remark. — Often the same adjective may take de or d with the 
infinitive. De regularh r occurs when the infinitive is the logical 
subject of an impersonal verb: II est facile de faire ce vetement 
(De faire ce vetement est facile). It is easy to make this garment, 
(but) Ce vetement est facile d faire. This garment is easy to make 
(to be made). 

4. Preceded by a, the infinitive, is used: 

a. After verbs expressing inclination or opposition: 
aimer, chercher, commencer, s'opposer, objecter, etc. 
Cherchez a faire cela. Try to do that. 



124 lesson *xxxn [§§96-97 

Aimez-vous a travailler (or Aimez-vous travailler) ? Do you like 
to work. 

II commence a pleuvoir. It is beginning to rain. 

b. After adjectives, as indicated above (§.95, 3, c, 
Rem.). 

Note (l). — It is often hard to decide whether a verb 
takes the direct infinitive or the infinitive preceded by 
a or by de, because sometimes the same verb may, under 
varying conditions, be followed by any of the three con- 
structions. However, the subject is one that gradually 
clears up as the student advances. 

Note (#). — Venir followed: 

(a) By the infinitive without any preposition, expresses 
purpose: Je viens lui parler. I come to speak to him. 

(b) By de + the infinitive, something that has just 
occurred: Je viens de lui parler. I have just spoken 
(come from speaking) to him. 

(c) By a + the infinitive, the idea of chance, " happen 
to": II vint a passer. He happened to pass. 

Note (3). — When an infinitive is negative, both the ne 
and the pas ordinarily precede : J'ai decide de ne pas y 
aller. I have decided not to go there. 

§ 96. The Present Participle (le participe present). 
The present participle always ends in ant (§ 68, 2). Used 
as an adjective, it agrees like an adjective, otherwise is 
invariable : 

Cette fleur est charmante. This flower is charming. 

On n'entend plus les marteaux frappant l'enclume. One no longer 
hears the hammers striking the anvil. 

§ 97. The Perfect Participle (le participe parfait). The 
perfect participle is formed by adding the past (passe) 
participle of the verb conjugated to the present participle 



§97] LESSON XXXII 125 

of the auxiliary: ayant ete, having been; etant alle, 
having gone. 

EXERCISE XXXII. 
Voulez-vous aller avec moi en Europe cet ete? — Merci 
bien, je serai heureux d'y aller. J'ai tou jours eu le desir 
de voir les choses interessantes la-bas, mais je n'ai jamais 
eu l'idee de pouvoir y aller cette annee. Je viens de 
decouvrir, cependant, que c'est possible. — Alors s'il vous 
convient, j'ai decide de partir d'ici au commencement 
des vacances, c'est-a-dire, le quatorze juin. Nous irons 
par le chemin de fer a New York ou nous prendrons le 
bateau a vapeur samedi matin a dix heures. — Qu'est-ce 
qu'il nous faut porter pour le voyage? — Faites attention 
de ne pas porter trop de choses. Les gens accoutumes a 
voyager ne prennent que tres peu de bagages. Nous 
prendrons chacun une malle pour le bateau, mais si, 
apres avoir quitte le bateau, nous pouvons voyager seule- 
ment avec des bagages a la main, ce sera beaucoup plus 
commode. D'ailleurs, on peut acheter tout ce qu'on veut 
aussi bon marche en Europe qu'en Amerique, et par 
suite il ne vaut pas la peine de se charger beaucoup. — 
Je commencerai a faire mes preparatifs tout de suite, 
mais, comme vous avez deja visite plusieurs fois ces pays 
etrangers, ne desirez-vous pas me servir de guide? — Si 
vous le voulez. Nous nous rencontrerons alors a la Gare 
Centrale pour le train express de trois heures cinquante- 
sept, vendredi apres-midi. Nous devons arriver a New 
York a, dix heures du soir, sans changer de train. Nous 
pourrons rester dans un hotel pendant la nuit, parce qu'il 
faudra etre frais pour le voyage qui commencera le lende- 
main. En attendant, je vous prie de m'ecrire, s'il y a 
des renseignements que vous desirez. — Je vous remercie 
de votre bonte. Nous nous ecrirons de temps en temps 
en tout cas, n'est-ce pas? — Bien entendu. 



126 LESSON XXXIII [§98 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Have you ever visited Europe? 2. No, never, but I 
have always had the desire to cross the sea and to visit 
foreign countries. 3. Can you not go with me next sum- 
mer? 4. Oh I shall be delighted to go, if my father and 
my mother are willing (wish it). 5. When can you know 
(it)? 6. I will ask them (it) on going home for vacation 
and I ought to know before leaving them. 7. What will 
it be necessary to take for the journey? 8. Don't take 
too many things. 9. People little accustomed to travel 
sometimes take several trunks and find them very in- 
convenient. 10. Besides, one can have less baggage 
transported in Europe than in America without paying 
11. Consequently it costs dear to take much of it. 12. 
It will be better to travel with only hand luggage after 
leaving the boat. 13. We can each take a trunk in which 
we shall put our wraps for the steamer. 14. But we must 
leave these trunks at Liverpool until our return. 15. 
This idea pleases me very much and, if I can go, I shall 
commence my preparations at once. 16. I am sorry, 
however, not to be able to take my sister. 17. She likes 
to travel and to see interesting things. 18. Travelling is 
a fine means of education {Voyager est un bon moyen de 
s'instruire) . 19. One ought to be much more interested 
in (a) a place (endroit) after having seen it. 20. Yes, and 
one judges better his own country (son propre pays) after 
having visited others. 

LESSON XXXIII. 

§ 98. A, En. 1. Place where, " to which," is ordina- 
rily expressed by en: 

a. before names of continents. 

b. before all singular names of European countries. 



§99] LESSON XXXIII 127 

c. before feminine singular names of countries outside 
of Europe; other names of countries usually take a. with 
the definite article: 

Je vais en Europe, en Amerique, en Angleterre, en Chine. II 
fait un voyage au Japon, au Canada, aux Indes Occidentales. 

2. Names of towns and cities usually take a without 
the article: 

Allez-vous a Paris ? Non, je vais a Londres. 

§ 99. Use of the Article with Proper Nouns. 1. As a 
general rule, the definite article occurs before names of 
continents, of countries, of rivers, and of mountains: 

^Europe, la France, la Seine, les Alpes. 

But it is omitted after the preposition en and some- 
times after de: 

Je viens d'ltalie; je vais en Amerique. 

2. The article is usually omitted also before names of 
cities, except when they are preceded by a descriptive 
adjective or followed by a determining phrase: 

Je vais a Paris, (but) le gai Paris, la Rome des Cesars. 

Note. — Some proper names of cities are always preceded by the 
article, but they were originally common nouns: Le Havre, La 
Rochelle. 

EXERCISE XXXIII. 

Nous voila partis pour notre voyage en Europe. Nous 
habitons Les Etats-Unis dans* TAmerique du Nord, mais 
nous avons quitte notre pays pour quelques mois et nous 
allons visiter des conferees etrangeres. Nous avons l'in- 
tention de debarquer a Liverpool en Angleterre et d'aller 
d'abord a Glascow et a Edimbourg en Ecosse. Nous 
passerons deux semaines a Londres avant d'aller a Paris. 
En quittant la France, nous irons a Bruxelles et a Anvers 

* En Amerique, (but) dans Y Amerique du Nord. 



128 LESSON XXXIII [§99 

en Belgique, a La Have, et a Amsterdam en Hollande. 
J'aime la Hollande; c'est un petit pays mais bien inte- 
ressant et les Hollandais sont un peuple tres laborieux. 
L'Allemagne sera le pro-chain pays a visiter. A Cologne, 
nous prendrons un bateau pour remonter le Rhin — ce 
voyage si connu et si goute de tous les tourist es. Si nous 
en avons le temps, nous irons a Berlin et a Dresde, mais 
en tout cas nous voulons passer quelques jours en Suisse, 
le pays des Alpes et de belles vues. Geneve, Lucerne, 
Zurich, chacune de ces villes vaut bien une visite, et on 
ne doit pas oublier la Chute du Rhin a ScharThouse. 
Nous avons grande en vie de voir TAutriche, l'Espagne, 
le Portugal, la Russie, le Siberie, le Danemark, la Norvege, 
la Suede, et la Grece, mais le temps nous manquera. 
Apres avoir vu le Mont Blanc, apres avoir passe une nuit 
en haut du Rigi, nous descendrons de la Suisse dans les 
plaines ensoleillees d'ltalie, en passant par le tunnel de 
Saint-Gothard. Nous irons a Milan, a Genes, a Pise, a 
Venise, a Florence, a Rome, la Rome des Cesars, la Rome 
de mes reves. J'aimerais bien y passer toute une annee; 
malheureusement nous avons nos billets de retour de 
Naples pour le onze septembre. La Mediterranee est si 
belle, le bleu de ses eaux est sans pareil, il me semble. 
La Corse, la Sardaigne, les Baleares seront passees en 
route avant d'arriver au detroit de Gibraltar, comme 
nous passerons les Acores dans PAtlantique. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. The continents are Asia, Africa, North America, 
South America, Europe, and perhaps Australia. 2. Have 
you ever visited China? 3. No, but I have friends who 
are missionaries there. 4. They say that Japan is a 
beautiful country. 5. I have (a) great desire to travel in 



§100] LESSON XXXIV 129 

the Orient. 6. The East Indies are important islands. 

7. Naturally, the Americans are interested in Manila. 

8. The Chinese and the Japanese are making great prog- 
ress in civilization. 9. It is the European countries, how- 
ever, which interest me most. 10. I would like to spend 
the summer in England, Ireland, Scotland, and Wales. 
11. Edinburgh and London are two of the most interesting 
cities I have ever visited. 12. But Paris, gay Paris, has 
not (an) equal in the world. 13. I like the French (lan- 
guage) and the French (people). 14. Then you ought to 
go to Paris often. 15. But I also like Germany and the 
Germans. 16. We intend next summer to go to Norway, 
Sweden, Denmark, and Russia. 17. When are you going 
to Athens? 18. I don't know, but I hope to go there 
soon. 19. The student of history also finds much pleas- 
ure in visiting Rome. 20. But of all the countries of the 
world, I prefer the United States. 

LESSON XXXIV. 

§100. The Subjunctive Mode (le mode subjonctif). 
The subjunctive mode has four tenses: the present (le 
present) and the imperfect (l'imparfait), simple tenses; 
the perfect (le parfait) and the pluperfect (le plus-que- 
parfait), their corresponding compounds. 

1. Present Subjunctive: 

avoir etre aimer 

(That I may have) (That I may be) (That I may love, like) 

que j' aie que je sois que j' aime 

que tu aies que tu sois que tu aimes 

qu' il ait qu' il soit qu' il aime 

que nous ayons que nous soyons que nous aimions 

que vous ayez que vous soyez que vous aimiez 

qu' ils aient qu' ils soient qu' ils aiment 



/ 



130 



LESSON XXXIV 



[§101 



finir 
(That I may finish) 
qu je finisse 
que tu finisses 
qu' il finisse 
que nous finissions 
que vous finissiez 
qu' ils finissent 



recevoir 
(That I may receive) 
qu je recoive 
que tu receives 
qu' il recoive 
que nous recevions 
que vous receviez 
qu' ils recoivent 



rompre 
(That I may break) 
que je rompe 
que tu rompes 
qu' il rompe 
que nous rompions 
que vous rompiez 
qu' ils rompent 



Note a. — With the exception of avoir and etre, all 
French verbs have the present subjunctive ending in e, 
es, e, ions, iez, ent. 

Note b. — In the first conjugation, the present sub- 
junctive is like the present indicative with the addition 
of i before the ons and ez of the first and second per- 
sons plural. Compare the present subjunctive with the 
present indicative in the other conjugations. 

Note c. — For the subjunctive of the irregular verbs 
used in the following exercises, see Part II. 

2. The perfect subjunctive is formed by adding the past 
participle of the verb conjugated to the present subjunc- 
tive of the auxiliary : 

Que j'aie aime. That I may have loved. 

Qu'il soit venu. That he may have come. 

§ 101. Uses of the Subjunctive : 

I. The subjunctive may occur in principal or indepen- 
dent clauses, either with or without que: 

Que tu viennes. Come here. 

Vive la Republique! Long live the Republic! 

Dieu soit loue! God be praised! 

II. But much more often it is used in subordinate 
clauses, where it may occur: 

A. After the conjunction que alone. 



§101] LESSON XXXIV 131 

B. After conjunctive expressions united with que: a 
fin que, in order that; pourvu que, provided that, etc. 

C. In relative clauses. 

A. Among its more common uses with que alone are: 

1. After verbs of thinking or of saying, if these are 
negative, interrogative or conditional, but in ordinary affir- 
mation these verbs take the indicative: 

Je pense qu'il ira chez lui. I think that he will go home. 

(but) Je ne pense pas qu'il aille chez lui. I do not think that he 
will go home. 

Pensez-vous qu'il aille chez lui? Do you think that he will go 
home? 

Note a. — Negation and interrogation neutralize each 
other, hence a negative question will be followed by the 
indicative : 

Xe voyez-vous pas que l'egalite des fortunes est impossible? Do 
you not see that the equality of fortunes is impossible? 

Note b. The same is true of double negatives: 
II est impossible de ne pas etre convaincu que cette egalite n'est 
qu'un reve. It is impossible not to be convinced that this equal- 
ity is only a dream. 

2. After expressions of emotion (joy, sorrow, regret, 
shame, surprise, fear, etc.) and of the will (to wish, to 
avoid, to prefer, to try, to forbid, to command, to op- 
pose, to blame, etc.), regardless of negation, question, or 
condition : 

Je suis content que vous soj-ez venu. I am pleased that you have 
come. 

Je m'etonne que tu l'aies fait. I am astonished that you have 
done it. 

II ordonne que ses hommes aillent devant lui. He commands 
that his men go before him. 

Je crains qu'il ne pleuve. I fear that it will rain. 

Je crains qu'il ne fasse pas beau aujourd'hui. I fear that it will 
not be pleasant to-day. 



132 LESSON xxxiv [§101 

3. After impersonal verbs expressing neither certainty 
nor probability: 

II faut que j'aille chez moi. It is necessary that I go home. 

C'est dommage que vous soyez malade. It is too bad that you 
are sick. 

II se peut que tout le monde dorme. It may be that every one 
is asleep. 

(but) II est probable que j'irai. It is probable that I shall go. 

Note. — II semble (it seems) takes the subjunctive. 
II me semble (it seems to me. I am certain) takes the indicative. 
II ne me semble pas (I am uncertain) takes the subjunctive. 
Ne vous semble-t-il pas? Negative question or double negative 
takes the indicative. 

B. Among the conjunctive expressions united with que 

which take the subjunctive are those expressing: 

1. Purpose: d fin que, pour que, de crainte que, de 
peur que are always followed by the subjunctive: 

Nous etudions a fin que nous puissions apprendre. We study 
in order that we may learn. 

2. Result: Pure result is expressed by the indicative 
but, as soon as the idea of purpose enters in, the sub- 
junctive occurs: 

II a rempli sa tache de maniere que tout le monde est content. 
He has fulfilled his task in such a way that everybody is satisfied. 

(but) Remplissez votre tache de maniere que tout le monde 
puisse etre* content. Fulfill your task in such a way that ever}' 
one may be satisfied. 

3. Condition: en cas que, d moins que (unless), sup- 
pose que, pourvu que, etc. 

Nous irons pourvu qu'il fasse beau. We shall go, provided 
that it is pleasant. 

4. Concession: quoique, bien que, etc.: 

Quoique nous soyons fatigues, nous travaillons toujours. Al- 
though we are tired, we still work. 



§101] LESSON XXXIV 133 

5. Negation: non que, sans que, ce n'est past que, etc.: 
Non qu'il soit oblige de le faire. Not that he is obliged to 

do it. 

6. Anteriority: Temporal conjunctions are followed by 
the subjunctive only when the action expressed in the 
subordinate clause is future with reference to that in the 
principal clause: Avant que, before; jusqu'a ce que, until; 
en attendant que, etc. : 

Je resterai ici jusqu'a ce que vous reveniez. I will remain here 
until you return. 

Note. — Repetition of Conjunctions: Any conjunction 
united with que, and occurring several times in the same 
sentence, is usually repeated simply by the que. So also 
the conjunctions comme, quand, si, etc., although not 
united with que, may be repeated by que. Que standing 
for si always takes the subjunctive even though si does 
not, but standing for any other conjunction, it will be 
followed by the same mode as would the word whose 
place it takes. 

C. Relative clauses take the subjunctive: 

1. After a superlative: 

C'est le meilleur ami que j'aie. He is the best friend that 
I have. 

Note. — The expressions le seul, I'unique, le premier and le dernier 
are considered as superlatives. 

2. After a general negative idea, expressed or implied 
by question or by condition: 

II n'y a pas un de nous qui soit sans defaut. There is not one of 
us who is without fault. Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui soit sans defaut ? 
Is there anyone who is without fault ? S'il y avait quelqu'un qui 
soit sans defaut. If there were anyone who is without fault. 

Note. — In case the relative clause is also negative, it 
will use only ne, not ne . . . pas : 

Y a-t-il un enfant qui n'aime sa mere? 



134 LESSON XXXIV [§101 

3. After a restrictive principal clause: 

II n'y avait que lui qui put le faire. There was no one but 
him who could do it. 

4. When expressing purpose or any other form of 

uncertainty : 

Les chateaux du moyen age possedaient une tour qui put servir 
de retraite aux assieges. The castles of the Middle Ages had a 
tower which might serve as retreat to the besieged. 

Remark. — There are of course exceptions to many of 
the foregoing rules. Apply the general test, Is a fact 
emphasized ? If so, the indicative mode will ordinarily 
be used, .but if desire or uncertainty is expressed, the 
subjunctive will occur. 

EXERCISE XXXIV.* 

La cuisiniere: Qu'est-ce qu'il faut que j'aehete pour le 
diner aujourd'hui? — Madame: Je desire que nous ayons 
quelque chose de tres bon, parce que j'ai invite* des amis 
a diner chez nous. — C: Je suis surprise que vous l'ayez 
fait sans me le dire plus tot; j'ai besoin de beaucoup de 
temps pour preparer un diner comme il faut pour des 
invites. — Mme: Je suis fachee que j'aie oublie* de vous 
le dire, mais faites le meilleur diner que vous puissiez. — 
C: Heureusement j'ai deja arrange pour le potage, et 
nous mangerons ensuite le releve de potage, n'est-ce pas? 
Alors voulez-vous que nous servions des artichauts comme 
entree? — Mme: Non, je ne crois pas que tout le monde 
aime les artichauts; je prefere que vous prepariez des 

* The exercises in this and the following lesson are given in order 
that the student may have drill in the use of the subjunctive. But 
many of these relations may be expressed more simply by the infin- 
itive. As a rule when the subject of the subordinate clause is the 
same as that of the principal clause, the infinitive is even preferable 
to the subjunctive, though the latter is grammatically correct. 



§101] LESSON XXXIV 135 

asperges. — C: Le roti a ete" d6ja commande chez le 
boucher, c'est un gigot de mouton; mais il est possible 
qu'on ne puisse pas le faire cuire a temps. — Mme: Je ne 
pense pas que nous ayons le diner avant sept heures et 
demie. Cela vous donnera assez de temps pour tout 
faire. — C: Je crains que je ne puisse pas trouver de 
petite chicoree pour la salade; en ce cas d£sirez-vous que 
je choisisse de la laitue? — Mme: Bien sur; il est bon 
aussi que vous commandiez des petits pois, des haricots 
verts, des choux-fleurs, et des carrottes comme legumes. 
— C: Quelle sorte d'entremets voulez-vous, un pouding 
ou une creme quelconque? — Mme: II vaut mieux que 
nous ayons de la glace. Cela sera tres facile a comman- 
der, et nous n'aurons pas la peine de la preparer a la mai- 
son. — C: Pensez-vous qu'il faille avoir du fromage? — 
Mme: Moi, je ne mange jamais de fromage, mais en 
France il faut toujours qu'on serve du fromage avant le 
dessert. — C: Et enfin que voulez-vous que je cherche 
pour le dessert? — Mme: C'est dommage qu'il n'y ait pas 
de fraises au marche, mais il se peut que vous puissiez y 
trouver de bonnes poires et des peches. En tout cas, 
faites attention que le dessert soit aussi bon que possible. 
— C: Bien, je ferai de mon mieux. 

For Oral or Written Work. 
1. What do you wish that we have for dinner to-day? 
2. It is necessary that we have something (of) good. My 
mother will come to dine with us. 3. I am sorry that I 
did not know it sooner; it is too late now to prepare any- 
thing special. 4. Prepare the best dinner that you can 
anyway. 5. I have ordered that the roast be here at ten 
o'clock. 6. Do you think that we have any fruit(s) for 
the dessert? 7. No, we have none; what do you desire 
that I get (buy)? 8. Get some grapes and some plums, 



136 LESSON xxxv [§101 

9. I am surprised that you do not wish peaches. They 
are your favorite fruit, are they not? 10. Yes, but I do 
not believe that everyone likes (the) peaches as I like 
them. 11. What is it pleasing to you that I make for 
sweets (entremets)? 12. Make the best pudding that you 
know (how) to make. My mother will be happy (con- 
tented) that you have chosen something to her taste, 
because she likes all kinds of pudding. 13. What vegeta- 
bles do you desire that I choose? 14. I prefer that you 
decide (it) for (par) yourself. It is important that you 
choose the best vegetables that there are in the market. 
15. Have you any further orders to give (anything more 
to order) ? 16. Take care that the roast be not * too well 
done (bien cuit). 17. At what time do you wish that the 
dinner be served? 18. I do not think that my mother 
can arrive before six o'clock; then we shall dine at half- 
past seven (o'clock). 19. May all go well. 20. Have no 
fear; I am sure that you will have no trouble. 

* Note. — After a principal clause containing a negation 
expressed or implied by prendre garde que (take care 
that), il tient (it depends on) and the like, a negative 
subordinate clause uses only ne, not ne . . . pas : Prenez 
garde que vous ne tombiez. Take care that you do 
not fall. 

LESSON XXXV. 
Subjunctive (Continued). 

Madame: Bon soir, ma mere; comme je suis heureuse 
que tu sois venue! Quoique je t'aie envoye le mot bien 
tard, tu as ete assez aimable de venir. — La mere Ce n'est 
pas que je n'aie rien a faire; en effet, je suis tres occupee, 
mais je suis venue a fin que je puisse te revoir avec ta 



§101] LESSON XXXV 137 

famille. II me semble qu'un siecle s'est coule depuis que 
je ne t'aie vue. — Mme: C'est vrai, et il faut que tu restes 
ici bien longtemps jusqu'a ee que nous ayons cause de 
toutes les choses qui nous interessent. — La mere J'aime- 
rais bien rester chez toi, mais il est necessaire que j'aille 
chez moi demain, pourvu qu'il fasse beau. — Mme: Alors 
nous esperons qu'il pleuvra demain, de maniere que nous 
puissions te garder. Xaturellement il n'y a personne, que 
nous voyions avec plus de plaisir que toi, et tout le monde 
dans la famille desire que tu restes au moins une semaine. 
—La mere: Comme tu es aimable! Tu es la meilleure 
fille que je connaisse. Mais nous attendrons jusqu'a 
demain avant que nous nous deeidions. Xon que je 
veuille partir tout de suite, mais il se peut qu'on m'envoie 
une depeche. Ta tante Marie a l'intention de venir nous 
visiter bientot, mais je ne sais* pas quand elle viendra. — 
Mme: En tout cas, il n'y a qu'elle qui puisse t'emmener 
de chez nous cette semaine. Je trouverai du travail qui 
puisse t'occuper plusieurs jours. — Mais comment se porte 
tout le monde dans ta ville? — La mere: Xotre voisin, 
Monsieur Girard, ne se porte pas bien du tout. II est au 
lit. — Mme: C'est dommage qu'il soit malade. Croit-on 
qu'il n'y ait pour lui aucune guerison? — La mere: II n'y 
a qu'une chose qui puisse le guerir, dit le medecin, c'est 
un voyage en Floride. Mais il est impossible qu'il y 
aille pour deux raisons: d'abord, on craint qu'il ne puisse 
pas supporter le voyage, il est deja tres faible; et puis, il 
parait trop pauvre pour payer les frais lui-meme et je 
doute qu'il veuille qu'on l'aicle.- — Mme: Oh comme cela 
est triste! Quoique nous iv ayons pas beaucoup d'argent 
nous-memes, je serai bien contente de lui envoyer quel- 
que chose. II se peut qu'il accepte un cadeau de moi, 

* S avoir usually take the indicative. 



138 LESSON xxxv [§101 

parce qu'il me connait depuis mon enfance. En tout 
cas, il faut que nous tachions de Taider. C'est le moins 
que nous puissions faire. 

For Oral or Written Work. 
1. I am happy that my mother is coming to-day to 
visit us. 2. Do you think that she will arrive this morn- 
ing? 3. No, I do not think that she will arrive before 
evening. 4. Will you go to the station in order that you 
may meet her? 5. In case that my husband does not go, 
I shall try to go (there) myself; but I do not feel at all 
well and I prefer that I stay at home. 6. It is too bad 
that you are sick. Is it possible that I do anything for 
you? 7. I thank you, there is nothing which you can do. 
The best medicine that I know, (it) is rest. 8. Although 
you are tired you keep on working. 9. Yes, but I wish to 
finish that which I have to do, before I stop (myself) for 
rest. 10. You must arrange your work in such a way 
(manner) that you may finish it earlier. 11. It is not that 
I have too much to do ordinarily, but just now (en ce 
moment) I have no maid. 12. It is the same story that 
one hears everywhere. It seems that no one can keep a 
maid very long. 13.- Who can tell what is to be done 
about it (what it is necessary to make of it) ? 14. There 
is no one who understands the situation, I believe. But 
do you wish that I find you a very capable maid? 15. 
Oh yes. It is the last hope that I have. 16. My sister 
and her husband intend to travel in Europe for (during) 
a year. Consequently they will not need their maid. 
She is the best maid that I know and it may be that she 
will come to you during their absence. 17. Do you think 
that she knows how to cook (faire la cuisine) ? 18. I am 
certain that she knows (it) . She makes things very appe- 
tizing at my sister's (home). 19. Then it is well (good) 



§102] 



LESSON XXXVI 



139 



that I write to her at once, in order that I may know if 
she will come. 20. May she come and may you be satis- 
fied with (de) her. 

LESSON XXXVI. 



102. Past Definite (parfait defini). 



avoir 


etre 


aimer 


y eus (I had) 


je fus (I was) 


j' aimai (I loved) 


tu eus 


tu fus 


tu aimas 


il eut 


ilfut 


il aima 


nous etimes 


nous fumes 


nous aimames 


vous eutes 


vous fiites 


vous annates 


ils eurent 


ils furent 


ils aimerent 


finir 


recevoir 


rompre 


je finis (I finished) 


je recus (I received) je rompis (I broke) 


tu finis 


tu recus 


tu rompis 


il finit 


il recut 


il rompit 


nous finimes 


nous recumes 


nous rompimes 


vous finites 


vous rectites 


vous rompites 


ils finirent 


ils recurent 


ils rompirent 



Note a. — The past definite always has the same end- 
ings in the plural, namely, mes for the first person, tes 
for the second, rent for the third. Furthermore there 
is always a circumflex accent in the first and second persons 
plural over the vowel which immediately precedes the 
ending. 

Note b. — Use of the Past Definite. — As its name indi- 
cates, the past definite is used to express a definite, com- 
pleted past action (never, like the imperfect, a continued 
or customary action). In connected discourse it occurs 
chiefly in narration: " Telle fut la bataille de Waterloo. 
Such was the battle of Waterloo. "Ce fut l'origine de 
la Sorbonne." That was the origin of the Sorbonne. 



140 



LESSON XXXVI 



§103 



§ 103. Past Perfect Indicative: Both the plus-que- 
parfait (compound of the imperfect) and the parfait 
anterieur (compound of the past definite) are translated 
by the past perfect of the English, but are used with this 
distinction: The parfait anterieur expresses an action 
performed immediately before another past action : 

Quand j'eus lu ce livre, je sortis. As soon as I had read this 
book, I went out. 

The plus-que-parfait also expresses an action performed 
before another past action, but it may have been a long 
while before: 

J'avais-lu ce livre quand je sortis. I had read this book when 
(or before) I went out (but it may have been ten years before). 





Plus-que-parfait . 




avoir 


etre 


aimer 


j I had 
i avais eu < , , 

,! { had 


. ... j I had 
r avais ete < , 
J { been 


, /lhad 
j avais aime | loved 


tu avais eu 


tu avais ete 


tu avais aime 


il avait eu 


il avait ete 


il avait aime 


nous avions eu 


nous avions ete nous avions aime 


vous aviez eu 


vous aviez ete vous aviez aime 


ils avaient eu 


ils avaient ete 


ils avaient aime 


finir 


recevoir 


rompre 


., . - . / I had 
i 'avais fim < „ . , , 
{ finished 


., . *{lhad . 
javaiSreeU \ received' 1 


j I had 
'avais rompu , , 


etc. 


etc. 
Parfait Anterieur. 


etc. 


avoir 


itre 


aim cr 


i I had 
* euS eU \ had 


_ / I had 
J CUS ete \ been 


A\ had 
f eus aime < . , 
J [ loved 


tu eus eu 


tu eus ete 


tu eus aime 


il eut eu 


il eut ete 


il eut aime 


nous eumes eu 


nous eumes ete nous eumes aime 


vous eutes eu 


vous eutes ete vous eutes aime 


ils eurent eu 


ils eurent ete 


ils eurent aime 



§103] LESSON x^xvi 141 

finir recevoir rompre 

. / I had ., / I had ., j I had 

j eus fini i _ . . I'eus recu < , J eusrompu \ , , 

(_ finished ,! v [ received i broken 

etc. etc. etc. 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

"Bataille de Waterloo (18 juin 1815).— Napoleon de- 
vait au moms, le 17 juin, accabler les Anglais; il se mit 
trop tard a leur poursuite, et le lendemain seulement il les 
attaqua, et seulement a onze heures. Les Anglais avaient 
eu le temps de se retrancher dans une forte position sur 
le plateau du Mont-Saint-Jean, ayant leur droite au 
chateau d'Hougoumont, leur centre a la Haie-Sainte, leur 
gauche dominant le ruisseau de Smohain; ils etaient 
adosses a la foret de Soignies, sans aucun moyen de 
retraite. Les Frangais etaient masses sur les hauteurs de 
Plancenoit et de la Belle Alliance. Napoleon menaga la 
droite des Anglais, pour envelopper leur gauche et empe- 
cher leur jonction avec Blucher. II esperait d'ailleurs 
que Grouchy arreterait les Prussiens. Le premier acte 
fut a Pavantage des Francais; le chateau d'Hougoumont 
et la Haie-Sainte furent enleves. Ney commenca alors 
ses attaques contre le Mont-Saint-Jean. 

Le second acte laissa Tavantage indecis, malgre la 
fureur des attaques; une canonnade s'etait produite a 
notre droite: Ton esperait Grouchy: c 'et ait T avant-garde 
prussienne qui debouchait sous les ordres de Billow. 
Napoleon fut force de detacher 12,000 hommes sous le 
comte de Lobau, et il enjoignit a Ney d'enlever a tout 
prix les positions anglaises. Trois fois les heroiques 
cuirassiers de Milhaud et de Kellermann, apres avoir 
escalade les cretes du plateau du Mont-Saint-Jean, le 
sillonerent dans toute son et endue, enfongant les carres 
anglais; trois fois ils reculerent sous d'effroyables de- 



142 • LESSON XXXVI [§103 

charges. Ney n'avait pas d'infanterie pour appuyer les 
cavaliers. II ne pensa pas a utiliser les regiments du 
corps de Reille, alors inactifs. ' De rinfanterie! Ney 
veut-il que j'en fasse? ' repondait l'Empereur aux de- 
mandes pressantes du marechal. L'attaque des Prus- 
siens a notre droite l'avait oblige a detacher sur Plance- 
noit une partie de la garde. 

Vers sept heures, le gros de 1'armee de Blucher appro- 
chait, et deja son lieutenant Ziethen prenait contact avec 
1'armee anglaise: c'est* le troisieme acte, le desastre. 
Ney va faire un supreme effort pour enlever les positions 
anglaises.. Napoleon lui donne cinq bataillons de la garde 
qui gravissent lentement les pentes du Mont-Saint-Jean. 
Mais, sous le feu des gardes de Maitland qui couronnent 
la crete, la garde recule! Elle recule aussi devant les 
masses profondes de Blucher. Anglais, Prussiens, for- 
mant maintenant une seule et immense ligne en equerre, 
rejetent dans le ravin et jusqu'au pied de la Belle-Alliance 
nos troupes en desordre: c'est la deroute qui commence. 
En vain Ney, qui a eu cinq chevaux tues sous lui et n'a 
echappe que par miracle a la mort, se cramponne a ce 
fatal champ de bataille. Seuls, les derniers carres de la 
vieille garde, sous le valeureux Cambronne, protegent la 
retraite, pendant que la cavalerie prussienne poursuit a 
travers champs, dans la nuit, les debris de la Grande Armee. 

Telle fut la bataille de Waterloo, du nom du quartier 
general d'ou Wellington data son bulletin de victoire." 
— Histoire Contemporaine, par R. Jalliffier. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. The Battle of Waterloo took place June 18, 1815. 
2. Napoleon began too late the pursuit of the English. 

* Notice the change of tense to the present for vivid narration. 



§104] LESSON XXXVII 143 

3. He attacked them the next day at eleven o'clock. 4. 
The English had had time to take a strong position. 5. 
Napoleon threatened the English on their right. 6. He 
tried to hinder their meeting with Blucher. 7. The first 
act was to our advantage. 8. The castle of Hougoumont 
was taken. 9. Ney began at once his attack on (against) 
Mont-Saint- Jean. 10. The second act was indecisive. 
11. We heard a cannonading at our right. 12. The van- 
guard of the Prussians suddenly appeared. 13. Napoleon 
was forced to send 12,000 men against them. 14. He 
commanded Ney to force the English from their position 
at any price. 15. Three times the brave soldiers of Mil- 
hand broke through the English squares. 16. Three times 
they withdrew. 17. Ney did not think of using as infan- 
try the inactive regiments. 18. Ney made a supreme 
effort to take the English positions. 19. The guard was 
forced to withdraw under the firing of the soldiers who 
crowned the summit. 20. The flight was commenced. 

21. The last squares of the old guard protected the retreat. 

22. The Prussian cavalry pursued through the fields in the 
night the wreck of the Great Army. 23. The Battle of 
Waterloo was named after (from) the headquarters from 
which Wellington dated his announcement of the victory. 



LESSON XXXVII. 

§ 104. The Imperfect Subjunctive. The imperfect 
subjunctive in all French verbs is formed on the same 
stem as the past definite of the indicative. Its charac- 
teristic is ss, which occurs in all forms except the third 
singular; that always ends in t and always has a circum- 
flex accent over the preceding vowel. 



144 



LESSON XXXVII 



§§105-106 



avoir 
(that I might have) 
que j'eusse 
que tu eusses 
qu' il eiit 
que nous eussions 
que vous eussiez 
qu' ils eussent 



finir 
que je finisse 
que tu finisses 
qu' il finit 
que nous finissions 
que vous finissiez 
qu' ils finissent 



etre 
(that 1 might be) 
que je fusse 
que tu fusses 
qu' il fut 
que nous fussions 
que vous fussiez 
qu' ils fussent 

recevoir 



aimer 
(that I might love) 
que j'aimasse 
que tu aimasses 
qu' il aimat 
que nous aimassions 
que vous aimassiez 
qu' ils aimassent 



rompre 

que je rompisse 

que tu rompisses 

qu' il rompit 

que nous rompissions 

que vous rompissiez 

qu' ils rompissent 



que je recusse 

qu tu recusses 
qu' il recut 
que nous recussions 
que vous recussiez 

qu' ils recussent 

Note a. — In the second conjugation, the imperfect subjunctive is 
like the present subjunctive except in the third singular. 

Note b. — The second and fourth conjugations, if regular, have 
their endings of the imperfect subjunctive alike: isse, isses, it, etc. 

§ 105. The pluperfect subjunctive is formed by adding 
the past participle of the verb conjugated to the imperfect 
subjunctive of the auxiliary: que j'eusse ete, that I might 
have been; que nous fussions arrives, that we might have 
arrived. 

Note a. — This tense is not commonly used, but it may be substi- 
tuted in an if clause for the pluperfect indicative and in a principal 
clause for the perfect conditional in a literary style. 

§ 106. Sequence of Tenses. Present or future time in 
the principal clause requires the present tense of the sub- 
junctive in the subordinate clause; past time or the con- 
ditional mode in the principal clause requires ordinarily 
the imperfect tense of the subjunctive in the subordinate 
clause. Compound tenses of the subjunctive usually fol- 
low the same law as if the auxiliary stood alone. 



LESSON XXXVII _ J| 145 

EXERCISE XXXVII. 
L'Education d'un Jeune Marquis. 

" Le pere et la mere donnerent d'abord uri gouverneur 
au jeune marquis. Ce gouverneur, qui etait un homme 
de bel air, et qui ne savait rien, ne put rien enseigner a 
son pupille. Monsieur voulait que son fils apprit le latin; 
madame ne le voulait pas. ' Mais qu'apprendra-t-il done? 
car encore faut-il qu'il sache quelque chose: ne pourrait- 
on pas lui montrer un peu de geographie? ' ' A quoi cela 
lui servira-t-il? ' repondit le gouverneur. - Quand mon- 
sieur le marquis ira dans ses terres, les postilions ne 
sauront-ils pas les chemins? ils ne l'egareront certaine- 
ment pas; on n'a pas besoin d'un quart de cercle pour 
voyage*r, et on va tres commodement de Paris en Au- 
vergne sans qu'il soit besoin de savoir sous quelle latitude 
on se trouve.' — ' Vous avez raison,' repliqua le pere; 
' mais j'ai entendu parler d'une belle science qu'on 
appelle, je crois, l'astronomie.' — ' Quelle pitie,' repartit 
le gouverneur; ' se conduit-on par les astres dans ce 
monde? Et faudra-t-il que monsieur le marquis se tue 
a calculer une eclipse, quand il la trouve a point nomme 
dans ralmanach, qui lui enseigne de plus les fetes mobiles, 
l'age de la lune et celuide toutes les princesses de l'Europe.' 

" Madame fut entierement de Tavis du gouverneur. 
Le petit marquis etait au comble de la joie; le pere etait 
tres indecis. ( Que faudra-t-il done apprendre a mon 
fils? ' disait-il. ' A etre aimable,' repondit Tami que Ton 
consultait; ' et s'il sait les moyens de plaire, il saura tout.' 

" La marquise lui dit: ' On voit bien, monsieur, que 
vous etes Thomme du monde le plus savant; mon fils 
vous devra toute son education; je m'imagine pourtant 
qu'il ne serait pas mal qu'il sut un peu d'histoire? — 



146 LESSON XXXVII 

1 Helas! madame, a quoi cela est-il bon,' repondit-il: 
' toutes les histoires anciennes ne sont que des fables 
convenues, et pour les modernes, c'est un chaos qu'on 
ne peut debrouiller.' — 'Rien n'est mieux dit!' s'ecria le 
gouverneur; ' on etouffe l'esprit des enfants sous un 
amas de connaissances inutiles ; mais de toutes les sciences 
la plus absurde, a mon avis, et celle qui est la plus capable 
d'etouffer toute espece de genie, c'est la geometric' . . . 
Enfin, apres avoir examine le fort et le faible des sciences, 
il fut decide que Monsieur le marquis apprendrait a 
danser." — Voltaire. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. A father and mother wished that their son receive a 
good education. 2. First, they gave a tutor to their son. 
3. This tutor knew nothing and consequently could teach 
nothing to his pupil. 4. The father wished that his son 
learn (the) Latin. 5. The mother did not wish it. 6. 
" But he must know something," said the father. 7. 
Then the father wished that the boy learn geography. 
8. The tutor did not think that his pupil had need of 
geography. 9. " Do you think that the postilions do not 
know the roads? " said the tutor. 10. And would one 
be obliged to know in what latitude he was, in order that 
he might travel? 11. The father had heard tell of a 
science which they called astronomy. 12. The tutor re- 
gretted that the father had thought of that. 13. The 
father was astonished that the tutor did not know astron- 
omy. 14. Would it be necessary that the boy kill himself 
calculating an eclipse, when he could find all that in an 
almanac? 15. The small boy was delighted that he was 
not obliged to learn astronomy. 16. The mother thought 
that it would not be bad if (that) he knew a little his- 



LESSON XXXVIII 



147 



tory. 17. " Geometry," the tutor said, " is the most 
absurd of all sciences." 18. Finally it was decided that 
the boy should learn to dance. 



LESSON XXXVIII. 
Chez le Tailleur. 

Bonjour, Monsieur A. Qu'y a-t-il pour votre service 
aujourd'hui? 

Ce vetement que je porte commence a paraitre use; 
j'en veux un autre. 

Bien. Voulez-vous seulement un veston ou un cos- 
tume complet? 

Je veux un costume complet — pantalon, gilet, et veston 
— quelque chose pour porter tous les jours dans les 
affaires. 

Tres bien. Je puis vous donner precisement ce que 
vous voulez. 

Je n'espere rien trouver dans les confections. Les vete- 
ments tout faits ne me vont jamais. 

Alors vous preferez vous faire habiller sur mesure. 

Oui, si vous pouvez me faire un costume tout de suite. 

Parfaitement. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte d'oter votre 
paletot; je vous prendrai mesure a l'instant. 

Maintenant si nous choisissons l'etoffe. Quelles sortes 
d'etoffe avez-vous? 

Toutes sortes. Nous avons des etoffes en laine, en 
toile, en coton, mais naturellement vous voulez du drap. 
Comment trouvez-vous cette etoffe grise? 

Je la trouve un peu trop sombre pour un costume de 
printemps. N'avez-vous rien de plus clair? 



148 LESSON XXXVIII 

Si, Monsieur. Voila quelque chose a votre gout, je crois. 

Oui, cette etoffe me plait beaucoup. Quelle doublure 
peut-on employer? 

Vous pouvez la doubler en soie, en satin, en coton. Je 
vous engage a choisir cette doublure-ci. Cela se porte 
tres bien. 

C'est cela. Vous savez mieux que personne ce qu'on 
doit employer. 

Comment voulez-vous la fagon de votre costume? 

Je tiens a ce que ce soit fait dans une fagon a la mode 
et en meme temps commode. 

Bien entendu. Un habit, on le porte en soiree, une 
redingote le dimanche, un pardessus en hiver et un pale- 
tot au printemps quand on sort; mais ce que vous voulez 
c'est un veston pour porter dans les affaires, n'est-ce pas? 

Parfaitement, et pour cette raison je desire etre a mon 
aise avec ce costume. 

Ne craignez rien. Je vous comprends parfaitement et 
je vous promets de tout faire a votre gout. 

J'ai oublie de vous demander le prix. 

Ce costume ne vous reviendra par plus cher que celui 
que vous portez. 

Je ne trouve rien a redire a ce prix-la. J'ai achete ces 
vetements assez bon marche. 

Quand avez-vous besoin de ce costume? 

Pouvez-vous le finir pour d'aujourd'hui en huit? 

Je ferai de mon mieux pour le finir a ce moment-la, 
mais nous avons actuellement tant de travail que je n'en 
suis pas stir. 

Quand voulez-vous que je l'essaye? 

Voyons. Passez apres demain. 

C'est bien. Au revoir. . . . 

Je vous demande mille fois pardon; votre costume n'est 



LESSON XXXVIII 149 

pas encore pret pour l'essayage. Mais attendez un ins- 
tant, je vais chercher le veston. 

Que je l'essaye. 

Ah Monsieur, cela vous va a merveille. 

Cependant je ne me sens pas a Taise avec le col, et les 
manches sont trop etroites. II n'est pas assez long de 
taille et il fait des plis entre les epaules. 

Ce sont des riens, des bagatelles, faciles a corriger. Je 
puis y remedier et terminer le costume a temps. 

Ayez bien soin que tout soit fait sans defauts. Je desire 
que mes vetements soient aussi bien ajustes que possible. 

Soyez sans crainte; je vous assure que vous serez tout 
a fait content. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Will you take my measure for a coat? 2. What kind 
of a coat do you wish — a heavy winter overcoat, a spring- 
overcoat, a dress coat, a frock coat, a sack coat? 3. 
I want something to wear every day in business. 4. Do 
you not wish a complete suit? 5. Yes, I think it would 
be better to order the vest and trousers too. 6. Do you 
buy your clothes ready-made or do you have them made 
to order? 7. I prefer to buy them ready-made when it is 
possible, but ordinarily ready-made garments do not fit 
me. 8. Will you have the kindness to try on this coat? 
9. This collar feels better (I feel better with this collar) 
but the sleeves are too short. 10. The coat is too long- 
waisted and it wrinkles on the back. 11. One can easily 
remedy trifles like that. 12. You are wearing a suit that 
fits you marvelously well. 13. Who is your tailor and 
what do you know about him? 14. It is Mr. Turenne. 
He has made my clothes for ten years. 15. I have no 
fault to find with him. 16. Let us look at the materials 
which you have to sell. 17. Do you want something in 



150 LESSON XXXIX 

silk, in wool, in linen, in cotton, or in satin? 18. Natu- 
rally I want cloth, for a gentleman's complete suit. 19. 
This goods is cheaper than that but not of so good qual- 
ity. 20. Which (cloth) will wear better? 21. What kind 
of lining do you prefer? 22. You know better than I 
what one ought to use. 23. I advise you to have this 
coat lined with satin. 24. What is the price of it a meter? 
25. You can find satin of good enough quality for lining 
for seventy-five cents a (the) meter. 26. Then line it 
with satin and take care that all be done as it ought. 
27. I insist that it fit me well and at the same time that it 
be comfortable. 

'—:>•,_ LESSON XXXIX. 

Chez la Couturiere. 

Madame C. — J'ai besoin d'une robe neuve. Pouvez- 
vous me recommander une couturiere qui travaille bien 
et bon marche? 

Mile S. — Oui, Madame. Allez chez Madame Mar- 
chand, rue de l'Abbe de l'Epee. Elle fait des robes et 
des manteaux bien jolis. 

Mme C. — La connaissez-vous? 

Mile S. — Depuis plusieurs annees. Je fais faire toutes 
mes robes chez elle. 

Mme C. — Alors voulez-vous avoir l'obligeance de m'ac- 
compagner, a fin de me presenter? D'ailleurs, je ne peux 
pas me faire bien comprendre en francais, et vous pourrez 
lui expliquer ce dont j'ai besoin. 

Mile S. — Volontiers, Madame. Quand voulez-vous y 
aller et ou nous donnerons-nous rendezvous? 

Mme C. — Si cela vous convient, je voudrais bien y aller 
demain a dix heures du matin, et je passerai par chez vous. 

Mile S. — A la bonne heure. A demain, alors. . . . 



LESSON XXXIX 151 

Mile S. — Madame Marchand, je vous amene une 
cliente. Permettez-moi de vous presenter Madame C. 

Mme M. — Je suis enchant ee de faire votre connais- 
sance, Madame, et c'est tres aimable a vous, Mademoi- 
selle, de m'amener une cliente. Je vous en suis tres 
obligee. 

Mile S. — II n'y a pas de quoi, Madame. Je suis tou- 
j ours si contente de votre travail moi-meme, que c'est un 
plaisir de vous amener d'autres clientes. 

Mme M. — Merci bien, Mademoiselle. — Et maintenant 
que desire Madame? 

Mme C. — J'aimerais un costume de ville, quelque chose 
de bleu. 

Mme M. — Voulez-vous dire de bleu uni, ou raye, ou 
quadrille? 

Mme C. — Je ne suis pas encore decidee. Quelle etoffe 
est la plus a la mode en ce moment? * 

Mme M. — Cet automme on portera des etoffes rayees, 
mais tout de meme les etoffes unies restent plus longtemps 
a la mode. 

Mme C. — C'est aussi mon avis, et je crois que je trou- 
verai un bleu fonce plus utile que quelque chose d'autre. 

Mile S. — Vous avez des echantillons a montrer, n'est-ce 
pas? 

Mme M. — Certainement. Voici des laines unies, des 
rayureS et des quadrilles. 

Mme C. — Que me conseillez-vous, Mademoiselle? Je 
ne sais que choisir. 

Mile S. — On y trouve tant de jolies choses qu'il est 
difficile de se decider, mais cet echantillon-ci me plait 
beaucoup. 

Mme C. — A moi aussi. Combien en faut-il pour une 
robe, Madame? 



152 LESSON XXXIX 

Mme M. — Cela depend de la mode que vous choisissez. 
Voici des modeles dans la vitrine et des gravures dans ces 
livres. 

Mme C. — Je ne veux pas d'une jupe plissee; Tetoffe 
est trop lourde pour des plis. Je la prefere plus simple. 
Mais n'oubliez pas de border la jupe. 

Mme M. — Bien sur. Nous mettons toujours une bor- 
dure a la jupe. 

Mme C. — Je voudrais bien un corsage comme la jupe 
pour sortir, et une blouse en soie pour porter a diner. 

Mme M. — Comme de juste. 

Mme C— Je prefer erais une robe qui ne se demode pas 
trop vite, et comme vous vous y connaissez mieux que 
moi, je m'en rapporte a vous. Faites au mieux. — A com- 
bien cela montera-t-il? 

Mme M.— Deux cent cinquante francs, tout compris. 

Mme C. — C'est votre dernier prix? 

Mme M. — Toujours, pour des costumes de ville. 

Mme C. — Bien. Faites la robe, et peut-etre plus tard 
j'aurai besoin d'un manteau. 

Mme M.— Je serai bien aise de vous servir, Madame. 

Mme C. — Maintenant, Mademoiselle, allons chez une 
modiste pour acheter des chapeaux. Ce chapeau de paille 
est passe pour l'automme. Je veux faire faire un chapeau 
en velours bleu pour porter avec la robe que je viens de 
commander. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. This dress is worn out. I must have a new one 
made. 2. Do you know a good dressmaker who does 
not ask too high prices? 3. I have always been well 
satisfied with the work of Madame Marchand. 4. She 
has made my dresses for some time and. you can tell 
whether they fit me or not. 5. That dress fits you mar- 



LESSON XL 153 

velously well and is quite in style. 6. Will you go with 
me to the dressmaker's? 7. You could introduce me 
and explain to her what I want. 8. Can't you make 
yourself understood in French? 9. Not very well. I 
understand better than I speak. 10. Do you desire a 
ball dress or a street costume? 11. A street costume; 
something heavy enough for winter. 12. Do you prefer 
the material checked, plain, or striped? 13. I like the 
stripes but ordinarily they do not remain in style so long 
as the plain goods. 14. Can you show me some samples 
from which I can choose? 15. Certainly, and will you 
look at the models in the show windows and at these 
fashion-plates, in order to decide how to have it made? 
16. I like the skirt plaited; that makes (that) one appear 
smaller. 17. How do you want the waist made? 18. 
Make it plain (simple), because I want to wear it under 
a cloak in the street. 19. However, it would be conve- 
nient to have a silk waist which I could wear with this 
skirt at dinner. 20. When will you be able to tell me 
what the price of it will be? 21. I can tell you (it) at 
once. Street costumes always cost fifty dollars. 22. Is 
not that price a little high? 23. But, Madame, think of 
the quality of this goods and of the Parisian style. 24. 
All right. Make the dress in the latest style and send me 
the bill. | 25. Now I want to go to a milliner's to order a 
hat which I can wear with my new dress. 

LESSON XL. 

L'Arrivee a Paris. 

M. X. — Nous approchons de Paris. Preparons nos sacs 
de voyage et nos couvertures pour descendre. 

M. Y. — Le train s'arrete. N'oubliez pas nos malles. 



154 LESSON XL 

M. X. — Non. Descendons. Ou y a-t-il un facteur? 
Ah, en voila un! Facteur, par ici. Portez ces sacs de 
voyage dans une voiture. Mettez les a l'interieur. — 
Maintenant ou se trouvent nos malles? 

F. — Dans la salle des bagages, n'est-ce pas, Monsieur? 

M. X. — Mais non. Nous sommes venus d'Amerique et 
nos malles sont en entrepot. Par consequent elles doivent 
etre a la douane. Ou est la douane? 

F. — Par ici, Messieurs. Vos bulletins de bagages, s'il 
vous plait. 

M. X. — Venez, Monsieur Y. II faut reconnaitre nos 
malles et les ouvrir pour la visite. 

M. Y. — Voila la mienne! 

M. X. — Et la mienne aussi. 

Le douanier. — Avez-vous quelque chose a declarer? — de 
la liqueur, du tabac, des cigares, des allumettes? 

Tous les deux. — Non, rien du tout. Faut-il ouvrir? 

Le douanier. — Ouvrez cette malle-ci. (Fouillant dans 
la malle.) C'est assez. (II marque chaque malle.) 

M. X. — Maintenant, facteur, portez ces malles aussi 
dans la voiture. (Au cocher:) Vous avez mis nos sac de 
voyage a l'exterieur, je vous ai dit de les mettre a Tinte- 
rieur. II est certain qu'il ne "faut pas payer des colis aussi 
petits que ceux-ci. Voici nos malles. Mettez les a l'exte- 
rieur et les sacs de voyage a l'interieur devant nous. 
Allons! 

Facteur. — Me voici, Monsieur. Ne m'oubliez pas. 

M. X. — Ah oui. Voyons! Vous avez porte deux malles 
et deux sacs. Qa fait un franc. Tenez. 

F. — Mais le pourboire, Monsieur. 

M. X. — Toujours les pourboires! Voila vingt-cinq 
centimes. 

F. — Merci bien, Monsieur. 



LESSON XL 155 

M. X. — Cocher, donnez-moi votre bulletin, s'il vous 
plait. (Le cocher lui donne un petit papier, qui contient 
le numero de la voiture et les conditions de transport.) 
Conduisez nous au Grand Hotel du Louvre. 

M. Y. — Avez-vous demande le prix au cocher? 

M. X. — Non, le prix est regie par la loi et le tarif est 
ecrit sur ce bulletin. 

M. Y. — Alors, combien avons-nous a payer? 

M. X. — Le tarif est un franc cinquante la course, pen- 
dant le jour et en dedans des fortifications. Et puis 
vingt-cinq centimes (cinq sous) pour chaque colis mis a 
l'exterieur de la voiture a cote du cocher — il n'est pas ne- 
cessaire de payer pour des colis mis a Tinterieur. Nous 
avons deux malles dehors. La course, un franc cinquante; 
deux malles, cinquante centimes; ga fait deux francs, et 
le pourboire. La plupart des voitures a Paris, toutefois, 
portent maintenant un taximetre, qui indique combien il 
faut payer. 

M. Y. — Le cocher s'arrete. Nous sommes deja arrives, 
je crois. 

M. X. — Oui, descendons. Attendez un instant, cocher, 
jusqu'a ce que je demande si on a une chambre libre ici. 
(Au gargon de I'hdtel:) Avez-vous une chambre a deux lits? 

Gargon. — Oui, Monsieur. Ces messieurs veulent-ils la 
voir? 

M. X.— S'il vous plait. 

G.— Yoici l'ascenseur, Messieurs. La chambre est au 
deuxieme. 

M. X. — Ou donne cette fenetre? 

G. — Sur la rue, Monsieur. 

M. X. — Je ne veux pas de chambre sur le devant de la 
maison. II y a toujours tant de bruit qu'on ne peut pas 
dormir. N' avez-vous pas de chambre libre sur une 



156 LESSON XL 

cour interieure ou quelque part plus tranquille qu'ici? 

G. — Si, Monsieur. Par ici, s'il vous plait. 

M. X. — Ah, j'aime cette chambre beaucoup mieux. 
Qu'en pensez-vous, Monsieur Y? 

M. Y. — Elle me plait aussi. 

M. X.— Quel en est le prix? 

G. — C'est dix francs par jour chaque personne, tout 
compris. 

M. X. — Ce n'est pas cher pour Paris. Nous retenons 
cette chambre. Faites payer le cocher et faites monter 
nos bagages, s'il vous plait. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. We shall land at six o'clock to-night. 2. How long 
does it take to go from Havre to Paris? 3. Let us send 
our trunks under bond, in order not to be obliged to open 
them before arriving at Paris. 4. Here we are; the train 
is stopping. 5. Porter, take our bags to (in) a carriage. 
6. Where is the custom-house? 7. Have you anything to 
declare? 8. Nothing at all. Must we open our trunks? 
9. Yes, it is necessary to open both. 10. Have you any- 
thing in the baggage-room? 11. No, nothing. We came 
from New York, consequently everything is in the cus- 
tom-house. 12. Porter, -put our trunks outside and our 
bags inside of the carriage. 13. Surely we do not wish to 
pay for small packages. 14. Coachman, I see that you 
have no taximeter; how much do you ask to take us 
from here to the Grand Hotel of the Louvre? 15. Four 
francs! That is too much. 16. Give me your bulletin 
(or number). 17. Let us see the tariff. One franc fifty 
(centimes) for the course and twenty-five centimes per 
piece of baggage {colis) put outside. 18. That makes 
exactly two francs. 19. Take us at once to the Grand 



LESSON XLI 157 

Hotel of the Louvre. 20. Wait a minute, I wish to inquire 
if they have a vacant room here. 21. Have you a room 
with (d) two beds, not too dear. 22. Yes, sir. Will the 
gentlemen take the elevator? 23. It is not light enough 
in this room; I do not like it. 24. Here is another, gen- 
tlemen. 25. Oh, this one pleases me much better. What 
do you think of it, my friend? 26. What is the price of 
it? 27. Ten francs a day is not too dear for Paris. 28. 
We engage this room. Send up our baggage and (make 
to) pay the coachman, please. 

LESSON XLI. 
A Paris. 

Si nous sortions aujourd'hui pour jeter un coup d'ceil 
sur les monuments et les batiments publics de la ville 
avant de les visiter en detail. 

Bien. Comment irons-nous? 

Prenons d'abord un omnibus. 

Combien paye-t-on en omnibus? 

Si on entre a l'interieur, six sous, mais si on monte sur 
Pimperiale (en haut), on ne pave que trois sous. Cepen- 
dant, avec une correspondance, c'est toujours trente 
centimes (six sous). 

II me semble que Paris a les moyens pour transporter 
le mosde entier. Voila le Metropolitan! avec ses trains 
souterrains toutes les trois minutes, des tramways, des 
omnibus, et des voitures partout. 

Oui, et avez-vous remarque qu'a Paris le systenie est 
tout autre qu'aux Etats-L"nis? Ici c'est defendu par la loi 
de laisser entrer dans un omnibus ou dans un tramwa} 7 plus 
de gens qu'il n'y a de places pour s'asseoir. II me semble 
que chez nous aussi il devrait y avoir une loi contre cela. 



158 LESSON XLI 

Que faut-il faire alors, si on veut prendre un omnibus 
a Paris? 

II faut aller au coin ou cet omnibus s'arrete et ou se 
trouve une petite station. Dans cette station vous 
prenez un numero et puis vous attendez votre tour. 
Quelquefois s'il y a foule, et si votre numero n'est pas des 
premiers, il faut laisser passer plusieurs omnibus avant 
de pouvoir monter. 

Ah, maintenant je comprends pourquoi j'ai vu circuler 
des omnibus ou des tramways avec l'enseigne " Com- 
plete 

Oui, cela veut dire qu'il n'y a plus de place. Voila 
justement l'omnibus que nous voulions est complet et 
beaucoup de personnes attendent. Nous prendrons une 
voiture a heure. — Cette rue qui passe devant l'hotel est 
la Rue de Rivoli, une des plus importantes de Paris. 
Tout le long de la rue, il y a des boutiques bien attray- 
antes. Le grand batiment en face est le Palais du Louvre, 
autrefois le palais des rois, mais maintenant le musee 
national d'art. Dans ce petit pare vous voyez la statue 
equestre de La Fayette, offerte a la France par les enfants 
des ecoles des fitats-Unis. J'assistai aux discours quand 
on la devoila le 4 juillet, 190„0. 

Quel est ce monument plus grand devant cet autre pare? 

C'est le monument de Gambetta, un homme d'Etat, 
qui a organise la defense nationale, pendant la guerre de 
1870-71. II s'est echappe de Paris dans un ballon pen- 
dant la siege, mais malgre ses efforts il n'a pas pu empecher 
la capitulation de la ville. 

Voila un arc quelconque. Qu'est-ce que e'est? 

C'etait 1'entree principale des Tuileries avant que ce 
palais ne fut demoli. En passant par le Jardin des Tuile- 
ries, nous arrivons sur la Place de la Concorde, la plus 



LESSON XLI 159 

belle et plus grande place de Paris et une des plus belles 
places du monde. Au milieu se trouve un obelisque 
apporte d'Egypte sous Louis-Philippe. 

Quelles fontaines charmantes a droite et a gauche de 
l'obelisque! 

Oui, elles sont jolies. Mais que de tristesses et de 
souffrances cette place a vues! 

Comment cela? 

C'etait sur cette place que la guillotine etait elevee 
pendant la Revolution de 1789. Vous vous rappelez que 
Louis XVI a ete guillotine le 21 Janvier, 1793; la reine, 
la malheureuse Marie- Antoinette, le 16 octobre de la 
meme annee, et que pendant le Temps de la Terreur a 
peu pres deux mille huit cents personnes y ont ete exe- 
cutees. 

Comme c'est triste et terrible! On ne peut guere penser 
a ces choses-la sans un sentiment d'horreur. 

C'est vrai. Avant de quitter la Place de la Concorde, 
regardez les huit statues en pierre qui l'entourent. Elles 
representent les villes principales de France. 

Qu'est-ce que veulent signifier toutes ces guirlandes 
funeraires sur la statue de Strasbourg? 

On la decore toujours avec des couronnes, comme des 
marques de deuil, depuis la guerre de 1870-71, quand la 
France fut forcee de ceder l'Alsace et la Lorraine a l'Alle- 
magne. Au bout de cette rue a notre droite, vous voyez 
la fagade de l'Eglise de la Madeleine. 

C'est comme un temple grec, n'est-ce pas? 

Oui, et elle est grande et imposante. — De l'autre cote 
de la Seine, a notre gauche, se trouve le palais de la 
Chambre des Deputes. Nous suivons maintenant les 
Champs Elysees, la plus fameuse promenade de Paris. 

Quel est cet arc que je vois au bout? 



160 LESSON XLI 

C'est l'Arc de Triomphe de l'Etoile, commence par 
Napoleon I. L'Etoile, vous le voyez, consiste en douze 
avenues qui rayonnent autour de Tare. Maintenant que 
nous avons assez vu pour aujourd'hui, allons au Bois de 
Boulogne. 

Qu'est-ce que c'est que ce Bois? 

C'est un beau pare de plus de deux mille " acres " et 
la promenade favorite des Parisiens. Entre trois et cinq 
heures de l'apres-midi, on y peut voir le monde elegant 
de Paris. Nous irons au restaurant pour y prendre une 
tasse de the, des biscuits, peut-etre des gateaux et des 
bonbons. . 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Shall we have time to take a walk before dinner? 
2. I think so. Let us go to the Triumphal Arch of the 
Star. 3. Here is a statue of La Fayette in this little park. 
4. The school children of the United States gave that 
statue to France. 5. I was present when it was unveiled, 
the fourth of July, 1900. 6. There is another small park 
and a large monument in front of it. 7. That is the 
monument of Gambetta, a hero and statesman of France. 
8. What did he do for his country? 9. During the siege of 
Paris, he escaped from the city in a balloon and organized 
the national defense. 10. But unfortunately he could not 
prevent the capitulation. 11. It was not his fault, how- 
ever. 12. That arch which you see yonder was formerly 
the principal entrance to the Tuileries. 13. Napoleon I 
caused to be placed on this arch the famous bronze horses 
from St. Mark's Cathedral in Venice. 14. This garden 
where we are standing is the site of the old Palace of the 
Tuileries. 15. The Place de la Concorde is a beautiful 
square but what suffering it has seen! 16. The guillotine 
was set up here during the French Revolution. 17. Dur- 



LESSON XLII 161 

ing the Reign of Terror, more than two thousand persons 
were executed here. 18. Have you noticed the obelisk 
in the center and the fountains at either (each) side? 
19. The eight statues at the corners of the Square repre- 
sent the principal cities of France. 20. That of Stras- 
bourg is always covered with funeral wreaths, because 
France was forced to cede this city to Germany in 1870. 
21. It is time now to return to the hotel for dinner. 



LESSON XLII. 

Bonaparte et la Sentinelle. 

Apres la conquete d'Arcole,* l'infatigable Bonaparte 
parcourait le camp dans la nuit. II apercoit une sentinelle 
endormie; il lui enleve, doucement et sans Teveiller, son 
fusil, fait la faction a sa place, attend qu'on vienne le 
relever. Le soldat s'eveille enfin. Quel est son trouble 
quand il apercoit son general dans cette attitude! II fait 
un cri: " Bonaparte, je suis perdu! " " Rassure-toi, mon 
ami," lui repond le general; " apres tant de fatigues, il 
est bien permis a un brave comme toi de s'endormir, mais 
une autre fois, choisis mieux ton temps." 

For Oral or Written Work. 

lrwho was Bonaparte? 2. Do you think him a great 
general? 3. What did he do for France? 4. Had he the 
right to make himself emperor? 5. By a stroke of state 
{coup d'etat), he converted the First French Republic 
into (en) the First Empire. 6. By a similar stroke his 
nephew converted the Second Republic into the Second 

* Small borough in Lombardy, famous for battle between French 
and Austrians, November, 1796. 



162 LESSON XLIII 

Empire and became Napoleon III. 7. The government of 
France to-day is the Third Republic. 8. The officer at 
the head of a republic is called a president. 9. After what 
battle did the incident in our lesson take place? 10. 
What was Bonaparte doing? 11. Whom did he find 
asleep? 12. Did he waken the sentinel? 13. No, he took 
the sentinel's gun and went on guard himself. 14. Was 
it a serious offense to go to sleep while on guard? 15. 
What was the feeling of the sentinel when he awoke? 16. 
What punishment had he the right to expect? 17. What 
did the sentinel do when he saw his general? 18. What 
did he say? 19. What reply did Bonaparte make? 20. 
Was Bonaparte always kind to his soldiers? 21. What 
was the secret of his power? 22. Will you name some of 
the great generals of the world? 23. Of these which do 
you think was greatest ? 24. How would Bonaparte com- 
pare with our Washington? 



LESSON XLIII. 

Henry IV et Sully. 

Des envieux, des calomniatures etaient parvenus a 
alterer Tamitie qui subsistait depuis longtemps entre 
Henry IV* et Sully t; le caractere franc et le bon coeur 
de Henri en souffraient singulierement. Un jour, il par- 
tait pour la chasse; Sully le quittait — " Ou allez-vous? " 
lui dit le roi, qui ne cherchait qu'a entamer la conversa- 
tion. — " A Paris, sire," repondit Sully, " pour les affaires 
dont Votre Majeste m'a parle." — " Eh bien! allez," re- 
pliqua le monarque, " je vous recommande toujours mes 

* King of France, born 1553, died 1610. First of the Bourbon line. 
tThe king's minister, born 1559, died 1641. 



LESSON XLIII 163 

affaires et que vous m'aimiez bien." Ensuite il le laissa 
partir. Mais a peine Sully avait-il fait quelques pas que 
Henri le rappela: " N'avez-vous rien a me dire? " lui 
demanda-t-il. — " Non, pour le present/' repondit Sully. — 
" Aussi ai-je bien, moi, a vous dire," dit le roi. Et il le 
prit par la main, et le mena, a la vue de toute sa cour, 
dans une allee du jardin. L'explication fut courte; Sully 
eut en quelques instants recouvre l'estime du roi; et le 
prince entremela cette reconciliation de (with) tant de 
regrets de s'etre laisse prevenir, de tant de promesses 
d'une confiance et d'une amitie inalterables, que le due, 
emporte par sa reconnaissance, voulut se jeter a ses pieds 
pour le remercier. Plus prompt que Sully, Henri le prend 
dans ses bras: " Ne le faites pas," dit-il; " ceux qui nous 
regardent croiraient que vous me demandez grace." II 
l'embrasse alors, avec un geste plein d'affection, et 
rentrant dans le cercle des courtisans qui les examinaient 
avec curiosite, il leur dit: — " Messieurs, j'aime Sully plus 
que jamais; et entre lui et moi, e'est a {for) la vie et a la 
mort." 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Henry IV was one of the ablest kings of France. 
2. His favorite minister was Sully. 3. For a long time 
an intimate friendship had existed between the king and 
his minister. 4. Some envious people had succeeded in 
changing this friendship. 5. Henry was a man of frank 
character and of good heart. 6. And because he really 
loved Sully, this estrangement made him suffer. 7. The 
king desired that they be friends as formerly. 8. One 
day, Henry was preparing himself for hunting (the chase). 
9. As he took leave of Sully, the king tried to begin a 
conversation. 10. To the king's question, " Where are 
you going? " Sully replied, " To Paris, for Your Majesty's 



164 LESSON XLIV 

business." 11. " May the business go well and may you 
always love me," said the king. 12. " But what more 
have you to say to me? " 13. lc Nothing for the pres- 
ent," replied the minister. 14. " Then I shall have 
something to say to you presently." 15. In the sight of 
all the court, the king took Sully by the hand. 16. 
They both went into a corner of the garden. 17. There 
a short explanation took place. 18. In a few moments, 
Sully had fully recovered the friendship of the king. 
19. Both regretted that they had allowed caluminators 
to prejudice them against each other. 20. They promised 
each other (a) complete confidence, and (an) unchange- 
able friendship for life and for death. 



LESSON XLIV. 
Le Predicateur Anglais. 

Une aventure assez desagreable est arrivee a un predi- 
cateur anglais, qui a l'habitude de faire de nombreux 
emprunts aux sermons d'autrui. 

Un vieillard a Fair grave* s'assied non loin du predica- 
teur. A peine ce dernier a-t-il commence sa troisieme 
phrase, que l'etranger murmure d'une voix assez haute 
pour etre entendu de ses voisins: " Qa, c'est de Sher- 
lock! " Le predicateur fronce les sourcils, mais il con- 
tinue. Un instant apres, son terrible interrupt eur mur- 
mure: " Qa, c'est de Tillotson! " Le predicateur se mord 
les levres de depit; il fait une pause, puis il se decide a 
reprendre le fil de son discours. Mais il ne tarde pas a 
etre de nouveau interrompu par un: " Qsl, c'est de 
Blair! " C'en est trop. La patience du predicateur est 



LESSON XLIV 165 

completement a bout. II se penche sur le bord de la 
chaire et crie a l'etranger: " Si vous ne retenez pas votre 
langue, vous serez mis a la porte, entendez-vous, imperti- 
nent? " L'etranger n'est pas desoriente par cette brusque 
interpellation. II releve la tete, regarde le predicateur en 
face, et dit: " Qsl, c'est de vous! " 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. An English preacher had a disagreeable adventure. 
2. This preacher had the habit of borrowing ideas. 3. 
His sermons were not original, but contained numerous 
loans from the sermons of others. 4. Not that he made 
quotations, because he did not give credit to the authors. 
5. An old man discovered this fault and decided to cor- 
rect it. 6. One Sunday he seated himself toward the 
front of the church, not far from the preacher. 7. The 
latter had just begun his third sentence. 8. What was 
his surprise to suddenly hear the stranger say, " That is 
from Sherlock." 9. The old man spoke loud enough to 
be heard by all the people in the church. 10. The preacher 
frowned and bit his lips, but went on. 11. Several times 
he was interrupted by the stranger. 12. He was embar- 
rassed and lost the thread of his discourse. 13. His 
patience was completely at an end. 14. Everybody 
waited to see what would happen. 15. When a man 
gets angry it is probable that something will happen. 
16. If this man is a preacher, one surely does not know 
what (it is necessary) to expect. 17. Finally the preacher 
leaned over the edge of the pulpit. 18. He cried to the 
stranger, " Keep still or I will put you out of doors." 
19. The old man was not at all disconcerted. 20. He 
looked calmly at the preacher and said. " That is orig- 
inal." 



166 LESSON XLV 

LESSON XLV. 

Frederic II et le Soldat Francais. 

Le roi Frederic II avait coutume, toutes les fois qu'un 
nouveau soldat paraissait au nombre de ses gardes, tous 
tires de la fleur de ses regiments, de lui faire ces trois 
questions: " Quel age avez-vous? — Depuis combien de 
temps etes-vous a mon service? — Recevez-vous exacte- 
ment votre paye et votre habillement ? " Un jeune Fran- 
cais, que sa figure et sa taille avaient fait adopter, mais 
qui ne savait pas l'allemand, fut prevenu par son capi- 
taine d'apprendre, par memoire, la reponse a ces trois 
questions. II parait devant le roi, qui, commencant par 
la seconde question, lui demande: " Combien y a-t-il que 
vous etes a mon service? " — " Vingt et un ans, sire." — 
" Comment! vingt et un ans! Et quel age avez-vous? " 
— " Sire, un an, sous le bon plaisir de Votre Majeste."— 
" Vous ou moi avons perdu Pesprit." — " L'un et l'autre, 
sire, tres exactement." — " Voila la premiere fois que je 
suis traite de fou a la tete de l'armee." Le jeune Fran- 
cais, qui avait epuise tout *ce qu'il savait d'allemand, 
gardait le silence le plus profond. Quand le roi s'avisa de 
le questionner de nouveau, il fut oblige d'avouer qu'il 
n'entendait pas la langue allemande. 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Of what country was Frederick II king? 2. Where 
did he find his guards? 3. They were all drawn from the 
best soldiers in his regiments. 4. What questions was he 
accustomed to ask each new soldier? 5. Did he always 
ask these questions in the same order? 6. Why was this 



LESSON XLVI 167 

young Frenchman in the German army? 7. Did he know 
the German language? 8. Is it not a little dangerous to 
speak with a king whose language is unknown to you? 
9. Who told the Frenchman to learn the replies to these 
three questions? 10. Was it not, then, more the fault of 
the captain than that of the soldier? 11. With which 
question did the king commence? 12. Was the king sur- 
prised that the young Frenchman had been in the Ger- 
man army twenty-one years? 13. What was the soldier's 
reply to the king's second question? 14. Would you not 
have thought that one of the two had lost his mind? 15. 
What did the king think about it? 16. As the Frenchman 
had exhausted all the German he knew, what did he do? 
17. Is it not wise to keep still when one has nothing to 
say? 18. Can one talk without saying anything? 19. 
What was the soldier finally obliged to confess? 20. 
Would it have been better to confess it at the beginning 
of the conversation? 



LESSON XLVI. 

Charles Dickens se trouvait un jour a la campagne 
avec un de ses amis. La conversation tomba sur Tedu- 
cation des enfants, un des sujets favoris du grand ecri- 
vain. 

L'ami de Dickens, homme serieux et positif, pretendait 
qu'il fallait le plus possible tuer rimagination chez les 
enfants: " Ne leur racontez jamais d'histoires merveil- 
leuses," disait-il, " laissez les s'elancer libres de prejuges 
dans la carriere qu'ils auront a remplir." 

Dickens ne repondait rien et se contentait de sourire. 
Cependant, par la fenetre ouverte entre un papillon dont 
les ailes brillaient des plus riches nuances. 



168 LESSON XLVI 

" Que faites-vous? " dit l'homme posit if en voyant son 
ami s'emparer du pauvre petit animal, " laissez lui la 
liberie." 

Dickens enleva a l'aide de son pouce la brillante pous- 
siere qui colorait les ailes du papillon, et le laissa s'envoler. 

" O mon cher ami! vous etes un barbare," dit l'homme 
positif. 

" Pas du tout," repliqua Dickens, " je viens d'appliquer 
vos principes, en debarrassant cet insecte d'un ornement 
inutile, qui Feut empeche de s'envoler librement." 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. Who was Charles Dickens? 2. How many of his 
novels have you read? 3. Which is the greatest novel of 
English literature? 4. Where was Dickens at the time of 
which we are speaking? 5. On what subject did the con- 
versation between Dickens and his friend fall. 6. Is the 
education of children a subject of importance to-day? 
7. What sort of (a) man was Dickens' friend and what. were 
his ideas on the subject? 8. Why did he think that it 
was necessary to kill imagination in children? 9. Did 
you like to hear ghost stories when you were 
(a) child? 10. Do the stories of childhood excite the 
imagination too much? 11. What kinds of stories would 
it be well to select (choose) for children? 12. What reply 
did Dickens make to his friend? 13. What came in 
through the window? 14. What did Dickens do to the 
butterfly? 15. How did his friend regard this action? 
16. Why was Dickens so barbarous? 17. Is the butterfly 
a beautiful insect? 18. Is it useful? 19. What principles 
did Dickens apply? 20. Did his friend understand the 
lesson which Dickens was trying to teach? 



LESSON XLVII 169 



LESSON XLVII. 

Contraint de sortir de Rome tres mal equipe et sans le 
sou, on pretend que Rabelais,* pour arriver a Paris com- 
modement et bien nourri, s'avisa d'un stratageme qui 
aurait pu couter cher a tout autre que lui. Arrive dans 
une hotellerie a Lyon, il y demanda une chambre ecartee 
et un petit garcon qui sut lire et ecrire. II fit ensuite 
plusieurs petits paquets de la cendre qu'il trouva dans 
la cheminee, et lorsque 1' enfant lui eut apporte de l'encre 
et du papier, il lui fit ecrire divers billets portant, Tun: 
" Poison pour le roi"; l'autre: " Poison pour la reine; 
poison pour monseigneur le due d'Orleans"; etc. II 
appliqua ensuite ces billets sur ehaque paquet, et dit a 
r enfant: " Mon ami, gardez-vous bien de rien dire a per- 
sonne de ce que je vous ai fait ecrire, car il y irait de ma 
vie et de la votre." Pendant qu'il dinait,' l'enfant ne 
manqua pas de rendre compte a sa mere de ce qui venait 
de se passer en haut, et la bonne femme n'eut rien de 
plus presse que de denoncer a l'autorite le nouvel hote 
qui lui etait arrive. Le prevot court a l'hotel avec ses 
archers, interroge Rabelais, qui ne repond pas juste a 
ses demandes, se saisit du voyageur et de sa valise et le 
conduit sous bonne escort e a Paris. Arrive en cette ville, 
Rabelais se nomme; il demande a parler au roi, qui le 
reconnait, et a qui il fait part de la ruse qu'il avait em- 
ployee pour aller depuis Lyon jusqu'a Paris, bien nourri 
et bien monte, aux frais de Sa Majeste, qui, dit-on, 
loin de se facher, rit beaucoup et s'amusa a sa cour de 
ce stratageme. 



* Perhaps the greatest of French humorists, born about 1495, 
died 1553. 



170 LESSON XLVIII 

For Oral or Written Work. 

1. How did Rabelais leave Rome? 2. Is it easy to 
travel when one is penniless? 3. How did he wish to 
arrive at Paris? 4. Of what stratagem did he bethink 
himself? 5. Might this stratagem have cost him dear? 
6. What did he ask for in the inn at Lyons? 7. Why did 
he want a small boy who could read and write? 8. What 
did Rabelais do first? 9. What did the boy bring him? 
10. Then what did he have the boy write? 11. Read the 
inscriptions which he wrote. 12. Where did he apply 
these labels? 13. What command did he give the small 
boy? 14. Are children accustomed to keep secrets? 15. 
Naturally to whom did the child tell it? 16. What did 
the mother do? 17. As Rabelais expected, who con- 
ducted him to Paris? 18. What explanation did he make 
to the king? 19. Was the king angry? 20. Would it be 
safe to try such a trick in all countries? 



LESSON XLVIII. 
LA CORRESPONDANCE. 

Note.— In studying any language, one of the most important 
difficulties to be mastered is the art of letter- writing. Even in the 
use of our native English, it is not easy for most people to write 
correct and attractive letters; and when an American or an Eng- 
lishman tries to write to a Frenchman, there is danger of being 
misunderstood. In the first place, if we translate literally the 
usual formulas with which we begin a business-letter, we are con- 
sidered too familiar, since the " My dear Sir " is never allowable 
except among intimate friends. In the second place, many of our 
expressions, which we look upon merely as straightforward and 
business-like, strike a Frenchman as abrupt and discourteous, since 
he has a more suave manner of expressing himself, and unwittingly 
we offend him. 



LESSON XLVIII 171 

With a view to giving the students the subject of " Letter Writ- 
ing " directly from the French standpoint, I quote from " La 
Correspondance dans toutes les Circonstances de la Vie " par 
Madame la Baronne Staffe. 

L'Etiquette dans la Correspondance. 

Details importants. 

" II est aussi indispensable, a dit quelqu'un, de repondre 
quand on vous ecrit que quand on vous parle. II est 
vrai qu'on pourrait dire de la correspondance que c'est 
une conversation ecrit e. 

C'est pour cette raison que les gens qui n'ont rien a 
faire ne doivent pas abuser, pour leur plaisir, du temps 
des gens qui travaillent, et qui sont trop polis pour laisser 
sans reponse des lettres sans interet. 

Dans une lettre, les abreviations sont considerees 
comme de mauvais gout. 

On ne peut non plus y employer les chiffres que pour 
enoncer une somme ou une date. ' 1000 ans ' ne serait 
pas tolere, il faut ' mille ans.' Mais on serait tres correct 
en ecrivant l 1000 francs,' a moins encore qu'il ne s'agit 
d'une lettre d'affaires ou, par precaution, les sommes 
sont ecrit es en toutes lettres. 

En nommant, dans une lettre, les parents ou les amis 
intimes de la personne a laquelle on s'adresse, on se 
gardera bien d'ecrire en abrege les mots Monsieur, Ma- 
dame, Mademoiselle, ' M. voire pere,' 'Mme de Seillac' 
(en ecrivant au mari de Mme de Seillac), ' Mile votre 
fille ou votre sceur.' II faut ' Monsieur votre pere,' 
1 Madame de Seillac,' ' Mademoiselle votre fille ou votre 
sceur," etc. 

II faut tacher de ne pas parler de la temperature, sauf 
bien entendu si Ton ecrit a des parents proches, a des 



172 LESSON XLVIII 

amis si affectueux qu'ils peuvent prendre quelque interet 
a savoir si vous avez froid ou chaud. 

On doit eviter aussi de parler de soi, de sa personne 
morale et physique aux etrangers, aux connaissances 
banales, excepte dans le cas ou il est necessaire de faire 
intervenir sa sante pour expliquer un retard, ou une 
abstention, ou toute autre chose. 

II est bon de ne pas ecrire avec trop d'abondance aux 
etrangers. On ce borne a dire ce qui est necessaire et on 
le dit de son mieux. 

On commence sa lettre par le mot: 'Monsieur/ ou 
' Madame/ ' ' Mademoiselle/ mis en vedette, apres la 
date. A des personnes de connaissance, on dit bien: 
' Cher Monsieur/ ' Chere Madame,' ' Chere Mademoi- 
selle.' Ce ton plus familier, plus aimable, depend de la 
nature des relations, c'est a chacun de se rendre compte 
si ce ton peut, doit etre employe. 

Jamais on n'eerit (ni ne dit, du reste) ' Ma chere Dame/ 
' Ma chere Demoiselle/ ni ' Mon cher Monsieur.' 

Dans les lettres ceremonieuses ou officielles, il est ne- 
cessaire de donner aux gens le titre de leur fonction: 
' Monsieur le Ministre/ ' Monsieur le President,' ' Ma- 
dame la Directrice/ ' Monsieur le General' ou 'General.' 
' Mon General/ 'Mon Colonel,' quand on a ete mili- 
taire. 

On ne termine plus les lettres en offrant ' ses civilites 
empressees.' On remplace cela par les ' sentiments dis- 
tingues/ ou ' les meilleurs '; 'les compliments empresses' 
ou ' les meilleurs.' 

' Veuillez, Monsieur, recevoir mes meilleurs compli- 
ments '; ou ' l'expression de mes sentiments distingues '; 
ou ' l'assurance de mes . . . etc' 

A une femme, un homme dira: ' Veuillez, Madame, ou 



LESSON XLVIII 173 

chere Madame, agreer 1'expression de tout mon respect 
— ou de mon profond respect.' A une femme avec laquelle 
il a eu quelques relations: ' Veuillez agreer 1'expression de 
mes sentiments respectueux.' S'il y a couleur d'intimite 
dans leurs rapports: '1'expression de mon devouement 
respectueux ou de mon attachement respectueux.' Un 
homme ne risque jamais rien a temoigner a la femme une 
profonde deference. 

On doit distinguer aussi entre les mots: assurance et 
expression; recevoir et agreer. A un superieur, on n'offre 
pas V assurance, mais bien V expression; on ne le prie pas 
de recevoir mais d' agreer. 

Les lettres a de grands personnages, les petitions se 
terminent ainsi: 

Je suis, avec le plus profond respect, 

Monsieur . 

Votre tres humble et obeissant serviteur." 



L'Adresse. Dans la lettre et sur la lettre. 

"Donnez votre adresse au haut de la lettre, c'est plus 
commode pour celui qui doit vous repondre. 

A moins d'ecrire a des parents, a des amis tres intimes, 
repetez cette adresse dans chacune de vos lettres, pour 
epargnez a votre correspondant la peine de la rechercher 
dans les lettres precedentes, ce qui serait une fatigue, 
un ennui, une depense de temps. Cela est a la fois tres 
poli et tres modeste. Tres modeste, car on semble dire: 
je ne me crois pas un personnage assez important pour 
penser que vous puissiez garder mes lettres precedentes, 
ou inscrire mon adresse, ou vous la rappeler. 

Nous donnerons, au lieu de longues explications, des 



174 LESSON XLVIII 

modeles de l'adresse telle qu'on l'inscrit aujourd'hui sur 
les lettres. 

Le Colonel et Madame Huot, 

10, Rue de Turenne, 
Paris. 

Monsieur le docteur Pelletier, 

Savigny-en-Septaine. 

(Cher)." 

La date. 

La date doit etre placee dans le haut de la lettre sous 
l'adresse, a. moins qu'il ne s'agisse d'un billet insignifiant. 
Et encore, il faut la donner bien exacte et bien complete. 

' Le 2 fevrier 1894.' 

II y a des correspondants exigeants qui reclament meme 
le jour de la semaine, afin ; disent-ils, que si Ton parle 
d' ' hier/ on sache immediatement de quel jour il s'agit. 

Quelques mondains ont encore imagine de decider 
qu'une lettre doit se dater au commencement et un billet 
a la fin. Ou que telle circonstance exige la date au debut, 
telle autre apres la signature. 

Ces distinctions sont ridicules, une seule regie doit etre 
adoptee : la date en commencant la lettre, cela sans omis- 
sion possible. 

La signature. , r 

En general, une femme ne signe que de l'initial de son 
prenom, suivie du nom de son pere ou de son mari, 
quand elle ecrit a des etrangers et meme a des amis mas- 
culins. Le prenom d'une femme, d'une jeune femme 
surtout, ne peut etre livre a tout le monde. 

Les hommes signent comme il leur plait, selon les gens 
a qui ils ecrivent." 



LESSON XLIX 175 

For Written Work. 

Write a letter engaging board, applying for a position, 
or asking for information, to an imaginary party in Paris. 

LESSON XLIX. 

BILLETS D'INVITATION, ETC. 

We give a few sample notes of invitation, acceptance, 
regret, etc., in order to bring the student into touch 
with the social usages of Paris. 

Invitation to Dinner. 

Monsieur et Madame Frederic X presentent leur 

compliments a Monsieur S et le prient de leur faire 

l'honneur de venir diner chez eux mercredi prochain a 
six heures. 

R. S. V. P. 72, rue de Monceau. 

Acceptance. 

Monsieur S remercie Monsieur et Madame X 

de leur gracieuse invitation (ou bonne et aimable invita- 
tion). II espere bien en profiter. Compliments affec- 
tueux. 

Regrets. 

Monsieur S est desole de ne pouvoir profiter de la 

bonne invitation de Monsieur et Madame X (Indi- 

quez pour quelle cause) . ' Tous ses remerciements et ses 
regrets d'etre prive de ce plaisir. Avec ses meilleurs 
compliments. 

Invitation to Reception. 

Madame G. et Madame S. prient de leur faire 

l'honneur de venir chez elles passer la soiree du 16 juin 
a 10 heures. R. S. V. P. 

6, rue du Val de Grace. 



176 LESSON XLIX 

Invitation to a Musicale. 

Madame C. a l'honneur de souhaiter le bonjour a 
Monsieur D. et de le prier vouloir bien passer la soiree 
chez elle. On fera de la musique et Monsieur D. enten- 
dra le violoniste Sirizki qu'il desire entendre depuis 
longtemps. 

Informal Invitation to a Musicale. 

Lyon, le 10 mars 1906. 
Chere Madame, 
Le violoniste Sirizki m'a promis de jouer chez moi 
jeudi soir. J'espere que vous voudrez bien venir l'enten- 
dre, me donnant ainsi le vif plaisir de vous voir. Les 
Quatre Cheminees sont si peu eloigners de la ville, que 
cette courte promenade dans votre excellente voiture ne 
peut vous effrayer beaucoup. 

Permettez-moi de compter sur vous et croyez, chere 
Madame, a ma bien vive sympathie. 
Le colonel est a vos pieds. 

Brives-Seillac. 
Invitation to Tea. "H 

La baronne de Seillac restera chez elle mardi soir, 7 
septembre, et vous prie de lui faire le plaisir de venir lui 
demander une tasse de the. 

Return of a Book. ^W 

Madame M. retourne au Colonel B. le beau livre qu'il 
avait bien voulu lui preter et le remercie du plaisir infini 
qu'elle a trouve a la lecture de ces pages superbes. 

Thanks for Flowers. 

Madame V. remercie bien vivement Madame W. des 
belles roses qu'elle vient de recevoir. Sa maison en est 



LESSON XLIX 177 

toute paree et parfumee. Elle est ravie de cette atten- 
tion si gracieuse, si aimable. 

Announcing a Birth. 

Monsieur et Madame Henry Y ont le plaisir de 

vous faire part de la naissance de leur fille Marcelle. 

Paris, le 14 Janvier 1900. 

35, rue Gay-Lussac. 

Expression of Sympathy at Death of a Mother. 

Madame Frappont apprend la triste nouvelle avec une 
vive emotion. Elle exprime a Monsieur et a Madame S. 
sa douloureuse sympathie et ses affectueux sentiments. 

Mademoiselle de Constelle, qui se souvient du charme 
exquis de la baronne douairiere de Seillac, prie ses en- 
fants de croire a la part douloureuse qu'elle prend au 
grand malheur qui les frappe. 

Congratulations on Promotion. 

Lyon, le 14 juillet 1906. 
Mon general. 

Je suis bien heureux de vous saluer du titre de votre 
nouveau grade. 

Le 201 e doit pleurer son Colonel. Mais l'armee se 
rejouit de vous voir appele a un poste ou vous pourrez 
mieux encore servir le pays, dormer plus de preuves 
encore a vos capacites militaires. 

Veuillez, mon general, agreer mes respectueuses felici- 
tations et P expression de mon devouement. 

Seillac. 
Reply. 

Paris, le 18 juillet 1906. 
Mon cher colonel, 

Votre billet m'a ete agreable, entre toutes les felicita- 
tions que j'ai recues. 



178 LESSON L 

Je me souviendrai toujours avec un vif plaisir, mon 
jeune collegue d'hier, de nos bonnes relations a Lyon. 

Mes hommages a la plus charmante de jeunes dames. 
Un gros baiser a la petite Jozette. 

Votre, bien affectueusement, 

B. 
Letter of Introduction. 

La personne qui a l'honneur de vous presenter cette 

lettre est Monsieur N , mon ami intime. II se rend 

dans votre ville pour une affaire importante, et je ne 
doute pas qu'il ne reussisse, si vous daignez Taider de 
vos conseils et votre protection. Quand vous le connai- 
trez, son merite vous le recommandera suffisamment. 
En consequence, comme je connais ses qualites, et Fami- 
ne que vous avez pour moi, je prends la liberte de vous 
le recommander avec chaleur, d'autant plus que mes 
recommandations n'ont jamais ete vaines aupres de vous. 
Agreez Y assurance etc. 

— Baedeker's Manual of Conversation.. 

Remark. — Some of the foregoing notes were obtained by the 
author from stationers and engravers in Paris; others have been 
borrowed from " La Correspondance dans toutes les Circonstances 
de la Vie " by Madame la Baronne^Staffe. 

For Written Work. 

The students should be required to write invitations, 
acceptances, regrets, and other notes for various occa- 
sions. 

LESSON L. 

FRENCH POETRY. 

Note. — No attempt is intended here to give a full discussion of 
French prosody, that belongs to a more advanced work. But since 



LESSON L 179 

in most schools the pupils in first year French are required to com- 
mit to memory certain short poems, the following rules are given 
to help the student read these poems correctly. 

The poetry of the French is far simpler than that of 
the English. There is no division of a line of poetry into 
feet, hence we hear nothing about tetrameter, pentam- 
eter, or hexameter. Furthermore there are no long or 
short syllables, since all syllables in French poetry are of 
equal value; hence there is no chance for talking about 
dactylic, iambic, anapaestic, etc., meters. 

French poetry depends on three principal things: 

1. The kind of rhyme. 

A feminine rhyme (or line) is one ending in a silent e. 
A masculine rhyme (or line) is one ending in any other 
syllable. 

2. The number of syllables in a line or verse. The most 
common verse of the French is the Alexandrine, having 
twelve syllables in a line (and thirteen when the rhyme 
is feminine). It must be kept in mind that every syllable. 
even those that would be silent in prose, is pronounced 
in French poetry, except: 

a. Final unaccented e at the end of a line. 

b. .Any vowel at the end of a word followed by an 

initial vowel or silent h in the next word. Then 
elision occurs, though not indicated by an 
apostrophe. 

3. The caesura (la cesure), a slight pause which is made 
usually in the middle of a line, dividing it into two equa] 
hemistiches. 



180 LESSON L 

Beau Soir. 

Lorsque au soleil couchant les rivieres sont roses, 
Et qu'un tiede frisson court sur les champs de ble, 
Un conseil d'etre heureux semble sortir des choses 

Et monter vers le cceur trouble. 
Un conseil de gouter le charme d'etre au monde 
Cependant qu'on est jeune et que le soir est beau, 
Car nous nous en allons, comme s'en va cette onde. 
Elle a la mer — nous au tombeau. 

— Paul Bourget. 
La Marseillaise. 
Allons, enfants de la Patrie, 
Le jour de gloire est arrive; 
Contre nous, de la tyrannie 
L'etendard sanglant est leve\ 
Entendez-vous dans les campagnes 
Mugir ces feroces soldats? 
lis viennent j usque dans vos bras, 
Egorger vos fils, vos compagnes! . . . 
Aux armes, citoyens! formez vos bataillons! 
Marchons, marchons! 
Qu'un sang impur abreuve nos sillons! 

Amour sacre de la patrie, 
Conduis, soutiens nos braves vengeurs; 
Liberte, liberte cherie. 
Combats avec tes defenseurs! 
Sous nos drapeaux que la Victoire 
Accoure a tes males accents; 
Que tes ennemis expirants 
Voient ton triomphe et notre gloire! 
Aux armes, citoyens! formez vos bataillons! 
Marchons, marchons! 
Qu'un sang impur abreuve nos sillons! 

— Rotjget de Lisle. 



PART IL 



THE VERB. 

The two auxiliary verbs and those of the four regular 
conjugations have already been given in detached form 
but are here repeated connectedly, since a review of these 
leads up naturally to the irregular verbs. 

§ 107. Conjugaison du verbe auxiliare Avoir (to have). 





LTNDICATIF. 


Present. 




Parfait Indefini 


(I have, do . have, am having) 


(I have had) 


V al 




]' ai eu 


tu as 




tu as eu 


il a 




il a eu 


nous avons 




nous avons eu 


vous avez 




vous avez eu 


ils ont 




ils ont eu 


Imparfait. 




Plus-que-parfait. 


(7 had, was having) 




(I had had) 


¥ avais 




'}' avais eu 


tu avais 




tu avais eu 


il avait 




il avait eu 


nous avions 




nous avions eu 


vous aviez 




vous aviez eu 


ils avaient 




ils avaient eu 



182 



THE 


VERB 


i\ 


Parfait Defini. 


Parfait Anterieur. 


(/ had) 


(I had had) 




¥ eus 


Y 'eus 


eu 


tu eus 


tu eus 


eu 


il eut 


il eut 


eu 


nous eumes 


nous eumes 


eu 


vous eutes 


vous eutes 


eu 


ils eurent 


ils eurent 


eu 


FUTUR. 


Futur Anterieur. 


(/ shall have) 


(/ shall have had) 


j' aurai 


j' aurai 


eu 


tu auras 


tu auras 


eu 


il aura 


il aura 


eu 


nous aurons 


nous aurons 


eu 


vous aurez 


vous aurez 


eu 


ils auront 


ils auront 


eu 



§170 



LE CONDITIONNEL 



Present. 
(I should have) 

}' aurais 

tu aurais 
il aurait 
nous aurions 
vous auriez 

ils auraient 



Parfait. 




(/ should have had) 


¥ aurais 


eu 


tu aurais 


eu 


il aurait 


eu 


nous aurions 


eu 


vous auriez 


eu 


ils auraient 


eu 



L'IMPERATIF. 



Present. 
aie (Have) 

ayons 
ayez 



Parfait. 
aie eu ( Have had) 



ayons eu 
ayez eu 



§107] 



THE AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR 



183 



Present. 
(That I may have) 
que j' aie 
que tu aies 
qu'il ait 
que nous ayons 
que vous ayez 
qu'ils aient 

Imparfait. 
(That I might have) 
que j' eusse 
que tu eusses 
qu'il eut 
que nous eussions 
que vous eussiez 
qu'ils eussent 

Present. 
avoir (to have) 

Present. 
ayant (having) 



LE SUBJONCTIF. 

Parfait. 

( That I may have had) 

que j' aie eu 

que tu aies eu 

qu'il ait eu 

que nous ayons eu 

que vous ayez eu 

qu'ils aient eu 

Plus-que-parfait . 

(That I might have had) 

que j' eusse eu 

que tu eusses eu 

qu'il eut eu 

que nous eussions eu 

que vous eussiez eu 

qu'ils eussent eu 

'INFINITIF. 

Parfait. 
avoir eu (to have had) 



LE PARTICIPE. 



Parfait. 
ayant eu (having had) 



Participe Passe. 
eu (had) : fern, eue 

108. Conjugaison du verbe auxiliare Etre (to be), 



L'INL 


HCATIF. 


Present. 


Parfait Indefini. 


(/ am) 


(/ have been) 


je suis 


j' ai ete 


tu es 


tu as ete 


il est 


il a ete 


nous sommes 


nous avons ete 


vous etes ' 


vous avez ete 


ils sont 


ils ont ete 



184 



THE VERB 



108 



Imparfait. 

(/ was) 

y etais 

tu etais 

il etait 

nous etions 

vous etiez 

ils etaient 

Parfait Defini. 
(/ was) 

je fus 

tu fus 

il fut 

nous fumes 

vous futes 

ils furent 



Plus-que-parfait. 

(/ had been) 

y avais ete 

tu avais ete 

il avait ete 

nous avions ete 

vous aviez ete 

ils avaient ete 



Parfait Anterieur. 

(/ had been) 

y eus ete 

tu eus ete 

il eut ete 

nous eumes ete 

vous elites ete 

ils eurent ete 



FUTUR. 

(/ shall be) 

je serai 

tu seras 

il sera 

nous serons 

vous serez 

ils seront 



Futur Anterieur. 

(/ shall have been) 

y aurai ete 

tu auras" ete 

il aura ete 

nous aurons ete 

vous aurez ete 

ils auront ete 



LE CON'DITIONNEL. 



Present. 

(T should be) 

je serais 

tu serais 

il serait 

nous serions 

vous seriez 

ils seraient 



Parfait 

(/ should have 

y aurais ete 

tu aurais ete 

il aurait ete 

nous aurions ete 

vous'auriez ete 

ils auraient ete 



§108] 



THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE 
L'IMPERATIF. 



185 



Present. 


Parfait. 


sois {Be) 


aie ete ( Have been) 


soyons 


ayons ete 


soyez 


ayez ete 




LE SUBJONCTIF. 


Present. 


Parfait. 


{That I may be) 


{That I may have been) 


que je sois 


que j' aie ete 


que tu sois 


que tu aies ete 


qu'il soit 


qu'il ait ete 


que nous soyons 


que nous ayons ete 


que vous soyez 


que vous ayez ete 


qu'ils soient 


qu'ils aient ete 


Imparfait. 


PLUS-QUE-P ARFAIT . 


{That I might be) 


{That I might have been) 


que je fusse 


que j' eusse ete 


que tu fusses 


. que tu eusses ete 


qu'il fut 


qu'il eut ete 


que nous fussions 


que nous eussions ete 


que vous fussiez 


que vous eussiez ete 


qu'ils fussent 


qu'ils eussent ete 




L'INFINITIF. 


Present. 


Parfait. 


etre {to be) 


avoir ete {to have been) 




LE PARTICIPE. 


Present. 


Parfait. 


etant {being) 


ayant ete {having been) 


Participe Passe (invariable). 




ete (been) 



186 



THE VERB 



[§109 



§109. 

to like). 



VERBES ACTIFS. 
Premiere Conjugaison — en er : Aimer (to love, 



Present. 

(7 love) 

']' aim e 

tu aim es 
il aim e 
nous aim ons 
vous aim ez 

ils aim ent 

Imparfait. 

(7 loved) 

]' aim ais 

tu aim ais 

il aim ait 

nous aim ions 

vous aim iez 

ils aim aient 

Parfait Defini. 

(7 loved) 

y aim ai 

tu aim as 

il aim a 

nous aim ames 

vous aim ates 

ils aim erent 

Futur. 
(7 shall love) 
y aim er ai 
tu aim er as 
il aim er a 
nous aim er ons 
vous aim er ez 
ils aim er ont 



L'INDl.ATIF. 



Parfait Indefini. 

(7 have loved) 

y ai aime 

tu as aime 

il a aime 

nous avons aime 

vous avez aime 

ils ont aime 



Plus-que-parfait. 


(7 had loved) 


y avais 


aime 


tu avais 


aime 


il avait 


aime 


nous avions 


aime 


vous aviez 


aime 


ils avaient 


aime 


Parfait Anterieur, 


(7 had loved) 


y eus 


aime 


tu eus 


aime 


il eut 


aime 


nous eumes 


aime 


vous eutes 


aime 


ils eurent 


aime 


Futur Anterieur. 


(7 shall have loved) 


y aurai 


aime 


tu auras 


aime 


il aura 


aime 


nous aurons 


aime 


vous aurez 


aime 


ils auront 


aime 



il09] 



first conjugation: aimer 



187 



LE CONDITIONNEL. 
Present. Parfait. 

(/ should love) (I should have loved) 

Y aim er ais 
tu aim er ais 
il aim er ait 
nous aim er ions 
vous aim er iez 
ils aim er aient 



j aurais 


aime 


tu aurais 


aime 


il aurait 


aime 


nous aurions 


aime 


vous auriez 


aime 



ils auraient aime 



L'IMPERATIF. 



Present. 


Parfait. 


aim e (Love) 


aie aime (Have loved) 


aim ons 


ayons aime 


aim ez 


ayez aime 


LE 


SUBJONCTIF. 


Present. 


Parfait. 


( That I may love) 


(That I may have loved) 


que j' aim e 


que j' aie aime 


que tu aim es 


que tu aies aime 


qu'il aim e 


qu'il ait aime 


que nous aim ions 


que nous ayons aime 


que vous aim iez 


que vous ayez aime 


qu'ils aim ent 


qu'ils aient aime 


Imparfait. 


Pltjs-que-parfait. 


(That I might love) 


(That I might have loved 


que j' aim asse 


que j' eusse aime 


que tu aim asses 


que tu eusses aime 


qu'il aim at 


qu'il eut aime 


que nous aim assions 


que nous eussions aime 


que vous aim assiez 


que vous eussiez aime 


qu'ils aim assent 


qu'ils eussent aime 



188 



THE VERB 



§109 



L'INFINITIF. 
Present. Parfait. 

aim er (to love) avoir aime (to have loved) 

LE PARTICIPE. 

Present. Parfait. 

aim ant (loving) ayant aime (having loved) 

Participe Passe. 
aim e (loved) : fem. aim ee 



§ 110. Deuxieme Conjugaison — en ir: Finir (to finish), 



L'INDICATIF. 


Present. 


Parfait Indefini. 


(I finish, am finishing, or do finish) 


(I have finished) 


je fin is 


y ai fini 


tu fin is 


tu as fini 


il fin it 


il a fini 


nous fin iss ons 


nous avons fini 


vous fin iss ez 


vous avez fini 


ils fin iss ent 


ils ont fini 


Imparfait. 


Pltjs-que-parfait. 


(7 finished, was finishing) 


(7 had finished) 


je fin iss ais 


j' avais fini 


tu fin iss ais 


tu avais fini 


il fin iss ait 


il avait fini 


nous fin iss ions 


nous avions fini 


vous fin iss iez 


vous aviez fini 


ils fin iss aient 


ils avaient fini 


Parfait Defini. 


Parfait Anterieur. 


(I finished) 


(7 had finished) 


je fin is 


j' eus fini 


tu fin is 


tu eus fini 


il fin it 


il eut fini 


nous fin imes 


nous eumes fini 


vous fin ites 


vous eutes fini 


ils fin irent 


ils eurent fini 



§110 



second conjugation: finir 



189 



FUTUR. 

(I shall finish) 

je fin ir ai 

tu fin ir as 

il fin ir a 

nous fin ir ons 

vous fin ir ez 

ils fin ir ont 



LE CONDITIONNEL 



Present. 
(7 should finish) 
je fin ir ais 
tu fin ir ais 
il fin ir ait 
nous fin ir ions 
vous fin ir iez 
ils fin ir aient 



Futur Anterieur. 


(I shall have fi 


nished) 


y aurai 


fini 


tu auras 


fini 


il aura 


fini 


nous aurons 


fini 


vous aurez 


fini 


ils auront 


fini 


FNEL. 

Parfait. 


(I should have finished) 


j' aurais 


fini 


tu aurais 


fini 


il aurait 


fini 


nous aurions 


fini 


vous auriez 


fini 



ils auraient fini 



L'IMPERATIF. 
Present. Parfait. 



fin is {Finish) 



fin iss ons 
fin iss ez 



aie fini ( Have finis ' ed) 



ayons fini 
ayez fini 



LE 


SUBJONCTIF. 




Present. 


Parfait. 




( That I may finish) 


(That I may have finished) 


que je fin iss e 


que j' aie 


fini 


que tu fin iss es 


que tu aies 


fini 


qu'il fin iss e 


qu'il ait 


fini 


que nous fin iss ions 


que nous ayons 


fini 


que vous fin iss iez 


que vous ayez 


fini 


qu'ils fin iss ent 


qu'ils aient 


fini 



190 



THE VERB 



§110 



Imparfait. 

( That I might finish) 
que je fin iss e 
que tu fin iss es 
qu'il fin it 
que nous fin iss ions 
que vous fin iss iez 
qu'ils fin iss ent 



Plus-que-parfait. 

( That I might have finished) 

que j' eusse fini 

que tu eusses fini 

qu'il eiit fini 

que nous eussions fini 

. que vous eussiez fini 

qu'ils eussent fini 



L'INFINITIF. 
Present. Parfait. 

fin ir (to finish) avoir fini (to have finished) 

LE PARTICIPE. 
Present. Parfait. 

fin iss ant (finishing) ayant fini (having finished) 

Participe Passe. 
fin i (finished) : fern, fin ie 



§ 111. Troisieme Conjugaison — en oir: Recevoir* (to 

receive). 



L'INDICATIF 






Present. 


Parfait 


Indefinl 


(/ receive, do receive, am receiving) 


(/ have received) 


je rec ois 


i'ai 


recu 


tu rec ois 


tu as 


recu 


. il rec oit 


ila 


recu 


nous recev ons 


nous avons 


recu 


vous recev ez 


vous avez 


recu • 


ils recoiv ent 


ils ont 


recu 



*Only six verbs are conjugated on this model: devoir, recevoir, 
percevoir, apercevoir, concevoir, decevoir. 



§111] 



third conjugation: recevoir 



191 



Imparfait. 

(I was receiving, received) 

je recev ais 

tu recev ais 

il recev ait 

nous recev ions 

vous recev iez 

ils recev aient 

Parfait Defini. 

(I received) 

je reg us 

tu reg us 

il reg ut 

nous reg times 

vous reg iites 

ils reg urent 

Futur. 

(I shall receive) 

je recev r ai 

tu recev r as 

il recev r a 

nous recev r ons 

vous recev r ez 

ils recev r ont 



Plus-que-parfait. 
(I had received) 



3 avais 


recu 


tu avais 


recu 


il avait 


recu 


nous avions 


recu 


vous aviez 


recu 


ils avaient 


recu 


Parfait Anterieur, 


(I had received) 



3 eus recu 

tu eus reg u 

il eut recu 

nous eumes recu 

vous eutes recu 

ils eurent recu 

Futur Anterieur. 
(I shall have received) 



j aurai 


recu 


tu auras 


recu 


il aura 


recu 


nous aurons 


recu 


vous aurez 


recu 


ils auront 


recu 



LE CONDITIONNEL. 



Present. 

(7 should receive) 

je recev r ais 
tu recev r ais 
■ il recev r ait 
nous recev r ions 
vous recev r iez 
ils recev r aient 



Parfait. 


(7 should have received) 


y aurais 


recu 


tu aurais 


recu 


il aurait 


recu 


nous aurions 


recu 


vous auriez 


recu 



ils auraient recu 



192 



THE VERB 



§111 



L'IMPERATIF. 

Present. 



reg ois (Receive) 



recev ons 
recev ez 



Parfait 
aie recu ( Have 



ayons recu 
ayez recu 



LE 

Present. 
(That I may receive) 
que je regoiv e 
que tu regoiv es 
qu'il regoiv e 
que nous recev ions 
que vous recev iez 
qu'ils regoiv ent 

Imparfait. 
(That I might receive) 
que je reg uss e 
que tu reg uss es 
qu'il reg ut 
que nous reg uss ions 
que vous reg uss iez 
qu'ils reg uss ent 



SUBJONCTIF. 



Parfait. 

(That I may have received) 

que j' aie recu 

que tu aies recu 

qu'il ait recu 

que nous ayons recu 

que vous ayez recu 

qu'ils aient recu 

Plus-que-parfait. 

(That I might have received) 

que j' eusse recu 

que tu eusses recu 

qu'il eut recu 

que nous eussions recu 

que vous eussiez recu 

qu'ils eussent re<?u 



Present. 
recev oir (to receive) 



L'lNFINITIF. 

Parfait. . 
avoir recu (to have received) 



LE PARTICIPE. 

Present. Parfait. 

recev ant (receiving) ayant recu (having received) 

Participe Passe. 
reg u (received) : fern, reg ue 



§112] 



fourth conjugation: rompre 



193 



§ 112. Quatrieme Conjugaison — en re: Rompre (to 

break). 

L'TNDICATIF. 



Present. 


Parfait Indefini. 


(/ break, am breaking, do break) 


(/ have broken) 


je romp s 


j'ai 


rompu 


tu romp s 


tu as 


rompu 


il romp t 


il a 


rompu 


nous romp ons 


nous avons 


rompu 


vous romp ez 


vous avez 


rompu 


ils romp ent 


ils ont 


rompu 


Imparfait. 


PLUS-QUE-PARF AIT . 


(/ broke, was breaking) 


(/ had broken) 


je romp ais 


Y avais 


rompu 


tu romp ais 


tu avais 


rompu 


il romp ait 


il avait 


rompu 


nous romp ions 


nous avions 


rompu 


vous romp iez 


vous aviez 


rompu 


ils i omp aient 


ils avaient 


rompu 


Parfait Defini. 


Parfait Anterieur. 


(/ broke) 


(/ had broken) 


je romp is 


'}' eus 


rompu 


tu romp is 


tu eus 


rompu 


il romp it 


il eut 


rompu 


nous romp imes 


nous eumes 


rompu 


vous romp ites 


vous eutes 


rompu 


ils romp irent 


ils eurent 


rompu 


Futur. 


Futur Anterieur. 


(I shall break) 


(/ shall have 


broken) 


je romp r ai 


y aurai 


rompu 


tu romp r as 


tu auras 


rompu 


il romp r a 


il aura 


rompu 


nous romp r ons 


nous aurons 


rompu 


vous romp r ez 


vous aurez 


rompu 


ils romp r ont 


ils auront 


rompu 



194 



THE VERB 



[§121 



LE CONDITIONNEL. 

Present. Parfait. 

(I should break) (I should have broken) 

je romp r ais j' aurais rompu 

tu romp r ais tu aurais rompu 

il romp r ait il aurait rompu 

nous lomp r ions nous aurions rompu 

vous romp r iez vous auriez rompu 



lis romp r aient 



ils auraient rompu 



L'IMPERATIF 

Present. 



romp s (Break) 



romp ons 
romp ez 



Parfait. 
aie rompu (Have broken) 



ayons rompu 
ayez rompu 



LE SUBJONCTIF. 



Present. 


Parfait. 


(That I may break) 


(That I may have broken) 


que je romp e 


que j' aie 


rompu 


que tu romp es 


que tu aies 


rompu 


qu'il romp e 


qu'il ait 


rompu 


que nous romp ions 


que nous ayons 


rompu 


que vous romp iez 


que vous ayez 


rompu 


qu'ils romp ent 


qu'ils aient 


rompu 



Imparfait. 
(That I might break) 
que je romp iss e 
que tu romp iss es 
qu'il romp it 
que nous romp iss ions 
que vous romp iss iez 
qu'ils romp iss ent 



Plus-que-parfait. 

(That I might have broken) 

que j' eusse rompu 

que tu eusses rompu 

qu'il eut rompu 

que nous eussions rompu 

que vous eussiez rompu 

qu'ils eussent rompu 



§§113-115] REMARKS ON VERBS 19o 

L'INFINITIF. 

Present. Parfait. 

romp re (to break) avoir rompu (to have broken) 

LE PARTICIPE. 
Present. Parfait. 

romp ant (breaking) ayant rompu (having broken) 

Participe Passe. 
romp u (broken) : fern, romp ue 



REMARKS ON VERBS. 

§ 113. It is necessary to consider in verbs: le radical 
(the stem), la terminaison (the ending), le nombre (the 
number), la personne (the person), le mode (the mode), 
le temps (the tense), l'auxiliare (the auxiliary), la conju- 
gaison (the conjugation). 

1. Radical — Terminaison. 

§ 114. The verb is always made up of two distinct 
parts : 

1. A part fixed, which changes rarely, called the radical 
or stem of the verb. 

2. A part changing and variable, called the terminaison 
or ending. Thus in je parle, nous parlons, vous parlez, 
pari is the stem, and e, ons, ez are the endings. 

2. Nombres. 

§ 115. Verbs, like nouns, have two numbers : le singu- 
lier, singular, which treats of but one person or thing: 
je parle, il parle; and le pluriel, plural, which treats of 
two or more: nous parlons, Us parlent. 



196 THE VERB [§§116-117 

3. Personnes. 

§ 116. French verbs have the same three persons as 
the English: the first person, indicating that the action 
is performed by the speaker: je marche, nous marchons; 
the second person, indicating that it is performed by the 
person addressed: tu marches, vous marchez; and the 
third person, indicating that it is performed by the party 
of whom we speak: il marche, elles marchent. 

4. Modes. 

§ 117. Le mode is the manner in which the verb pre- 
sents the action or state expressed by it. 

There are five * modes in French : V indicatif , le condi- 
tionnel, Vimperatif, le subjonctif and I'infinitif. 

1. Le mode indicatif indicates simply that an action or 
state takes place: je marche, I walk; il dort, he sleeps. 

2. Le mode conditionnel indicates that the action would 
take place, if a certain condition were fulfilled : Je sorti- 
rais, s'il faisait beau, I would go out, if it were pleasant. 

The conditional mode, however, is rarely, if ever, used 
in the subordinate or conditional clause, but rather in 
the principal clause, while either the indicative or the 
subjunctive will occur in the subordinate clause. 

3. Le mode imperatif expresses a command or an ex- 
hortation: Allez, Go; Allons, Let us go. 

4. Le mode subjonctif has been discussed in Lesson 
XXXIV of Part I. It is usually found in subordinate 



*Some grammarians make a sixth mode, le participe: but as 
the nature of the participle is such that it is sometimes a verb, 
sometimes an adjective, it seems best to treat it as a separate part 
of speech. 



** 



118-120] REMARKS OX VERBS 197 



clauses, though it may occur in independent sentences: 
Je veux que tu viennes, I wish that you come; Vive la 
France! Long live France! 

5. Le mode infinitif presents the action in an indefinite 
manner without distinction of number or person: marcher, 
finir, lire. 

5. Temps. 

§ 118. Le temps or tense is the form that the verb 
takes in order to indicate at what time the action occurs. 

As all time must be present, past, or future, so all tenses 
ma}' be grouped under those three general heads. 

From the nature of the case, there can be but one pres- 
ent tense in any mode, but there are several past tenses 
and two futures, since an action may be more or less past. 
more or less future. 

§ 119. Simple and Compound Tenses. — Referring to 
the preceding conjugations, all tenses in the left hand 
column are called simple tenses, since one word consti- 
tutes the verb; all in the right hand column are called 
compound tenses, since the verb in each case is made up 
of two words: the auxiliary, and the past participle. 

Furthermore, each compound tense is known as the 
corresponding compound of the simple tense directly op- 
posite it on the page, since it uses that tense of the 
auxiliary. For instance, the parfait indefini is the cor- 
responding compound of the present, because it uses the 
present of the auxiliary. 

§ 120. The indicative mode has eight tenses: 
1. Le present. The four conjugations all have the 
same endings in the present plural: ons, ez, ent, this ent 



198 THE VERB [§120 

being silent in the pronunciation. Verbs like finir insert 
iss between the stem and these plural endings. 

In the first person singular, verbs of the first conjuga- 
tion end in silent e, those of the other three conjuga- 
tions in s. 

In the second person singular, the verbs of all four 
conjugations end in s. 

In the third person singular, verbs of the first conjug - 
tion end in silent e, those of the other three in t. How- 
ever, in the fourth conjugation this t is dropped, if the 
stem ends in d or in c. 

2. L'imparfait always has the same endings: ais, ais, 
ait, ions, iez, aient. Verbs like finir insert iss between 
the stem and the endings, as they do in the plural of the 
present. 

The imperfect expresses an incomplete, a continued, or 
an accustomed past action: Je lisais quand vous etes 
entre, I was reading when you came in. In connected 
discourse it is used chiefly in past description. 

3. Le parfait defini always has the same endings in the 
plural: mes, tes, rent, and a circumflex accent over the 
vowel immediately preceding the ending in the first and 
second persons plural. 

In the singular, the endings' of this tense for the first 
conjugations are ai, as, a; for the other three conjuga- 
tions s, s, t, the preceding vowel being usually i or u. 

The past definite expresses an action performed at a 
definite time, completely past: Je lus ce livre hier, I read 
this book yesterday. In connected discourse it is used 
in past narration. 

4. Le futur, in all four conjugations, is formed in the 
same way, namely, by adding to the present infinitive of 
the verb conjugated the present indicative of the verb 



§120] REMARKS ON VERBS 199 

avoir, dropping the av in the first and second persons 
plural. The future endings become then ai, as, a, ons, 
ez, ont. In verbs of the third conjugation, the oi of the 
infinitive is dropped in the future; in those of the fourth, 
the final e of the infinitive is elided or absorbed before 
the vowel endings of the future. 

5. Le parfait indefini, compound of the present, ex- 
presses an action performed at a vague, indefinite past 
time. It is primarily considered as equivalent to the 
present perfect of the English: J'ai lu ce livre plusieurs 
fois, I have read this book several times; but more often 
it occurs where it must be translated without " have " 
as a simple past: Quand etes-vous alle chez vous? When 
did you go home? 

The past indefinite occurs chiefly in conversation and in 
disconnected details. 

6. Le plus-que-parfait, compound of the imperfect, and 
le -parfait anterieur. compound of the past definite, are 
both translated by the past perfect of the English but 
are used with this distinction: The plus-que-parfait ex- 
presses an action performed before another past action, 
but it may have been a long time before: J'avais la ce 
livre quand je sortis, I had read this book when, or be- 
fore, I went out. 

7. Le parfait anterieur, on the other hand, expresses an 
action performed immediately before another past action: 
Quand j'eus lu ce livre, je sortis, As soon as I had read 
this book, I went out. 

8. Le futur anterieur compound of the future, corre- 
sponds to the future perfect of the English: J'aurai lu ce 
livre, quand ma sceur viendra, I shall have read this 
book, when my sister comes (will come). 



200 THE VERB [§§121-124 

§ 121. Le Conditionnel. The present conditional is 
always built on the same stem as the future indicative, 
that stem usually being the present infinitive of the verb 
conjugated. The conditional endings are ais, ais, ait, 
ions, iez, aient, borrowed from the imperfect indicative. 

§ 122. Llmperatif. 1. Le present of the imperative in 
the four conjugations is identical with the corresponding- 
forms of the present indicative. Some grammarians say 
that it is " borrowed " from the present indicative and 
that in the two auxiliaries it is " borrowed " from the 
present subjunctive. 

In the first conjugation, the final s of the indicative 
second person singular is dropped in the imperative but 
reappears before en or y: Chante une chanson, Sing a 
song; (but) Chante-s-en une partie, Sing a part of it. 

2. Le parfait of the imperative indicates that an action 
ought to be accomplished before a certain time: Ayez fini 
dans une heure, Have finished in an hour; ay ons tout 
regie avant quatre heures, Let us have all settled before 
four o'clock. 

§ 123. Le Subjonctif. 1. Le present of the subjunctive, 
except in the two verbs avoir and etre, always ends in e, 

es, e, ions, iez, ent. 

2. L'imparfait of the subjunctive is always built on the 
same stem as the past definite of the indicative. Its 
characteristic is ss, which occurs in all forms but the 
third singular; that always ends in t and has a circum- 
flex accent over the preceding vowel. 

§ 124. L'Infinitif. The present infinitive always ends 
in er for the first conjugation, ir for the second, oir for 
the third, re for the fourth. 



§§125-128] REMARKS ON VERBS 201 

§ 125. Le Participe. 1. Le participe present (present 
participle) for all conjugations ends in ant; the conjuga- 
tion in ir, however, usually inserts an iss before the 
ending. 

2. Le participe passe (past participle) of the first con- 
jugation always ends in e, of the other three (if regular) 
in i for the second, u for the third and fourth. 

3. Le participe parfait (perfect participle) is a com- 
pound tense, formed by adding the past participle of the 
verb conjugated to the present participle of the auxiliary: 
ay ant fini. 

6. Auxiliares. 

§ 126. Avoir and etre are called auxiliary verbs when 
they aid in the conjugation of other verbs: j'ai fini, I 
have finished; je suis alle, I have gone. 

§ 127. In general, verbs that express action and may 
be transitive will take avoir as auxiliary, except in the 
case of reflexive verbs which always have etre; verbs that 
express state will ordinarily take etre. 

7. Conjugaison. 

§ 128. The union of all the modes and tenses of a verb 
in all the persons and numbers is called conjugation. 
French authorities make four conjugations, distinguished 
by the ending of the present infinitive: I conj. in er: 
aimer; II conj. in ir: finir; III conj. in oir: recevoir; 
IV conj. in re: rompre. 

Remark. — Verbs in ir comprise in reality two conjugations: the 
one, like finir, inserts iss in the imperfect &c: finissais; the other, 
like sentir, omits iss: sentais. 



202 THE VERB [§§129-130 

§ 129. The French language has, according to the 
" Dictionary of the French Academy," a little more than 
4000 simple verbs of which about 3600 end in er; 330 in 
ir (with iss in the imperfect) ; 28 in ir (without iss in the 
imperfect); 17 in oir; and 50 in re. The first conjuga- 
tion, then, contains about nine-tenths of all French 
verbs. 

The French form new verbs from nouns by adding er: 
fete, feter; gant, ganter; and from adjectives by adding 
ir: pale, palir; maigre, maigrir. The first and second 
conjugations, then, are said to be vivantes, living, since 
they are constantly adding to their number. 

On the other hand, the conjugations in oir, re (and those 
in ir that do not insert iss), are incapable of forming new 
verbs and, according to Brachet and Dussouchet, since 
the origin of the language not a single verb in oir or in re 
has been added to the small number inherited from the 
Latin. The third and fourth conjugations, then, since 
they never make new additions, are spoken of as mortes, 
dead. 

This simple distinction of conjugations into mortes and 
vivantes explains to us at once why at least 3900 out of 
4000 verbs in the French belong to the first and second 
conjugations, while the other Wo conjugations combined 
have less than 80 verbs. - 



Verbs Conjugated Interrogatively. 

§ 130. To conjugate a verb interrogatively: 

1. The pronoun is placed after the verb in the simple 
tenses: Recevez-vous? Aiment-ils? 

2. The pronoun is placed between the auxiliary and the 



§§131-132] REMARKS ON VERBS 203 

participle in the compound tenses: Avez-vous fini? Ai-je 
recu? 

Remarks: 

a. Verbs can be conjugated interrogatively only in the 
indicative and conditional modes. 

b. If the first person singular ends in a silent e, this e 
takes the acute accent (but is pronounced as if it had 
the grave), when the verb has the interrogative form: 
Aime-je? 

c. When the third person singular ends in a vowel, a t, 
coming from the corresponding form of the Latin word, 
is inserted between the verb and pronoun in the inter- 
rogative form. As this t is used to improve the sound, it 
is called " euphonic t ": Aime-i-il? A-^-il? Aura-i-il? 

Verbs Conjugated Negatively. 

§ 131. To conjugate a verb negatively: 

1. Ne is placed before the verb, pas after, in the simple 
tenses: Je ne parle pas. 

2. Ne is placed before the auxiliary, pas between the 
auxiliary and participle in the compound tenses: Je n'ai 
pas fini. 

Verbs Conjugated Interrogatively and Negatively. 

§ 132. To conjugate a verb both interrogatively and 
negatively : 

1. The pronoun is attached to the verb by a hyphen in 
the simple tenses: Ne savez-vous pas? 

2. The pronoun is attached to the auxiliary in the 
compound tenses: N'avez-vous pas su? 



204 THE VERB [§133 

Classification of Verbs. 

§ 133. All French verbs may be classified as follows: 

( actifs 

A. Transitifs \ passifs 

{ refiechis 

( neutres 

B. Intransitifs I impersonnels 

{ substantifs 

A. Un verbe transitif (transitive) is any verb which 
has or can have a direct object. 

1. It is actif (active) when that which is represented by the sub- 
ject performs the action: Jean aime Charles, John loves Charles. 

2. It is passif (passive) when that which is represented by the 
subject receives the action: Charles est aime de Jean, Charles is 
loved by John. 

3. It is reflechi (reflexive) when that which is represented by the 
subject both acts and receives the action: Jean se bats, John strikes 
himself. 

B. Un verbe intransitif (intransitive) is one expressing 
a state, or even an action that is not received by any 
object. 

1. It is neutre (neuter), because it cannot take a direct object: 
L'enfant dort, the child sleeps; le cheval marche, the horse walks. 

(The terms neutre and intransitif are often used interchangeably 
in French.) 

2. It is impersonnel (impersonal) when used only in the third 
personal singular, expressing an action or state which can be attrib- 
uted to no person or thing: il neige, it snows; il pleut, it rains; il 
faut, it is necessary. 

3. The verb etre is called un verbe substantif (a substantive verb), 
because it expresses mere existence: il est; elles etaient. 



134-136] passive verbs: etre aime 



205 



§ 134. Resume. — There are, then, six kinds of verbs: 
active, passive, reflexive, neuter, impersonal, and sub- 
stantive. 

VERBES PASSIFS. 

§ 135. As in English, a verb may be conjugated in the 
passive voice by adding its past participle to each form 
in the conjugation of " to be " (etre). 

It must be kept in mind that the participle will always 
agree with the subject in gender and number. 

§ 136. Conjugaison du verbe passif: Etre aime* (to be 
loved) : 



L'INDICATIF, 

Present. 
(I am loved) 
je suis aime(e) 



tu es aime 

il est aime 

elle est aimee 

nous sommes aimes 

vous etes aimes 

ils sont aimes 

elles sont aimees 



Parfait Indefini. 
(I have been loved) 
j'ai ete aime(e) 



tu as ete aime 

il a ete aime 

elle a ete aimee 

nous avons ete aimes 

vous avez ete aimes 

ils ont ete aimes 

elles ont ete aimees 



Imparfait. 


Plus-qtje-parfait. 


(7 was loved) 


(I had been loved) 


j'etais 


aime 


j'avais ete aime 


tu etais 


aime 


tu avais ete aime 


il etait 


aime 


il avait ete aime 


nous etions 


aimes 


nous avions ete aimes 


vous etiez 


aimes 


vous aviez ete aimes 


ils etaient aimes 


ils avaient ete aimes 



* Agent. — The one by whom the action is performed is, as a rule, 
indicated by par if definite intention is implied, otherwise by de. 



206 



THE VERB 



[§136 



Parfait Defini. 
(I was loved) 
je fus aime 
tu fus aime 
il fut aime 
nous fumes aimes 
vous futes aimes 
ils furent aimes 



Parfait Anterieur. 
(I had been loved) 
j'eus ete aime 
tu eus ete aime 
il eut ete aime 
nous eumes ete aimes 
vous eutes ete aimes 
ils eurent ete aimes 



FUTUR. 


Futur Anterieur. 


(I shall be loved) 


(7 shall have been loved) 


je serai 


aime 


y aurai ete 


aime 


tu seras 


aime 


tu auras ete 


aime 


il .sera 


aime 


il aura ete 


aime 


nous serons 


aimes 


nous aurons ete 


aimes 


vous serez 


aimes 


vous aurez ete 


aimes 


ils seront 


aimes 


ils auront ete 


aimes 



LE CONDITIONNEL. 
Present. Parfait. 

(I should be loved) (I should have been loved) 



je serais 


aime 


j' aurais ete 


aime 


tu serais 


aime 


tu aurais ete 


aime 


il serait 


aime 


il aurait ete 


aime 


nous serions 


aimes 


nous aurions ete 


aimes 


vous seriez 


aimes 


vous auriez ete 


aimes 


ils seraient 


aimes 


ils auraient ete 


aimes 



L'IMPERATIF. 

Present. i Parfait. 

sois aime (Be loved) aie ete aime (Have been loved) 



soyons aimes 
soyez aimes 



ayons ete aimes 
ayez ete aimes 



(136] 



passive verbs: etre aime 



207 



LE SUBJONCTIF. 



Present 




{That I may be loved) 


que je sois 


aime 


que tu sois 


aime 


qu'il soit 


aime 


que nous soyons 


aimes 


que vous soyez 


aimes 


qu'ils soient 


aimes 


Imparfait. 


{That I might be loved) 


que je fusse 


aime 


que tu fusses 


aime 


qu'il fut 


aime 


que nous fussions 


aimes 


que vous fussiez 


aimes 


qu'ils fussent 


aimes 



Parfait. 



{That I may have been loved) 

que j' aie ete aime 

que tu aies ete aime 

qu'il ait ete aime 

que nous ayons ete aimes 

que vous ayez ete aimes 

qu'ils aient ete aimes 

Plus-que-parfait. 
{That I might have been loved) 
quej' eusse ete aime 
que tu eusses ete aime 
qu'il eut ete aime 

que nous eussions ete aimes 
que vous eussiez ete aimes 
qu'ils eussent ete aimes 



L'INFINITIF. 
Present. Parfait. 

etre aime {to be loved) avoir ete aime {to have been loved) 



LE PARTICIPE. 
Present. Parfait. 

etant aime {being loved) ayant ete aime {having been loved) 

Participe Passe (variable). 
aime {loved) : fern, aimee 



208 



THE VERB 



§137 



VERBES REFLECHIS. 

(See Part I, Lesson XVIII, and § 71, 2, a.) 

§ 137. Conjugaison du verbe reflechi: Se Repentir (to 

repent) : 



L'INDICATIF. 


Present. 


Parfait Indefini. 


(7 repent) 


(I have repented) 


je me repens 


je me suis repenti 


tu te repens 


tu t'es repenti 


il se repent 


il s'est repenti 


nous nous repentons 


nous nous sommes repentis 


vous vous repentez 


vous vous etes repentis 


ils se repentent 


ils se sont repentis 


Imparfait. 


Plus-que-parfait. 


(I repented) 


(I had repented) 


je me repentais 


je m'etais repenti 


tu te repentais 


tu t'etais repenti 


il se repentait 


il s'etait repenti 


nous nous repentions 


nous nous etions repentis 


vous vous repentiez 


. vous vous etiez repentis 


ils se repentaient 


ils s'etaient repentis 


Parfait Defini. 


Parfait Anterieur. 


(I repented) 


(I had repented) 


je me repentis 


je me fus repenti 


tu te repentis 


tu te fus repenti 


il se repentit 


il se fut repenti 


nous nous repentimes 


nous nous fumes repentis 


vous vous repentites 


vous vous futes repentis 


ils se repentirent 


ils se furent repentis 



§137] 



REFLEXIVE VERBS : SE REPENTIR 



209 



FtJTUR. 


Futur Anterieur. 


(I shall repent) 


(/ shall have repented) 


je me 


repentirai 


je me serai 


repenti 


tu te 


repentiras 


tu te seras 


repenti 


il se 


repentira 


il se sera 


repenti 


nous nous 


repentirons 


nous nous serons 


repentis 


vous vous 


repentirez 


vous vous serez 


repentis 


ils se 


repentiront 


ils se seront 


repentis 




LE CONDITIONNEL. 




Present. 


Parfait. 


(/ should repent) 


(7 shoidd have r 


epented) 


je me 


repentirais 


je me serais 


repenti 


tu te 


repentirais 


tu te serais 


repenti 


i] se 


repentirait 


il se serait 


repenti 


nous nous 


repentirions 


nous nous serions 


repentis 


vous vous 


repentiriez 


vous vous seriez 


repent s 


ils se 


repentiraient 


ils se seraient 


repentis 




L'IMPERATIF. 




Present. 


Parfait. 




repens-toi (Repent) 






repentons-nous 


(Inusite) 




repentez- 


-vous 








LE SUBJONCTIF. 




Present. 


Parfait. 





(That I may repent) 
que je me repente 
que tu te repentes 
qu'il se repente 
que nous nous repentions 
que vous vous repentiez 
ou'ils se reoentent 



( That I may have repented) 
que je me sois repenti 

que tu te sois repenti 

qu'il se soit repenti 

que nous nous soyons repentis 
que vous vous soyez repentis 
ou'ils se soient repentis 



210 THE VERB [§§138-139 

Imparfait. Plus-que-parfait. 

( That I might re-pent) ( That I might have repented) 

que je me repentisse que je me fusse repenti 

que tu te repentisses que tu te fusses repenti 

qu'il se repentit qu'il se fut repenti 

que nous nous repentissions que nous nous fussions repentis 

que vous vous repentissiez que vous vous fussiez repentis 

qu'ils se repentissent qu'ils se fussent repentis 

L'INFINITIF. 
Present. Parfait. 

se repentir (to repent) s'etre repenti (to have repented) 

LE PARTICIPE. 

Present. Parfait. 

se repentant (repenting) s'etant repenti (having repented) 

Participe Passe. 

repenti (repented) : fern, repentie 



VERBES IMPERSONNELS. 

§ 138. As in English, an impersonal verb is conjugated 
only in the third person singular and has " it " (il), used 
in a vague sense, as subject: il tonne, it thunders; il 
pleut, it rains. 

§ 139. Conjugaison du verbe impersonnel: Neiger (to 
snow) : 

L'INDICATIF. 

Present. Parfait Indefini. 

il neige (It snows) il a neige (It has snowed,) 

Imparfait. Plus-que-parfait. 

il neige*ait (It was snowing) .il avait neige (It had snowed) 
*See §§ 4, 1 and 141. 



§139] IMPERSONAL VERBS! XEIGER 211 

Parfait Define Parfait Anterieur. 

il neige*a (// snowed) il eut neige (It had snowed) 

Futur. Futub Axterieur. 

il neigera (It will snow) il aura neige (7/ will have snowed) 

LE CONDITIONNEL. 

Present. Parfait. 

il neigerait (It would snow) il aurait neige (It would have snowed) 

LE SUBJONCTTF. 

Present. Parfait. 

qu'il neige (That it may snow) qu'il ait neige (That it may have 

snowed) 

Imparfait. Plus-que-parfait. 

qu'il neige*at (That it might qu'il eut neige (That it might 

snow) have snowed) 

L'INFINITIF. 

Present. Parfait. 

neiger (to snow) avoir neige (to have snowed) 

LE PARTICIPE. 

Present. Parfait. 

neige *ant (snowing) ayant neige (having snowed) 

Participe Passe. 
neige 



*See §§4, 1, and 141. 



212 THE VERB [§§140-143 

ORTHOGRAPHICAL PECULIARITIES. 
§ 140. Verbs in cer. 

Verbs in cer, like percer, effacer, tracer, take a cedilla 
under the c every time that this letter comes before a or o : 
je percais; nous eff aeons; tu tracas (§4, 1). 

§ 141. Verbs in ger. 

Verbs in ger, like venger, manger, neiger, take a silent e 
after the g every time that this letter comes before a or o: 
nous mangeons; je mangeais (§4, 1), 

§ 142. Verbs in yer. 

1. Verbs in oyer and uyer, like envoy er, essuyer, change 
the y to i before a silent e: 

j'envoie, tu envoies, il envoie, nous envoyons, vous envoyez, 
ils envoient. 

2. Verbs in ayer and eyer, like payer, grasseyer, ordina- 
rily retain the y throughout: 

je paye; il grasseyera. 

However, the French Academy authorizes the changing 
of the y to i before a silent e: 
je paie; j'essaierai. 

§ 143. Verbs with Stem-vowel in e or e. 

1. Grave accent. Verbs like mener and ceder which 
have an unaccented e (e) or an e ferme (e) in next to the 
last syllable of the infinitive (as stem-vowel) change the 
e or e to e ouvert (e) when followed by a silent syllable: 

je mene, tu menes, il mene, nous menons, vous menez, ils 
menent; je cede, tu cedes, il cede, nous cedons, vous cedez, ils 
cedent. 



§§144-145] IRREGULAR VERBS: IN ER 213 

However, the verbs which have an acute accent in the 
infinitive retain it in the future and conditional: 
je cederai, ils cederaient. 

2. Doubling / or /. Most verbs in eler and eter double 
the consonant I or t before a silent e: 

j'appeZZe, tu appe/fes, il appeZZe, nous appelons, vous appelez, 
ils appeZtent; je jette, tu jettes, il jette, nous jetons, vous jetez, 
ils je/tent. 

a. A few verbs in eler and eter, however, take the grave 
accent like mener: 

je gele, tu geles, il gele, nous gelons, vous gelez, ils gelent; j'achete, 
tu achetes, il achete, nous ache tons, vous achetez, ils achetent. 

§ 144. Verbs in ier and ier. 

In verbs in eer and ier, as creer, prier, etudier, it must 
be borne in mind that the vowels e, i form part of the 
stem: 

je cr<?e, je creerai; nous etudiions (imperf.). 



VERBES IRREGULIERS. 

Premiere Conjugaison, en er. 

§ 145. Aller (to go). — Ind. pres. je vais, tu vas, il va, 
nous allons, vous allez, ils vont; Imparf. j'allais, nous 
allions; Parf. def. j'allai, nous allames; Parf. indef. je 
suis alle, nous sommes alles; Fut. j'irai, nous irons. — 
Cond. pres. j'irais, nous irions. — Imper. va, allons, allez. 
— Subj. pres. que j'aille, que nous allions, que vous alliez, 
qu'ils aillent; Imparf. que j'allasse, que nous allassions, 
qu'ils allassent. — Part, allant, alle. (Uses etre as auxil- 
iary.) 



214 THE VERB [§§146-150 

146. Envoyer (to send). — Ind. pres. j'envoie, nous 
envoyons; Imparf. j'envoyais, nous envoyions; Par}, def. 
Y envoy ai, nous envoy ames; Fut. j'enverrai, nous enver- 
rons. — Imper. ' envoie, envoyons, envoyez.— Subj. pres. 
que j'envoie, que nous envoyions, qu'ils envoient; Im- 
parf. que j'envoyasse, que nous envoyassions, qu'ils 
envoyassent. — Part, envoyant, envoye. 

Deuxieme Conjugaison, in ir. 

§ 147. Acquerir (to acquire). — Ind. pres. j'acquiers, il 
acquiert, nous acquerons, ils acquierent; Imparf. j'acque- 
rais, nous acquerions; Parf. def. j 'acquis, nous acquimes; 
Fut. j'acquerrai, nous acquerrons. — Cond. pres. j'acquer- 
rais, nous acquerrions. — Imper. acquiers, acquerons, 
acquerez. — Subj. pres. que j'acquiere, que nous acque- 
rions, qu'ils acquierent; Imparf. que j'acquisse, que nous 
acquissions. — Part, acquerant, acquis. [Conquerir (to 
conquer) and requerir (to require) are conjugated like 
acquerir.] 

§ 148. Assaillir (to assail). — Ind. pres. j'assaille, nous 
assaillons; Imparf. j'assaillais, nous assaillons; Parf. 
def. j'assaillis, nous assaillimes ; Fut. j'assaillirai, nous 
assaillirons. — Cond. pres. j'assaillirais, nous assaillirions. 
—Imper. assaille, assaillons, assaillez. — Subj. pres. que 
j'assaille, que nous assaillions; Imparf. que j'assaillisse, 
que nous assaillissions. — Part, assaillant, assailli. 

§ 149. Benir (to bless). — Is regular except that it has 
two past participles: beni and benit. The latter has 
come to be used only as an adjective, meaning " conse- 
crated": du pain benit (consecrated bread), de l'eau 
benite (holy water). 

§ 150. Bouillir (to boil). — Ind. pres. je bous, tu bous, il 



§§151-154] IRREGULAR VERBS I IN 1R 215 

bout, nous bouillons, vous bouillez, ils bouillent; Imparf. 
je bouillais, nous bouillions; Par}, def. je bouillis, nous 
bouillimes; Fut. je bouillirai, nous bouillirons. — Cond. 
pres. je bouillirais, nous bouillirions. — Imper. bous, bouil- 
lons, bouillez. — Subj. pres. que je bouille, que nous bouil- 
lions; Imparf. que je bouillisse, que nous bouillissions. — 
Part, bouillant, bouilli. 

§ 151. Courir (to run). — Ind. pres. je cours, tu cours, 
il court, nous courons, vous courez, ils courent; Imparf. 
je courais, nous courions; Parf. def. je courus, nous 
courtimes; Fut. je courrai, nous courrons. — Cond. pres. 
je courrais, nous courrions. — Imper. cours, courons, 
courez. — Subj. pres. que je coure, que nous courions; 
Imparf. que je courusse, que nous courussions. — Part. 
courant, couru. 

§ 152. Cueillir (to pluck, to gather). — Ind. pres. je 
cueille, nous cueillons; Imparf. je cueillais, nous cueillions; 
Parf. def. je cueillis, nous cueillimes; Fut. je cueillerai, 
nous cueillerons. — Cond. pres. je cueillerais, nous cueille- 
rions. — Imper. cueille, cueillons, cueillez. — Subj. pres. que 
je cueille, que nous cueillions; Imparf. que je cueillisse, 
que nous cueillissions.- — Part, cueillant, cueilli. 

§ 153. Dormir (to sleep). — Ind. pres. je dors, tu dors, 
il dort, nous dormons, vous dormez, ils dorment; Imparf. 
je dormais, nous dormions; Parf. def. je dormis, nous 
dormimes; Fut. je dormirai, nous dormirons. — Cond. pres. 
je dormirais, nous dominions. — Imper. dors, dormons, 
dormez. — Subj. pres. que je dorme, que nous dormions; 
Imparf. que je dormisse, que nous dormissions. — Part. 
dormant, dormi. 

§ 154. Faillir (to fail, to be on the point of). — Ind. pres. 
je faux, tu faux, il faut, nous faillons, vous faillez, ils 



216 THE VERB [§§155-159 

faillent; Imparf. je faillais, nous faillions; Parf. def. je 
faillis, nous faillimes; Fut. je faudrai, nous faudrons. — 
Cond. pres. je faudrais, nous faudrions. — Imper. not used. 
— Subj. pres. que je faille, que nous faillions; Imparf. que 
je faillisse, que nous faillissions. — Part, faillant, failli. 
(Several of the tenses of this verb, such as the present de 
Vindicatif, V imparf ait and the futur, are seldom used.) 

§ 155. Ferir (to strike). — Occurs only in the phrase, 
" Sans coup ferir " (Without striking a blow), and in the 
past participle, feru (wounded). 

§ 156. Fleurir has two forms: fleurissais, fleurissant; 
florissait, florissant. The former, from the noun fleur, 
means to bloom; the latter, from an old verb, florir, sig- 
nifies to flourish, to prosper. 

§ 157. Fuir (to flee, to avoid). — Ind. pres. je fuis, tu 
fuis, il fuit, nous fuyons, vous fuyez, ils fuient; Imparf. 
je fuyais, nous fuyions; Parf. def. je fuis, nous fuimes; 
Fut. je fuirai, nous fuirons. — Cond. pres. je fuirais, nous 
fuirions. — Imper. fuis, fuyons, fuyez. — Subj. pres. que je 
fuie, que nous fuyions, qu'ils fuient; Imparf. que je fuisse, 
que nous fuissions. — Part, fuyant, fui. 

§ 158. Gesir (to lie, lie buried). — This verb is now used 
only in the following forms: Ind. pres. il git, nous gisons, 
ils gisent; Imparf. il gisait; Part. pres. gisant. It occurs 
chiefly in epitaphs : Ci-git (Here lies) . 

§ 159. Hair (to hate). — Ind pres. je hais, tu hais, il 
hait, nous haissons, vous haissez, ils haissent; Imparf. je 
haissais, nous haissions; Parf. def. je hais, tu hais, il hait, 
nous haimes, vous haites, ils hairent; Fut. je hairai, nous 
hairons. — Cond. pres. je hairais, nous hairions. — Imper. 
hais, haissons, haissez. — Subj. pres. que je haisse, que nous 



§§160-164] IRREGULAR VERBS: IN IR 217 

ha'issions; Imparf. que je haisse, que nous haissions. — 
Part, haissant, ha'i. 

Note. — Hair loses the diaeresis in the singular of the present 
indicative and of the imperative and takes no circumflex accent; 
otherwise it is conjugated like finir. 

§ 160. Issir (to issue, spring from).' — Is no longer used 
except in the past participle: issu. 

§ 161. Mentir (to lie, tell a lie). — Ind. pres. je mens, 
nous mentons; Imparf. je mentais, nous mentions; Parf. 
def. je mentis, nous mentimes; Fut. je mentirai, nous 
mentirons. —Cond. pres. je mentirais, nous mentirions. — 
Imper. mens, mentons, mentez. — Subj. pres. que je mente, 
que nous mentions; Imparf. que je mentisse, que nous 
mentissions. — Part, mentant, menti. 

§ 162. Mourir (to die). — Ind. pres. je meurs, il meurt, 
nous mourons, ils meurent; Imparf. je mourais, nous 
mourions; Parf. def. je mourus, nous mourumes; Fut. 
je mourrai, nous mourrons. — Cond. pres. je mourrais, nous 
mourrions. — Imper. meurs, mourons, mourez. — Subj. pres. 
que je meure, que nous mourions, qu'ils meurent; Imparf. 
que je mourusse, que nous mourussions. — Part, mourant, 
mort. (Uses etre as auxiliary.) 

§ 163. Offrir (to offer). — Ind. pres. j 'offre, nous offrons; 
Imparf. j'offrais, nous offrions; Parf. def. j'offris, nous 
offrimes; Fut. j'offrirai, nous offrirons. — Cond. pres. j'offri- 
rais, nous offririons. — Imper. offre, offrons, offrez. — Subj. 
pres. que j 'offre, que nous. offrions ; Imparf. que j'offrisse, 
que nous offrissions. — Part, offrant, offert. 

§ 164. Ou'ir (to hear). — Conjugated in full in the Old 
French, it now occurs only in the present infinitive, outr, 
in the past part., oui, in the past definite, j'ou'is etc., and 
in the imperfect subjunctive, que j'ouisse. 



218 THE VERB [§§165-174 

§ 165. Ouvrir (to open). — Conjugated like Offrir (§ 163). 

§ 166. Partir (to depart). — Conjugated like Mentir (§ 
161). 

§ 167. Querir (to fetch, go and get). — Is used only in 
the infinitive: Allez querir le maitre (Go get the teacher). 

§ 168. Saillir. — When meaning to leap, makes its future 
je sailltrai; when meaning to jut out, project, makes the 
future il saillera. 

§ 169. Sentir (to smell; reflex, to feel). — Conjugated 
like Mentir (§ 161). 

§ 170. Servir (to serve). — Conjugated like Mentir (§ 
161). 

§ 171. Sortir (to go out). — Is conjugated like Mentir, 
except that in its compound tenses it uses etre as auxil- 
iary. 

§ 172. Souffrir (to suffer). — Conjugated like Offrir (§ 
163). 

§ 173. Tenir (to hold). — Ind. pres. je tiens, tu tiens, il 
teint, nous tenons, vous tenez, ils tiennent; Imparf. je 
tenais, nous tenions; Parf. def. je tins, nous tinmes, vous 
tintes, ils tinrent; Fut. je tiendrai, nous tiendrons. — 
Cond. pres. je tiendrais, 'nous tiendrions. — Imper. tiens, 
tenons, tenez. — Subj. pres. que je tienne, que nous teni- 
ons, qu'ils tiennent; Imparf. que je tinsse, que nous 
tinssions, qu'ils tinssent. — Part, tenant, tenu. 

§ 174. Transir (to chill). — Aside from the infinitive, 
this verb has only the indicatif present, parfait indefini, 
and participe passe: Le froid me transit; le vent m'a 
transi; je suis transi. 



§§175-181] IRREGULAR VERBS: IN IR, OIR 219 

§ 175. Tressaillir (to tremble, shudder, give a start). — 
Like Assaillir (§ 148). 

§ 176. Venir (to come). — In its simple tenses like Tenir 
(§ 173); uses etre as auxiliary for its compound tenses. 

§ 177. Vetir (to clothe). — Ind. pres. je vets, tu vets, il 
vet, nous vetons, vous vetez, ils vetent; Imparf. je 
vetais, nous vetions; Parf. def. je vetis, nous vetimes; 
Fid. je vetirai, nous vetirons. — Cond. pres. je vetirais, 
nous vetirions. — Imper. vets, vetons, vetez. — Subj. pres. 
que je vete, que nous vetions; Imparf. que je vetisse, que 
nous vetissions. — Part, vetant, vetu. 

Troisieme Conjugaison, en oir. 

§ 178. Apparoir (to appear, be evident) .—Used only in 
the infinitive and third person singular of the present 
indicative: il appert. 

§ 179. Asseoir (to seat; reflex, to be seated). — Ind. 
pres. j'assieds, il assied, nous asseyons, vous asseyez, ils 
asseyent; Imparf. j'asseyais, nous asseyions; Parf. def. 
j'assis, nous assimes; Fut. j'assierai, nous assierons (or 
j'asseyerai, nous asseyerons). — Cond. pres. j'assierais, 
nous assierions (or j'asseyerais, nous asseyerions) .• — Im- 
per. assieds, asseyons, asseyez. — Subj. pres. que j'asseye, 
que nous asseyions, qu'ils asseyent; Imparf. que j'assisse, 
que nous assissions. — Part, asseyant, assis. 

§ 180. Choir (to fall). — Is seldom used in any of its 
forms except the present infinitive. The old past partici- 
ple, chu, chute, has given the substantive, la chute (the 
fall). (Uses etre as auxiliary.) 

§ 181. Dechoir (to fall off, decay). — Ind. pres. je de- 
chois, nous dechoyons, ils dechoient; Imparf. je de- 



220 THE VERB [§§182-186 

choyais, nous dechoyions; Parf. def. je dechus, nous 
dechumes; Fut. je decherrai, nous decherrons. — Cond. 
pres. je decherrais, nous decherrions. — Subj. pres. que je 
dechoie, que nous dechoyions, qu'ils dechoient; Imparf. 
que je dechusse, que nous dechussions. — No participe pre- 
sent; Part, passe, dechu. 

§ 182 Echoir (to fall due, expire) . — Is used only in the 
third person singular of the pres. de V indie, il echoit; in 
the parf. def. j'echus; in the fut. j'echerrai; Cond. pres. 
j'echerrais; Imparf. du subj. que j'echusse; Part. pres. 
echeant, part, passe, echu. (Uses etre as auxiliary.) 

§ 183. Falloir (to be necessary; must — impers.). — Ind. 
pres. il faut; Imparf. il fallait; Parf. def. il fallut; Fut. 
il faudra. — Cond. pres. il faudrait. — Subj. pres. qu'il faille; 
Imparf. qu'il fallut.— Part, passe, fallu. 

§ 184. Mouvoir (to move). — Ind. pres. je meus, tu 
meus, il meut, nous mouvons,' vous mouvez, ils meuvent; 
Imparf. je mouvais, nous mouvions; Parf. def. je mus, 
nous mumes; Fut. je mouvrai, nous mouvrons. — Cond. 
pres. je mouvrais, nous mouvrions. — Imper. meus, mou- 
vons, mouvez. — Subj. pres. que je meuve, que nous 
mouvions, qu'ils meuvent; Imparf. que je musse, que 
nous mussions, qu'ils mussent". — Part, mouvant, mu. 

§ 185. Pleuvoir (to rain — impers.). — Ind. pres. il pleut; 
Imparf. il pleuvait; Parf. def. il plut; Fut. il pleuvra. — 
Cond. pres. il pleuvrait. — Subj. pres. qu'il pleuve; Imparf. 
qu'il plut. — Part, pleuvant, plu. 

§ 188. Pouvoir (to be able; can).— Znd. pres. je peux 
(or je puis), tu peux, il peut, nous pouvons, vous pouvez, 
ils peuvent; Imparf. je pouvais, nous pouvions; Parf. def. 
je pus, nous pumes; Fut. je pourrai, nous pourrons. — 



§§187-192] IRREGULAR VERBS: IN OIR 221 

Cond. pres. je pourrais, nous pourrions. — Imper. not used. 
— Subj. pres. que je puisse, que nous puissions; Imparf. 
que je pusse, que nous pussions. — Part, pouvant, pu. 

§ 187. Promouvoir (to promote). — Is seldom used ex- 
cept in the present infinitive, the past participle (promu), 
and the compound tenses. 

§ 188. Savoir (to know, know how). — Ind. pres. je sais, 
tu sais, il sait, nous savons, vous savez, ils savent; Im- 
parf. je savais, nous savions; Parf. def. je sus, nous 
stimes; Fut. je saurai, nous saurons. — Cond. pres. je 
saurais, nous saurions. — Imper. sache, sachons, sachez. — 
Subj. pres. que je sache, que nous sachions; Imparf. que 
je susse, que nous sussions. — Part, sachant, su. 

§ 189. Seoir. — -In the sense of "to be seated," this verb 
is no longer used, except occasionally in the present par- 
ticiple (seant), and in the past participle (sis). In the 
sense of " to be fitting or suitable," it occurs still in cer- 
tain tenses but always in the third person of the singular 
or plural: il sied, ils sieent, il seyait, il siera; Part pres. 
seyant. 

§ 190. Souloir (to be accustomed) . — Is used only in the 
imperfect indicative: II soulait dire (He was accustomed 
to say). 

§ 191. Valoir (to be worth). — Ind. pres. je vaux, tu 
vaux, il vaut, nous valons, vous valez, ils valent; Imparf. 
je valais, nous valions; Parf. def. je valus, nous valumes; 
Fut. je vaudrai, nous vaudrons. — Cond. pres. je vaudrais, 
nous vaudrions. — Imper. vaux, valons, valez. — Subj. pres. 
que je vaille, que nous valions, qu'ils vaillent; Imparf. 
que je valusse, que nous valussions. — Part, valant, valu. 

§ 192. Voir (to see). — Ind. pres. je vois, tu vois, il voit, 



222 THE VERB [§§193-196 

nous voyons, vous voyez, ils voient; Imparf. je voyais, 
nous voyions; Parf. def. je vis, nous vimes; Fut. je verrai, 
nous verrons. — Cond. pres. je verrais, nous verrions. — 
Imper. vois, voyons, voyez. — Subj. pres. que je voie, que 
nous voyions; Imparf. que je visse, que nous vissions. — 
Part, voyant, vu. 

§ 193. Vouloir (to wish, be willing). — Ind. pres. je veux, 
tu veux, il veut, nous voulons, vous voulez, ils veulent; 
Lmpaff. je voulais, nous voulions; Parf. def. je voulus, 
nous voulumes; Fut. je voudrai, nous voudrons. — Cond. 
pres. je voudrais, nous voudrions. — Imper. veux, voulons, 
voulez, or veuille, veuillons, veuillez. — Subj. pres. que je 
veuille, que nous voulions, qu'ils veuillent; Imparf. que 
je voulusse, que nous voulussions, qu'ils voulussent. — 
Part, voulant, voulu. 



Quatrieme Conjugaison, en re. 

§ 194. Absoudre (to absolve). — Ind. pres. j 'absous, tu 
absous, il absout, nous absolvons, vous absolvez, ils ab- 
solvent; Imparf. j'absolvais, nous absolvions; Parf. def. 
wanting; Fut. j'absoudrai, nous absoudrons. — Cond. pres. 
j'absoudrais, nous absoudripns. — Imper. absous, absol- 
vons, absolvez. — Subj. pres. que j 'absolve, que nous 
absolvions; Imparf. wanting. — Part, absolvant; absous, 
absoute. 

§ 195. Accroire (to believe). — Used only in the present 
infinitive: faire accroire a (to make believe); en faire 
accroire a (to impose upon). 

§ 196. Battre (to beat, strike). — Loses one t in the 
present indicative singular: je bats, tu bats, il bat, other- 
wise like rompre. 



§§197-201] IRREGULAR VERBS! IN RE 223 

§ 197. Boire (to drink). — Ind. pres. je bois, tu bois, il 
boit, nous buvons, vous buvez, ils boivent; Imparf. je 
buvais, nous buvions; Parf. def. je bus, nous bumes; 
Fut. je boirai, nous boirons. — Cond. pres. je boirais, nous 
boirions. — Imper. bois, buvons, buvez. — Subj. pres. que 
je boive, que nous buvions, qu'ils boivent; Imparf. que je 
busse, que nous bussions, qu'ils bussent.— Part, buvant, 
bu. 

§ 198. Braire (to bray, to whine). — Is seldom used ex- 
cept in the infinitive, the third persons of the present 
indicative, of the future, and of the present conditional: 
braire; il brait, ils braient; il braira, ils brairont; il brai- 
rait, ils brairaient. 

§ 199. Bruire (to rustle, murmur). — Has only the fol- 
lowing forms: bruire, il bruit, il bruissait, ils bruissaient. 
Bruyant is now rather an adjective, meaning " noisy," 
than a present participle. 



§ 200. Clore (to close, enclose). — Has only the past 
participle, clos; the three persons of the singular of the 
present indicative, je clos, tu clos, il clot; the future, je 
clorai etc.; the present conditional, je clorais etc.; the 
imperative singular, clos; the present subjunctive, que je 
close, and the compound tenses. 

§ 201. Conclure (to conclude). — Ind. pres. je conclus, 
tu conclus, il conclut, nous concluons, vous concluez, ils 
concluent; Imparf. je concluais, 'nous concluions; Parf. 
def. je conclus, nous conclumes; Fut. je conclurai, nous 
conclurons. — Cond. pres. je conclurais, nous conclurions. 
— Imper. conclus, concluons, concluez. — Subj. pres. que 
je conclue, que nous concluions; Imparf. que je conclusse, 
que nous conclussions. — Part, concluant, conclu. 



224 the verb [§§202-205 

§ 202. Conduire (to conduct, drive). — Ind. pres. je con- 
dais, tu conduis, il conduit, nous conduisons, vous con- 
duisez, ils conduisent; Imparf. je conduisais, nous con- 
duisions; Parf. def. je conduisis, nous conduisimes; Fut. 
je conduirai, nous conduirons. — Cond. pres. je conduirais, 
nous conduirions. — Imper. conduis, conduisons, conduisez. 
— Subj. pres. que je conduise, que nous conduisions; Im- 
parf. que je conduisisse, que nous conduisissions. — Part. 
conduisant, conduit. 

§ 203. Confire (to preserve, pickle) .—Ind. pres. je con- 
ns, nous confisons; Imparf. je confisais, nous confisions; 
Parf. def. je confis, nous confimes; Fut. je confirai, nous 
conflrons. — Cond. pres. je confirais, nous confirions. — Im- 
per. confis, confisons, confisez.— Subj. pres. que je confise, 
que nous confisions; Imparf. not used. — Part, confisant, 
confit. 

§ 204. Connaitre (to know, be acquainted with). — Ind. 
pres. je connais, tu connais, il connait, nous connaissons, 
vous connaissez, ils connaissent; Imparf. je connaissais, 
nous connaissions ; Parf. def. je connus, nous connumes; 
Fut. je connaitrai, nous connaitrons. — Cond. pres. je con- 
naitrais, nous connaitrions. — Imper. connais connaissons, 
connaissez. — Subj. pres. que* je connaisse, que nous con- 
naissions; Imparf. que je connusse, que nous connussions. 
— Part, connaissant, connu. 

§ 205. Coudre (to sew). — Ind. pres. je couds, tu couds, 
il coud, nous cousons, vous cousez, ils cousent; Imparf. 
je cousais, nous cousions; Parf. def. je cousis, nous cou- 
simes; Fut. je coudrai, nous coudrons. — Cond. pres. je 
coudrais, nous coudrions. — Imper. couds, cousons, cousez. 
— Subj. pres. que je couse, que nous cousions; Imparf. que 
je cousisse, que nous cousissions. — Part, cousant, cousu 



§§206-210] IRREGULAR VERBS: IN RE 225 

§ 206. Craindre (to fear). — Ind. pres. je crains, tu 
crams, il craint, nous craignons, vous craignez, ils craign- 
ent; Imparf. je craignais, nous craignions ; Parf. def. je 
craignis, nous craignimes; Fut. je craindrai, nous crain- 
drons. — Cond. pres. je craindrais, nous craindrions. — 
Imper. crains, craignons, craignez. — Subj. pres. que je 
craigne, que nous craignions; Imparf. que je craignisse, 
que nous craignissions. — Part, craignant, craint. 

§ 207. Croire (to believe, to think). — Ind. pres. je crois, 
tu crois, il croit, nous croyons, vous croyez, ils croient; 
Imparf. je croyais, nous croyions; Parf. def. je crus, nous 
crumes; Fut. je croirai, nous croirons.— Cond. pres. je 
croirais, nous croirions. — Imper. crois, croyons, croyez. — 
Subj. pres. que je croie, que nous croyions, qu'ils croient; 
Imparf. que je crusse, que nous crussions, qu'ils crussent. 
— Part, croyant, cru. 

§ 208. Croitre (to grow, increase). — Ind. pres. je crois, 
tu crois, il croit, nous croissons, vous croissez, ils croissent; 
Imparf. je croissais, nous croissions; Parf. def. je crus, 
nous crumes; Fut. je croitrai, nous croitrons. — Cond. pres. 
je croitrais, nous croitrions.- — Imper. crois, croissons, 
croissez. — Subj. pres. que je croisse, que nous croissions; 
Imparf. que je crusse, que nous crussions. — Part, crois- 
sant, cru. 

§ 209. Dire (to say, to tell). — Ind. pres. je dis, tu dis, 
il dit, nous disons, vous dites, ils disent; Imparf. je disais, 
nous disons; Parf. def. je dis, nous dimes, vous dites, ils 
dirent; Fut. je dirai, nous dirons. — Cond. pres. je dirais, 
nous dirions. — Imper. dis, disons, dites.— Subj. pres. que 
je dise, que nous disions; Imparf. que je disse, que nous 
dissions. — Part, disant, dit. 

§ 210. Eclore (to hatch, to open [of flowers]). — Has only 



226 THE VERB [§§211-215 

the following forms: Ind. pres. il eclot, ils eclosent; Fut. 
il eclora, ils ecloront. — Cond. pres. il eclorait, ils eclor- 
aient. — Subj. pres. qu'il eclose, qu'ils eclosent. — Part. pass. 
eclos. (Uses etre as auxiliary.) 

§ 211. Ecrire (to write). — Ind. pres. j'ecris, nous ecri- 
vons; Imparf. j'ecrivais, nous ecrivions; Parf. def. j'ecri- 
vis, nous ecrivimes; Fut. j'ecrirai, nous ecrirons.- — Cond. 
pres. j'ecrirais, nous ecririons. — Imper. ecris, ecrivons, 
ecrivez. — Subj. pres. que j'ecrive, que nous ecrivions; 
Imparf. que j'ecrivisse, que nous ecrivissions. — Part, ecri- 
vant, ecrit. 

§ 212. Faire (to make, to do). — Ind. pres. je fais, tu 
fais, il fait, nous faisons, vous'faites, ils font; Imparf. je 
faisais, nous faisions; Parf. def. je fis, nous fimes; Fut. 
je ferai, nous ferons. — Cond. pres. je ferais, nous ferions. 
— Imper. fais, faisons, faites. — Subj. pres. que je fasse, 
que nous fassions; Imparf. que je fisse, que nous fissions. 
— Part, faissant, fait. 

§ 213. Frire (to fry) (intrans.). — Besides the present in- 
finitive, this verb has also the three persons of the singular 
of the present indicative : je fris, tu fris, il frit; the future, 
je frirai etc. ; the present conditional, je frirais etc. ; the 
second person singular of the imperative, fris; the past 
part. frit. The place of the other forms is supplied by 
placing the verb faire before the infinitive frire: nous 
faisons frire, vous faites frire. 

§ 214. Joindre (to join). — Conjugated like Craindre 

(§ 206). 

§ 215. Lire (to read). — Ind. pres. je lis, tu lis, il lit, nous 
lisons, vous lisez, ils lisent; Imparf. je lisais, nous lisions; 
Parf. def. je lus, nous lumes; Fut. je lirai, nous lirons. — 



§§216-220] IRREGULAR VERBS: IN RE 227 

Cond. pres. je lirais, nous lirions. — Imper. lis, lisons, lisez. 
— Subj. pres. que je lise, que nous lisions; Imparf. que je 
lusse, que nous lussions. — Part, lisant, lu. 

§ 216. Luire (to shine, glitter). — This verb and its com- 
pound reluire make the past participle lui, relui. The 
parf. def., imper atif, and imparf. du subj. are all wanting. 

§ 217. Malfaire (to do evil). — Is used only in the infini- 
tive: II est enclin a malfaire. 

§ 218. Mettre (to put, place). — Ind. pres. je mets, tu 
mets, il met, nous mettons, vous mettez, ils mettent; 
Imparf. je mettais, nous mettions; Parf. def. je mis, 
nous mimes; Fut. je mettrai, nous mettrons. — Cond. 
pres. je mettrais, nous mettrions. — Imper. mets, mettons, 
mettez. —Subj. pres. que je mette, que nous mettions; 
Imparf. que je misse, que nous missions. — Part, mettant, 
mis. 

§ 219. Moudre (to grind). — Ind. pres. je mouds, tu 
mouds, il moud, nous noulons, vous moulez, ils moulent; 
Imparf. je moulais, nous moulions; Parf. def. je moulus, 
nous moulumes; Fut. je moudrai, nous moudrons. — Cond. 
pres. je moudrais, nous moudrions. — Imper. mouds, mou- 
lons, moulez. — Subj. pres. que je moule, que nous mou- 
lions; Imparf. que je moulusse, que nous moulussions.' — 
Part, moulant, mourn. 

§ 220. Naitre (to be born). — Ind. pres. je nais, tu nais, 
il nait, nous naissons, vous naissez, ils naissent; Imparf. 
je naissais, nous naissions; Parf. def. je naquis, nous 
naquimes; Fut. je naitrai, nous naitrons. — Cond. pres. je 
naitrais, nous naitrions. — Imper. nais, naissons, naissez. — 
Subj. pres. que je naisse, que nous naissions; Imparf. que 
je naquisse, que nous naquissions. — Part, naissant, ne. 
(Uses etre as auxiliary.) 



228 the verb [§§221-227 

§ 221. Nuire (to hurt, be harmful). — Conjugated like 
Conduire (§ 202), except in the past participle, nui. 

§ 222. Paitre (to graze). — Ind. pres. je pais, tu pais, il 
patt, nous paissons, vous paissez, ils paissent; Imparf. je 
paissais, nous paissions; Parf. def. wanting; Fut. je 
paitrai, nous paitrons. — Cond. pres. je paitrais, nous 
paitrions. — Imper. pais, paissons, paissez. — Subj. pres. 
que je paisse, que nous paissions; Imparf. wanting. — 
Part, paissant, pu. 

§ 223. Paraitre (to appear, to seem). — Conjugated like 
Connaitre (§ 204). 

§ 224. Peindre (to paint) and Plaindre (to pity, reflex. 
to complain). — Conjugated like Craindre (§ 206). 

§ 225. Plaire (to please).— ind. pres. je plais, tu plais, 
il plait, nous plaisons, vous plaisez, ils plaisent; Imparf. 
je plaisais, nous plaisions; Parf. def. je plus, nous plumes; 
Fut. je plairai, nous plairons. — Cond. pres. je plairais, nous 
plairions. — Imper. plais, plaisons, plaisez. — Subj. pres. que 
je plaise, que nous plaisions; Imparf. que je plusse, que 
nous plussions. — Part, plaisant, plu. 

,§226. Prendre (to take)» — Ind. pres. je prends, tu 
prends, il prend, nous prenons, vous prenez, ils prennent; 
Imparf. je prenais, nous prenions; Parf. def. je pris, nous 
primes; Fut. je prendrai, nous prendrons. — Cond. pres. 
je prendrais, nous prendrions. — Imper. prends, prenons, 
prenez. — Subj. pres. que je prenne, que nous prenions, 
qu'ils prennent; Imparf. que je prisse, que nous pris- 
sions. — Part, prenant, pris. 

§ 227. Resoudre (to resolve, dissolve). — Conjugated 
like Absoudre (§ 194), except the parf. def., je resolus, 



§§228-233] irregular verbs: in re 229 

nous resolumes; Imparf. du Subj. que je resolusse, que 
nous resolussions; Part. pass, resolu or resous. 

§ 228. Rire (to laugh). — Ind. pres. je ris, tu ris, il rit, 
nous rions, vous riez, ils rient; Imparf. je riais, nous 
riions; Parf. def. je ris, nous rimes; Fid. je rirai, nous 
ririons. — Cond. pres. je rirais, nous ririons. — Imper. ris. 
rions, riez. — Subj. pres. que je rie, que nous riions; Im- 
parf. que je risse, que nous rissions. — Part, riant, ri. 

§ 229. Suffire (to suffice). — Conjugated like Confire 
(§ 203), except the past participle, suffi. 

§ 230. Suivre (to follow). — Ind. pres. je suis, tu suis, 
il suit, nous suivons, vous suivez, ils suivent; Imparf. je 
suivais, nous suivions; Parf. def. je suivis, nous suivimes; 
Put. je suivrai, nous suivrons. — Cond. pres. je suivrais, 
nous suivrions. — Imper. suis, suivons, suivez. — Subj. pres, 
que je suive, que nous suivions; Imparf. que je suivisse. 
que nous suivissions. — Part, suivant, suivi. 

§ 231. Taire (to be silent). — Ind. pres. je tais, tu tais, 
il tais, nous taisons, vous taisez, ils taisent; Imparf. je 
taisais, nous taisions; Parf. def. je tus, nous tumes; Fid. 
je tairai, nous tairons. — Cond. pres. je tairais, nous tairi- 
ons.— Imper. tais, taisons, taisez.- — Subj. pres. que je 
taise, que nous taisions; Imparf. que je tusse, que nous 
tussions. — Part, taisant, tu. 

§ 232. Tistre (to weave). — Used only in the infinitive, 
the past participle (tissu), and the compound tenses. 

§ 233. Traire (to^milk). — Ind. pres. je trais, tu trais, il 
trait, nous trayons, vous trayez, ils traient; Imparf. je 
trayais, nous trayions; Parf. def. wanting; Fid. je trairai, 
nous trairons. — Cond. pres. je trairais, nous trairions. — 
Imper. trais, trayons, trayez. — Subj. pres. que je traie, 



230 the verb [§§234-237 

que nous trayions, qu'ils traient; Imparf. wanting.— 
Part, tray ant, trait. 

§ 234. Vaincre (to conquer). — Ind. pres. je vaincs, tu 
vaincs, il vaincs, nous vainquons, vous vainquez, ils vain- 
quent; Imparf. je vainquais, nous vainquions; Parf. def. 
je vainquis, nous vainquimes; Fut. je vaincrai, nous 
vaincrons. — Cond. pres. je vaincrais, nous vaincrions.- — 
Imper. vaincs, vainquons, vainquez. — Subj. pres. que je 
vainque, que nous vainquions; Imparf. que je vainquisse, 
que nous vainquissions. — Part, vainquant, vaincu. 

§ 235. Vivre (to live). — Ind. pres. je vis, tu vis, il vit, 
nous vivons, vous vivez, ils vivent; Imparf. je vivais, 
nous vivions; Parf. def. je vecus, nous vectimes; Fut. je 
vivrai, nous vivrons. — Cond. pres. je vivrais, nous vivrions. 
— Imper. vis, vivons, vivez. — Subj. pres. que je vive, que 
nous vivions; Imparf. que je vecusse, que nous vecussions. 
— Part, vivant, vecu. 

Use of Auxiliary Verbs. 

§ 236. Avoir is used as auxiliary of all transitive and of 
most intransitive verbs. 

§ 237. Etre is used as auxiliary of all reflexive verbs 
(§ 70, 2) and, as a rule, of (§ 70, 2, a) : 

aller, to go echoir, to fall due 

partir, to depart eclore, to hatch 

sortir, to go out deceder, to die 

venir, to come mourir, to die 

devenir, to become naitre, to be born 

re venir, to come back inter venir, to intervene 

arriver, to arrive, happen parvenir, to attain 

entrer, to enter provenir, to proceed 

rester, to remain redevenir, to become again 

tomber, to fall survenir, to befall 

clioir, to fall 



§§238-239] auxiliaries 231 

§ 238. Either avoir or etre may be used as auxiliary of 
a number of intransitive verbs, the general distinction 

being that avoir is used when the verb expresses action, 
etre when it expresses state: 

aborder, to land degenerer, to degenerate 

accourir, to run to descendre, to descend 

accroitre, to increase disparaitre, to disappear 

apparaitre, to appear echapper, to escape 

cesser, to cease echouer. to be stranded 

croitre, to grow embellir, to embellish 

deborder, to overflow emigrer. to emigrate 

deeamper, to decamp empirer, to grow worse 

dechoir. to decay, fall, off grandir, to grow up 

decroitre, to decrease passer, to pass 

1. In case any one of the preceding verbs is used tran- 
sitively it will of course take avoir as auxiliary (§ 236): 

La bonne a passe le pain. The maid has passed the bread. 

2. The meaning of a verb sometimes changes with the 
auxiliary : 

Avoir Etre 

convenir, to suit, please, become convenir, to agree, admit 

demeurer, to live demeurer, to remaui 

disconvenir, not to suit, please disconvenir, to deny 

or become 

expirer, to die expirer. to cease, run out [lease] 

repartir, to reply repartir, to depart again 

§ 239. Secondary Auxiliaries. One ma} T consider as 
secondary auxiliaries certain verbs, such as pouvoir, de- 
voir, falloir, voidoir, alter, venir de, and faire: 

Pouvez-vous me dire? Can you tell me? 

II devait eerire. He was destined to (or about to) write. 

II me faut aller chez moi. I must go home. 

Youdriez-Yous me faire quel que chose? Would you do something 
for me? 

Je vais sortir. I am going to go out. 

II vient de parler. He has just spoken. 

Faites venir le medecin. Cause to come (Call) the doctoi 



232 the verb [§§240-242 

1. Some authorities refer to the first four verbs as 
" auxiliaries of mode," since they help to express the 
potential mode of the English. 

2. Devoir and aller help to orm a sort of future in- 
finitive and participle: 

devoir sortir, to be destined, or about, to go out. 
allant sortir, going to go out. 

3. Venir de expresses the most recent past: 
Je viens de le voir. I have just seen him. 



Agreement of Verb with Subject. 

§ 240. General Rule. As in English, a verb agrees with 
its subject in person and number. 

Person. 

§ 241. In case there are two subjects of different per- 
sons, the verb will be in the first person if either subject 
is in the first, otherwise in the second: 

Vous et moi (nous) irons. You and I shall go. 
Vous et elle (vous) irez. You and she will go. 

.Number. 

§ 242. Compound Subject. With a compound subject, 
the verb is usually plural, but: 

1. Two or more singular subjects may form one com- 
plex idea: 

" Sa piete et sa droiture lui attire ce respect " (Bossuet). His 
piety and his uprightness win for him this respect. 

" Le bien et le mal est dans ses mains " (La Bruyere). Good and 
ill are in his hands. 



§243] AGREEMENT WITH SUBJECT 233 

2. The singular will occur when the subjects are summed 
up by one word in the singular (as tout, rien, etc.) : 

Femmes, moines, vieillards, tout etait descendu. Women, monks, 
old men, all had descended. 

3. The verb may agree with the nearest subject and be 
understood with the others : 

" Louis, son fils, l'etat, V Europe est dans vos mains " (Voltaire). 
Louis, his son, the State, Europe are in your hands. 

4. When singular subjects are connected by ou (or) or 
by ni — ni (neither — nor) , the verb will be singular if one 
subject excludes the other, otherwise the verb will be 
plural : 

" Ou ton sang ou le mien lavera cette injure " (Voltaire). Either 
your blood or mine will wash out this injury. 

" Le temps ou la mort sont nos remedes " (Rousseau). Time or 
death are our remedies. 

" Ni l'homme ni aucun animal n'a pu se faire soi-meme " (Vol- 
taire). Neither man nor any animal has been able to make himself. 

" Ni l'or ni la grandeur ne nous rendent heureux " (La Fontaine). 
Neither gold nor greatness render us happy. 

5. When two subjects are united by comme, ainsi que, 
de meme que, the verb is singular when a comparison is 
expressed, plural when union or enumeration: 

" La verite, comme la lumiere, est inalterable, immortelle " (B. de 
St. Pierre). Truth, like light, is unchangeable, immortal. 

" La verite, comme la reconnaissance, m'obligent a dire "etc. (Id.). 
Truth, as well as gratitude, oblige me to say. 

§ 243. Impersonal Subject. 1. Ce as subject may take 
a plural verb only when a plural noun, or a pronoun of 
the third person plural is in the predicate, or when the ce 
refers to some preceding plural: 

Ce sont mes parents. They are my parents. 

Ce sont eux. It is (or they are) they. 

Mes amis, ce sont la joie de ma vie. My friends, they are the joy 



234 the verb [§§244-245 

2. II always takes a singular verb: 

II est arrive des choses etranges. Strange things have happened. 

§ 244. Subject a Collective Noun or an Adverb of 
Quantity. 1. A collective subject in the singular, accom- 
panied by a partitive genitive (de + a noun) in the plural, 
will have the verb singular or plural, according as the 
collective idea is emphasized or not: 

" Une nuee de traits obscurcit l'air et couvrit les combattants " 
(Fenelon). A cloud of arrows darkened the air (sky) and covered 
the combatants. 

" Une nuee de barbares desolerent le pays " (Academie). A cloud 
of barbarians desolated the country. 

2. With the adverbs of quantity, beaucoup, assez, peu, 
trop, moins etc., and with the noun la plupart (majority), 
the verb is regularly plural: 

Beaucoup de personnes etaient la. Many people were there. 

Assez de gens ont ces idees. Quite a number of people have these 
ideas. 

" Le peu d'habitants que la guerre a laisse dans cette ville ne 
sont pas a craindre " (Littre). The few inhabitants that war has 
left in this city are not to be feared. 

a. Plus d'un (more than one) takes a singular verb; 
moins de deux (less than two) a plural verb. 

§ 245. Interrogative Sentences. 

A declarative sentence may be changed to a question 
in the following ways : 

1. When the subject is a personal pronoun, on, or ce: 

a. Invert the order:* 

Vous chantez, You sing. Chantez-vous? Do you sing? 
On parle francais ici. Parle-t-on francais ici? 

* See § 26, n. 2, and § 41, n. 1. 



§245] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 235 

(or) b. Prefix Est-ce quef to the declarative statement : 

Est-ce que vous chantez? Do you sing? 

Note.* — The use of Est-ce quef is permissible with all forms of 
the verb, but is obligatory with a monosyllabic first singular (except 
ai-je? suis-je? dis-jef dois-je? fais-jef -puis-je? sais-jef vais-jef 
vois-jef) and it is preferable to avoid forms like donne-je? 

Est-ce que je parle distinctement? Do I speak distinctly? 

Est-ce que je peux vous aider? Can I help you? 

2. When the subject is a noun (or any other pronoun 
than those included in 1 [above]) : 

a. The subject comes first and a personal pronoun 
agreeing with the subject follows the verb: 

Le livre est-il sur la table? Is the book on the table? 
La chaise est-elle jaune? Is the chair yellow? 

(or) b. Prefix Est-ce quef 

Est-ce que le livre est sur la table? 

Note. — Some French authorities claim that a is preferable to b. 

3. When the question is introduced by an interrogative 
adjective or adverb: 

a. If the subject is a personal pronoun, invert the order: 
Ou est-il? Where is he? 

b. If the subject is a noun, either the inverted or direct 
order may generally be used with a simple tense of the 
verb: 

Combien coute le livre? (inverted) ) How much does the book 
Combien le livre coute- t-il? (direct) J cost? 
Note. — The inverted order cannot be used with a compound tense 
of the verb, or when there is a direct object other than the interroga- 
tive word: 

Combien le livre a-t-il coute? How much did the book cost? 
(not) Combien a coute le livre? 

Monsieur X ou pousse-t-il la chaise? Where is Mr. X pushing 
the chair? (not) Ou pousse Monsieur X la chaise? 



* Quoted from Fraser & Squair. 



236 



THE VERB 

The Infinitive. 



§§246-247 



The infinitive has probably been fully enough discussed 
for ordinary use in Lesson XXXII of Part I, but the fol- 
lowing is added for those who may want more detailed 
work. 



§ 246. Used substantively the infinitive may stand : 

1. As subject: 

Apprendre par coeur lui est facile. To learn by heart is easy for 
him. 

2. In apposition: 

Voir, c'est croire. Seeing is believing (To see, it is to believe). 

3. As logical subject after certain verbs used imper- 
sonally : 

II vaut mieux ne pas y aller. It is better not to go there. 

4. In the predicate: 

Plaisanter n'est pas repondre 
Elle semble avoir de 1' argent. 

5. As object: 

Je sais lire et ecrire. I know how to read and write. 
Je veux faire une promenade. I wish to take a walk 



To joke is not to reply. 
She seems to have money. 



§ 247. Without any preposition, the infinitive may be 
governed by the following verbs: 

accourir, to hasten 
affirmer, to affirm 
aimer, to like 
aimer autant, to like 
as well 



aimer mieux, 

better 
aller, to go 



to like 



avouer, to avow 
compter, to expect 
concevoir, to conceive 
confesser, to confess 
courir, to run 
croire, to believe 
daigner, to deign 
declarer, to declare 



apercevoir, to perceive deposer, to testify 
assurer, to assure descendre, to descend 



desirer, to desire 

devoir, ought to 

ecouter, to listen 

entendre, to hear 

envoyer, to send 

esperer, to hope 

faillir, to be on the 

point of 
faire, to cause, make 
fallo'ir, to be necessary 



§248] 



THE INFINITIVE 



237 



se figurer, to imagine 
s'imaginer, to imagine 
laisser, to allow, let 
mener, to bring, lead 
mettre, to -place 
monter, to go up 
nier, to deny 
observer, to observe 
oser, to dare 
ou'ir, to hear 
paraitre, to appear 
penser, to think 

§ 248. Preceded 

by: 

s'abstenir, to abstain 
accorder, to accord 
accuser, to accuse 
achever, to finish 
affecter, to affect 
s'affliger, to grieve 
ambitionner, to aspire 

to 
s'apercevoir, to per- 
ceive 
s'applaudir, to con- 
gratulate one's self 
apprehender, to ap- 
prehend 
arreter, to arrest 
avertir, to warn 
s'aviser, to think of 
blamer, to blame 
bruler, to be anxious 
censurer, to censure 
cesser, to cease 
charger, to charge 
choisir, to choose 
commander, to com- 
mand 



pouvoir, to be able 
preferer, to prefer 
pretendre, to claim 
se rappeler, to recollect 
reconnaitre, to ac- 
knowledge 
regarder, to look at 
rentrer, to re-enter 
retourner, to go back 
revenir, to come back 
savoir, to know (how) 
sembler, to seem 



sentir, to feel 
souhaiter, to wish 
soutenir, to maintain 
supposer, to suppose 
temoigner, to testify 
valoir mieux, to be 

better 
venir, to come 
voir, to see 
voler, to fly 
vouloir, to wish, be 

willing 



by c/e, the infinitive may be governed 



commencer, to com- 
mence 
conjurer, to beseech 
conseiller, to advise 
se contenter, to be 

content 
continuer, to continue 
contraindre, to con- 
strain 
convaincre, to con- 
vince 
con venir, to agree 
craindre, to fear 
crier, to cry 
decider, to decide 
decourager, to dis- 
courage 
dedaigner, to disdain 
defendre, to forbid 
defier, to defy 
degouter, to disgust 
deliberer, to deliberate 
demander, to ask 
se depecher, to make 
haste 



desesperer, to despair 

desirer, to desire 

determiner, to deter- 
mine 

detester, to detest 

differ er, to defer 

dire, to tell 

discontinuer, to dis- 
continue 

disconvenir, to disa- 
gree 

dispenser, to dispense 

dissuader, to dis- 
suade 

douter, to doubt 

ecrire, to write 

s'efforcer, to strive 

empecher, to hinder 

s'empresser, to hurry 

enjoindre, to enjoin 

s'ennuyer, to be tired 
of 

s'enorgueillir, to be 
proud 

enrager, to madden 



238 



THE VERB 



>248 



entreprendra, to un- 
dertake 
epargner, to spare 
essayer, to try 
s'etonner, to be aston- 
ished 
eviter, to avoid 
s'excuser, to excuse 

one's self 
exempter, to exempt 
faire bien, to do well 
se fatiguer, to be tired 
feindre, to feign 
feliciter, to congratu- 
late 
finir, to finish 
se flatter, to flatter 

one's self 
forcer, to force 
fremir, to shudder 
gager, to wager 
se garder, to take care 

not 
gemir, to groan 
gener, to incommode 
se glorifier, to boast 
gronder, to scold 
hasarder, to venture 
se hater, to hasten 
imaginer, to imagine 
s'impatienter, to be 

impatient 
s'indigner, to be indig- 
nant 
inspirer, to inspire 
interdire, to prohibit 
jouir, to enjoy 



jurer, to swear, declare 
se lasser, to be tired 
louer, to praise 
mander, to order 
manquer, to fail 
mediter, to meditate 
se meler, to meddle 
menacer, to threaten 
meriter, to merit 
se moquer, to make 

fun of 
negliger, to neglect 
nier, to deny 
notifier, to notify 
obliger, to oblige 
obtenir, to obtain 
s'occuper, to occupy 

one's self 
offrir, to offer 
omettre, to omit 
ordonner, to order 
oublier, to forget 
pardonner, to pardon 
parler, to speak 
permettre, to permit 
persuader, to persuade 
plaindre, to pity 
se plaindre, to com- 
plain 
prendre garde, to take 

care not 
prescrire, to prescribe 
presser, to press 
se presser. to hurry 
presumer, to presume 
prier, to pray, beg 
se priver, to deprive 



pro jeter, to plan 
promettre, to promise 
proposer, to propose 
se proposer, to pur- 
pose 
protester, to protest 
punir, to punish 
recommander, to rec- 
ommend 
redouter, to fear 
refuser, to refuse 
regretter, to regret 
se re jouir, to rejoice 
remercier, to thank 
se repentir, to repent 
reprimander, to repri- 
mand 
reprocher, to reproach 
resoudre, to resolve 
rire, to laugh 
risquer, to risk 
rougir, to blush 
sommer, to summon 
se soucier, to care 
souffrir, to suffer 
souhaiter, to wish 
soupgonner, to suspect 
sour ire, to smile 
se souvenir, to remem- 
ber 
suggerer, to suggest 
supplier, to beseech 
tacher, to try 
tenter, to attempt 
trembler, to tremble 
se vanter, to boast 
*venir de, have just 



* § 95, 4, n. 2. 



§249] 



THE INFINITIVE 



239 



249. Preceded by a, the infinitive may be governed 



by: 



s'abaisser, to stoop 
abandonner, to give up 
aboutir, to end, tend 
s'accorder, to agree 
(s')accoutumer, to ac- 
custom 
s'acharner, to be bent 

on 
admettre, to admit 
(s')aguerrir, to inure 
aider, to aid 
aimer, to like 
(s')amuser, to amuse 
appeler, to call 
s'appliquer, to apply 
apprendre, to learn 
s'appreter, to prepare 
aspirer, to aspire 
(s')assujetir, to sub- 
ject 
(s')attacher, to attach 
s'attendre, to expect 
autoriser, to authorize 
(s')avilir, to disgrace 
avoir, to have 
balancer, to hesitate 
(se) borner, to limit 
chercher, to seek 
commencer, to com- 
mence 
se complaire, to be 

pleased 
concourir, to contribute 
(se) condamner, to 

condemn 
condescendre, to con- 
descend 



(se) consacrer, to devote 
consentir, to consent 
consister, to consist 
conspirer, to conspire 
(se) consumer, to con- 
sume 
continuer, to continue 
contraindre, to con- 
strain 
contribuer, to contrib- 
ute 
convier, to invite 
couter, to cost 
decider, to induce 
se decider, to decide 
demander, to ask 
depenser, to spend 
destiner, to destine 
determiner, to deter- 
mine 
(se) devouer, to devote 
differer, to defer 
disposer, to dispose 
(se) divertir, to divert 
donner, to give 
dresser, to train 
s'efforcer, to strive 
employer, to employ 
s'empresser, to hurry 
encourager, to encour- 
age 
(s')engager, to advise 
enhardir, to embolden 
s'enhardir, to dare 
enseigner, to teach 
s' entendre, to under- 
stand 



entrainer, to lead on 
essayer, to try 
(s')etudier, to study 
exceller, to excel 
(s')exciter, to excite 
(s')exercer, to exercise 
exhorter, to exhort 
(s')exposer, to expose 
se fatiguer, to tire 
forcer, to force 
gagner, to gain 
habituer, to accustom 
hair, to hate 
se hasarder, to venture 
hesiter, to hesitate 
inciter, to incite 
incliner/Zo incline 
induire, to induce 
instruire, to instruct 
(s')interesser, to inter- 
est 
inviter, to invite 
jouer, to play 
laisser, to leave 
manquer, to fail 
se mettre, to begin 
montrer, to show 
obliger, to oblige 
s'obstiner, to persist 
s'occuper, to occupy 

one's self 
s'offrir, to offer one's 

self 
s'opiniatrer, to be ob- 
stinate 
parvenir, to succeed 
pencher, to incline 



240 



THE VERB 



[§§250-252 



penser, to think 
perseverer, to perse- 
vere 
persister, to persist 
se plaire, to delight 
(se) plier, to submit 
porter, to induce 
pousser, to impel 
prendre garde, to take 

care not 
prendre plaisir, to take 

pleasure 
(se) preparer, to pre- 
pare 
pretendre, to claim 
prier, to pray, beg 



proceder, to proceed 
provoquer, to provoke 
recommencer, to begin 

again 
reduire, to reduce 
(se) refuser, to refuse 
renoncer, to renounce 
repugner, to feel reluc- 
tant 
(se) resigner, to resign 
(se) resoudre, to re- 
solve 
r ester, to remain 
reussir, to succeed 
servir, to serve 
songer, to think 



souffrir, to suffer 

(se) soumettre, to sub- 
mit 

suffire, to suffice 

supr,endre, to surprise 

tarder, to delay 

tendre, to tend 

tenir, to hold 

travailler, to work 

trembler, to tremble 

trouver, to find 

se tuer, to kill one's 
self 

venir, to happen 

viser, to aim 

(se) vouer, to devote 



The Participle. 

§ 250. The participle is so called because it partakes of 
the nature of two different parts of speech, the verb and 
the adjective. 

It is a verb since it may express action and take an 
object. 

It is an adjective since it may modify a noun. 

§ 251. There are two kinds of participles: the present 
participle always ending in ant, and the past par'itiple, 
ending in e, i, u, s, or t. 



Present Participle. 

§ 252. The present participle used as a verb is always 
invariable : 

Votre mere est une personne obligeant tout le monde. Your 
mother is a person obliging every one. 



§§253-256] PARTICIPLES AND ADJECTIVES 241 

Used as an adjective, it is called a verbal adjective and 
follows the regular rules of agreement: 

Cette personne est obligeante. This person is obliging. 

Difference between the Present Participle and the 
Verbal Adjective. 

§ 253. The present participle expresses action, the 
verbal adjective state. 

§ 254. There is action and consequently no agreement: 

1. When the participle has a direct object: 

On entend les marteaux frappant l'enclume. One hears the ham- 
mers striking the anvil. 

2. When it is followed by an adverb: 

Une fille obeissant bien. A daughter obeying well. 

3. When it is preceded by the preposition en: 
Xous eauserons en marchant. We shall chat while walking. 

a. The present participle thus preceded by en forms 
what is called a gerund and usually expresses the relation 
of time, cause, or manner. The en is translated " while," 
" on," " in," " by," or sometimes is not translated at all. 

§ 255. There is state and consequently agreement: 

1. When the verbal adjective is accompanied by the 
verb etre: 

Cette peinture est charmante. This painting is charming. 

2. When the verbal adjective is preceded by an adverb : 
Un fille bien obeissante. A very obedient daughter. 

§ 256. Participles contrasted with Adjectives. Care 
must be taken not to confound the present participles, 



242 



THE VERB 



[§256 



such as negligeant, adherant, differ ant, etc., with the adjec- 
tives negligent, adherent, different. The first are regularly 
made by the French from the verbs negliger, adherer, 
differ er; the second are real adjectives taken directly 
from the Latin and cannot be called the verbal adjectives 
of negliger etc. 



1. Participles whose stem differs from that of the 
adjective: 



Present Participles formed 
from French Verbs. 

convainquant, conquering 
extravaguant, raving 
fabriquant, manufacturing 
fatiguant, tiring 
intriguant, intriguing 
suffoquant, suffocating (part.) 
vaquant, attending to 



Adjectives or Verbal Nouns 
coming from the Latin. 

convaincant, convincing 
extravagant, extravagant 
fabricant, a manufacturer 
fatigant, tiresome 
intrigant, an intriguer 
suffocant, suffocating (adj.) 
vacant, vacant 



2. Participles whose ending differs from that of the 
adjective: 



Present Participles. 

adherant, adhering 
affluant, flowing into 
differant, deferring, differing 
divergeant, diverging 
equivalent, equaling 
excellant, excelling 
excedant, exceeding 
expediant, sending off 
negligeant, neglecting 
precedant, preceding 
presidant, presiding 
residant, residing 
violant, violating 



Adjectives or Verbal Nouns. 

adherent, adherent 
affluent, a tributary stream 
different, different 
divergent, divergent 
equivalent, equivalent 
excellent, excellent 
excedent, excess 
expedient, expedient 
negligent, careless 
precedent, precedent, former 
president, a president 
resident, a resident 
violent, violent 



§§257-258] PAST PARTICIPLE 243 

Past Participle. 

§ 257. The past participle is used: 

1. Without an auxiliary. 

2. With etre. 

3. With avoir. 

§ 258. Without Auxiliary. 1. The past participle used 
without any auxiliary has the force of an adjective and 
like an adjective agrees in gender and number with the 
noun it modifies: 

La lune cachee par un nuage. The moon hidden by a cloud. 

Des personnes estimees. Esteemed persons. 

2. Certain past participles, as approuve, attendu, certifie, 
ci-inclus, ci-joint, excepte, non compris, passe, suppose, vu, 
etc., placed before the noun may agree or remain invari- 
able: 

Exceptee or excepte sa mere, except his mother; 

placed after the noun they must agree: 

Sa mere exceptee, his mother excepted; l'annee passee, last year. 

3. a. The past participle of transitive verbs (§ 133) 
may be used without auxiliary: 

un homme aime, a man beloved; une lettre finie, a letter finished. 

b. The past participle of neuter verbs conjugated with 
etre may also be used without auxiliary: 

un arbre tombe, a fallen tree; Partis a deux heures, arrives ce soir, 
nos amis sont bien fatigues, Set out at two o'clock, arrived this 
evening, our friends are very tired. 

c. But the past participle of neuter verbs conjugated 
with avoir can not be used without auxiliary. One can- 
not say, then, un enfant dormi, but must use the perfect 
participle : 

un enfant ay ant dormi, a child having slept. 



244 the verb [§§259-260 

§ 259. Past Participle with Eire. As already shown 
(§ 71, 2), a verb conjugated with etre has the past partici- 
ple, like a predicate adjective, agree with the subject. 

Consequently passive verbs, neuter and impersonal 
verbs conjugated with etre come under this rule. 

(For reflexive verbs see § 71, 2, a.) 

§ 260. Past Participle with Avoir. 1. The past partici- 
ple conjugated with avoir agrees with a direct object 
when preceded by it (§ 71, 1). 

a. The direct object placed before the participle is gen- 
erally one of the personal pronouns, me, te, se, le, la, les, 
nous, vous or the relative que. 

2. When the direct object stands for a collective noun, 
the participle may agree either with that $oun or with 
the partitive genitive: 

La foule d'hommes que j'ai vue or vus. The crowd of men that I 
saw. 

3. The past participle always remains invariable when 
the object which precedes is indirect, or when the direct 
object follows instead of preceding: 

Je lui ai donne une rose. I gave a rose to her. 

II a porte une lettre a la poste. He carried a letter to the office. 

4. Since neuter verbs never have a direct object, the 
past participle of these verbs conjugated with avoir is 
always invariable: ■ 

Ces actions vous ont nui. These actions have harmed (to) you. 

5. Certain verbs are sometimes active, sometimes 
neuter. When used in an active sense, their past par- 
ticiple follows the rules of agreement of the participle 



§260] PAST PARTICIPLE 245 

conjugated with avoir; when used as neuter verbs, the 
participle remains invariable: 

Les enfants que leur mere a couches. The children whom their 
mother put to bed. 

La nuit que nous avons couche a l'hotel. The night that we slept 
at the hotel. 

6. The past participles of courir, to run, and of valoir, 
to be worth, are invariable when used with their literal 
meaning; but used figuratively in the sense of " to 
brave," and " to procure," they are variable: 

Les deux heures que j'ai couru m'ont essoufle. The two hours that 
I ran have put me out of breath. 

Les dangers que j'ai courus sont nombreux. The dangers that I 
have braved are numerous. 

Dix mille francs, cette maison ne les a jamais valu. Ten thousand 
francs, this house has never been worth it (them). 

Voila les chagrins que vous a valus votre paresse. There are the 
sorrows that your laziness has procured for you. 

7. The past participles of vivre, to live; dormir, to 
sleep ; couter *, to cost ; regner, to reign, are always in- 
variable : 

Les jours qu'on a vecu. The days that one has lived. 
Les heures qu'elle a dormi. The hours that she has slept. 

8. As impersonal verbs conjugated with avoir cannot 
take a direct object, their past participle must be invari- 
able: 

II a neige. It has snowed; II a tonne. It thundered. 



* Formerly couter, used figuratively, had its participle variable: 
" Apres tous les ennuis que ce jour m'a coutees" (Racine). After all 
the annoyances that this day has cost me; but the Dictionary 
of the French Academy now gives it invariable. 



246 THE VERB [§261 

a. The past participle of active verbs used impersonally 
also remains invariable: 

Les grandes chaleurs qu'il a fait. The great heat that it made 
(literally). 

§ 261. Remarks on Agreement of Past Participle. 

1. Infinitive. The participle when followed by an 
infinitive (with or without a preposition) may remain 
invariable or agree with the direct object which pre- 
cedes: 

-Ces dames, je les ai entendu or entendues chanter. These ladies, 
I have heard them sing. 

II nous a prie or pries d'ecrire. He begged us to write. 

2. Fait. The participle fait followed by an infinitive is 
always invariable: 

Les maisons qu'il a fait construire. The houses which he caused 
to' be constructed. 

3. Another participle. The past participle when fol- 
lowed by another participle, present or past, may remain 
invariable or agree with a preceding direct object: 

Les arbres que j'ai vu or vus coupes. The trees which I saw cut. 

4. Du, pu, voulu, The participles du, pu, voulu are 
invariable when they have an auxiliary force, that is, 
when an infinitive is expressed or implied after them: 

Je lui ai rendu tous les services que j'ai pu (rendre) et que j'ai 
du (lui rendre). I have rendered him all the services that I can 
(render) and that I ought (to render him). 

II a lu tous les livres qu'il a voulu (lire). He has read all the 
books that he has wished (to read). 

5. Relative que. When the relative que is not object of 



§261] AGREEMENT OF PAST PARTICIPLE 247 

the participle, but of the verb in a following clause, the 
past participle remains invariable: 

Les livres que j'avais suppose que vous liriez. The books which I 
had supposed that you would read. 

6. En. The partitive en is never direct object, hence 
the past participle never agrees with it. The participle 
does, however, agree with an adverb of quantity (com- 
bien, moins, plus, autant, etc.) preceding en: 

Tout le monde m'a offert ses services, mais personne ne m'en a 
rendu. Everybody has offered me his services, but no one has ren- 
dered me any. 

Plus il a eu de livres, plus il en a lus. The more books he has 
had, the more of them he has read. 

Mes jours! combien ]'en ai deja perdusl My days! how many of 
them I have already lost! 

Autant il a attaque d'ennemis, autant il en a vaincus. As many 
enemies as he attacked, so many of them he conquered. 

a. But the participle does not agree if the adverb fol- 
lows en, instead of preceding: 

J' en ai beaucoup mi. I have seen many of them. 

7. Le. When Ze, meaning " it," precedes the participle, 
the latter is always invariable : 

Sa robe n'est pas si jolie qu'elle Ze'aurait desire. Her dress is not 
so pretty as she would have desired (it). 

8. Le peu. The past participle preceded by le pea 
varies according to the meaning. 

a. When le peu means " the small quantity," the par- 
ticiple agrees with the noun: 

Le peu de nourriture qu'il a prise l'a sauve. The little nourish- 
ment which he took saved him (that is, he was saved by not over- 
eating) . 



248 the noun [§§262-265 

b. When le peu means " the insufficiency " or " lack/' 
the participle agrees with le peu, hence remains invariable : 

C'est le peu de nourriture qu'il a pris qui a cause sa mort. It is 
the little nourishment which he took that caused his death (that is, 
he did not take enough food to keep him alive). 



THE NOUN. 



§ 262. French nouns may be classified as follows: 



Les Noms 

(nouns) 



Communs 
(common) 



^ Propres 

(proper) 



Concrets (concrete) 
Abstraits (abstract) 
Collectifs (collective) 
Composes (compound) 



§ 263. As in English, a concrete noun is one indicating 
material substance: 

une personne, a person; un cheval, a horse; un livre, a book. 

§ 264. An abstract noun is one indicating a quality : . 
le courage, courage; la paresse, laziness; la foi, faith. 

§ 265. A collective noun ' is one expressing an assem- 
blage, a collection of persons, of animals, or of things: 
une foule, a crowd; une troupe, a troop. 

1. A collective noun may be general or partitif. 

a. It is general when it designates the totality or a 
definite part of the persons or of the things referred to; 
it is then generally preceded by le, la, ce, cette, mon, ton, 
or son etc. : 

La multitude des soldats se porta en avant. The multitude of 
the soldiers moved forward. 



§§266-270] gender 249 

b. It is partitive when it designates only a part, an 
indefinite number of the persons or of the things referred 
to ; it is then generally preceded by un, une, de or des etc. : 

Une multitude de soldats se porterent en avant. A multitude of 
soldiers moved forward. 

§ 266. A compound noun is one composed of two or 
more words, usually connected by the hyphen: 
un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow; un chef-d'oeuvre, a masterpiece. 

§ 267. In studying French nouns, the two important 
things to consider are : le genre, the gender ; and lenombre, 
the number. 

Gender. 

§268. French noims have but two genders : lemasculin, 
the masculine, and le Jeminin, the feminine. 

§ 269. General Rule. As in English, names of male 
beings are usually masculine, names of female beings 
feminine : 

le pere, la mere; le lion, lalionne. 

Of names of animals, the gender is easy to determine, 
but practice and the dictionary alone can teach us defi- 
nitely the gender of names of things. No rules can cover 
all cases, but the following may be of some help. 

§ 270. Gender Determined by Endings. 1. As a general 
rule, nouns ending in silent e are feminine, nouns ending 
in any other vowel or in a consonant are masculine: 

une femme le menton, the chin un opera, an opera 

une fille un os, a bone un bateau, a boat 

Yet the exceptions are numerous. 



250 THE NOUN [§271 

2. The majority of nouns ending in age, ege, ten, iste, 
and ment are masculine: 

le voyage un Italien le jugement, judgment 

le college un artiste le commencement 

3. Nouns ending in ance, ense, esse, eur (abstract), ion, 
son, and te are usually feminine: 

l'independance la tristesse, sadness la nation la liberte 
la defense la douleur, grief la maison 

§ 271. Gender Determined by Meaning. The following 
nouns are usually masculine: 

1. Names of the days of the week, the months, and the 

seasons : 

dimanche, Janvier, Phiver. 

Exception : 

Vautomne, autumn, may be either masculine or feminine. 

2. Names of the cardinal points: 
le nord, le sud, l'est, l'ouest. 

3. Names of trees and shrubs: 

un erable, a maple; un orme, an elm; un buisson, a bush. 
Feminine exceptions: 

epine, thorn; and its compounds, aubepine, hawthorn, etc. 
bourdaine, black alder; ronce, brier; viorne, viburnum, 
bruyere, heather; vigne, vine. 

4. Names of metals and minerals: 
le fer, iron; For, gold; le cuivre, copper. 

5. Names in the decimal system of money, weights, and 
measures : 

un franc, un centime, un gramme, un metre (meter). 



§§272-273] gender 251 

6. Names of countries, except those ending in silent e: 

le Portugal, le Danemark, le Bresil. 
(but) la France, la Prusse (Prussia), la Russie. 

7. Usually names of mountains not ending in es: 

le Caucase, Caucasus; les Balkans; les Apennins are masculine, 
(but) les Alpes, les Pyrenees, les Cevennes are feminine. 

8. Names of many rivers and cities, especially when not 
ending in e or es: 

le Rhin (Rhine), le Rhone, le Tibre (Tiber), 
(but) la Seine, la Loire, la Gironde. 

Bordeaux, Lyon (Lyons), Paris — masculine, 
(but) Rome, Venise (Venice), Athenes (Athens)— feminine. 

9. Adjectives, verbs, prepositions, conjunctions etc. 
when used substantively: 

un etre, a being; le rire, laughter; le beau, the beautiful; le bon, 
the good; le devant, the front; un oui, a yes. 

Nouns of Double Gender. 

§ 272. Gender Varies with Sex. Certain nouns referring 
to persons vary in gender according to the sex of the party 
mentioned : 

un J . , .. , un J , 1v ., un J garde-malade, 

< enfant, a child < eleve, a pupil < 

une ( une [ une { a nurse 

§ 273. Gender ' Varies with Meaning. Some nouns 
change their meaning with the gender: 



Noun. 


Mas. 


Fern. 


aide, 


assistant, 


assistance. 


aune, 


alder, 


ell. 


barbe, 


Barbary horse, 


beard. 


barde, 


poet, 


slice of bacon. 


cartouche, 


scroll, 


cartridge. 


coche, 


coach, 


notch. 



52 


THE NOUN 


[§27, 


crepe, 


crape, 


pancake. 


critique, 


critic, 


criticism. 


echo, 


echo (sound), 


Echo (nymph). 


enseigne, 


standard bearer , 


standard. 


garde, 


guard, keeper, 


guarding. 


greffe, 


registrar's office, 


graft. 


guide, 


guide, 


rein (of bridle). 


livre, 


book, 


pound. 


manche, 


handle, 


sleeve. 


manoeuvre, 


workman, 


manipulation. 


memoire, 


memorandum, 


memory. 


merci, 


thanks, 


mercy. 


mode, 


mode, way, 


style. 


moule, 


mold, 


mussel. 


mousse, 


cabin boy, 


moss. 


office, 


service, 


pantry. 


page, 


page (boy), 


page (of book). 


parallele, 


comparison, 


parallel (geometry). 


pendule, 


pendulum, 


clock. 


poUe, 


stove, 


frying-pan. 


poste, 


position, 


post-office. 


pourpre, 


purple (color), 


purple (dye or cloth) 


reldche, 


relaxation, 


harbor. 


remise, 


livery coach, 


remittance. 


solde, 


clearance sale, 


pay. 


somme, 


nap, sleep, 


sum. 


souris, 


smile, 


mouse. 


statuaire, 


sculptor, 


sculpture. 


tour, 


trip, trick, 


tower. 


trom,pette, 


trumpeter, 


trumpet. 


vague, 


vagueness, 


wave of sea. 


vapeur, 


steamer, 


steam. 


vase, 


vase, 


mud, slime. 


voile, 


veil, 


sail. 



§§274] GENDER 253 

§ 274. Gender Varies with Number, etc. The follow- 
ing nouns have the gender depend upon various circum- 
stances, as whether the word is singular or plural, whether 
it is used literally or figuratively, etc. : 

a. Aigle, eagle, is masculine: 

1. When it designates in general the bird, the eagle: 
On a tue un bel aigle. They killed a fine eagle. 

2. When it is used figuratively to indicate superiority: 
Cet homme est un aigle. This man is an eagle. 

3. When it refers to a decoration: 

he grand aigle de la Legion d'honneur. The grand eagle of the 
Legion of Honor. 

It is feminine: 

1. When it designates the female aigle: 

Cette belle aigle a pondu deux ceufs. This beautiful eagle has laid 
two eggs. 

2. When it means a military standard: 

Les aigles romaines. The Roman eagles. 

3. In terms of heraldry: 

Une aigle eployee d'argent. A silver eagle with wings extended. 

b. Amour, love, is masculine in the singular, masculine 
or feminine in the plural: 

un bel amour; de beaux (or) de belles amours. 

Note. — Some of the best writers, however, make amour indiffer- 
ently masculine or feminine even in the singular. Of course when it 
refers to the god of love it is always masculine. 

c. Chose, thing, is feminine: une chose; but the expres- 
sion quelque chose de is always followed by a masculine 
adjective: 

quelque chose de bon, something good. 



254 THE NOUN [§274 

d. Couple, couple, is masculine when it designates two 
beings united: 

un couple d'amis, a couple of friends; un hereux couple, a happy 
couple. 

It is feminine when it designates simply the number 
two: 

une couple d'ceufs, a couple of eggs. 

e. Delice, delight, is masculine in the singular (rarely 
used), feminine in the plural: 

un delice enivrant, an intoxicating joy; de grandes delices, great 
delights. 

f. Foudre, thunderbolt, is feminine: 

La foudre tombe d'ordinaire sur les lieux eleves, The thunderbolt 
falls ordinarily on elevated places. 

It is masculine: 

1 . When used figuratively in the sense of a great warrior, 
great orator, hero: 

Un foudre de guerre, a thunderbolt of war (a great general) ; un 
foudre d'eloquence, a great orator. 

2. When referring to the " thunderbolts of Jupiter ": 
le foudre de Jupiter. 

g. Gens, people, is plural and, according to Larive et 
Fleury, requires that any adjective preceding shall be 
feminine, any following, 'masculine : 

Voila de bonnes gens. There are some good people. 
Les gens soupgonneux sont souvent trompes. Suspicious people 
are often deceived. 

h. Hymne, hymn, is, according to Larive et Fleury, 
feminine when it applies to a hymn of the church, other- 
wise masculine: 

On a chante une belle hymne. They sang a beautiful hymn. 

Un hymne guerrier. A hymn of war. 



§274] GENDER 255 

i. (Euvre, work, is generally feminine, especially if 
plural. It must be of that gender: 

1. When it means " action ": 

Les bons coeurs se plaisent aux bonnes oeuvres. Good hearts are 
pleased with good actions. 

2. When it applies to literary productions: 
les belles oeuvres de Racine, the fine works of Racine. 

It is masculine and usually singular: 

1. When it designates the " philosopher's stone." It 
is then always accompanied by the adjective grand: 

le grand ceuvre. 

2. When it applies to the collective works of a musician 
or engraver: 

tout Vceuvre de Mozart, all the works of Mozart. 

3. In architectural terms, in the sense of " stone 
work ": 

le gros ozuvre, the heavy stone-work. 

j. Orge, barley, was formerly either masculine or fem- 
inine, but is now usually considered only feminine: 
de belle orge, fine barley. 

Note. — The Academy still seems to justify, however, orge monde, 
hulled barley; orge perle, pearl barley. 

k. Orgue, organ, is usually masculine in the singular, 
masculine or feminine in the plural: 

un grand orgue, a large organ; de grands (or) de grandes orgues, 
large organs. 

1. Paque or Paques, Easter, is masculine singular and 
written with a capital: 

a Paque i prochain, next Easter. 



256 THE NOUN [§275 

Pdques is feminine plural in Pdques fleuries, Palm 
Sunday; Pdques closes, Low Sunday (Sunday after 
Easter) . 

Pdque, the Passover, a feast of the Jews, is feminine 
and written with a small letter: 

Les Juifs celebrent la pdque en memoire de la sortie d' Egypt e. 
The Jews celebrate the Passover in memory of the departure from 
Egypt. 

m. Periode, period, is feminine when it designates a 
space of time: 

Les grandes periodes de l'histoire, the great periods of history. 

It is masculine when it signifies the highest point to 
which a person or thing can attain: 

Demosthene et Ciceron ont porte 1' eloquence a son plus haut 
periode. Demosthenes and Cicero carried eloquence to its highest 
period (point).' 



§ 275. Gender of Compound Nouns. Before the gen- 
der of a compound noun can be ascertained, the word 
must be analyzed. 

1. If the leading idea is found in a noun, that noun 
determines the gender o£ the compound word : 

un arriere-petit-fils, a great grandson. 

une arriere-petite-fille, a great grand daughter. 

2. Otherwise the gender is usually masculine: 

un casse-noisette (casser, to break; noisette, nut), a nut cracker, 
un cure-dent (curer, to clean out, pick; dent, tooth), a tooth pick, 
un pourboire (pour, for; boire, drink), a fee, tip. 
un parapluie (parer, to protect; a, against; pluie, rain), an um- 
brella. 



§276] FORMATION OF FEMININE 257 

Formation of the Feminine. 

§ 276. The feminine gender of French nouns is distin- 
guished from the corresponding masculine in three ways: 

A. By changing the ending of the masculine: le lion, la 

lionne. 

B. By using a special word to distinguish the female 

from the male: pere, mere; frere, sceur. 

C. By adding to the noun a descriptive adjective which 

determines its gender: Taigle male, l'aigle femelle. 

A. General Rule. The corresponding feminine form is 
usually made by adding an unaccented e to the mascu- 
line: 

cousin, cousine; marquis, marquise; ours, ourse (bear). 

Special Rules. 1. Nouns in er and ier, besides adding 
this e, take a grave accent on the e before the r: 
berger, bergere; jardinier, jardiniere; fermier, fermiere. 

2. The majority of nouns ending in n or t double the 
final consonant before adding the e: 

baron, baronne; paysan, paysanne. 

3. Nouns in aim, in, and some in an are, however, 
exceptions to the preceding rule: 

Romain, Romaine; orphelin, orpheline; Persan, Persane. 

4. A score of nouns form their feminine in esse: 
negre, negresse; hote, hotesse. 

5. Nouns in eur form their feminine: 

a. In euse: 
pecheur, pecheuse. 

b. In ice: 
mediateur, mediatrice. 

c. In esse: 
pecheur, pecheresse. 



258 



THE NOUN 



i276 



(1) This esse occurs as the feminine ending of only a 
few nouns in eur: 



devineur, devineresse, soothsayer 
enchanteur, enchanteresse, 

charmer 
pecheur, pecheresse, sinner 
vendeur, venderesse, vendor 



bailleur, bailleresse, lessor 

chasseur, chasseresse, hunter 

defendeur, defenderesse, defen- 
dant 

demandeur, demanderesse, 
plaintiff 

(2) Some of the nouns in esse have also a feminine in 
euse: vendeur, vendeuse; chasseur, chasseuse; devineur, 
devineuse, etc. 

B. 1. Entirely different words are sometimes used to 
designate the two sexes: 



Mas. 
homme, man 
mari, husband 
pere, father 
frere, brother 
oncle, uncle 
neveu, nephew 



Fern. 
femme, woman 
femme, wife 
mere, mother 
soeur, sister 
tante, aunt 
niece, niece 



Mas. 
cheval, horse 
bceuf, ox 
belier, ram 
coq, rooster 
jars, gander 
bouc, he goat 



Fern. 
jument, mare 
vache, cow 
brebis, sheep 
poule, hen 
oie, goose 
chevre, she goat 



2. The following nouns have the peculiarity of being- 
shorter in the feminine than in the masculine : 

Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. 

canard, duck cane * mulet, mule mule 

chiffon, darling chiffe taureau, bull taure, heifer 

dindon, turkey dinde 

3. Words such as auteur (author), ecrivain (writer), 
peintre (painter), professeur, etc., which designate profes- 
sions more often followed by men, lack a distinct form 
for the feminine. One says, then, une femme auteur, une 
femme professeur, etc. 

C. Most animals have only one name, in some in- 
stances masculine, in others feminine, to designate both 



§§277-278] number 259 

male and female: le rossignol (nightingale), la girafe. 
It becomes necessary, then, in making a distinction, to 
say: le rossignol male, le rossignol femelle; la girafe male, 
la girafe femelle. 

Number. 

§ 277. General Rule. To form the plural of nouns, 
add s to the singular: 

Fhomme, les hommes; le livre, les livres. 

§ 278. Exceptions. 1. Nouns ending in the singular in 
s, x, or z remain unchanged in the plural : 
le fils, les fils; la voix, les voix; le nez, les nez. 

2. Nouns ending in the singular in au or eu take x in 
the plural: 

un bateau, des bateaux; un feu, des feux; 

nouns in ou make the plural in s: 

un clou (nail), des clous; un verrou (bolt), des verrous. 

a. Formerly seven nouns in ou made the plural in x: 
bijou (jewel), caillou (pebble), chou (cabbage), genou (knee), 
hibou (owl), joujou (toy), pou (louse), but in April, 1905, 
the French Academy decreed that these nouns should 
henceforth follow the regular rule and add s. 

3. The majority of nouns ending al make their plural 
in aux: 

le cheval, les chevaux; le mal (pain), les maux. 

a. The following, however, are regular, adding s: 

bal, ball, dance carnaval, carnival pal, stake (and a few others), 
cal, callosity chacal, jackal regal, feast 



260 THE NOUN [§279 

4. The majority of nouns in ail form their plural regu- 
larly in s: 

un gouvernail (rudder), des gouvernails; un eventail (fan), des 
eventails. 

a. The following, however, make the plural in aux: 
bail, baux, lease vantail, vantaux, folding door 

corail, coraux, coral ventail, ventaux, visor of a helmet 

email, emaux, enamel vitrail, vitraux, stained glass win- 

soupirail, soupiraux, air-hole dow 

travail, travaux, work 

Note. — Betail (cattle) uses as its plural bestianx, which comes 
really from the obsolete singular bestial. 

§ 279. Double Plurals. The following nouns have two 
plurals which differ in meaning: 

1. Aieul, grandfather, has aieux, ancestors, and aieuls, 
grandfathers. 

2. Ail, garlic, has aulx in ordinary language, ails as a 
botanical term. 

3. Ciel, sky, heaven, makes its plural usually cieux, but 
has dels: 

a. Referring to paintings: 

Ce peintre fait bien les dels. This painter makes skies well. 

b. Referring to climate: 

Nice est sous un des plus beaux dels de 1' Europe. Nice is under 
one of the finest skies (climates) of Europe. 

c. In technical expressions: 

dels de lit, canopies; dels de carriere, roofs of quarries. 

4. CEil, eye, makes its plural yeux when it refers to the 
organs of sight, but uses oeils in certain compound nouns : 

oeils-de-bcenf , bull's-eyes (of lantern) ; ae^s-de-serpent, serpentine 

stones. 



§280] NUMBER 261 

5. Travail, work, makes its plural ordinarily travaux 
but has travails: 

1. When it refers to an instrument for shoeing refractory 
horses : 

Le marechal-f errant a plusieurs travails. The blacksmith has 
several brakes. 

2. When it refers to the official report of a public officer: 

Ce ministre a eu cette semaine plusieurs travails avec le roi. This 
minister has had (made) this week several reports with (to) the king. 

§ 280. Invariable Nouns. 1. Some nouns are usually 
found only in the singular. They are : 

a. Names of metals: 
argent, silver; fer, iron. 

b. Abstract nouns: 
la justice, la modestie. 

c. Names of the sciences and of the arts: 

la chimie, chemistry; l'astronomie, astronomy; la peinture, 
painting. 

d. Other parts of speech used substantively: 
le manger, eating; le beau, the beautiful. 

2. Temoin, witness, is singular at the beginning of a 
sentence and in the expression, a temoin, to witness: 

Temoin les blessures qu'il a recues. Witness the wounds which 
he has received. — Je vous prends tous a temoin. I call you all to 
witness. 

3. Certain nouns are used only in the plural: 

accordailles, espousals besides, spectacles 

affres, reproaches confins, confines 

alentours, surroundings decombres, ruins 

armoiries, armorial bearings depens, expense 

arrerages, arrears entrailles, entrails 



262 the noun [§§281-282 

epousailles, nuptials mceurs, manners 

fiancailles, betrothal nippes, toggery 

frais, expenses obseques, obsequies 

funerailles, funeral premices, first fruits 

hardes, clothes tenebres, darkness 



manes, ghost vepres, vespers 

materiaux, materials vivres, victuals 

4. Some nouns have a different meaning in the plural: 

une assist, a stratum of rock des assises, session of criminal court 

unciseau, a chisel des ciseaux, scissors 

une lunette, a lens, telescope des lunettes, spectacles, etc. 

§ 281. Foreign Nouns. 1. Nouns of foreign origin take 
the s of the plural when long use has made them a part 
of the French language: des operas, des albums, des 
pianos. 

2. If the foreign noun designates a prayer, a hymn of 
the church, or is composed of several words, it will be 
invariable : 

un pater (Lord's Prayer), des pater; un in-folio (quarto), des 
in-folio. 

3. Some Italian words introduced into French retain 
their original plurals: 

un lazarone (beggar), des lazarom; un carbanaro, des carbonari. 

§ 282. Compound Nouns. ' 1. The only component 
parts of a compound noun that can take the plural sign 
are nouns and adjectives. 

2. A compound noun written without a hyphen, as a 
single word, usually follows the rules for simple nouns: 
un contrevent (window shutter), des contrevents; un porteman- 
teau (hall rack), des portemanteaiLT. 

Exceptions : 

bonhomme (good man), bonshommes; gentilhomme (nobleman), 
gentilshommes; monsieur, messieurs; madame, mesdames, etc. 



§282] NUMBER 263 

3. Two nouns. If a compound word is composed of 
two nouns, both usually take the plural sign: 

fc un chou-fleur (cauliflower), des chouaxfleurs; un oiseau-mouche 
(humming-bird), des oiseaurr-mouches. 

Exceptions : 

reines-claude, green-gage plums; timbres-poste, postage stamps. 

a. If the compound noun is made up of a foreign and 
a French noun, the latter alone will take the plural sign: 
Anglo-Saxons; Gallo-Romains; tragi-comedies. 

4. Two nouns with preposition. If two nouns are united 
by a preposition, the first alone usually takes the plural 
sign: 

un arc-en-ciel (arch-in-sky, rainbow), des arcs-en-ciel ; un chef- 
d'oeuvre (chief -of-work, masterpiece), des chefs-d'oeuvre. 

a. When the preposition is understood, the rule remains 
the same: 

H6tel-Dieu = Hotel de Dieu (Mansion of God, hospital), Hotels- 
Dieu. 

b. In a few cases, both nouns remain invariable: 

coq-a-1'ane, incoherent talk; pied-a-terre, temporary lodging; 
tete-a-tete. 

5. Noun and adjective. If 'the compound word is formed 
of a noun and an adjective or participle, both take the 
plural sign: 

arc-boutant (flying buttress), arcs-boutants; beaua*-freres, broth- 
ers-in-law. 

a. A few words like grand'mere (grandmother), grand'- 
messe (high mass), terre-plein (platform), chevau-leger 
(light horseman) are treated as a single word: grand'- 
meres, chevau-legers. 



264 THE NOUN [§283 

6. Noun and verb. If the compound word consists of a 
noun and a verb, the former alone takes the plural sign: 

un cure-dent, des cure-dents; un serre-frein (brakeman), des 
serre-f reins. 

a. Quite a number of words thus formed remain invari- 
able: 

abat-jour, lamp shade; cache-nez, muffler; couvre-feu, curfew, etc. 

b. If the compound noun already ends in s, the plural 
will not change: 

porte-clefs, turnkey; presse-papiers, paper-weight. 

c. In compound nouns formed with the verb garder, to 
guard, take care of, garde may take an s when the word 
designates persons, but remains invariable when it de- 
notes things: 

un garde-malade (sick-nurse), des gardes-malades. 
une garde-manger (pantry), des garde-manger. 

7. Noun with adverb or preposition. If the compound 
word is formed of a preposition and a noun or of an ad- 
verb and a noun, the noun alone takes the plural sign : 

des avant-coureurs, forerunners; des vice-rois, viceroys. 

8. If the compound noun is formed with neither a noun 
nor an adjective, it must remain invariable: 

un oui-dire, a hear-say; un passe-partout, a master-key. 

§ 283. Proper Nouns.* 1. Proper nouns do not ordi- 
narily take the plural sign when they designate the indi- 
viduals themselves who bear these names: 

Les deux Corneille sont nes a Rouen. The two Corneilles were 
born at Rouen. 



* According to Larive et Fleury. 



§§284-285] THE ARTICLE 265 

2. Proper nouns do take the plural sign: 

a. If they designate individuals like those named : 

Les Corneilles, les Racines sont rares; that is, Poets like Corneille 
and Racine are rare. 

b. If they designate certain historic families: 
Les Bourbons, les Guises. 

c. If they are names of countries: 
Les deux Ameriques. The two Americas. 

3. When the name of an individual serves to designate 
the thing of which he is inventor or author, it is treated 
as a common noun and becomes variable: 

des chassepots, guns invented by Chassepot. 
des elzevirs, books printed by Elzevir Brothers. 



THE ARTICLE. 
§ 284. The Definite Article, " the/' 

Singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

le la 

Plural (both genders). 
les 

a. Before a word beginning with a vowel or silent h, le 
or la becomes by elision V : Pamie (friend), l'homme. 

§ 285. The Indefinite Article, " a " or " an ": 

Masculine. Feminine. 

un une 



266 THE ARTICLE [§§286-288 

§ 286. Contractions. The following contractions occur 
in French: 

a + le — au de+le =du 

a+les=aux de + les=des 

a. No contraction occurs with the feminine la. 

b. Besides the four contractions above, the Old French 
had es, put for en+les, or dans+les. This es still occurs 
in academic titles: maitre es arts, Master of Arts; doc- 
teur es lettres, Doctor of Letters; and in certain expres- 
sions like Pierre es liens, Peter in chains. 

§ 287. Agreement of the Article. The article agrees in 
gender and number with the noun it modifies: 
le tableau, la table. 

a. Sometimes the article precedes a noun of different 
gender and number from its own. This is due to the fact 
that one or more words are understood between the 
article and noun: 

Coiffe a la Titus = a la mode de Titus. Head-dressed in the style 
of the Emperor Titus. 

line peinture a la Rembrandt = a la maniere de Rembrandt. A 
painting after the manner of Rembrandt. 

La Saint-Jean = la fete de S.aint-Jean. The festival of Saint John. 

The Article with Common Nouns'. 

§ 288. General Use. 1. The definite article is placed 
before a common noun used in a definite or determined 
sense : 

On a recu notre ambassadeur avec les honneurs dus a son rang. 
They received our ambassador with the honors due to his rank. 
Les honneurs is determined by dus a son rang. 



§289] WITH COMMON NOUNS 267 

2. But the article does not occur if the noun is used in 
an undetermined sense: 

On l'a recu avec honneur (not l'honneur). 

§ 289. Repetition of the Article. 1. With nouns. When 
the definite article belongs to two or more nouns, it is 
ordinarily repeated before each one: 

Les femmes, les enfants,. les vieillards furent mis en surete. The 
women, the children, the old men were put in safety. 

2. But the article is not repeated: 

a. When the second noun merely explains the first: 
le Pont-Euxin ou mer Noire, the Black Sea. 

le Grand Ocean ou ocean Pacifique, the Pacific Ocean. 

b. In certain expressions established by use, particu- 
larly in legal terms: 

les pere et mere (for le pere et la mere), the father and mother. 

les dits jour, mois, et an (for le dit jour, le dit mois, et le dit an), 
the said day, month, and year. 

les us et coutumes (for les us et les coutumes), the ways and cus- 
toms. 

les ponts et chaussees, department of roads and bridges. 

3. With adjectives. When the article belongs to two or 
more adjectives referring to different objects, it should be 
repeated : 

la grande et la petite maison, the large and the small house. 
le seizieme siecle et le dix-septieme, the sixteenth and the seven- 
teenth century. 

4. The article is not repeated, however: 

a. If both adjectives refer to the same object, unless 
special emphasis is placed on each adjective: 

le brave et illustre Turenne. the brave and illustrious Turenne. 
(but) Bossuet, le grand, le sublime orateur chretien. Bossuet, the 

great, the sublime Christian orator. 
le doux. le tendre, Z'harmonieux Racine, the gentle, the tender, 

the harmonious Racine. 



268 THE ARTICLE [§§290-291 

b. When a single adjective precedes nouns united by et: 
les principals fleuves et montagnes de FEurope, the principal 

rivers and mountains of Europe. 

c. When two or more singular adjectives modify a 
plural noun: 

les dixieme, onzieme, et douzieme siecles, the tenth, eleventh, and 
twelfth centuries. 

§ 290. The Indefinite Article. 1. The indefinite article 
is used in general as in English; des (§ 286) serves as its 
plural : 

un fils, a boy; une fille, a girl; des hommes, men. 

2. The indefinite article also usually stands before an 
abstract noun, especially if the latter is accompanied by 
an adjective or by a phrase: 

J'ai recu une triste nouvelle. I have received sad news. 
Elle avait une patience extraordinaire. She had extraordinary 
patience. 

§ 291. The General Noun. A noun employed in a gen- 
eral sense, that is, when " all," " every," " in general," 
or the like, is implied, takes the definite article in French, 
though not usually in English : 

L'homme est mortel. Man is mortal. 

he miel est doux. Honey is sweet. 

L'or est jaune. Gold is yellow. 

Ma soeur etudie la musique. My sister is studying music. 

Le cheval est un animal utile. The horse is a useful animal. 

a. Names of the days of the week, when used in a gen- 
eral sense, take the article: 

Elle prendra une lecon lundi prochain. She will take a lesson next 
Monday. 

(but) Elle prend ses lecons le lundi (or les lundis). She takes her 
lessons Mondays. 



§§292-294] IN PARTITIVE CONSTRUCTIONS 269 

b. Names of languages take the article, except after the 
preposition en or the verb parler. With the latter the use 
of the article is optional: 

Aimez-vous le frangais? 

Parlez-vous le frangais? (or) Parlez-vous frangais? 

Quel est ce mot en frangais? What is this word in French? 

Partitive Constructions. 

§ 292. Definition. A partitive construction is one ex- 
pressing an indefinite quantity or number of, " some," 
" any." 

§ 293. General Rule with the Article. This "some" or 
"any" with a noun is regularly expressed by de-\-the 
definite article: 

Avez-vous du pain? Have you any bread?* 
Avez-vous de la creme? Have you any cream? 
Avez-vous des livres? Have you any books? 
Ces hommes sont des voleurs. These men are thieves. 

§ 294. Exceptions, without the Article. The article is 
ordinarily omitted and de alone used with the noun: 

1. In a general negation: 

II ne fait pas de fautes. He does not make mistakes. 

a. But the article does occur in negation: 
(1) If the sense of the noun is determined by an adjec- 
tive, a phrase, or a clause: 

II ne "ait pas des fautes grossieres. He does not make serious 
mistakes. 

II ne fait pas des fautes qui vous f assent rire. He does not make 
mistakes which make you laugh. 



* Frequently it makes better English to omit the " some " or 
" any " in translation. 



270 THE ARTICLE [§294 

(2) In contrasts: 

Pas du pain, mais de la viande. Not bread but meat. 

(3) In a negative question implying an affirmative 
answer : 

N'avez-vous pas de la nourriture, des vetements ? Have you 
not food, clothing? 

2. When an adjective precedes the noun: 
Avez-vous de bon pain? Have you any good bread? 
Avez-vous de bonnes plumes? Have you any good pens? 

a. The article remains, however: 

(1) When the adjective forms with the noun, a sort of 
compound word: 

des jeunes gens, young people. 
des petits-maitres, dudes. 

Note. — Similarly one says du bon vin, good wine; de la bonne 
musique, good music, etc. By a decree of Feb. 25, 1901, the French 
Academy authorized the use of the article with an adjective before 
a noun. 

(2) When a modifying phrase or clause follows: 

Voila du bon beurre que ma tante a fait. There is some of the 
good butter that my aunt made. 

3. When a noun is understood after the adjective: 
De mauvais livres et de bons. Bad books and good. 

4. After a word of quantity: 

Combien de livres avez-vous? How many books have you? 
J'ai beaucoup de livres. I have many books. 
Un tasse de the. A cup of tea. 
Peu de temps. Little time. 

a. Expressions of quantity take the article when a 
qualifying phrase or clause follows: 

Beaucoup des etudiants de cette universite. Many of the students 
of this university. 



§§295-296] in comparison 271 

b. A collective noun is usually followed by de + the 
article when the collective is general, by de without the 
article when it is partitive (§ 265, 1): 

La multitude des perils ne m'a jamais effraye. The multitude of 
perils has never frightened me. 

(but) Une multitude de perils m'environnent. A multitude of 
perils surround me. 

c. La plupart (majority, most) takes de + the article: 
La plupart des gens. The majority of people. 

d. Bien when it means " much," " many," usuall}' 
takes de + the article: J'ai tue bien des oiseaux, I have 
killed many birds; otherwise is used without de: J'ai 
bien sommeil, I am very sleepy. 

§ 295. Article for Possessive. The definite article is 
frequently used for the possessive adjective when there 
is no ambiguity as to meaning: 

J'ai un mouchoir dans la poche. I have a handkerchief in my 
pocket. 

II se lave la figure. He is washing his face (the face to himself). 

§ 296. Article in Comparison. 1. Before the adverbs 
plus, moins, mieux, followed by an adjective, the article 
{le, la, les) agrees if comparison is expressed: 

La rose est la plus belles des fleurs. The rose is the most beautiful 
of the flowers. 

De tous mes livres. ces deux sont les plus interessants. Of all my 
books, these two are the most interesting. 

2. But le remains invariable if the highest degree of a 
quality is expressed without comparison: 

C'est le matin que les fleurs paraissent le plus (or la plus) belles. 
It is in the morning that the flowers appear most beautiful. 



272 THE ARTICLE [§§297-299 

3. Le also remains invariable in the comparison of 
adverbs : 

De tous ces eleves, elle travaille le plus fort. Of all these pupils, 
she works hardest. 

J'aime cette peinture le mieux. I like this painting best. 

§ 297. Article with Titles. A title with a proper name 
regularly takes the definite article: 
Le docteur Thibault. Doctor Thibault. 
Monsieur le professeur Betrine. Professor Betrine. 

§ 298. Definite for Indefinite Article. Nouns of meas- 
ure, weight, and quantity take the definite article, in- 
stead of the indefinite as in English: 

J'ai paye ce drap dix francs le metre. I paid ten francs a meter 
for this cloth. 

Le sucre cotite cinq sous la livre. Sugar costs five cents a pound. 

Elle a paye ses gants un dollar la paire. She paid a dollar a pair 
for her gloves. 

§ 299. Omission of the Article. The article, whether 
definite or indefinite, is usually omitted: 

1. In proverbs: 

Pauvrete n'est pas vice. Poverty is not a vice. 

Plus fait douceur que violence. Mildness does more than violence. 

2. In enumerations: 

Hommes, femmes, enfants, tout perit. Men, women, children, all 
perished. 

3. In certain comparisons or contrasts: 

Plus on a, plus on veut avoir. The more one has, the more one 
wishes to have. 

4. After quel: 

Quel affreux accident! What a frightful accident! 

5. Before nouns used in direct address: 
Courage, soldats! Courage, soldiers! 



§299] omission 273 

6. Before words put in apposition or in predication: 

Son pere, medecin a Londres, est mort. His father, a physician 
in London, is dead. 

Son pere etait medecin a Londres. His father was a physician 
in London. 

Louis quatorze. Louis the Fourteenth. 

Je suis Americain. I am an American. 

a. After c'est, ce sont, or with a determining expression 
the article usually occurs: 

C'est une Americaine. She is an American. 

Son pere, un medecin de grande distinction. His father, a physi- 
cian of great distinction. 

7. In many expressions consisting of a verb + a noun: 

avoir faim, to be hungry avoir soif, to be thirsty 

avoir envie, to desire faire peur, to frighten 

avoir peur, to be afraid prendre feu, to take fire 

avoir raison, to be right demander pardon, to ask pardon 

avoir tort, to be wrong prendre garde, to take care 

courir risque, to run the risk mettre fin, to put an end, etc. 

8. In many phrases (prep. + noun) equivalent to an ad- 
jective or an adverb: 

une tasse de the, a cup of tea en voiture, in a carriage; all aboard! 
une tasse a the, a tea cup par an, by the year 

aller a pied, to go on foot par exemple, for example 

aller a cheval, to go on horseback sans crainte, without fear, etc. 

9. Other cases occur where the use or omission of the 
article differs from that in English: 

aller a Tecole, to go to school faire la guerre, to make war 

Tannee passee, last year Vers les cinq heures, Toward five 
avoir le temps, to have time o'clock 

avoir ^'occasion, to have occasion Soyez la bien venue, Be welcome 

au revoir, till we meet again! Tous les quatre, All four 

Good-bye! Mille hommes, A thousand men, 

etc. • 



274 THE ARTICLE [§§300-301 

The Article with Proper Nouns. 

§ 300. Names of Persons. 1. Names of persons do not 
ordinarily take the article : 

Racine etait l'ami de Boileau. Racine was the friend of Boileau. 

a. Certain proper names have preserved in French the 
article which they had in Italian or Portuguese: 

le Tasse, Tasso; TArioste, Ariosto; le Titien, Titian; le Camoens, 
Camoens. 

b. The article is a part of some proper names: 
L ; Fayette, La Fontaine. 

c. The article is used sometimes in an emphatic way 
before proper names in the plural: 

Les Bossuet, les Moliere, les Conde ont illustre le siecle de Louis 
XIV; c'etait aussi l'epoque des Colbert, des Vauban, des Pascal. 
The Bossuets, the Molieres, the Condes made illustrious the century 
of Louis XIV; it was also the time of the Colberts, the Vaubans, 
and the Pascals. 

2. Proper names of persons do take the article: 

a. When accompanied by an adjective or a determining 

phrase : 

le grand Richelieu, the great Richelieu. 

Le Racine d'Athalie est superieur au Racine de Phedre. The 
Racine of Athalie is superior to the Racine of Phedre. 

b. When designating works of art: 

le David de Michel-Ange, the David of Michael Angelo. 
la Venus de Milo. 

c. When used as common nouns: 

Napoleon etait ^Alexandre des temps modernes. Napoleon was 
the Alexander of modern times. 

§ 301. Names of Countries, Rivers, Mountains, etc. 1. 
Names of continents, countries, large islands, rivers, and 



§§302-303] WITH PROPER NOUNS 275 

mountains regularly take the article: /'Europe, la France, 
la Sicile (Sicily), la Seine, les Alpes; but it is omitted 
after the preposition en and sometimes after de: 

Je viens d'ltalie; je vais en Amerique. I came from Italy; I am 
going to America. 

a. Some names of countries coming from those of towns 
do not take the article: Venise, Venice; Naples. 

§ 302. Names of Cities. The article is usually omitted 
before names of cities, except when they are preceded by 
a descriptive adjective or followed by a determining- 
phrase: 

Je vais a Paris, (but) le gai Paris, gay Paris. 

la Rome des Cesars, the Rome of the Caesars. 

a. Some names of cities always have the article, but 
they were originally common nouns: 
Le Havre, La Rochelle. 

§ 303. 1. Place Where, " to which," is ordinarily ex- 
pressed by en: 

a. Before names of continents. 

b. Before all singular names of European countries. 

c. Before feminine singular names of countries outside 
of Europe; other names of countries usually take a with 
the definite article: 

Je vais en Europe, en Amerique, en Angleterre, en Chine. 

II fait un voyage an Japon, an Canada, aux Indes Occidentals. 

a. Xote the distinction: en Amerique (but) dans 
V Amerique du Xord. 

2. Names of towns and cities usually take a without 
the article: 

Allez-vous a Paris? Xon, je vais a Londres. 



276 



THE ADJECTIVE 



[§§304-306 



304. 



Adjectifs 



THE ADJECTIVE. 

French adjectives may be classified as follows: 
Qualificatifs (descriptive) — noir, long, etc. 
Cardinaux 



Determinatifs 



Numeraux < 

I Ordinaux 

Demonstratifs 



un, deux, 
trois, etc. 
premier, 
deuxieme, etc. 



Possessifs < 



Indefinis 



ce, cette. 
ces. 
mon, ma, 
ton, ta, 
son, sa, 
notre, notre, 
votre, votre, 
leur, leur, 
aucun, maint, 
autre, meme, 
certain, nul, 



mes 

tes 

ses 

nos 

vos 

leurs 

quel, tout 

quelconque 

quelque 



chaque, plusieurs, tel 



Adjectifs Qualificatifs. 

§ 305. Les adjectifs qualificatifs are the same as the 
descriptive adjectives of the English. They are not sub- 
divided into classes, but, as .they take both genders and 
both numbers, the main points to consider in their study 
are the rules for forming the feminine and the plural. 

The Feminine of Adjectives. 

§ 306. General Rule. The corresponding feminine of 
adjectives, as of nouns, is usually formed by adding an 
unaccented e to the masculine : grand, grange; noir, noire. 

When the masculine already ends in e, there is no 
change for the feminine: rouge, large. 



§307] THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES 277 

§ 307. Special Rules. 1. Adjectives ending in el, eil, ol, 
ul, en, on, et, ot, and those in s usually double the final 

consonant before adding e : 

crueZ, CYuelle (cruel) -pareil, p&reille (like) mol, molle (soft) 
nul, nulle (not any) ancien, ancienne (old) bon, bonne (good) 
mud, muette (silent) sot, sotte (stupid) epais, epaisse (thick) 

a. Yet devot (devout), folot (funny), idiot (idiotic), man- 
chot (one armed), niais (silly), ras (shaven), make the 
feminine devote, folote, idiote, manchote, niaise, rase, with- 
out doubling the final consonant. 

b. The same is true of Frangais, Anglais, Danois and 
other names of peoples, in ais and ois: Frangaise, Anglaise, 
Danoise. 

2. Adjectives in er, ier and the six adjectives complet 
(complete), concret (concrete), discret (discreet), inquiet 
(anxious), replet (stout), secret (secret) do not double the 
final consonant, but take a grave accent on the e which 
precedes : 

etranger, etrangere (foreign) altier, altiere (haughty) 

complex, complete concref, concrete 

discreZ, discrete inquiei, inquiete 

reple£, replete secret, secrete 

3. Adjectives ending in x regularly change x to se: 

heureuz, heureuse (happy); jalouz, jalouse (jealous), 
(but) a. Faux becomes fausse (false); roux, rousse (reddish), 
b. Vieux (old) becomes vieille; doux (sweet, mild), douce. 

4. Adjectives in f change that /to ve: 

bre/, brei'e (short); neu/, neuve (new); crainti/, eraintive (timid). 

5. Some adjectives ending in c pronounced change the 
c to que: public, publique (public); turc, turque (Turk- 
ish). Grec (Greek) retains the c and adds que: grec, 
grecque. 



278 THE ADJECTIVE [§307 

a. But more often adjectives ending whether in silent 
c (blanc) or in c pronounced (sec) change this c to che in 
the feminine: blanc, blanc/ie (white); sec, seche (dry). 

6. Adjectives in g, like long, oblong, add ue for the fem- 
inine: long, longue. 

7. Adjectives in eur form their feminine in four ways: 

a. Simply add e to the masculine: majeur, majeure 
(major). 

b. Change eur to euse: trompeur, trompeuse (deceitful). 

c. Change eur to eresse : vengeur, vengeresse (revenge- 
ful). 

d. Change teur to trice: conductor, conductrice (con- 
ducting) . 

8. Adjectives in gu make their feminine in gue: aigu, 
aigue (sharp); ambigu, ambigue (ambiguous); that is, 
they put a trema over the silent e. 

9. Irregular Feminines. Beau (beautiful) has for its 
feminine belle; jumeau (twin), jumelle; nouveau (new), 
nouvelle; fou (insane), folle; mou (soft), molle; benin 
(benign), benigne; matin (malicious), maligne; favori 
(favorite), favorite; coi (quiet), coite; tiers (third), tierce. 

10. Exceptions, a. French adjectives, as we have just 
seen, all have a silent e in the feminine. Only one adjec- 
tive remains invariable without that e, namely, grand in 
such expressions as grand'mere (grandmother), grand'- 
route (highway), etc. 

b. A few adjectives are used only in the feminine, such 
as crasse (gross): ignorance crasse (gross ignorance); 
others are used only in the masculine: aquilin (aquiline), 
dispos (nimble), fat (stupid), Hebreu (Hebrew), etc. For 



§§308-310] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 279 

the feminine of the last, recourse is had to the adjective 
hebraique, which is either masculine or feminine : la langue 
hebraique (the Hebrew language). 

The Plural of Adjectives. 

§308. General Rule. The plural of adjectives is formed, 
like that of nouns, by adding s to the singular: grand, 
grands; saint (sacred), saints. 

If the singular already ends in s or x, there is no change 
for the plural: gros, epais, heureux, glorieux. 

§ 309. Special Rules. 1. Adjectives in al usually take 
the plural in aux: loyal, loyaia*; legal, legaux; egal 
(equal), egaux. 

a. However, according to the Dictionary of the Acad- 
emy, a number of adjectives in al either take no plural 
at all or take it in s: fatal, final, automnal, etc. 

2. Adjectives in eau take x in the plural: beau, beaux; 
nouveau, nouveaux. 

3. Adjectives in eu and in ou take s: bleu, bleus; fou, 
fous; but hebreu makes hebreux. 

a. Tout (all) loses t in the plural: tons. 

Comparison of Adjectives. 

§ 310. French adjectives have the same three degrees 
of comparison as the English, namely, le positif , le com- 
paratif , and le superlatif . They are never compared, how- 
ever, as are many English adjectives, by adding suffixes 
(as in tall, taller, tallest), but rather by adverbs placed 
before the positive (§ 56). 



280 THE ADJECTIVE [§§311-312 

§ 311. The positive is the adjective itself: Mon livre 
est gros, My book is large. Gros, which merely expresses 
a quality, is in the positive degree. 

§ 312. The comparative, as its name indicates, always 
involves a comparison and is formed by prefixing: 

plus to indicate superiority: Mon livre est plus gros 
que le votre. My book is larger than yours. 

moms to indicate inferiority: Mon livre est moins 
gros que le votre. My book is less large than yours. 

aussi to indicate equality: Mon livre est aussi gros 
que le votre. My book is as large as yours. 

Hence three kinds of comparatives in French: the 
comparative of superiority, that of inferiority, and that 
of equality. 

a. The comparison of equality is not considered the 
comparative degree in English, but is so classed in French. 

b. Aussi is replaced by si after a negative: Mon livre 
n'est pas si gros que le votre. My book is not so large as 
yours. 

c. When aussi or si is omitted, " as " = comme (not que) : 
Un homme grand comme vous. A man tall as you. 

d. " Than " is ordinarily que, but with an expression 
of number or quantity is de: Vous etes plus grand que 
Jean. You are taller than John, (but) II a plus de trois 
mille francs. He has more than three thousand francs. 

e. After plus or moins used affirmatively and coming 
before a finite verb, "than" = gwe . . . ne: Vous etes 
plus grand que je ne pensais. You are taller than I 
thought. 



§§313-315] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 281 

§ 313. The superlative expresses the quality in the 
highest degree: 

1 . The relative superlative is so called because compari- 
son or relation is implied. It is formed by prefixing the 
definite article to the comparative: 

Le plus gros livre. The largest book. 
La plus belle fleur. The most beautiful flower. 
L'hiver est la saison la moins agr cable. Winter is the least agree- 
able season. 

2. The absolute superlative is so called because no com- 
parison or restriction is implied. It is formed by placing 
before the adjective one of the adverbs: tres, fort, bien, 
extremement, etc.: 

Vous etes extremement bon. You are extremely kind. 

§ 314. Irregular Comparison. As in English, some ad- 
jectives are compared irregularly: 

bon (good), meilleur (better), le meilleur (best) 

. ,, ,, f pire (worse), or f le pire (worst) 

mauvais (bad), < . < , . 

I plus mauvais, I le plus mauvais 

. .,. J moindre* (less), or J le moindre (least) 

\ plus petit (smaller), \ le plus petit (smallest) 

§ 315. Remarks on Comparison: 

1. Besides the superlatives which precede (§313) and 
which might be called compound superlatives, the French 
language possesses a few others expressed by a single 
word: 

a. Minime, from the Lat. minimus (least, smallest). 

b. Reverendissime (most reverend), serenissime (most 
serene), illustrissime (most illustrious), etc., borrowed 



* Moindre more often means " less " in importance; phis petit, 
smaller " in size. 



282 THE ADJECTIVE [§316 

from the Italian, which, in turn, took them from the 
Latin. 

c. Extreme (extreme), supreme (supreme), infime (low- 
est, in rank), intime (inmost), ultime (last), etc., coming 
from Latin words which are superlatives. To a certain 
extent, they are still regarded as superlatives; never- 
theless one can say le plus extreme, the most extreme, tres 
intime, etc. 

2. Superieur, inferieur, anterieur, posterieur, interieur, 
exterieur, etc., come from Latin words which are compara- 
tives. To a certain extent, they are still regarded as 
comparatives. One cannot say plus superieur (more 
superior), yet one does say tres superieur (very superior); 
on the other hand, one says plus interieur, plus exterieur, 
but cannot say tres interieur, etc. 

3. The comparative and superlative can be distin- 
guished only from the context, when the English equiva- 
lent requires the definite article before the comparative: 

Le plus long de tous ces crayons. The longest of all these pencils. 
Le plus long de ces deux crayons. The longer of these two pencils. 

4. Notice the following: 

L'homme le plus brave de l'armee. The bravest man in the army. 
Le marchand le plus riche de la ville. The richest merchant in 
the city. 

Plus jeune de deux ans. Younger by two years. 

Agreement of Adjectives. 

§ 316. General Rule. An adjective, whether used 
attributively or predicatively, agrees in gender and 
number with its substantive: 

Le bon pere; la bonne mere. 

lis sont bons; elles sont bonnes. 



§317] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 283 

§ 317. Several Nouns. 1. An adjective which belongs 
to several nouns in the singular is made plural. If the 
nouns are of different genders, the adjective will be 
masculine : 

Le pere et la mere sont prudents. 

2. In case these singular nouns have about the same 
meaning, the adjective will be singular and will agree in 
gender with the last noun: 

Get enfant a une inclination, un penchant demesure pour le jeu. 
This child has an boundless inclination, liking for play. 

3. After two nouns united by the conjunction ou (or) 
or by ni . . . ni (neither, nor), the adjective agrees with 
the latter noun if it modifies that one alone, but is plural 
if it modifies both: 

Colonnes en bois ou en pierre dure. Columns of wood or of hard 
stone. 

(but) Les Lapons se nourissent de chair ou de poisson crus. The 
Laplanders live on raw flesh or fish. 

4. After two nouns united by de, the adjective agrees 
according to sense with the first or second noun: 

Des robes de sole trainarites. Trailing dresses of silk. 
Des robes de soie Ugere. Dresses of light silk. 

5. The above rule applies also in case of collective 
nouns : 

Un groupe de maisons desagreable a la vue. A group of houses 
disagreeable to the sight. 

Un groupe de maisons construites en briques. A 'group of 
houses built of brick. 

a. But after the collective expressions assez de, beau- 
coup de, la plupart, etc., the adjective always agrees with 
the complement: 

Assez de gens sont miser ables. Enough people are miserable. 



284 THE ADJECTIVE [§§318-319 

6. When two or more nouns mark a gradation, and when 
one wishes to fix attention on the last, the adjective may 
take the gender and number of the last noun: 

Conde montra un courage, un sang-froid, une audace etonnante. 
Conde showed a courage, a coolness, an audacity astonishing. 

§ 318. Several Adjectives. A noun to which several 
adjectives, denoting different objects, belong is made 
plural while the adjectives remain singular; or the noun 
is singular while the article is repeated with each adjec- 
tive: 

Les langues francaise et anglaise. 

La langue 'francaise et £' anglaise. 

La langue francaise et la langue anglaise. 

a. The same rule applies to ordinals: 
Les troisieme et quatrieme pages. 
La troisieme page et la quatrieme. 
La troisieme et la quatrieme page. 

§319. Compound Adjectives. 1. A compound adjective 
formed of two adjectives (or of an adjective and a par- 
ticiple) ordinarily has both parts agree with the noun: 

Des fruits aigres-doux. Sourish fruits. 

Des (femmes) sourdes-muettes. Deaf-mutes. 

Des hommes ivres-morts. Men dead-drunk. 

2. But if the first modifies the second, it is regarded as 
an adverb and remains invariable: 

Des enfants court-vetus. Children in short clothes. 
Une fille nouveau-nee. A new-born daughter. 

3. In the two compound adjectives premier-ne and 
dernier-ne, both parts- are variable but cannot be femi- 
nine: 

Le premier-ne, les premiers-nes. 
Le dernier-ne, les demiers-nes. 



§320] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 285 

4. When nouveau is used with any other participle than 
ne, it is considered as an adjective and is variable. Fur- 
thermore, no hyphen unites it to the participle: 

Des nouveaux venus. New comers. 

Les nouveaux maries. The bride and bridegroom. 

5. Frais with a participle means " newly," " recently " 
and ought to remain invariable. Nevertheless it is 
treated as an adjective, hence is variable: 

Une maison toute fraiche batie. A house very recently built. 
Des roses fraiches cueillies. Roses newly picked. 

6. Clair seme (thin-sown) is written as one word: 
Des oignons clairsemes. Thin-sown onions. 

§ 320. Special Cases. 

1. Adverbs. Adjectives used as adverbs naturally are 
invariable : 

Parlez haut. Speak loud. 

Marchez droit. Walk straight. 

Cette fleur sent bon. This flower smells good (sweet). 

2. Nouns. Adjectives preceded by the definite article 
form new nouns and are invariable: 

Le beau, the beautiful; le vrai, the true; le bon, the good. 

3. Adjectives of Color. Nouns used as adjectives to 
designate certain colors are invariable (except rose, pink; 
cramoisi, crimson; and pourpre, purple): 

Des robes olive. Olive green dresses. 

Des rubans marron. Chestnut-colored ribbons. 

(but) Des cravates cramoisies. Crimson ties. 

a. Two adjectives united to designate certain colors also 
remain invariable: 

Des yeux bleu fonce. Dark blue eyes. 

Des cheveux chdtain clair. Light auburn hair. 



286 THE ADJECTIVE [§320 

4. Avoir Pair. After the expression avoir Vair (to have 
the air, to seem, to look) the adjective agrees according to 
sense with the word air or with the preceding noun: 

Cette femme a l'air contente (or) content. 

(but) Cette femme a l'air sourde. This woman seems deaf. 

5. Nu, Demi. Nu (bare) and demi (half) are ordinarily 
invariable when they precede the noun, variable when they 
follow it : 

II a marche nu-pieds et nu-tete pendant une dcmi-heure. He 
walked bare-footed and bare-head :d for a half -hour. 

(but) II a marche pieds nus et tete nue pendant une heure et 

demie. 

6. Mi, Semi. Mi (mid) and semi (semi) are adverbs 
used as prefixes, hence invariable: 

Mi-careme. Mid-lent. 
$e?m-annuel. Semi-annual. 

7. Feu. Feu (late, deceased) is usually invariable when 
the definite article or a determinative adjective separates 
it from its noun, but variable when it immediately pre- 
cedes the noun: 

Feu la reine. The late queen. 
(but) La feue reine. 

8. Franc de port. In the expression franc ale port (post- 
paid), franc may be considered as an adjective and agree 
with its noun, or as part of an adverbial expression and 
remain invariable: 

Cette lettre est franc (or) franche de port. This letter is post-paid. 

9. Possible. Preceded by le plus, le moins, le mieux, etc., 
possible forms an adverbial expression and remains in- 
variable : 

II a rassemble" le plus de livres possible. He has collected the 
most books possible. 



§§321-323] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 287 

In all other cases, it is variable: 

II a eprouve tous les malheurs possibles. He has experienced all 
the misfortunes possible. 

10. Proche. Proche may be used as an adjective, then 
it is variable: Les maisons proches de la riviere sont 
humides. The houses near the river are damp. 

Or it may be part of a prepositional expression, then it 
is invariable: Nous batissons des maisons proche de 
1'octroi. We build houses near the toll-office. 

Position of Attributive Adjectives. 

§ 321. Qualificative adjectives regularly follow the noun 

to which they belong: 

Un chapeau noir. A black hat. 

Un livre amusant. An amusing book. 

§ 322. But when used figuratively or especially closely 
connected in sense with the noun, they may precede : 
Un noir chagrin. A dark sorrow. 
IJn eclatant succes. A striking success. 

a. The following adjectives usually precede: 

beau gros long meilleur pire 

bon jeune mauvais moindre vieux 

grand joli mechant petit vilain 

§ 323. Many adjectives, including some of those men- 
tioned above (§ 322, a), change their meaning according 
as they are placed before or after the noun: 

affreux. Un affreux homme, a bad, terrible man. 

Un homme affreux, an ugly man. 
bon. Un bon homme, a weak, simple man. 

Un homme bon, a good, kind man. 
brave. Un brave homme, an honest man. 

Un homme brave, a brave man. 



288 



THE ADJECTIVE 



[§323 



certain. Une certaine chose, a particular thing. 

Une chose certaine, a positive thing. 
cher. Un cher frere, a dear brother. 

Un habit cher, an expensive coat. 
commun. D'une commune voix, unanimously. 

Une voix commune, a common voice, without distinc- 
tion. 
cruel. Un cruel homme, a disagreeable, tiresome man. 

Un homme cruel, a cruel man. 
dernier. Le mois dernier, last month. 

Le dernier mois, the last month (of the year, of my 
stay, etc.). 
faux. Une fausse clef, a skeleton key. 

Une clef fausse, a wrong key. 
fi,er. ' Un fier homme, a fine fellow. 

Un homme fier, a proud man. 
fort. Une forte femme, a strong woman. 

Une femme forte, a strong-minded woman. 
galant. Un galant homme, a well-bred man. 

Un homme galant, a ladies' man. 
gentil. Un gentil homme, a nobleman. 

Un homme gentil, a polite man, gentleman. 
grand. Un grand homme, a great man. ) This distinction does 

Un homme grand, a tall man. J not always hold. 
haul. Le haut ton, an arrogant manner. 

Le ton haut, a loud voice. 
honnete. Un honnete homme, an honest man. 

Un homme honnete, a* polite man. 
jeune. Un jeune homme, a young man. 

Un homme jeune, a youthful man. 
maigre. Un maigre diner, a scanty, wretched dinner. 

Un diner maigre, a dinner where no meat is eaten. 
malheureux. Un malheureux ecrivain, a wretched author. 

Un ecrivain malheureux, an unfortunate author. 
mauvais. Le mauvais air, vulgar appearance. 

L'air mauvais, ill-natured look. 
mechant. Une mechante epigramme, a poor epigram. 

Une epigramme mechante, a wicked epigram. 
mortel. Un mortel ennemi, a deadly enemy. 

L'homme mortel, mortal man. 



i324] 



COMPLEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 



289 



neuf. Un habit neuf, a new-made coat; un habit nouveau, a 

coat of a new fashion; un nouvel habit, another coat. 
nouveau. Un nouveau chapeau, another hat. 

Un chapeau nouveau, a new-style hat. 
pauvre. Un pauvre poete, a poor-grade poet. 

Un poete pauvre, a poet poor financially. 
petit. Un petit homme, a short man. 

Un homme petit, a mean man. 
plaisant. Un plaisant homme, an odd man. 

Un homme plaisant, a jolly, pleasant man. 
propre. Mon propre habit, my own coat. 

Mon habit propre, my clean coat. 
puissant. Une puissante femme, a large, heavy woman. 

Une femme puissante, a powerful, rich woman. 
seul. Un seul homme, a single man. 

Un homme seul, a man alone. 
simple. Un simple soldat, a private. 

Un soldat simple, a simple-minded soldier. 
triste. Un triste homme, a poor kind of a man. 

Un homme triste, a sorrowful man. 
unique. Un unique poeme, an only poem. 

Un poeme unique, a poem unequalled. 
vrai. Une vrai histoire, a downright falsehood 

Une histoire vraie, a true story, history. 



Complement of Adjectives. 



§ 324. A complement of an adjective is any expression 
placed after it to complete its sense. This complement is 
usually joined to the adjective by a preposition, the choice 
of which depends upon the relation expressed: 

Le cheval est utile a l'homme. The horse is useful to man. 

Cette robe est facile a faire. This dress is easy to make. 

II est facile de faire cette robe. It is easy to make this dress. 

Je suis content de vous voir. I am pleased to see you. 

Ce pays est riche en mineraux. This country is rich in minerals. 

II est cruel envers les animaux. He is cruel toward animals. 



290 THE ADJECTIVE [§§325-329 

Adjectifs Determinatifs. 

§325. The determinative adjectives designate rather 
than describe the object represented by the noun which 
they modify: 

Ce livre, this book; mon parapluie, my umbrella. 

As shown in the classification (§ 304), there are four 
classes of determinative adjectives: numeral, demonstra- 
tive, possessive, and indefinite. 

Adjectifs Numeraux. 

§ 326. Numeral adjectives are those which indicate 
the number and the order or rank. Hence two classes 
of numeral adjectives: cardinals and ordinals. 

Adjectifs Cardinaux. 

§ 327. The cardinal numerals indicate the number : un, 
deux, trois, cent, mille etc. 

For a list and discussion of cardinals see Lesson VI, 
Part I. 

Adjectifs Ordiriaux. 

§ 328. The ordinal numerals indicate the order or rank: 
premier, deuxieme, troisijeme, etc. 

For a discussion of ordinals see Lesson VII, Part I. 

Adjectifs Multiplicatifs. 

§ 329. To the cardinals and ordinals should be added: 
1. The- multiplicative adjectives, which indicate how 
many times a quantity is multiplied: 

double, triple, quadruple, decuple, centuple, etc. 

These are often used substantively as nouns. 



§§330-331] ADJECTIFS POSSESSIFS 291 

2. The distributive or partitive adjectives, which ex- 
press a certain fraction of the whole: 

demi, half; tiers, third; quart, fourth; quint, fifth, etc. 

3. The collective adjective or noun: 

une dizaine, half a score; douzaine, dozen; vingtaine, score. 

Adjectifs Demonstratifs. 

§ 330. Demonstrative adjectives are those which serve 
to point out the person or the thing of which one is 
speaking : 

ce livre, this book; cette maison, this house. 

For the discussion of demonstrative adjectives see § 25. 

Adjectifs Possessifs. 

§ 331. Possessive adjectives are those placed before a 
noun to show to whom the object represented by the 
noun belongs: 

mon chapeau, voire gant, notre maison. 

For a discussion of possessive adjectives, see Lesson V, 
Part I. 

Note 1. — Son livre may be either his book or her book, since livre 
is masculine. If a distinction must be made between the two, his 
book is son livre a lui, her book son livre a elle. 

Note 2. — Before several adjectives, when these adjectives refer to 
different persons or things represented by a single noun, the posses- 
sive adjective must be repeated: 

Notre bonne et notre mauvaise fortune. Our good and our bad 
fortune. 

a. But the repetition does not occur when the adjectives refer to 
the same person or thing: 

Nos belles et fertiles plaines. Our beautiful and fertile plains. 



292 THE ADJECTIVE [§332 

Note 3. — The possessive adjectives mon, ton, son, etc., may be re- 
placed by the definite article when it is a question of a thing insepa- 
rable from the person and when the sense indicates clearly the pos- 
sessor: 

J'ai mal a la tete. I have headache. 

a. But it is necessary to say, II a perdu son chapeau (He has lost 
his hat), because chapeau does not express a thing inseparable from 
the person. 

b. When the possessor is indicated by the reflexive pronoun se, 
the article must be used instead of the possessive adjective: 

II s'arrache les cheveux. He tears out his hair. 

Note 4- — When the object possessed belongs to a person, son, sa, 
ses, etc., must be used to indicate possession. 

J'aime mon frere, mais je connais ses defauts. I love my brother, 
but I know his faults. 

Note 5. — In speaking of things, the possessive adjectives are used 
when the nouns representing the possessor and object possessed are 
in the same clause: 

Paris a ses maisons tres hautes. Paris has its houses very high. 

a. But when the nouns representing the possessor and object 
possessed are in different clauses, the definite article with the pro- 
noun en is generally used: 

Paris est une ville magnifique, les maisons en sont tres hautes. 
Paris is a magnificent city, the houses of it (its houses) are very 
high. 

Adjectifs Iirdefinis. 

§ 332. Indefinite adjectives are those which indicate 
that the noun is used in a vague and general way: 
Je n'ai aucun livre. I haven't any book. 

For the indefinite adjectives, see § 85. 

1. Chaque (each), the adjective, must not be con-^ 
founded with chacun (each one), the indefinite pronoun: 

Chaque pays a ses usages. Each country has its customs, 
(but) Ces fruits valent un franc chacun (not chaque). These 
fruits are worth a franc each (one). 



§332] ADJECTIFS INDEFINIS 293 

2. Meme may be an adjective or an adverb. 

a. As an adjective it means " same " or " self " and is 
variable : 

Les memes causes. The same causes. 

Ses ennemis eux-memes. His enemies themselves. 

b. As an adverb it means " even " and is invariable: 

Les guerres, meme justes, sont toujours regrettables. Wars, even 
just (wars), are always regrettable. 

3. Nul placed before the noun is accompanied by a ne 
before the verb: 

" Nul fleuve ne les arrete; nulle forteresse ne les effraie." No river 
stops them; no fortress frightens them. 

a. Placed after the noun, nul is used without ne and 
means " of no value," " void," " null ": 

Ce devoir est nul; cette operation nulle. This duty is void; this 
operation of no value. 

4. Quelque may be an adjective or an adverb: 

a. As an adjective it means " some " and is variable: 
Quelque temps, some time; quelques hommes, some men. 

b. As an adverb it means " about " or " however " 
and with the latter meaning will take a verb in the sub- 
junctive mode: 

II vivait quelque cent ans avant Jesus-Christ. He lived about a 
hundred years before Christ. 

Quelque riches qu'ils soient. However rich they may be. 

5. Tout may be an adjective or an adverb. 

a. As an adjective, it means " all," " every " and is 
variable : 

Toute femme. Every woman. 

Je les ai tous vus. I have seen them all. 

Yet one says tout Rome, or toute Rome. All Rome. 



294 THE ADJECTIVE [§332 

b. As an adverb, it means " quite," " entirely," 
" very," " all," is invariable, and occurs: 

(1) When it modifies an adjective or a participle: 
Tout aimable qu'elle est. Quite aimiable as she is. 

Elle resta tout etonnee. She remained quite astonished. 

(2) When it modifies an adverb: 

La riviere coule tout doucement. The river flows very gently. 

(3) In the expressions tout yeux (all eyes), tout oreilles 
(all ears), etc.: 

Ces gens sont tout yeux. These people are all eyes. 

(4) In the expressions tout en larmes (all in tears), etc.: 
On la trouva tout en pleurs. They found her all in tears. 

Remarks: 

1. Before a feminine adjective or participle, beginning with a 
consonant or with aspirate h, tout is variable: 

Elles etaient toutes honteuses. They were all ashamed. 
Elle est toute surprise. She is quite surprised. 

2. Before a masculine adjective or participle, tout varies or not, 
according as it has the adjective or adverbial force: 

Ces livres sont tous ronges par les vers. All these books are 
eaten by worms. 

Ces livres sont tout ronges par les vers. These books are quite 
eaten, etc. 

3. Before the word autre (other) , tout is an adjective when it means 
" some," an adverb when it means " entirely ": 

Toute autre maison me plairait davantage. Some other house 
would please me more. 

Cette personne est tout autre qu'on ne me l'avait depeinte. This 
person is entirely other than one had pictured him to me. 



?333] 



TABLE OF PRONOUNS 



295 



§ 



THE PRONOUN. 

333. French pronouns may be classified as follows: 

Sing. 
I pers. je, me, moi 
II " hi, te, toi 
III " il, elle, lui, le, la, soi 



Personnels - 



Plural 
I pers. nous 
II " vous 
III " ils, elles, eux, les, leur 



Both numbers 
k III pers. se, en, y 
Sing. 
Mas. Fein. 

{ Ce,* celui, celle 
Plu. 
ceux, celles 
Sing, (with reference to possessor). 
Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. 

I pers. le mien la mienne les miens lesmiennes 



"55 


II ' 


le tien la tienne les tiens les tiennes 




III ' 


le sien la sienne les siens les siennes 


CO 




Plu. (with reference to possessor). 



I pers. le notre la notre les notres les notres 
II " le votre la votre les votres les votres 
III " le leur la leur les leurs les leurs 

Relatifs \ qui, que, quoi, dont, lequel 

Interrogans \ qui, que, quoi, lequel 



Indefinis 



autrui, l'un, on (l'on), quelqu'un, rien 
chacun, l'autre, personne, quiconque^ 



♦See 5 79, 2. 



296 the pronoun [§§334-335 

Pronoms Personnels. 

§ 334. The personal pronouns are those which desig- 
nate persons, indicating the role which they play in the 
discourse. In the sentence, Je veux que tu viennes avec 
lui, I wish that you come with him, Je indicates the 
speaker, tu the one addressed, and lui the person spoken 
of. 

For classification of personal pronouns see table, § 333. 

§ 335. Use of Personal Pronouns. 

1. Je (I) can be used only as subject of a verb. 

2. The distinction between me and moi is that me is 
conjunctive, moi disjunctive . 

3. A conjunctive pronoun is one " joined to " the verb, 
either as direct or as indirect object. Except on the im- 
perative affirmative, it should precede the verb of which 
it is object (§ 62): 

Pouvez-vous me voir? Can you see me? 

Voulez-vous me donner le livre? Will you give (to) me the book? 

a. Moi is used for me in the imperative affirmative, 
except when followed by en or y: 

Donnez-moi le livre. Give me the book. 

(but) Donnez m0 'en un autre. Give me another. 

b. As the name conjunctive indicates, this class of pro- 
nouns technically includes, as well, all pronouns used as 
subject of a verb. 

4. A disjunctive pronoun is one " disjoined," separated 
from the verb and may be used in any of the four ways 
indicated in § 76, Lesson XXIV. 

5. The familiar pronouns of the second person, tu, te, 
toi, correspond in their use to je, me, and moi respectively. 



§335] PRONOMS PERSONNELS 297 

6. II is always masculine and always subject of a verb 
(See 9, b, below.) 

7. Elle is always feminine, but may be either: 

a. Subject of a verb: 

Elle est ici. She is here; or, 

b. The feminine disjunctive pronoun: 

C'est elle. It is she. 

Venez avec elle. Come with her. 

8. Lui is : 

a. The masculine disjunctive pronoun: 

C'est lui. It is he. 

Allez avec lui. Go with him. 

b. The masculine or feminine conjunctive pronoun, usea 
only as indirect object: 

Voulez-vous lui dormer le livre? Will you give Mm the book? or, 
Will you give her the book? 

(The context must decide which is meant.) 

9. Le is the masculine, la the feminine definite conjunc- 
tive pronoun, used as direct object: 

Prenez-vous le livre? Oui, je le prends. 
Voyez-vous la plume? Non, je ne la vois pas. 

a. The pronoun le, la, les may also occur in the predi- 
cate: 

(1) When the pronoun le represents a noun preceded 
by the definite article, it agrees with this noun: 

Etes-vous la reine? Je la suis. Are you the queen? I am (she). 

Etes-vous les soldats qui ont battu l'ennemi? Nous les sommes. 

Are you the soldiers who have beaten the enemy? We are (they). 



298 THE PRONOUN [§335 

(2) When le represents an adjective or an indeterminate 
noun, it remains invariable : 

Etes-vous A merica ine f Je le suis. Are you an American? lam. 

Messieurs, etes-vous avocats? Nous le sommes. Gentlemen, are 
you lawyers? We are. 

b. Both il and le are invariable and neuter when no 
definite gender can be ascribed to the antecedent: 
Y Sb-tr-il, etc.? Je le crois. Is there, etc.? I think so. 

10. Soi is explained in § 78, Lesson XXIV. 

11. Nous is the only personal pronoun of the first per- 
son plural, hence is used in all the various relations: 

Nous sommes ici. We are here. 
Pouvez-vous nous voir? Can you see us? 
Donnez-nous le livre. Give (to) us the book. 
Allez avec nous. Go with us. 

a. Nous is sometimes used instead of je: 

(1) By sovereigns and rulers to express authority: 
Nous decretons, etc. We decree, etc. 

(2) Like the " editorial we " of English: 

Comme nous avons dit. As we have said. 

Remark. — The verb of which nous is then subject will be in the 
plural, but an adjective modifying nous will be singular: 
Nous sommes certain. We are certain. 

12. Vous is the only personal pronoun of the second 
person plural and is used in all relations: 

Vous avez mon chapeau; je vous le donne; je vous vois, etc. 

a. Vous is used by compliment for tu in ordinary dis- 
course. The verb will also be in the plural, but an adjec- 
tive modifying vous will be in the singular: 

Jean, vous etes sage. John, you are good. 



§336] PRONOMS PERSONNELS 299 

13. lis is plural of il, hence is always masculine and 
always subject. 

14. Elles is plural of elle and used in the same two rela- 
tions. 

15. Eux is plural of lui in its disjunctive relation, hence 
always masculine: 

C'est eux. It is they (referring to gentlemen, or to both ladies 
and gentlemen). 

Allez avec eux. Go with them (referring to gentlemen, or to both 
ladies and gentlemen). 

16. Leur is plural of lui in its conjunctive relation, hence 
either masculine or feminine, indirect object: 

Voulez-vous leur donner les plumes? Will you give them the pens? 

a. Leur, the personal pronoun, must be distinguished 
from leur, the possessive adjective. As personal pro- 
noun it means "to them" is used in connection with 
the verb, and never takes s: 

Je leur donne un livre. I give them a book. 

As possessive adjective it means "of them," "their," 
and takes s in the plural: 

Que les eleves prennent leurs livres. Let the pupils take their 
books. 

17. Les is plural of le or la (see 9 above) : 
Je vous les donne. I give them to you. 

18. Se is the reflexive pronoun of the third person, 
either masculine or feminine, singular or plural. 

II se leve. Elles se levent. 

§ 336. Pronominal Adverbs. En and y are called pro- 
nominal adverbs or adverbial pronouns, because they 



300 THE PRONOUN [§337 

were originally adverbs in the Latin (en coming from the 
Latin inde, " thence," and y from ibi, " there ") and have 
come to be used as pronouns in the French (§ 63). 

1. En is: 

a. Pronoun, when it takes the place of de lui, d'elle, 
d'eux, etc.: Avez-vous des crayons? Oui, yen ai trois (of 
them). 

b. Adverb, when it means " away," " from there," etc.: 
Allez vous en, Go away. J'en viens, I come from there. 

c. Preposition, when it means " in ": Je suis en Ame- 
rique. 

2. Yis: 

a. Pronoun, when it takes the place of a cette chose, a 
ces choses, a cela (to that): L'affaire est importante, ]'y 
donne toute mon attention (I give to it, etc.). 

b. Adverb, when it means " there," " here ": Le livre 
est-il sur la table? Oui, il y est. 

Remark. — En and y may be considered neuter when equivalent 
to de cela, a cela: J' en suis fache. I am sorry for that. 

Aller sans vous! Je n'y penserai jamais. Go without you ! I shall 
never think of it. 

§ 337. Position of Conjunctive Personal Pronouns (see 
§§64 and 65): 

1. When coming before the verb. 



me 

te 

se 

nous 

vous 



• precede j la > precede I U1 precede \ y \ precedes \ en.J 



§§338-339] pronoms demonstrates 



301 



2. When coming after the verb in the imperative affirm- 
ative : 

' lui 
leur 

1 precede •] y [ precedes \ en. 




Note. — For emphasis or in familiar discourse, the order of pro- 
nouns is sometimes varied. 



Pronoms Demonstrates. 

§ 338. The demonstrative pronouns are those that point 
out definitely the person or the thing of which one is 
speaking : 

Voire chien est plus joli que celui-ci. Your dog is prettier than 
this one. 

For classification and discussion of demonstrative pro- 
nouns see table, § 333, and § 79, Lesson XXV. 

§ 339. Additional Rules. 

1. Celui-la is sometimes used for celui at the beginning 
of a sentence, to give more force to the expression. Thus 
instead of saying: Celui qui commande a ses passions est 
vraiment fort, He who commands his passions is truly 
strong, one may say: Celui-la est vraiment fort qui com- 
mande a ses passions. 

2. The pronoun ce is often placed before etre to put in 
relief a noun, a pronoun, or a verb: 

Cest erreur, ou plutotc'est crime. It is error, or rather it is crime. 
Cest moi. Ce sont eux. 

Cest mourir deux fois que souffrir tes atteintes. It is to die twice 
to suffer your attacks. 



302 THE PRONOUN [§340 

3. Ce is also used before the verbs devoir, pouvoir, sem- 
bler and dire: 

Ce doit etre Paul. That must be Paul. 
Ce ne peut etre que lui. It can be only he. 
Ce semble, etc. It seems, etc. 

Je devais, ce dis-tu, te donner quelque avis. I ought, you say, to 
give you some advice. 

4. Ce is used in a large number of idioms: 
C'est aujourd'hui le quinze. To-day is the fifteenth. 
Demain ce sera samedi. To-morrow will be Saturday. 
C'est a dire. That is to say. 

Est-ce que? Ce n'est pas que, etc., etc. 

5. Ceci often applies to what is going to follow, cela to 
what has preceded: 

N'oubliez pas ceci: aide-toi, le ciel t'aidera. Don't forget this: 
Help yourself and Heaven will help you. 

L'orgueil est un grand defaut, retenez bien cela. Pride is a great 
fault, remember that well. 

6. Ceci and cela generally refer only to things; some- 
times, however, cela refers to persons in familiar language : 

Voyez ces enf ants : cela ne fait que jouer. Look at these children : 
that one does nothing but play. 

7. Cela is used in many idioms: 
C'est cela. That is right. 
Comment cela? How is that? 

a. In familiar language, cela contracts to ga: 
Comment ga va-t-il? How goes it? 

Pronoms Possessifs. 

§ 340. The possessive pronouns, as the name indicates, 
denote possession: Mon frere est plus jeune que le voire, 
My brother is younger than yours. 

For classification and discussion see table, § 333, and 
§ 80, Lesson XXVI. 



§341-343] PRONOMS RELATIFS 303 

§ 341. Additional Rules. 

1. The possessive pronouns ordinarily replace the noun, 
but are sometimes used as attributive adjectives in familiar 
language : 

Un sien cousin. A cousin of his. 

2. These pronouns sometimes occur without the article 
in the predicate after certain verbs, such as etre, devenir, 
faire, etc.: 

La maison est tienne. The house is yours. 

lis deviendront miens. They will become mine. 

II l'a fait sienne. He made her his. 

3. The singular of these pronouns may be employed in 
a neuter sense to indicate that which belongs to one, 
" property"; the plural may indicate relatives, friends, 
etc.: 

Deux freres ne devraient jamais distinguer le tien et le mien. 
Two brothers ought never to distinguish yours and mine. 
Toi et les tiens. You and your friends; vous et les vdtres. 

4. The idiom " a friend of mine " is translated into 
French as " one of my friends ": un de mes amis. 

Pronoms Relatifs. 

§ 342. The relative pronouns serve to unite a subordi- 
nate clause of which they form a part to the noun or pro- 
noun for which they stand: 

Le livre qui est sur la table est vert ; celui qui est sur la chaise est 
brun. 

For classification and discussion see table, § 333, and 
§§ 81-83, Lesson XXVII. 

§ 343. Additional Rules: 

1. Qui may be used absolutely without an antecedent 



304 THE PRONOUN [§343 

as subject or as object. In this case it applies only to 
persons and is always regarded as masculine singular: 

Qui sert bien son pays n'a pas besoin d'a'ieux. (He) who serves 
well his country has no need of ancestors. 

Choisis qui tu voudras. Choose whom you will. 

a. Qui without antecedent may apply to things when 
the neuter antecedent ce is omitted: 

Voila qui vous plaira. There is (something) which will please you. 

2. Qui repeated means " some . . . others/' " these 
. . . those": 

" Les medecins ont raisonne que cela procedait, qui du cerveau, 
qui de la rate, qui du foie." The physicians have reasoned that that 
proceeded, some from the brain, others from the spleen, others from 
the liver. 

3. A qui may express rivalry, emulation: 

C'est a qui arrivera le premier. There is rivalry as to who will 
arrive first. 

4. Que, usually direct object, may be indirect or cir- 
cumstantial object: 

L'annee qu'ii fit si froid. The year that it was so cold. 

5. Que preceded by ce is used sometimes as attribute, 
sometimes as object: 

Vous serez ce que je suis. You*will be that which (what) I am. 
Croyez ce gw'il vous plait. m Believe that which it pleases you (to 
believe), Believe what you please. 

6. Que enters into several idioms: 

Coute que cotite. Cost what it will; At any price. 
Je n'en ai que faire, etc. 

7. Quoi is used as direct object in je ne sais quoi, and 
this whole expression is sometimes used substantively: 

" II devient unje ne sais quoi qui n'a de nom dans aucune langue " 
(Bossuet). He is becoming an I know not what, which has no name 
in any language. 



§§344-345] pronoms interrogates 305 

8. Quoi followed by que forms an indefinite relative and 
takes the subjunctive: 

Quoiqu'il arrive, taisez-vous. Whatever happens, keep still. 

9. De quoi means " that which is necessary to," 
" enough to ": 

" Une telle imposture a de quoi me surprendre " (Voltaire). Such 
an imposture has enough to surprise me. 

II n'y a pas de quoi (pour remercier) . There is no need (for thanks) . 

10. Ou followed by que has the force of an indefinite 
relative and takes the subjunctive: 

Oil que vous alliez, soyez sage. Wherever you go, be good. 

Pronoms Interrogans. 

§ 344. The interrogative pronouns are those which serve 
to ask a question: Qui est ce monsieur? 

For classification and discussion see table, § 333, and 
§ 84, Lesson XXVIII. 

§ 345. Additional Rules. 

1. Qui, que, quoi and lequel may each be made more 
emphatic by adding est-ce que: 

Qui est-ce que Ton accuse? Who is it whom one accuses? 
Qw^ 'est-ce que vous demandez? What is it that you ask? 
De quoi est-ce que vous parlez? Of what is it that you speak? 
Lequel est-ce que vous desirez? What is it that you desire? 

2. All four pronouns may be used in indirect questions: 
Dites-moi qui a fait cela. Tell me who did that. 

II ne sait que faire. He does not know what to do. 
Dites-moi lequel vous preferez. Tell me which you prefer. 
Dites-moi en quoi* je puis vous servir. Tell me in what I can 
serve you. 



*Quoi here would be considered by some authorities relative, by 
thers interrogative. 



306 the pronoun [§§346-347 

3. Qui occurs in exclamatory phrases: 

Qui? toi, tu me trahis! Who? you, you betray me! 

4. Quoi accompanied by an adjective may be used as 
subject in certain elliptical expressions: 

Quoi de plus beau que de mourir pour sa patrie? What more 
beautiful than to die for one's country? 

5. Quoi may be used as direct object in sentences like: 
Vous demandez quoi? You ask what? 

Vous desirez quoi? 

Pronoms Indefinis. 

§ 346. The indefinite pronouns are those which desig- 
nate a person or thing in a vague, general, and indefinite 
manner: 

On parle Fanglais ici. Quelqu'un est la. 

For classification and discussion see table, § 333, and 
§ 86, Lesson XXIX. 

§ 347. Additional Rules: 

1. Autrui, on, personne, quelqu'un, quiconque and rien 

are considered by some grammarians as indefinite nouns. 

2. On is repeated before ea'ch verb: 

On cherche Vatel, on va a sa chambre, on heurte. One (they) 
looks for Vatel, one goes to his room, one knocks. 

a. When on designates a woman, an adjective belonging 
to it may be feminine: 

A ton age, ma fille, on est bien curieuse. At your age, my daugh- 
ter, one is very curious. 

3. On is used sometimes for a personal pronoun when 
one wants to give vagueness to the sentence: 

On se levait a six heures. (that is) We arose at six o'clock. 



§347] PRONOMS INDEFIXIS 307 

4. For euphony, Von is frequently used instead of on 
after the conjunctions et, si, ou: 

Si Van savait tout. If one knew all. 

Parlez et Von vous ecoutera. Speak and one will listen to you. 

a. But when on is followed by the pronoun le, la, les, 
the article must be suppressed: 

Qu'il parle et on /'ecoutera. Let him speak and one will listen. 

b. Von seldom occurs at the beginning of a sentence. 

5. Chacun placed before the verb is construed with son, 
sa, ses: 

Chacun doit parler a son tour. Each one ought to speak in his 
turn. 

a. Placed after the verb and referring to a word in the 
plural, chacun may take either son, sa, ses, or lew, lexers: 

Remettez ces livres chacun a sa or a leur place. Put back these 
books each one in its (or their) place. 

6. L'un 1' autre expresses reciprocity and takes the two 
genders and two numbers: 

lis s'aiment les uns les autres. They love each other. 

Elles se nuisent les unes aux autres. They harm each other. 

7. I/un et V autre does not express reciprocity, but 
simply the idea of two or more persons or things: 

lis sont malades Vun et V autre. They are both sick. 

a. When Vun et V autre, les uns et les autres are used as 
direct objects, les is usually placed before the verb: 

Je les approuve Vun et V autre. I approve of them both. 

Je les trouve mauvais les uns et les autres. I find them all bad. 

b. When these pronouns are used as indirect objects, 
leur is placed before the verb: 

Je leur ecrirai, a Vun et a V autre. I shall write to them both. 

Remark. — This use of les and of leur with Vun et V autre is pleonas- 
tic, but is supposed to add emphasis to the expression. 



308 THE ADVERB [§§348-349 

8. Quiconque is ordinarily subject of two clauses: 

Quiconque n'observera pas cette loi sera puni. Whoever will not 
observe this law will be punished. 

a. But quiconque may be object of the verb which pre- 
cedes and subject of the verb which follows: 

La loi punit quiconque a commis un crime. The law punishes 
whoever has committed a crime. 

9. Rien followed by an adjective is always accompanied 
by the preposition ale: 

Nous n'avons rien de nouveau a vous dire. We have nothing 
new to tell you. 

a. In the plural rien is purely substantive and means 
" trifles," " things of little importance." 

" Je n'ai que des riens a vous mander." I have only some trifles 
to send you. 

10. Tel as a pronoun is equivalent to celui, but is not 
used in the plural : 

11 Tel qui rit vendredi, dimanche pleurera " (Racine). He who 
laughs Friday will weep Sunday. 

11. Tout used as a pronoun is always masculine (or 
neuter) when the gender is not determined by a noun: 

Tout est fini. All is finished. 



THE ADVERB. 

§ 348. The Adverb is an invariable word which modi- 
fies a verb, an adjective or another adverb: 

Le garcon court vite. The boy runs fast. 

Cette fleur est tres belle. This flower is very beautiful. 

Vous marchez tres lentement. You walk very slowly. 

§ 349. Classes. French grammarians distinguish seven 
classes of adverbs, namely, adverbs of place, of time, of 



§350] ADVERBS OF PLACE 309 

manner, of quantity, of affirmation, of negation, and of 
doubt. 

1. Adverbs of Place. 

§ 350. The principal adverbs of place are: 

ailleurs, elsewhere dessus, above 

alentour, around en, away 

ga, here id, ci, here 

dega, on this side la, there 

dedans, inside loin, far 

dehors, outside oil, where 

dela, beyond partout, everywhere 

dessous, underneath y, there, etc. 

Remarks: 

1. Ailleurs means "elsewhere" but d'ailleurs "besides," "how- 
ever." 

2. Ca usually occurs with la, dega with dela: 

Ca et la, here and there; dega et dela, on this side and on that. 

3. Dessus and dessous, devant and derriere form certain idioms: 
Sens dessus dessous, upside down; sens devant derriere, hindside 

before. 

4. Ci rarely stands alone, but is ordinarily joined to another word 
by a hyphen. It occurs: 

a. After a noun preceded by a demonstrative adjective: cet 

homme-a". 

b. After a demonstrative pronoun: celui-ci. 

c. After an interrogation : Qu'est-ce-ci? 

d. Before adverbs and prepositions : ci-dessus above mentioned ; 

ci-apres, farther down. 

e. Before some adjectives: ci-inclus, here enclosed. 

f. Before the verb gesir: ci-git, here lies. 

5. La also occurs with certain adverbs and prepositions: la-bas, 
down there, yonder; la-haut, up there; par-ci par-Id, here and there. 

6. Y, usually an adverb or a pronoun, is an expletive in the expres- 
sion II y a, there is, there are. 



310 



THE ADVERB 



[§§351-352 



2. Adverbs of Time. 

§ 351. The principal adverbs of time are: 



alors, then 
aujourd'hui, to-day 
auparavant, hereto- 
fore 
aussitdt, immediately 
autrefois, formerly 
bientdt, soon 
detnain, to-morrow 
depuis, since 
already 



yet 



puis, then 
quand, when 
quelquefois, sometimes 
sitot, so soon 
soudain, suddenly 
souvent, often 
tantot, presently 
tard, late 
tot, soon 
toujours, always, still 



encore, again, 

enfin, finally 

ensuite, afterward 

hier, yesterday 

jadis, formerly 

jamais, never 

longtemps, a long 
while 

lors, then 

maintenant, now 
desormais, henceforth naguere, lately 
dorenavant, hereafter parfois, at times 

Remarks: 

1. De suite, tout de suite. These two adverbial expressions should 
not be confused. 

a. De suite means " without interruption," " in succession." 

II parlait deux heures de suite. 

b. Tout de suite means " immediately ": Allez tout de suite. 

2. Plus t6t, plut6t. Plus tot means "before," "sooner": II est 
arrive plus tdt que vous. He arrived before you. 

Plutot expresses preference, " rather " : Plutot la mort que le des- 
honneur. Rather death than dishonor. 

3. Tout a coup, tout d'un coup. Tout a coup means " suddenly," 
tout d'un coup, " at a single stroke/* " all at once ": Tout a coup je 
me sentis frappe; la maison s'est ecroulee tout d'un coup. Suddenly 
I felt myself struck; the house collapsed all at once. 



3. Adverbs of Manner. 

§ 352. The principal adverbs of manner are: 

ainsi, thus ensemble, together mieux, better 

Men, well expres, purposely • pis, worse 

comme, as, how! gratis, gratuitously plutot, rather 

comment, how? mat, badly quasi, nearly, etc. 

1. To the above must be added a large class of ad- 



§353] ADVERBS OF MANNER 311 

verbs formed by adding ment to the feminine form of 
adjectives: 

II mourut courageusement. He died courageously. 
II vecut sagement. He lived wisely. 

a. Adjectives ending in ant or ent make their adverbs 
in amment, emment: 

savant, s&vamment; prudent, -prudemment. 

2. Some simple adjectives are used as adverbs of manner : 
voir clair, to see clearly; parler bas, to speak low. 

Remarks: 

1. Bien. a. Before an adjective or adverb bien means " very ": 
II est bien laborieux. He is very industrious. 

b. Sometimes it means " much " : J'ai eu bien de la peine. I have 
had much difficulty. 

c. Sometimes it merely strengthens the force of the verb: C'est 
bien lui. It is surely (or indeed) he. 

2. Mieux. a. Mieux, comparative of bien, is joined only to verbs 
and to participles: II ecrit mieux. He writes better; mieux eleve, 
better brought up. 

b. Mieux enters into several idioms: 

II va mieux. He is better (in health). 

II fait de son mieux. He does his best. 

A qui mieux mieux. In emulation of each other. 

3. Mai is the contrary of bien. With pas it is used: 

a. Familiarly, to approve of something: pas mat pour un enfant, 
not bad for a child. 

b. To mean " not a few ": pas mat de fautes, not a few faults. 

4. Adverbs of Quantity. 

§ 353. The principal adverbs of quantity are: 

assez, enough combien, how much 

aussi, as, to davantage, more 

autant, as much guere, but little 

beaucoup, much mains, less 



312 THE ADVERB [§353 

peu, little, few tant, so much, so 

plus, more lellement, in such a manner 

presque, almost tres, very 

si, so trop, too much 

Remarks: 

1. Aussi. a. Aussi ordinarily expresses comparison and modifies 
only adjectives and adverbs: 

II est aussi prudent que brave. He is as prudent as brave. 
II ecoute aussi attentivement que vous. He listens as attentively 
as you. 

b. Aussi is usually replaced by si when the sentence is negative: 
II n'est pas si prudent que brave. He is not so prudent as brave. 

c. Notice: 

Vous le voulez, moi aussi. You wish it, I too (or also). 
Vous ne le voulez pas, ni moi non plus. You do not wish it, nor 
I either. 

2. Autant. a. Autant expresses comparison and modifies only 
nouns and verbs. It is joined to a noun by the preposition de: 

Je l'aime autant que son frere. I like him as well as (I like) his 
brother. 

II y a autant de garcons que de filles ici. There are as many boys 
as girls here. 

b. Autant is usually replaced by tant when the sentence is negative : 
Rien ne pese tant qu'un secret. Nothing weighs so much as a 

secret. 

c. Notice the idioms: 

D'autant plus que. So much the more as. 

D 'autant moins que. So much the less as. 

Autant dire. You may as well say. 

Autant f aire cela tout de suite. You may as well do that at once. 

3. Beaucoup. a. Beaucoup modifies only verbs, and adjectives in 
the comparative degree: 

Je l'estime beaucoup. I esteem him very much. 

II est beaucoup plus sage que son frere. He is much better be- 
haved than his brother. 

b. (1) Placed after a comparative, beaucoup must be preceded 
by de: 

II est plus sage de beaucoup, etc. 



§354] ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION 313 

(2) Placed before a comparative, de may be used or not: 
II est beaucoup or de beaucoup plus sage, etc. 

(3) With a superlative de always occurs: 

II est de beaucoup le plus sage, (or) II est le plus sage de beau- 
coup. 

(4) The same rule holds after certain verbs expressing comparison: 
Vous le surpassez de beaucoup. You surpass him much. 

c. Beaucoup is also used as a collective noun: 
II a beaucoup d' argent. He has much money. 

Beaucoup n'etaient pas contents. Many were not satisfied. 

d. Beaucoup occurs in idioms: 

I] s'en faut beaucoup (or de beaucoup). It lacks much of it. 
A beaucoup pres. By a great deal; by far. 

4. Davantage and plus are synonyms, but: 

a. Davantage can be followed neither by que nor by a complement : 
II a plus de raison (not II a davantage de raison). He is nearer 

right. 

b. Davantage modifies only verbs, not adjectives or other adverbs: 

c. However, when a comparison is expressed by means of two 
clauses and when the attribute in the first is repeated in the second 
by the pronoun le, la, les, the verb of the latter clause cannot be 
modified by plus, it must take davantage: 

Eschine etait eloquent mais Demosthene Z'etait davantage. Eschi- 
nes was eloquent but Demosthenes was more (eloquent). 



5. Adverbs of Affirmation. 

§ 354. The principal adverbs of affirmation are: 

out, yes assurement, assuredly certes, surely 

si, yes volontiers, with pleasure vraiment, truly, etc. 

1. For distinction between oui and si, see § 45. 

2. Si is sometimes reenforced by vraiment, certes, fait 
(indeed), or preceded by que: que si! Yes on the contrary. 
Si fait. 



314 THE ADVERB [§§355-356 

6. Adverbs of Negation. 

§ 355. There are properly only two adverbs of negation 
in French: ne, and non. 

The other words so employed, such as pas, point, goutte, 
are really nouns (un pas, un point, une goutte), used 
adverbially as terms of comparison, but have come to 
have a negative meaning when used alone: 

Per sonne, no one; pas du tout, not at all. 

§ 356. Ne Alone as Negative. Instead of ne — pas, 
ne — point, etc., ne alone is used to express negation: 

1. With aucun guere nul plus 

aucunement jamais nullement rien 

autre ni (repeated) personne 

Nul n'est prophete en son pays. No one is a prophet in his own 
country. 

Ni mon livre, ni ma plume ne sont ici. 

2. After a relative pronoun followed by a verb in the 
subjunctive: 

Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui ne sache cela? Is there anyone who does 
not know that? 

3. After que = pour quoif (why): 

Que ne corrigez-vous de vos defauts? Why do you not correct 
your faults? 

4. Usually after qui or que in exclamations and rhetori- 
cal questions: 

Qui ne sait cela? Who doesn't know that? 

Que pareille chose n'arrive encore! Don't let such a thing happen 
again. 

5. In subordinate clauses after a negation, whether ex- 
pressed or implied: 

Non que je ne le croie. Not that I do not believe it. 
Impossible qu'elle ne vienne. Impossible that she will not come. 
Prenez garde que vous ne tombiez. Take care that you don't fall. 



§356] ADVERBS OF NEGATION 315 

6. In condition, expressed by inversion or by such con- 
junctions as a moins que (unless), etc.: 

N'eut ete l'orage. Had it not been for the storm. 

A moins que vous ne le declariez. Unless you declare it. 

a. Si (if) may or may not omit pas: 

Si vous n'y consentez, (or) Si vous n'y consentez pas. If you do 
not consent to it. 

7. With words expressing number or duration of time 
if these are preceded by de: 

Je ne le verrai de dix jours. I shall not see him for ten days. 
Je ne leur ecrirai de longtemps. I shall not write to them for a 
long time. 

Je ne lui pardonnerai de ma vie. I shall not forgive him in my life. 

8. After the expressions depuis que (since), il y a . . . 
que, when the verb in the subordinate clause is in a com- 
pound tense: 

II y a six mois que je ne lui ai parle. It is six months that I have 
not spoken to him. 

a. But if the second verb is in a simple tense, pas or 
point must be added: 

II y avail six mois que nous ne nous parlions point. It was six 
months that we did not speak to each other. 

9. With certain verbs, such as avoir garde (to be inclined 
to), cesser (to cease), importer (to be of importance), oser 
(to dare), pouvoir (to be able), and savoir (to know), + an 
infinitive (usually): 

Je n'ai garde de le contredire. I don't care to contradict it. 
II ne cesse de nous importuner. He does not cease to importune 
us. 

iV'importe. No matter. 

Je n'ose lui parler. I don't dare speak to him. 

Nous ne pouvons les entendre. We cannot hear them. 



316 THE ADVERB [§357 

a. Sometimes the use or omission of pas changes the 
meaning of the sentence: 

II ne sait ce qu'il dit = He doesn't know what he is saying (that 
is, His mind isn't clear). 

II ne sait pas ce qu'il dit means He doesn't know the importance 
of what he is saying. 

b. With the above verbs the idea of persistence is usually 
expressed by ne . . . pas: 

Cet enfant ne cesse pas de nous tourmenter. 

10. In certain idioms: 

A Dieu ne plaise. God forbid. 

Ne vousdeplaise. Don't be angry, etc. 

§ 357. Ne pleonastic. 

1 . After expressions of fearing : apprehender, avoir peur, 
craindre, redouter, etc., taken affirmatively; after the verbs 
empecher, eviter, prendre garde; after the conjunctions a 
moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, and after the words 
autre, autrement, meilleur, mieux, moins, plus, the verb in 
the subordinate clause is usually preceded by ne: 

Je crains qu'il ne pleuve. I fear that it will rain. 

J'empeche qu'il ne parte. I keep him from going. 

II faut visiter souvent les fourr,ures, de peur que les' vers ne s'y 
mettent. It is necessary to look over furs often, for fear that worms 
may get in them. 

II est plus heureux que vous ne l'etes. He is happier than you are. 

a. When any of the above words is accompanied by a 
negation, either expressed or implied by interrogation, ne 
is omitted: 

Je ne crains pas qu'il pleuve. I do not fear that it will rain. 

Je ne puis pas empecher qu'il parte. I cannot keep him from 
going. 

Apprehendez-vous qu'il succombe? Do you apprehend that he 
will yield? 



§§358-359] ADVERBS OF DOUBT 317 

II n'est pas plus heureux que vous Petes. He is not happier than 
you are. 

b. Negation and interrogation neutralize each other, 
hence ne remains: 

A T, est-il pas plus heureux que vous ne 1'etes? Is he not happier 
than you are? 

c. Notice: 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne. I fear that he will come. 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. I fear that he will not come. 

2. After the verbs doater, nier, contester, disconvenir (to 
deny), accompanied by a negation, the verb in the sub- 
ordinate clause usually takes ne: 

Je ne nie pas que vous ne soyez applique. I do not deny that you 
are diligent. 

Doutez-vous qu'elle ne parte? Xon. Do you doubt that she will 
leave? No. 

a. However if one wishes to express a fact, of the reali- 
zation of which one is certain, ne is omitted. 

Je ne doute pas que vous reussissiez. I do not doubt that you 
will succeed. 

b. After defendre (to forbid) and the conjunctions sans 
que and avant que, French grammarians prefer to omit ne: 

Je defends qu'il sorte. I forbid him to go out. 
J'irai le voir avant gw'il parte. I shall go to see him before he 
leaves. 

7. Adverbs of Doubt. 

§ 358. The principal adverbs of doubt are: 
peut-etre, perhaps; probablement, probably; appar eminent, appar- 
ently. 

§ 359. Comparison of Adverbs. Adverbs are regularly 
compared like adjectives, by using plus, moins, aussi (si), 



318 THE ADVERB [§§360~361 

to form the comparative, but le of the superlative is invar- 
iable (§57): 

Vous marchez plus vite que lui. You walk faster than he. 
Elle ne marche pas si vite que vous. She does not walk so fast 
as you. 

Jean marche le plus vite de tous. John walks fastest of all. 

(For irregular comparison see § 57, note.) 

§ 360. Position of Adverbs. 1. An adverb ordinarily 
precedes the adjective or the adverb which it modifies: 
II est tres sage. Vous paflez trop vite. 

2. An adverb modifying a verb is usually placed after 
the verb in a simple tense, between the auxiliary and past 
participle in a compound tense: 

II travaille peu, He works little; II a peu travaille. 

a. The adverbs aujourd'hui, demain, hier are never 
placed after the participle: II a travaille aujourd'hui. 

3. An adverb may for emphasis be placed at the begin- 
ning of a clause or sentence: 

Jamais un homme ne mourut avec plus de courage. Never did a 
man die with more courage. 

§ 361. Adverbial Expressions. Aside from the adverbs 
which precede, there are many phrases having an adver- 
bial force: 

a bon marche, cheap au moins, at least en haul, up stairs 

a jamais, forever au plus, at most la-dessus, thereupon 

a la fois, at the same d'abord, at first sans doute, doubtless 

time d'oii, whence tant mieux, so much 

a Vavenir, in the fu- en avant, forward the better 

ture en bas, down stairs tot ou tard, sooner or 
a peine, hardly later 

a peu pres, nearly tour a tour, in turn 

etc., etc. 



§§362-365] list of prepositions 319 



THE PREPOSITION. 

§ 362. The preposition is an invariable word which 
serves to unite two other words, indicating the relation 
they have to each other: 

Le livre de Jean; utile d l'homme. 

§ 363. The principal relations expressed by prepositions 
are five in number: 

1. Inclination or opposition. 

2. Cause, ownership, or origin. 

3. Manner or means. 

4. Time. 

5. Place. 

§ 364. Among the more common prepositions are: 

d, at, in, on, to, etc. des, from, since par, by, through 

apres, after devant, in front of parmi, among 

avant, before en, in, to pendant, during 

avec, with entre, between, among pour, for 

chez, at — 's, with envers, toward, to sans, without 

contre, against jusque, as far as, till sauf, save, except 

dans, in, into malgre, in spite of selon, according to 

de, from, with nonobstant, notwith- sous, under 

depuis, from, since standing suivant, according to 

derriere, behind outre, besides, beyond sur, on, upon 

vers, toward 
Remarks: % 

1 . Several prepositions may also be used as adverbs : 
apres, aupres (near), avant, depuis, derriere, devant. 

2. Some have corresponding adverbial forms: 

Prep. : avant, autour de, dans, hors, sur, sous. 

Adv.: auparavant, alentour, dedans, dehors, dessus, dessous. 

§ 365. Formation. Most of the simple prepositions in 



320 THE PREPOSITION [§§366-367 

French come from the Latin, but new ones have been 
formed: 

1. From nouns: malgre {mat, bad, and gre, will), in spite 

of. 

2. From adjectives: sauf (safe, unharmed), save. 

3. From the imperative: void (voi, see; ci, here), here is. 

4. From past participles: excepte (excepted), except. 

5. From present participles: pendant (hanging), during. 

§ 366. Repetition. 

1. Two or more prepositions may precede the same 
noun, provided they express the same relation (§ 363): 

Avant, apres et pendant la guerre. Before, after, and during the 
war. 

2. Before several complements, it is customary to re- 
peat the prepositions a, de, en: 

II aime a lire et a ecrire. He likes to read and to write. 

3. The other prepositions may be repeated or not, 
according to taste and euphony: 

II vit dans mollesse et (dans) l'oisivete. He lives in ease and 
idleness. 

a. Yet the prepositions must be repeated when the 
complements express different ideas : 

Dans la paix et dans la guerre. In peace and in war. 

4. The preposition is never repeated before two nouns 
forming a single expression: 

Le roman de Paul et Virginie. The romance of Paul and Virginia. 

Particular Prepositions. 

§ 367. A indicates: 

1. Direction, tendency, intention: II va d Paris. II 
aime a travailler. 



§368 PARTICULAR PREPOSITIONS 321 

2. Time and place: Au mois de mai; II reste d la porte. 

3. Possession (with etre) : Ce livre est d moi. 

4. Source, origin: II demande conseil d un ami. 

5. Manner, instrument: II se promene d cheval. 

6. Valuation, estimate: Cinq d six cents personnes. 

§ 368. De indicates: 

1. Point of departure: II vient de Londres. 

2. Origin: Les peuples du midi (of the South). 

3. Cause: Elle tremblait de peur. 

4. Ownership: Le livre de Marie. 

5. Partitive sense: Avez-vous du pain? 

De is used: 

a. As an explicative before a qualificative adjective: 
Rien de nouveau. Nothing new. 

b. Before an adjective or participle after an expression 
of number: 

Deux cents soldats de tues. Two hundred soldiers killed. 

c. In familiar style, between two nouns in apposition: 
Un drole d'enfant. A rogue of a child. 

d. Before an infinitive, the logical subject of an imper- 
sonal verb: 

II est honteux de mentir. It is shameful to lie. 

(e) When two infinitives are compared, de is placed 
before the second: 

Plutot mourir que d'etre esclave. Rather die than be a slave. 

f. In interrogative sentences which express a compari- 
son, de sometimes occurs before each term compared : 

Lequel des deux fut le plus intrepide, de Cesar ou d' Alexandre? 

g. In titles of nobility: Madame de Sevigne. 

h. In idioms: Si j'etais que de vous. If I were you. 



322 the preposition [§§369-372 

§ 369. En and dans: 

1. En occurs before indeterminate nouns: En paix, en 
ville, en voiture. 

Dans before words preceded by the definite article or 
by a determinative adjective: 

Dans la guerre de Cent ans; dans cette voiture. 

2. En and dans are used figuratively speaking of time, 
but en means " in the space of," dans means " after ": 

Je le ferai en trois jours (that is, I shall be three days doing it). 
Je le ferai dans trois jours (that is, I shall do it after three days). 

3. En le', en les, dans le, dans les are ordinarily replaced 
by an, aux: II va au Japon, aux Indes. 

a. But en is used before feminine singular nouns: 

En Amerique, en Angleterre, en France. 

4. En sometimes = comme (as) : 

II parle en maitre. He speaks as a master. 

§ 370. Avant and devant both mean " before," but 
avant refers to time (or preference), devant to place: 

Avant hier, day before yesterday; devant Teglise, before the church. 

§ 371. Pres de and aupres de both express proximity, 
" near," but pres de refers both to time and to space, 
aupres de only to space: 

II a ete absent pres d'un mois. 
II demeure aupres de l'eglise. 

§ 372. A travers and au travers both mean " through," 
but au travers is always followed by de, a travers is not: 

Au travers des perils; a travers champ. 



§§373-374] 



LIST OF CONJUNCTIONS 



323 



THE CONJUNCTION. 

§ 373. The conjunction is an invariable word which 
serves to unite two words of the same kind or two clauses : 
Pierre et Paul; J'aime cet enfant parce qu'il est bon. 

§ 374. The principal conjunctions and conjunctive ex- 
pressions used in French are: 

a condition que, on condition that 
afin que, in order that 
ainsi, thus, therefore, 
ainsi que, as well as 



alors que, when 

a mesure que, in proportion as 

a moins que, unless 

apres que, after 

attendant que, until 

attendu que, considering that 

au cas que, in case that 

aussi, hence, therefore 

avant que, before 

bien que, although 

car, because, for 

ce n'est pas que, not that 

cependant, however, yet 

comme, as, since, because 

de crainte que, for fear that 

de maniere que, so that 

de meme que, in the same way as, 

so as, as 
de peur que, for fear that 
depuis que, since 
de sorte que, so that 
des que, as soon as 
done, therefore, then, now 
en attendant que, until 
en cas que, in case that 



encore, even, yet 

encore que, or else 

en sorte que, so that 

en supposant que, supposing that 

et, and 

et . . . et, both . . . and 

excepte que, except 

jusqu'a ce que, until 

loin que, far from 

lorsque, when 

mais, but 

neanmoins, nevertheless 

ni, nor 

ni, ni . . . (ne), neither . . . nor 

nonobstant que, notwithstanding 

that 
non . . . que, not that 
or, now 
ou, or 

ou . . . ou, either ... or 
parce que, because 
pendant que, while 
pour que, in order that 
pourtant, however 
pourvu que, provided that 
puisque, since 
quand, when 

quand {bien) meme, even if 
que, that, as, than 



324 the conjunction [§§375—376 

quoique, although soit que . . . soit que (ou que), 

sans que, without whether ... or 

selon que, according as suppose que, suppose that 

si, if, whether tandis que, while 

si bien que, so that tant que, as long as 

sinon, otherwise, if not tellement que, so that 

sitdt que, as soon as toutefois, nevertheless, yet 

soit . . . soit, whether ... or vu que, seeing that 

soit , . < ou, whether ... or 

§ 375. Classes. As in English, conjunctions are divided 
into two classes: 

1. Coordinate conjunctions, which unite words or prop- 
ositions of equal value in the sentence: et, ou. 

2. Subordinate conjunctions, which unite a subordinate 
to a principal clause : a fin que, puisque. 

§ 376. Particular Conjunctions. 

1. Que, the most common of all the subordinate con- 
junctions, is used: 

a. To unite a subordinate to a principal clause: Je 
crois que vous vous trompez. I think that you are mis- 
taken. 

b. To unite two terms of a comparison: II est plus 
heureux que prudent. He is more happy than prudent. 

c. After the adjectives autre, quel, meme, tel: II est tout 
autre que je ne pensais. He is entirely other than I 
thought. 

d. After the adverbs ailleurs, aussi, aidant, mieux, 
moins, plutdt, etc. : II est aussi grand que vous. He is as 
tall as you. 

e. After an impersonal verb: II n'arrive jamais que les 
grands manquent de flatteurs. It never happens that the 
great lack flatterers. 



§376] PARTICULAR CONJUNCTIONS 325 

f. With the subjunctive in independent clauses: Qu'il 
entre. Let him enter. 

g. With the negative ne: 

Je n'ai que trois livres. I have only three books. 

II ne fait que rire. He does nothing but laugh. 

II ne fait que de rentrer. He has only just come in. 

h. To form conjunctive expressions: 

(1) With substantives preceded by a preposition: d 

condition que. 

(2) With the verb etre: soit que. 

(3) With adverbs: Men que. 

(4) With prepositions: avant que. 

Remarks: 

Que is often used: 

1. In place of conjunctive expressions: afin que, sans que, etc.: 
Venez, que je vous le montre. Come in order that I may show it 
to you. 

2. To avoid repetition of the conjunctions commie, quand, si: 
Quand on est jeune, et qu' on se porte bien. on doit travailler. When 
one is young and when one feels well, one ought to work. 

2. Parce que and par ce que. Farce que (in two words) 
means " because ": 

Je me tais parce que j'ai tort. I keep still because I am wrong. 

Par ce que (in three words) means " by that which ": 

Je suis instruit par ce que mon pere m'a dit. I am instructed bj T 
that which my father told me. 

3. Quoique and quoi que. Quoique (in one word) means 
"although": 

Quoique fatigues, nous travaillons. Although tired, we work. 

Quoi que (in two words) means " whatever ": 
Quoi qu'il dise. Whatever he says. 



326 THE INTERJECTION [§§377-378 

4. Quand and quant a. Quand is a conjunction, "when" : 
Quand j'aurai fini, je partirai. When I shall have finished, I 

shall go. 

Quant a is a prepositional expression, " as for ": 
Quant a moi, je n'irai pas. As for me, I shall not go. 

5. Si as a conjunction may be used: 

a. In a dubitative sense: 

Je ne sais si mon frere parlera. I do not know whether my brother 
will speak. 

It may then be construed with all the tenses of the 
indicative and conditional. 

b. In a conditional sense: 

II viendrait si vous l'invitiez. He would come if you should 
invite him. 

It can then be construed neither with the future nor 
with the conditional. 

c. In a positive sense: 

Si cet homme est pauvre, est-ce une raison pour le mepriser? 
Even if this man is poor, is it a reason for despising him? 



THE INTERJECTION. 

§ 377. The interjection is a cry, an exclamation: ah! 
oh ! helas ! 

§ 378. The principal interjections are: 

1. Joy: Ah! 

2. Grief: Aie ! ah! helas! ouf ! 

3. Fear: Ha! he! ho! 

4. Admiration; Ah! eh! oh! 



§§379-380] homonyms 327 

5. Aversion: Fi ! oh ! 

6. Encouragement: Sus ! ca! 

7. Call: Hola! he! 

a. To this list may be added a large number of words 
which are really other parts of speech used in an exclama- 
tory way: 

Bon! peste! misericorde! allons! courage! bravo! etc. 



HOMONYMS, PARONYMS, SYNONYMS. 

§ 379. One of the most confusing features of the 
French language is the homonyms, words pronounced 
alike, though having quite different meanings. They 
may be divided into two classes: 

1. Homographs, words both written and pronounced 
alike: la biere, beer; la Mere, bier. 

2. Homophones, words pronounced alike though spelled 
differently: chene, oak; chaine, chain. 

§ 380. The following are examples of homonyms: 

1. Abord, landing, approach; abhorre, abhor. 

2. Air, air we breathe; air, look, appearance; aire, area; aire, 
nest of an eagle; ere, era; erre, err; haire, sackcloth; here, poor 
wretch; erre, course, way (of a ship); erre, the letter R. 

3. Amande, almond; amende, fine, penalty; amende, amend. 

4. Are, are (land measure); Aar, a river in Switzerland; art, art; 
arrhes, pledge, wager; hart, rope, halter. 

5. Au, aux, a + def. art.; aulx, garlic; eau, water; haut, high; 
O! ho! oh! interjections; os, bones. 

6. Va in, vain; vainc, from vaincre (to conquer) ; vin, wine; vingt, 
twenty; vint, parf. def. of venir. 



328 paronyms; synonyms [§§381-382 

7. Van, fanning-mill; vend, from vendre; vent, wind. 

8. Ver, worm; vair, kind of fur; vert, green; verre, glass; vers, 
verse; vers, toward. 

9. Vice, vice, crime; vice, subordinate (vice-roi) ; vis, screw; visse, 
from visser (to screw). 

10. Voie, way; voie, ancient measure; voix, voice; vois, from voir. 

§ 381. Paronyms are words whose pronunciation, while 
not identical, is near enough alike to be confusing: goute, 
goutte. 

1. Bailler, to give in lease; battler, to yawn. 

2. Boite, box; boite, from boiter (to limp). 

3. Pomme, apple; paume, palm of the hand. 

4. Tacher, to stain; tdcher, to try. 

5. Abstraire, to abstract; distraire, to distract. 

6. Consommer, to consummate; consumer, to consume. 

7. Plier, to fold, bend; ployer, to curb. 

§ 382. Synonyms, as in English, are words having a 
similar meaning. They are ordinarily divided into two 

classes : 

1. Those having the same root: abuser, mesuser. 

2. Those having different roots: haine, aversion, anti- 
pathie, repugnance. 



VOCABULARY 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



a (a) 3 sing. pres. indie, of avoir, 
has 

a (a), prep, to, till until, towards, 
at, on, in, with, by, for, per 

abat-jour (abasuir), m. pi. same, 
lamp-shade, window-blind 

abeille (abe:j), /. bee. 

abimer (abime), to destroy, 
spoil, ingulf 

abondance (aboda:s), /. abund- 
ance, plenty 

abord (abo:r), m. landing, access, 
approach, attack 

d'abord, adv., at first, from the 
very first 

abrege (abrese), m., abridge- 
ment, summary ; en abrege, 
briefly 

abreuver (abrove), to water, 
soak, drench, fill 

abreuvoir ( abrovwa :r ) , m., 
watering-trough 

abreviation (abrevjasjo), /., ab- 
breviation 

abricot (abriko), m., apricot 

abstention (abstasjo), /., absten- 
tion 

absurde (apsyrd), adj., absurd 

abuser (abyze), to abuse, impose 
on, misuse, deceive, cheat 

acacia (akasja), m., acacia, locust 
tree 

acajou (aka3u), m., mahogany 

accabler (akable), to crush, over- 
whelm, weigh down 



accepter (aksepte), to accept 

accompagner (akopajie), to ac- 
company, escort 

accourir (akuri:r), accourant, ac- 
count, hasten, rush, flock to- 
gether 

accoutumer (akutyme) , to accus- 
tom; a Vaccoutumee, customar- 
ily 

achat (a 5a), m., purchase 

acheter (a$te), to buy, purchase 

Acores (aso:r), /. pi., the Azores 
(islands in the Atlantic) 

acote de (akote da), prep., be- 
side, at the side of 

acte (akt), m., act, deed, docu- 
ment 

actif (akt if), adj. (f. active), 
active, actual 

actuellement (aktqelma), adv., 
actually, just now 

adapter (adapte), to adopt, suit, 
fit 

adieu (adjo), adv., good bye, fare- 
well 

admirablement (admirablama), 
adv., admirably 

admirer (admire), to admire, 
wonder at 

adosser (adose), to lean one's 
back against 

adresse (adres), /., address, 
speech, skill 

adresser (adrese), to direct, ad- 
dress; s'adresser, to address 
one's self, apply 

affaire (ate:r), /., affair, thing, 



330 



VOCABULARY 



business; pi., things, busi- 
ness 

affectueux (atektqo), adj. (/. 
affectueuse), affectionate 

affreux (aire), adj. (/. affreuse), 
frightful, fearful 

age (a 13) m., age, years; moyen 
age, Middle Ages. 

agir (a3i:r), to act, have an influ- 
ence; il s'agit de, it is a ques- 
tion of 

agneau (ajio), m., lamb 

agrafe (agraf), /., hook, clasp; 
agrafe et porte, hook and eye 

agrafer (agrafe), to hook, clasp; 
cling 

agreable (agreabl), adj., agree- 
able, pleasant 

agreer (agree), to accept, receive 
kindly 

agrement (agrema), m., pleasure, 
charm, advantage 

aider (ede), to aid, help, assist 

aigu (egy), adj. (/. aigue), acute, 
sharp, pointed, shrill 

aiguille (egqirj), /., needle, hand 
(of watch), spire (of steeple) 

aile (el),/., wing, pinion, aisle (of 
church) 

ailleurs (aja:r), adv., elsewhere; 
d'ailleurs, besides, moreover 

aimable (emabl), adj., amiable, 
kind, friendly, agreeable 

aimer (erne), to love, like; aimer 
mieux, to prefer 

ainsi (esi), adv., thus, so, in this 
manner; conj., thus, therefore 

air (err), m., air, wind; look, ap- 
pearance 

aise (e:z),/., ease, comfort, glad- 
ness; adj., glad 

ajouter (a3ute), to add, join, 
interpolate 

ajuster (asyste), to adjust, regu- 
late, put in order, reconcile 

allee (ale),/., alley, passage, lane 

Allemagne (alman),/., Germany 

allemand (alma), adj. (/., alle- 
mande), German 

aller (ale), to go; s'en alter, to go 



away; allons! come! Com- 
ment allez vousf How do you 
do? Cela ne va pas, That 
won't do. Cela vous va bien, 
That fits (or becomes) you 
well 
allumer (alyme), to light, kindle 
allumette (alymet), /., match 
almanach (almana), m., almanac 
alors (alo:r), adv., then 
Alpes (alp), /. pi., les Alpes, the 

Alps 
Alsace (alzas), /., Alsace (part of 

Germany) 
alterer (altere), to alter, change 
amande (ama:d),/., almond 
amandier (amadje), m., almond- 
tree 
amas (ama), m., heap, pile 
amasser (amase), to heap up, 
hoard up; s' amasser, to get 
together, crowd 
ambition (ubisjo), /., ambition 
ame (ct:m), /., soul, spirit, mind 
amener (amne), to bring, lead 
amer (ame:r), m., bitterness, 

gall; adj., bitter 
americain (amerike), adj. (/., 

americaine), American 
Amerique (amerik), /., America; 
I'Amerique du Nord (no:r), 
North America; V Amerique 
du Sud (syd), South America 
ameublement (amoblama), m., a 
» set of furniture 
ami (ami), m. (/., amie), friend 
amidon (amido), m., starch 
amiral (amiral), m., admiral 
amitie (amitje), /., friendship 
amnistie (amnisti), /., amnesty 
amour (amu:r), m., love; Quel 
amour d'enfant! What a darl- 
ing child! 
Amsterdam, city in Holland 
amuser (amyse), to amuse; 
s'amuser bien, have a good 
time 
an (a), m., year; Van bissextile, 
leap year; le jour de Van, New 
Year's dav 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



331 



ananas (anana), m., pineapple 
ancien (asje), adj. (/., ancienne), 

old, ancient, senior 
ancre (a:kr),/., anchor 
ane (a:n), m., donkey 
ange (6:3), m., angel 
anglais (ugle), adj. (/., anglaise), 

English 
Angleterre (aglate:r), /., Eng- 
land; la Nouvelle- Angleterre, 

New England 
anguille (agi:j),/., eel 
animal (animal), m., animal, 

beast 
anneau (ano), m. (pi., anneaux), 

ring, link (of chain) 
annee (ane), /., year, twelve- 
month; toute V annee, all the 

year 
Anvers (ave:r), m., Antwerp 

(port in Belgium) 
aout (u), m., August 
apaiser (apeze), to appease, 

pacify, calm, soothe 
apercevoir (apersavwa:r), aper- 

cevant, apergu, to perceive, see 
a peu pres (apopre), adv., about, 

nearly 
apparaitre (apare:tr), apparais- 

sant, apparu, to appear, come 

in sight 
appareil (spare :j), m., apparatus, 

implements, apparel, attire 
appartement (apartama), to., 

apartment, flat, suite of rooms 
appeler (aple), to call, send for, 

summon; s' appeler, to be 

called or named 
appetit (apeti), m., appetite, 

relish 
applaudir (aplodi:r) to applaud; 

s'applaudir to congratulate 

one's self 
applique (aplike) adj., diligent, 

attentive, intent 
appliquer (aplike), to apply, 

adapt, lay or fix on; s' appli- 
quer, to apply one's self, appty 

one's mind, study hard, to be 

fastened on 



apporter (aporte), to bring 

apprecier (apresje), to appre- 
ciate, value, rate, esteem 

apprehender (apreade), to appre- 
hend, fear, arrest 

apprendre (apra:dr), apprenant, 
appris, to learn, inform, teach, 
hear of 

approcher (apr$oe), to approach, 
bring near, be nearly like 

approprier (aproprie), to appro- 
priate, adapt; approprie, ap- 
propriate 

approuver (apruve), to approve, 
approve of 

appuyer (apyije), to prop up, 
stay, sustain, second, lay 
stress on; s' 'appuyer, to lean 
on, confide in, rely upon 

apres (apre), prep, and adv., 
after, afterwards 

apres-demain (apredme), adv., 
day after tomorrow 

apres-midi (apremidi), m., after- 
noon 

aquarelle (akwarel), /., water- 
color painting 

arabe (arab), adj., Arabian, 
Arabic 

Arabie (arabi), /., Arabia (coun- 
try in S. W. Asia) 

araignee (arene), /., a spider; 
toile d'araignee, cob-web 

arbre (arbr), m., tree 

arbuste (arbyst), m., shrub 

arc (ark), m., arch, arc; arc- 
boutant, flying buttress; arc- 
en-ciel, rainbow; Arc de Tri- 
omphe de V fttoile, Triumphal 
Arch of the Star, the largest 
triumphal arch in the world, 
begun at Paris in 1806 by 
Napoleon I. The " Star " 
refers to the fact that twelve 
avenues radiate from it 

arche (ar$),/., ark (Noah's), arch 
(of a bridge, viaduct) 

archer (ar$e), m., archer, bow- 
man, constable 



332 



VOCABULARY 



archeveque (ar§(9)ve:k), m., 
archbishop 

ardeur (arda:r), /., ardor, fervor 

ardoise (ardwa:z), /., slate 

argent (ar3a), m., silver, silver 
coin, money 

argenterie (ar3&tri), /., plate, 
silver-ware 

argot (argo), m., slang 

aristocratie (aristokrasi), /., aris- 
tocracy 

aristocratique (aristokratik) , adj. , 
aiistocratic 

arithmetique (aritmetik) ,/., arith- 
metic 

armee (arme), /., army, fleet, 
host 

armoire (armwa:r), /., cupboard, 
linen closet 

armoiries (armwari),/. pi., coat- 
of-arms, armorial bearings 

armure (army:r),/., armor 

arranger (ara3e), to arrange, put 
in order 

arret (are), m., arrest, decree, 
sentence, check 

arreter (arete), ro arrest, stop, 
check; arreter sa place, secure 
one's place; arreter court, stop 
short; arreter un point, fasten 
a stitch (in sewing); s'arreter, 
stop, pause, stand still 

arriere (arje:r), in., back part, 
rear; en arriere, backwards 

arriver (arive), to arrive, come, 
happen 

arroser (aroze), to water, sprin- 
kle; (in cooking) baste 

art (a:r), m., art; .beaux arts, fine 
arts; arts d'agrement, accom- 
plishments 

artichaut (arti$o), in., artichoke 

ascenseur (asaso:r), m., elevator, 
lift 

ascension (asasjo), /., ascent, 
ascension 

asperges (asper3),/., asparagus 

asseoir(s) (saswa:r), asseyant, 
assis, to sit down, seat one's 
self 



assez (ase), adv., enough, rather, 
quite 

assiette (asjet), /., plate 

assis (asi), sitting (see asseoir) 

assister (asiste), to be present at, 
attend, assist 

assurance (asyra:s), /., assur- 
ance, insurance 

assurer (asyre), to assure, assert, 
insure 

astre (astr), m., star, heavenly 
body 

astronomie (astronomi), /., as- 
tronomy 

atelier (atdje), m., studio, work- 
shop 

Athenes (ate:n), /., Athens (city 
in Greece) 

athletique (atletik), /., athletics 

Atlantique (atlcitik), m., V Atlan- 
tique, the Atlantic (Ocean) 

attacher (ata$e), to attach, fas- 
ten, join 

attaquer (atake), to attack, 
tackle 

attendre (ata:dr), to wait, wait 
for, expect, look forward to. 
Attendez! Wait! en attendant, 
in the meantime, meanwhile; 
attendant que, till, until; at- 
tendu que, considering that, 
whereas; s' attendre, to count 
or rely on, anticipate; je m'y 
attends, I expect it; se faire 
dttendre, keep people waiting 

attente (ata:t), /., waiting, expec- 
tation; salle d' 'attente, waiting- 
room 

attentif (atatif), adj. (/., atten- 
tive), attentive, careful, dili- 
gent, studious 

attention (atasjo), /., attention, 
heed; attention! Look out! 

attraper (atrape), to catch, se- 
cure, entrap; attraper un 
rhume, catch a cold 

attrayant (atreja), adj., attrac- 
tive 

aube (o:b), /., dawn 

aubepine (obepin), /., [hawthorn 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



333 



auberge (obei'3), /., inn, tavern 

aubergiste (obersist), m., inn- 
keeper, landlord 

aucun (oka), indef. pron. or adj. 
(/., aucune), anyone, any 

aucunement (okynma), adv., in 
no wise, by no means 

aujourd'hui (o3iirdyi), adv., to- 
day 

au moins (omwe), at least 

au plus (oply), at most 

aupres de (opreda), prep., near 
to, in comparison with, in the 
estimation of 

aussi (osi), adv., too, also, as; 
conj., therefore, consequently 

aussitot (osito), adv., immedi- 
ately 

autant (ota), adv., as much, as 
many; d' autant plus, so much 
the more; d' autant mieux, so 
much the better 

autel (otel), m., altar 

auteur (oto:r), m., author 

automne (oton),m. or/., autumn, 
fall 

autorite (otorite), /., authority 

autour (otu:r), adv., round about; 
id autour, hereabouts; autour 
de, prep., around 

autre (o:tr), pron. and adj., 
other, another; Vun V autre, 
each other, one another; tout 
autre que vous, anybody else 
but you; tout autre, quite dif- 
ferent; nous autres Francois, 
we French folks 

autrefois (otrafwa), adv., for- 
merly, once 

autrement (otrama), adv., other- 
wise, else 

Autriche (otri$), /., Austria 

autrichien (otri$e), adj., Austrian 

autruche (otry$),/., ostrich 

Auvergne (overp), /., Auvergne 
(ancient province of France) 

avaler (avale), to swallow, go 
down 

avance (ava:s),/., advance, start; 
prendre Vavance, to get the 



start; d 'avance, adv., before- 
hand 

avancer (arose), to advance, 
move forward, go too fast (of 
a clock or watch) 

avant (ava), prep, and adv., be- 
fore, forward, deep, far; d'a- 
vant, before; en avant! for- 
ward! en avant de, in front of ; 
plus avant, further, deeper; 
alter de V avant, go ahead; 
avant que, before 

avantage (avert a 15), m., advan- 
tage, superiority, benefit 

avantageux (avataso), adj. (/., 
avantageuse) , advantageous, 
profitable 

avant-garde (avagard), /., van- 
guard 

avant-hier (avaje:r), adv., day 
before yesterday 

avec (avek), prep, and adv., with, 
therewith 

aventure (avatyr),/., adventure; 
a I'aventure, by accident, by 
chance 

avenue (avny), /., avenue 

avertir (averti:r), to warn, cau- 
tion, give notice 

avertissement (avertisma), m., 
warning, advice, notification 

aveu (avo), m., avowal, confes- 
sion 

aveugle (avegl), adj., blind 

avis (avi), m., opinion, judg- 
ment; changer d'avis, change 
one's mind 

aviser (avize), to perceive, espy; 
consider; s' aviser, to think of, 
take it into one's head; avisez-y 
bien, consider it well 

avocat (avoka), m., lawyer, advo- 
cate 

avoine (avwan), /., oats 

avoir (avwa:r), ayant, eu, to 
have; avoir faim, to be hun- 
gry; avoir deux ans, to be two 
years old ; il y a, there is, there 
are; il y a un mois, a month 
ago; il n'y a pas de quoi, not 



334 



VOCABULARY 



at all, don't mention it; com- 
bien y a-t-il d'ici, how far is it 
from here; qu'avezvousf what 
is the matter with you? 

avoue (avwe), m., attorney, 
solicitor 

avouer (avwe), to confess, avow, 
own, acknowledge, grant 

avril (avril), m., April 



B 



babiole (babjol), /., bauble, toy 

badigeon (badiso), m., white- 
wash 

bagage (baga:3), m., baggage, 
luggage 

bagatelle (bagatel), /., bauble, 
trinket, trifle 

bague (bag), /., ring 

baguette (baget), /., rod, wand 

baigner (bene), to bathe 

baigneur (bejia:r), m. (/., baig- 
neuse (beno:z)), bather 

baignoire (benwa:r),/., bath tub 

bain (be), m., bath 

bain-marie (be mari), m. (pi., 
bains-marie), double boiler 

baiser (beze), m., a kiss 

baiser (beze), to kiss 

baisser (bese), to lower, let 
down; se baisser, stoop 

bal (bal), ra., ball, dance 

halai (bale), ra., broom 

balancer (balase), to poise, bal- 
ance, swing; se balancer,, to 
swing, rock, sway 

balancoire (balaswa:r),/., swing, 
see-saw 

balayer (baleje), to sweep 

balbutier (balbysje), to stammer, 
stutter, mumble 

balcon (balko), ra., balcony 

Baleares (balea:r), /. pi., Bale- 
aiic Islands (east of Spain) 

baleine (balen), /., whale 

balle (bal), /., ball, bullet, shot 

ballon (balo), ra., balloon, foot- 
ball; jouerau ballon, play foot- 
ball 



banal (banal), adj. (/., banale), 
common, commonplace, cas- 
ual 
banane (banan), /., banana 
bananier (bananje), ra., banana- 
tree 
banc (ba), ra., bench, seat, pew, 

reef, bed 
bander (bade), to bind up 
banniere (banje:r), /., banner, 

standard, flag 
banque (ba:k), /., bank; carnet 

de banque, bank book 
banquier (bakje), m., banker 
barbare (barba:r), m., barbarian; 
adj., barbarous, merciless, 
rude 
barbe (barb), /., beard 
barbier (barbje), m., barber 
baron (baro), m., baron 
baronne (baron), /., baroness 
barrer (bare), to bar, block, ob- 
struct 
bas (ba), adj. (/., basse), low; en 
bas, down stairs, below; d'en 
bas, from below; la-bas, yon- 
der, over there ; tout bas, in an 
undertone, softly 
bas (ba), m., stocking 
basculer (baskyle), to rock, see- 
saw; une chaise a bascule, 
rocking-chair 
bassin (base), m., basin, dishpan 
, Bastille (basti:j), /., la Bastille, 
the old prison in Paris, de- 
stroyed at the beginning of the 
French Revolution, July 14, 
1789 
bataille (bata:j), /., battle 
bataillon (batajo), m., batallion 
bateau (bato), m., boat; se" 
promener en bateau, to go for 
a boat-ride 
batiment (batima), m., building, 

edifice; ship, vessel 
batir (bati:r), to build, erect 
baton (bato), m., stick, stroke 
(in writing); coup de baton, 
blow; baton de sucre, stick of 
candy 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



335 



batterie (batri), /., battery; bat- 
terie de cuisine, kitchen uten- 
sils 

battre (batr), to beat, strike, 
thresh, flap, swing open 

bavarder (bavarde), to prattle, 
gossip 

beau (bo), adj. (/., belle), beauti- 
ful, fine; adv., tout beau, gently, 
not so fast; avoir' beau fair e, to 
try in vain 

beaucoup (boku), m. and adv., 
much, many, a great deal, 
deeply 

bee (bek), rn., beak, bill, jet; bee 
de gaz, gas burner 

beche (be :$),/., spade 

becher (bej\e), to dig 

begue (beg), m., stammerer, stut- 
terer; adj., stammering, stut- 
tering 

bel (bel), adj., =beau (used be- 
fore vowel or silent h) 

Belgique (belsik), /., Belgium 

belle (bel), adj., see beau 

Belle Alliance (belalja:s), /., 
name of a hill on battlefield of 
Waterloo 

belles-lettres (belletr), /. -pi., 
polite liteiature 

benediction (benediksjo),/., ben- 
ediction, blessing 

bercer (berse), to rock, lull to 
sleep 

berger (berse), m., shepherd 

Berlin (berle), m., Berlin 

besoin (bezwe), m., need, want; 
au besoin, at need, on a pinch 

bete (be:t), /., beast, brute, 
blockhead; adj., stupid 

betise (beti:z), /., absurdity, 
stupidity 

betterave (betra:v), /., beet 

beurre (be:r), m., butter 

bibelot (biblo), m., trinket, nick- 
nack 

bibliothecaire (bibliotek£:r), m., 
librarian 

bibliotheque (bibliotek), /., lib- 
rary, bookcase 



bicyclette (bisiklet), /., bicycle 

bien (bje), adv., well, very, in- 
deed, right; bien que, although; 
bien moins, much less 

bien (bje), m., property, estate; 
good, benefit, welfare 

bien-etre (bjene:tr), m., well- 
being, welfare, comfort 

bientot (bjeto), adv., soon; a 
bientot, good bye for the pres- 
ent 

bienvenu (bjevany), adj., wel- 
come; Soyez le bienvenu, Be 
welcome, make yourself at 
home 

bijou (bisu), m. (pi., bijoux), 
jewel 

bijouterie (bisutri), /., jewelry 

bijoutier (bisutje), m., jeweler 

billet (bije), m., note, ticket, 
label; billet doux, love letter; 
billet de banque, bank note; 
billet de retour, return ticket 

biscuit (biskyi), m., biscuit, 
cracker 

bizarre (biza:r), adj., odd, pecu- 
liar 

blamer (blame), to blame, cen- 
sure, reprimand 

blanc (bla), adj. (J., blanche), 
white 

blanchir (bla$i:r), to whiten, 
wash (clothes), bleach 

ble (ble), m., wheat, grain 

blesser (blese), to wound, hurt 

blessure (blesy:r), /., wound, 
hurt 

bleu (bio), adj., blue 

bleuatre (bloa:tr), adj., bluish 

blouse (blu:z),/., shirt-waist 

Bliicher, commander of the Prus- 
sians at Waterloo 

bluet (blye), m., corn flower, 
bachelor's button 

bobine (bobin),/., bobbin, spool; 
bobine de fit (fil), spool of 
thread 

boeuf (bof), m., ox, beef 

boire (bwa:r), buvant, bu, to 
drink 



336 



VOCABULARY 



bois (bwa), m., wood; bois de 
chauffage, firewood; bois de lit, 
bedstead 

Bois de Boulogne (bwadobuloji), 
a beautiful park belonging to 
Paris, and containing over 
2,000 acres 

boite (bwa:t), /., box; boite a 
savon, soap dish 

boiter (bwate), to limp 

boiteux (bwato), adj. (/., boi- 
teuse), lame 

bombarder (bobarde), to bom- 
bard 

bombe (bo:b), /., bomb 

bon (bo), adj. (/., bonne), good, 
kind; c'est bon, all right; a 
bon marche, cheap; tenir bon, 
hold firm; de bonne heure, 
early; a la bonne heurel good! 
well done ! all right ! une bonne 
fois, once for all; tout de bon, 
in earnest 

bonbon (bobo), m., bonbon, 
candy 

bonbonniere (bobonje:r), /., 
sweetmeat-box 

bonheur (bona:r), m., happiness, 
good luck, success 

bonjour (bo5u:r), m., good morn- 
ing, good day 

bonne (bon), /., maid; adj., see 
bon 

bonsoir (boswa:r), m,., good even- 
ing 

bonte (bote), /., goodness, kind- 
ness 

bord (bo:r), m., shore, bank, bor- 
der, edge; au bord de la mer, at 
the seashore 

border (borde), to border, edge; 
border une jupe, put braid on 
a dress skirt; border un lit, 
tuck in the bedclothes ; border 
la cote, sail along the coast 

bordure (bordy:r), /., edge, bor- 
der, rim, dress braid 

borgne (born), adj., one-eyed 

borne (born), /., landmark, boun- 
dary, curbstone, milestone 



borner (borne), to limit ; se borner, 

limit one's self 
bossu (bosy), adj., hunch-backed 
botte (bot),/., man's boot; bunch 

(of vegetables) ; thrust 
bottine (botin), /., lady's boot, 

high shoe 
bouche (bu$), /., mouth 
boucher (bu$e), m., butcher 
boucher (bu^e), to cork, stop up 
bouchon(bu5o), m., cork, stopper 
boucle (bukl), /., buckle; curl, 

ringlet 
boucler (bukle) to buckle, curl 
bouder (bude), to pout, sulk 
boue (bu), /., mud, dirt 
boueux (buo), adj. (/., boueuse), 

muddy, dirty 
bougeoir (bu3wa:r), m., short 

candlestick 
bougie (bu3i), /., candle, wax 

taper 
bouillir (bujirr), bouillant, bouilli, 

to boil 
bouilloire (bujwa:r),/., teakettle 
bouillon (bujo), m., broth 
boulanger (bulase), m., baker 
bouleau (bulo), m., birch, birch- 
tree 
boulevard (bulva:r), m., boule- 
vard, bulwark 
bouleverser (bulverse), to over- 
throw, upset, throw into con- 
fusion 
bouquet (buke), m., bouquet, 

nosegay; bunch, cluster 
bourdonner (burdone), to buzz, 

hum 
bourru (bury), adj., cross, gruff, 

peevish 
bourse (burs), /., purse, stock 

exchange, scholarship 
bousculer (buskyle), to jostle, 

hustle, put in disorder 
bout (bu), m., end, extremity 
boutique (butik), /., shop 
bouton (buto), m., button, stud; 

bouton d'or, butter-cup 
boutonniere (butonje:r), /., but- 
tonhole 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



33' 



bras (bra), ra., arm; bras dessus 

bras (lessons, arm in arm 
brave (bra:v), adj., brave, gal- 
lant, good, kind; brave homme, 
honest man; homme brave, 
courageous man 
bravement (bravma), adv., brave- 
ly, courageously 
braver (brave), to brave, defy 
briller (brije), to shine, glitter, 

sparkle 
brin (bre), m., blade, slip, sprig; 
un brin d'herbe, blade of grass 
brique (brik), /., brick 
brise (bri:z), /., breeze 
briser (brize), to break, dash to 

pieces, shatter 
broche (bro$), /., brooch 
broder (biode), to embroider, 

adorn 
broderie (brodri), /., embroidery 
bronze (br5:z), m., bronze 
brosse (bros), /., brush; brosse a 
cheveux, hair brush; — a j 
dents, tooth brush; — a habits, 
clothes brush 
brosser (brose), to brush 
brouette (bruet),/., wheelbarrow 
brouillard (bruja:r), m., fog, mist 
bruit (brqi), m., noise, clamor; 

quarrel; rumor, report 
bruler (bryle), to burn 
brume (brym), /., haze, mist 
brun (bra), adj. (f., brime), brown 
.brusque (brysk), adj., blunt, 

abrupt, brusque 
brusquement (bryskama), adv., 

bluntly, abruptly 
Bruxelles (brysel), /., Brussels 

(capital of Belgium) 
bruyere (bryje:r), /., heath, 

heather 
buffet (byfe), m., buffet, side- 
board 
buisson (buiso), m., bush, thicket 
bulletin (bylte), m., bulletin, an- 
nouncement, receipt, official 
report 
Biilow (bylo), Prussian general 
bureau (byro), m. (pi., bureaux), 



bureau, desk, office; bureau de 
poste, post-office; — de rert- 
seignements, bureau of informa- 
tion 

but (b}0, m-i mark, aim, end in 
view, purpose, design 

buvard (byva:r), m., blotting- 
pad; papier buvard, blotting 
paper 



ca (sa), demons, pron., that; 
com me ci comme ga, only so-so; 
adv., here; ga et Id, here and 
there 

cabinet (kabine), m., cabinet, 
office, study, closet 

cacher (ka$e), to hide, conceal 

cacheter (ka$te), to seal, seal up 

cadavre (kadaivr), m., corpse 

cadeau (kado), m. (pi., cadeaux), 
present, gift 

cadenas (kadnct), m., padlock 

cadre (ka:dr), m., frame 

caduc (kadyk), adj. (/., caduque), 
decrepit, broken-down 

cafe (kafe), m., coffee, coffee- 
house 

cafetiere (kaftjeir), /., coffee-pot 

cage (ka:s), /., cage, coop 

cahier (kaje), m., note-book 

caille (ka:j), /., quail 

caillou (kaju), m., pebble, flint 

caisse (ke:s), /., chest, desk, 
counter, treasmy 

caissier (kesje), m., cashier, 
treasurer 

calcul (kalkyl), m., calculation, 
arithmetic 

calcul er (kalkyle), calculate, con- 
trive, plan 

Calif ornie (kaliforni), /., Cali- 
fornia 

calme (kalm) m., stillness, calm; 
adj., calm, still 

calmer (kalme), to calm, quiet, 
soothe 

calomniateur (kalomnjatair), m. 
(J., calomniatrice), slanderer 



338 



VOCABULARY 



calorifere (kalorife:r), m., fur- 
nace; calorifere a vapeur, 
boiler 

Cambronne (kabron), a French 
general 

camp (ka), m., camp 

campagne (k&pan), /., country, 
field (of battle), campaign 

Canada (kanada), m., Canada 

canape (kanape), m., sofa, divan 

canard (kana:r), m., duck 

canif (kanif), m., penknife 

canne (kan), /., cane, walking- 
stick 

canner (kane), to cane (a chair); 
canne, cane-seated 

canon (kano), m., cannon 

canonnade (kanonad), /., can- 
nonading 

cantique (katik), m., hymn 

capable (kapabl), adj., able, fit, 
capable 

capitaine (kapiten), m., captain 

capitulation (kapitylasjo),/., cap- 
itulation, compromise, surren- 
der 

capucine (kapysin), /., nastur- 
tium 

car (ka:r), conj., for, because 

caractere (karakte:r), m., char- 
acter 

carafe (karaf), /., water-bottle 

careme (kare:m), m., Lent; faire 
le careme, keep Lent 

carotte (karat), /., carrot 

carre (kare), m., square 

carriere (karje:r), /., career, 
course; stone-quarry 

cas (ka), m., case; en cas que, in 
case that; en tout case, in any 
case, at any rate, anyway 

casquette (kasket), /., cap (of 
man or boy) 

casser (kase), to break; casse- 
noisette, nut-cracker 

casserole (kasrol), /., saucepan, 
stew pan 

cathedrale (katedral), /., cathe- 
dral 



catholique (katolik), n. and adj., 

Catholic 
cause (ko:z), /., cause, reason, 

case (law) 
causer (koze), to cause; chat 
cavalerie (kavalri), /., cavalry 
cavalier (kavalje), m., cavalier, 

horseman, cavalry-man 
cave (ka:v),/., cellar 
ce (s8), demons, pron. and adj., 

this one, this, that, it 
ceder (sede), to yield, give up, 

cede 
ceinture (setyrr),/., sash, girdle, 

belt 
celui (solqi), celle, ceux, celles, 

ceci, cela, demons, pron., this 

one, that one 
cendre (sa:dr),/., ashes, cinders; 

mercredi des cendres, Ash- 
Wednesday 
cent (s5), adj., hundred 
centaine (saten), /., a hundred 
centime (satim), m., centime 

(about a fifth of a cent) 
centre (sa:tr), m., center 
cependant (sapada), adv., in the 

meantime, meanwhile, how- 
ever, nevertheless, yet, still; 

cependant que, while, whilst 
cercle (serkl), m., circle, club; 

Cercle Frangais, French Club 
ceremonieux (seremonjo). adj. 

(/., ceremonieuse) , ceremonious 
cerise (sgri:z),/., cherry 
cerisier (sarizje), m., cherry-tree, 

cherry (wood) 
certainement (sertenma), adv., 

certainlj^ 
certifier (sertifje), to certify, 

guarantee 
Cesar (seza:r), m., Caesar 
cesser (sese), to cease, quit, stop 
c'est a dire (setadi:r), that is to 

say 
c'est cela (sesala), that is right, 

that's it 
chacun (Sake), indef. pron., each 

one 
chaine (§e:n),/., chain 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



339 



chair ($e:r), /., flesh 

chaire *($e:r), /., pulpit, desk (in 
churches), professorship 

chaise (Se:z), /., chair; chaise a 
bascule, rocking-chair; chaise 
cannee, cane-seated chair 

chaleur (salo:r), /., heat 

chambre (Sa:br), /., chamber, 
room ; chambre a coucher, sleep- 
ing room; — d'amis, guest- 
room; femme de — , chamber- 
maid; robe de — , dressing 
gown 

champ (S&), to., field 

Champs-Elysees (S<i:zerize), m. 
pi., " Elysian Fields," an 
avenue and the gardens sur- 
rounding it in Paris, extending 
from the Place de la Concorde 
one and one-quarter miles to 
the Place de l'Etoile 

changer (S&se), to change 

chanson ($as5), /., song, ballad 

chanter (Sate), to sing 

chaos (kao), in., chaos 

chapeau ($apo), to. (pi., cha- 
peaux) , hat ; chapeau de feutre, 
felt hat; — de paille, straw 
hat; — haut de forme, tall hat 

chapelier (Sapalje or Saplje). m., 
hatter, hat-maker 

chapelle (Sapel), /., chapel 

chapitre (Sapitr), m., chapter 

chaque (Sak), indef. adj., each, 
every 

charbon (Sarbo), in., coal; — de 
bois, charcoal; — de terre, pit- 
coal 

chardon (Sardo), m., thistle 

charger (Sarse), to charge, load, 
burden; se charger de, to take 
charge of, attend to 

Charles (Sari), in., Charles 

charmant (Sarma), adj., charm- 
ing 

charmer (Sarme), to charm, de- 
light; char me de, delighted 
with 

chasse ($as), /., hunt, hunting, 
chase 



chat (Sa), m., cat 

chataignier (Satepje), in., chest- 
nut-tree 

chateau (Sato), in. (pi., chateaux), 
castle, country-seat, palace 

chaud (So), adj.-, warm, hot; 
avoir chaud, to be warm 

chauffage ($013:3), m., fuel, fire- 
wood, heat; — a vajpeur, 
steam heat 

chauffer (Sofe), to heat, warm 

chaussure (Sosy:r), /., footwear 
(of all kinds) 

chef (Sef), ni., chief, leader, head 
— de rayon, floor-walker, hea< 
of department (in store) ; chej 
d'ceuvre, masterpiece 

chemin (Same), in., way, road; 
grand — , highway; — defer, 
railroad 

cheminee (Samine), /., chimney, 
fire-place, mantel-piece 

chene (Se:n), m., oak 

chenil ($ani) 3 to., dog's kennel 

chenille ($ani:j), /., caterpillar, 
chenille (cord) 

cheque (jek), in., check (bank) 

cher (Se:r), adj. and adv., dear, 
costly 

chercher (SerSe), to seek, look for, 
search 

cherir (Seri:r), to cherish 

cheval (Saval), in. (pi., chevaux), 
horse 

cheveu (Save), in., hair; les che- 
veux, the hair of the head 

chevreau (Savro), m., kid 

chevrefeuille (Sevrafa:j), to., hon- 
eysuckle 

chez (Se), prep., at the home of, 
at the business place (or store) 
of 

chicoree (Sikore), /., endive, 
chicory 

chien (Sje), m., dog 

chiffonnier (Sifonje), in., chif- 
fonier, bureau 

chiffre (Sifr), to., figure, number, 
total am 

Chine 



340 



VOCABULARY 



chocolat (Sokola), m., chocolate; 
baton de — , stick of chocolate 

chocolatiere ($okolatje:r), /., 
chocolate-pot 

choisir ($wazi:r), to choose 

choix (§wa), m., choice 

chose ($o:z), /., thing; quelque 
chose de bon, something good 

chou (§u), m., cabbage 

chute (§yt), /., fall, water-fall, 
downfall; Chute de Niagara, 
Niagara Falls; — du Rhin, 
Rhine Fall 

ciel (sjel), m. (pi., cieux), sky, 
Heaven 

cigale (sigal),/., grasshopper 

cigare (siga:r), m., cigar 

ci-inclus (siekly), adv., enclosed 

ci-joint (siswe), adv., accom- 
panying, annexed, enclosed 

cinq (se:k), adj., five 

cinquante (seka:t), adj., fifty 

cirage (sira:3), m., blacking (for 
boots) 

circonstance (sirkostais), /., cir- 
cumstance 

circuler (sirkyle), to circulate, 
spread; move on 

cire (si:r), /., wax, beeswax; cire 
a cacheter, sealing-wax 

cirque (sirk), m., circus 

ciseau (sizo), m., chisel 

ciseaux (sizo), m. pi., scissors 

citadin (sitade), m., citizen, one 
living in a city 

citoyen (sitwaje), m., fellow citi- 
zen 

citron (sitro), m., lemon 

civilite (sivilite), /., civility, 
courtesy 

clair (kle:r), m., light, clearness; 
il fait clair de lune, it is moon- 
light; adj., clear, light (tint of 
color); adv., clearly, plainly 

classe (kla:s), /., class, school- 
room; salle de classe, class- 
room; faire la classe, give in- 
struction; suivre la classe, 
receive instruction 

clef (kle), /., key, clef 



client (klija), m. (/., cliente), 
client, customer 

climat (klima), m., climate 

cocher (ko§e), m., coachman; 
porte cochere (ko$e:r), carriage 
entrance 

cceur (ka:r), m., heart, core; par 
cceur, by heart 

coiffeur (kwafa:r), m., hair- 
dresser, barber 

coin (kwe), m., corner 

col (kol), m., collar; faux col, 
detachable collar; col mordant 
(or droit), stand-up collar; col 
rabattu (or casse), turn-down 
collar 

colere (kolerr),/., anger, wrath; se 
mettre en — , fly into a passion 

colis (koli), in., package, parcel, 
piece of baggage 

colle (kol), /., paste, mucilage 

college (kole:5), m., college, 
grammar-school 

collegue (koleg), m., colleague 

collier (kolje), in., necklace, col- 
lar (for animals) 

colline (kolin), /., hill 

Cologne (kolon),/., Cologne (city 
in Prussia in Germany) 

colorer (kolore), to color, dj^e 

combattre (kobatr), to fight, 
combat 

combien (kobje), adj., how much, 
how many 

cbmble (ko:bl), m., heap, top, 
summit, height 

comedie (komedi), /., comedy 

commander (koma:de), to com- 
mand, order 

comme (kom), adv., as, like, how! 
comme de juste, exactly right; 
comme d 'habitude, as usual 

commencer (komase), to com- 
mence, begin 

comment (koma), adv., how? in 
what manner? comment! what ! 
indeed ! 

commis (komi), m., clerk 

commission (komisjo),/., errand, 
commission 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



341 



commode (komocl), adj., con- 
venient, commodious, com- 
fort-able; line commode, a 
commode, chest of drawers 

commodement (komodemfi), adv., 
conveniently, comfortably 

commun (komo). adj., common, 
usual, ordinary 

compagne (kopaji), /., compan- 
ion 

complet (kople), adj. (/., com- 
plete), complete, full 

compliment (koplima), m., com- 
pliment 

composer (kopoze), to compose, 
put together; temps compose, 
compound tense 

comprendre (kopra:dr), compren- 
ant, compris, to understand, 
include; tout compris, every- 
thing included 

compte (k5:t), m., account, 
count, calculation; a bon — , 
at fair price; au bout du — , 
on the whole, after all; solde 
de — , payment in full 

compter (k5te), to count, reckon 

comptoir (kotwa:r), m., counter 

comte (k5:t), m., count, earl 

concerner (koserne), to concern, 
relate to 

concert (kose:r), m., concert 

concevoir (kosovwarr), concevanf, 
congu, to conceive 

concierge (kosjerj), m. or/., jani- 
tor 

Concorde (kokord), /., concord, 
harmony; Place de la Con- 
corde, a noted public square 
in Paris 

concourir (kokuri :r) , to compete, 
concur, cooperate 

concours (k5ku:r), m., competi- 
tion, meeting, cooperation. 

conduire (kodqi:r), conduisant, 
conduit, to conduct, drive, lead 

confection (kofeksjo), /., ready- 
made clothing 

conference (koferars),/., lecture, 
conference 



confiance (kofjars), /., confidence, 
reliance 

confiseur (kofizo:r), m., confec- 
tioner 

confiture (kofityrr), /., preserve, 
jam 

confortable (kofortabl), adj., com- 
fortable 

connaissance (konesais), /., ac- 
quaintance, knowledge 

connaitre (kone:tr), connaissant, 
connu, to know (persons), be 
acquainted with 

conquete (koks:t), /., conquest, 
acquisition 

conseil (kose:j), m., counsel, ad- 
vice 

conseiller (koseje), to advise, 
counsel 

consentir (k5sati:r), to consent, 
agree 

consequence (koseka:s), /., con- 
sequence 

consequent (koseka), consequent ; 
par — , consequently 

conserver (koserve), to preserve, 
keep, maintain 

consideration (k.5sidercisjo), /., 
consideration, regard, esteem 

considerer (kosidere), to con- 
sider, estimate, think over 

consigne (kosiji), /., orders (mili- 
tary) ; parcel room (in railway 
station) 

consister (kosiste), to consist, be 
composed of 

consolation (kosolasjo),/., conso- 
lation, comfort 

conte (k5:t), m., story, tale; 
contes bleus, fairy tales 

contenir (k5tni:r), contenant, con- 
tenu, to contain, hold, con- 
trol 

content (kotci), adj., glad, con- 
tented 

contenter (kotat^), to content, 
satisfy; se concenter, to satisfy 
or indulge one's self 

contester (ko^este), to contest, 
dispute, contend 



342 



VOCABULARY 



contraindre (kotre:dr), contraign- 
ant, contraint, to constrain, 
compel 

contraire (k5tre:r), m. and adj., 
contrary; au contraire, on the 
contrary 

contre (k5:tr), prep., against 

contree (kotre), /., country, re- 
gion, district 

convenable (kovnabl), adj., suit- 
able, fit, proper, advisable 

convenir (kovni:r), convenant, 
convenu, (with avoir) to suit, 
please, become; (with etre) to 
agree, harmonize, concede, 
admit 

coquelicot (kokliko), m., poppy 

cordialite (kordjalite), /., cor- 
diality, heartiness 

cordonnier (kordonje), m., shoe- 
maker 

corps (ko:r), m., body; person, 
corpse, corps 

correspondence (korespoda:s),/., 
correspondence, transfer 

corridor (korido:r), m., hall, 
lobby 

corriger (kori3e), to correct, read 
(proof), punish 

corsage (korsa:5), m., tight-fit- 
ting waist 

Corse (kors), /., Corsica (French 
island in the Mediterranean) 

costume (kostym), m., costume, 
dress; costume de ville, street 
gown 

coton (koto), m., cotton 

cou (ku), m., neck 

couchant (ku^a), m., rest, decline; 
adj., setting, lying 

coucher (ku$e), to cause to lie 
down, put to bed; se coucher, 
go to bed 

coude (kud), m., elbow 

coudre (kudr), cousant, cousu, to 
sew 

couler (kule), to flow, run, glide; 
pour 

couleur (kulo:r), /., color 

coup (ku), m., blow, stroke; coup 



d'oeil, glance; coup d'etat, 

stroke of state policy 
couper (kupe), to cut 
cour (ku :r) , /., court (in all senses) 
courir (kuri:r), courant, couru, to 

run, hurry, move rapidly 
couronne (kuron), /., crown, 

wreath 
couronner (kurone), to crown 
courrier (kurje), m., mail, post, 

courier 
cours (ku:r), m., course (in all 

senses) ; salle de cours, lecture 

room; faire un cours, give a 

course of lectures 
course (kurs),/., race, excursion, 

journey (from one point to 

another without stopping) ; 

faire une — , do an errand; 

faire une — d cheval, take a 

ride on horseback 
court (ku:r), adj., short 
courtepointe (kurtopwe:t), /., 

quilt 
courtisan (kurtiza), m., courtier 
cousin (kuze), m. (/., cousine), 

cousin 
coussin (kuse), m., cushion 
couteau (kuto), m. (pi, cou- 

teaux), knife 
couter (kute), to cost 
coutume (kutym), /., custom, 

habit 
Qouturiere (kutyrjerr), /., dress- 
maker 
couvert (kuve:r), adj., covered, 

cloudy 
couverture (kuverty:r), /., wrap, 

blanket 
craie (kre), /., chalk, crayon 
craindre (kre:dr), craignant, cra- 

int, to fear, dread 
crainte (kre:t), /., fear; de 

crainte que, for fear that 
cramponner (krapone), to cramp, 
fasten with a cramp iron; se 
cramponner, cling, hold fast 
crapaud (krapo), m., toad 
cravate (kravat), /., neck-tie, 
cravat 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



343 



crayon (krejo), m., pencil 

creer (kree), to create 

creme (kre:m), /., cream; creme 
fouettee, whipped cream 

crete (kre:t), /., crest, summit 

cri (kri), m., cry 

crochet (kro$e), m., hook, crook 

croire (krwa:r), to believe, think; 
croire a, to believe in, expect 

cruche (kryS), /•> J U S> pitcher 

cuiller or cuillere (kqije:r), /., 
spoon; — d the, tea spoon 

cuir (kiri:r), m., leather 

cuirassier (kqirasje), m., cuiras- 
sier, a mounted soldier armed 
with a cuirass 

cuire (kqi:r), cuisant, cuit, to 
cook; bien cuit, well done 

cuisine (krjizin),/., kitchen, cook- 
ing; faire la cuisine, to cook 

cuivre (kiri:vr), m., copper; — 
jaune, brass 

cure-dent (kyrda), m., toothpick 

curiosite (kyrjozite), /., curiosity 

cuvette (kyvct), /., wash bowl, 
wash basin 



dahlia (dalja), m., dahlia 
daigner (dene), to deign, conde- 
scend 
dame (dam), /., lady 
Danemar(ck or k) (danmark), m., 

Denmark 
dangereux (d&sro), adj. (J., dan- 

gereuse), dangerous 
dans (da), prep., in 
danser (dase), to dance 
date (dat), /., date (time) 
datte (dat), /., date (fruit) 
Daudet (dode), Alphonse Dau- 
det, French humorist and 
novelist (1840-1897) 
davantage (davata:5), adv., more, 
longer; pas davantage, no 
more; ne restez pas — , do not 
stay longer 
de (da), prep., of, at, from, by, 
with 



de (de), m. } thimble, die 

debarquer (debarke), to disem- 
bark, land 

debarrasser (debarase), to clear, 
clear away, rid 

deboucher (dabu^e), to open, un- 
cork, flow into (rivers), come 
out on (sur) 

debout (dabu), adv., standing, 
upright 

debris (debri), m. pi., remains, 
wreck, rubbish, ruins 

debrouiller (debruje), to disen- 
tangle, unravel, clear up 

debut (deby), m., first appear- 
ance, beginning 

decembre (desa:br), m., Decem- 
ber 

decevoir (desavwa:r), decevant, 
degu, to deceive 

decharge (debars), /., discharge 

dechirer (desire), to tear 

decider (deside), to decide; fai 
decide de; je me suis decide a. 

declarer (deklare), to declare, 
make known, certify 

decorer (dekore), to decorate, 
trim 

decourager (dekurase), to dis- 
courage, dishearten 

decouvrir (dekuvrirr), decouvrant, 
decouvert, to discover, unravel 

dedans (dada), adv., within, in- 
side; en dedans, on the inside 
of 

defaut (defo), m., defect, lack, 
flaw, imperfection 

defendre (defa:dr), to forbid, 
defend; defendu, forbidden 

defense (defa:s), /., prohibition, 
defense 

defenseur (defaso:r), m., defen- 
der 

deference (deferens), /., defer- 
ence, regard, respect 

dehors (dao:r), adv., outside, out 
of doors 

deja. (desa), adv., already 

dejeuner (ck^ane), m., breakfast, 
lunch ; petit — , or premier — , 



344 



VOCABULARY 



breakfast; — a la fourchette, 
meat breakfast, or luncheon; 
second — , luncheon 

delicieux (delisjo), adj. (/., deli- 
cieuse), delightful, delicious 

demain (dame), adv., to-morrow 

demande (damaid), /., question, 
request, demand 

demander (dam&de), to ask, ask 
.for, beg, demand 

demenager (demena3e), to move 
out 

demeurer (demore), to live, re- 
side 

demi (dami), m., adj. and adv., 
half 

demoder (demode), to get out of 
style 

demoiselle (dsmwazel),/., young 
lady 

demolir (demoli:r), to demolish, 
destroy 

denoncer (denose), to denounce 

dent (da), /., tooth, notch, cog 

dent-de-lion (dadaljo), /., dande- 
lion 

dentelle (datel), /., lace 

depart (depa:r), m., departure 

depeche (depe:§), /., dispatch 

depecher (depe$e), to dispatch, 
hasten; se — , hurry up 

dependre (depa:dr), to depend 

depense (depa:s), /., expense 

depit (depi), m., spite, vexation; 
avoir du depit, to be vexed 

depuis (dapui), prep, and adv-., 
since, from 

depute (depyte), m., deputy, del- 
egate 

deranger (derive), to disturb, 
derange, discommode 

dernier (dernje), adj. (/., der- 
nier e), last 

deroute (derut), /., rout, defeat; 
en pleine — , in full flight 

derriere (derje:r), adv. and prep., 
behind; le — , the back 

des (de) — de + les 

desagreable (dezagreabl), adj., 
disagreeable 



desastre (dezastr), m., disaster 
descendre (desa:dr), to descend, 

go down, take or let down 
desir (de3i:r), m., desire, wish 
desirer (dezire), to desire, wish 
desole (de3ole), adj., very sorry, 

disconsolate. 
desorienter (dezorjate), to dis- 
turb, disconcert 
desordre (dezordr), m., disorder, 

confusion, uproar 
dessert (dese:r), m., dessert 
dessus (dasy), adv. and prep., on, 
above; un dessus de lit, a bed- 
spread 
detacher (deta$e), to detach, 

separate 
detail (deta:j), m., detail, trifle; 

vendre en — , sell at retail 
detailler (detaje), to relate mi- 
nutely, retail, detail 
detroit (detrwa), m., strait, chan- 
nel 
deuil (da:j), m., mourning; pren- 
dre le — , go into mourning 
deux (do), adj., two; tons les 

deux, both 

devant (dava), prep, and adv., 

before, in front of; le — , the 

front 

deviner (dsvine), to guess, divine 

devise (davi:z),/., motto, device, 

emblem 
devoiler (davwale), to unveil 
devoir (davwarr), devant, du, owe, 
ought; il devrait y avoir, there 
ought to be; le — , duty 
devouement (devuma), m., devo- 
tion 
devouer (devwe), to devote, ded- 
icate 
diable (dja:bl), m., devil 
diamant (djama), m., diamond 
dictionnaire (diksjoneir), m., dic- 
tionary 
Dieu (djo), m., God 
different (difera), adj., different 
difficile (difisil), -adj., difficult 
dimanche (dimd:$), m., Sunday 
dindon (dedo), m., turkey 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



345 



diner (dine), to dine; le diner, 

dinner 
dire (di:r), disant, dit (/., dite), to 

say, tell 
direction (direksjS), /., direction 
directrice (direktris), /., direct- 
ress 
disconvenir (diskovnir), to be in- 
convenient, unsuitable, dis- 
agree 
discours (disku:r), m.., discourse, 

speech, address 
distinguer (distege), to distin- 
guish; se — , to be distin- 
guished 
distribuer (distrib t e), to distrib- 
ute 
divers (dive:r), adj., diverse, 

various, sundry 
dix (dis), adj., ten 
dix-huit (dizuit), adj., eighteen 
dix-neuf (diznaf), adj., nineteen 
dix-sept (dizset), adj., seventeen 
docteur (dokta:r), m., doctor 
dominer (domine), to dominate, 

rule, govern 
dommage (doma:3), m., damage, 
harm; c'est — , it is a pity, too 
bad 
done (do), cenj., therefore, then; 
repondez — , now answer; 
qu'ai-je done fait? whatever 
have I done? 
dormer (done), to give, look out 

upon (window) 
dont (do), rel. pron., of whom, of 

which, whose 
dore (dore), adj., gilt, gilded 
dormir (dormi:r), to sleep 
dos (do), m., back 
douairiere (dwerje:r), /., dowa- 
ger 
douane (dwan),/., custom-house 
douanier (dwanje), m., custom- 
house officer 
doubler (duble), to double, line 
doublure ( dubly:r), /., lining 
douce (dus), adj. (see doux) 
douleur (dule:r),/., sorrow, grief, 
pain 



douloureux (duluro), adj. (/., 
douloureuse) , sorrowful, sad, 
painful 

douter (dute), to doubt; se 
douter, to suspect 

doux (du), adj., sweet, mild, gen- 
tle 

douze (du:z), adj., twelve 

drap (dra), m., sheet (for bed); 
du drap, broadcloth 

drapeau (drapo), m., flag, stand- 
ard, banner 

Dresde (drezd),/., Dresden (cap- 
ital of Saxony in Germany) 

droit (drwa), m., right, law; adj., 
and adv., right, straight; (of 
collars) stand-up; tout — , 
straight ahead 

droite (drwat), /., right hand; a 
droite, to the right 

drole (dro:l), adj., droll, funny 

du (dy) = de + le 

due (dyk), m., duke 

dur (dy:r), adj., hard 

durer (dyre), to last, continue 



eau (o), /., water; un verre d'eau, 
a glass of water; eau-de-vie, 
brandy 

ecarte (ekarte), p. p., apart, aside 

echantillon (e^atijo), m., sample, 
specimen 

echapper (e$ape), to escape 

echarpe (e^arp), /., scarf 

eclair (ekle:r), m., flash of light- 
ning; faire des eclairs, lighten 

eclairer (eklere), to give light, 
light up 

eclipse (eklips),/., eclipse, disap- 
pearance 

ecole (ekcl), /., school 

Ecosse (ekos), /., Scotland; la 
Nouvelle — , Nova Scotia 

ecouter (ekute), to listen 

ecrire (ekri:r), ecrivant, ecrit, to 
write, spell 

ecrivain (ekrive), m., writer, 
author 



346 



VOCABULARY 



ecureuil (ekyro:j), m., squirrel 

Edimbourg (edebu:r), m., Edin- 
burgh (capital of Scotland) 

edredon (edrado), m., eiderdown, 
eiderdown quilt 

education (edykasjo), /., educa- 
tion 

effacer (efase), to efface, obliter- 
ate, blot out 

effet (efe), m., effect; en effet, in 
fact 

effrayer (efreje), to frighten 

effrayable (efrwajabl), adj., 
frightful, dreadful, awful ■ 

egarer (egare), to lead astray, 
mislay; s' — , to go astray, 
wander, be lost 

eglise (egli:z),/., church 

egorger (egor3e), to throttle, 

, slaughter 

Egypte (e3ipt), /., Egypt 

elancer (elase), to launch; s' — , 
to spring forth, start out 

electricite (elektrisite), /., elec- 
tricity 

elegant (elega), adj., elegant, ex- 
quisite, stylish 

eleve (elev), m. or/., pupil 

elever (elve), to bring up, rear, 
educate, elevate 

elle (el), pers. pron., she, it 

eloigne (elwane), p. p., remote, 
removed 

embaumer (abome), to perfume, 
scent, embalm 

embrasser (abrase), to kiss, em- 
brace 

emmenager (amena3e), to move; 
s' — , to move in 

emmener (amne), to lead away, 
take away 

emparer (Spare), to fortify; 
s'emparer de, to seize, take 
possession of 

empecher (ape$e), to hinder, pre- 
vent 

empereur (apra:r), m., emperor 

emplette (aplet), /., purchase 

employe (aplwaje), m., clerk, 
person employed, employee 



employer (aplwaje), to employ, 

use 
emporter (aporte), to carry away 
empresse (aprese), adj., active, 

eager, earnest 
emprunt (apro), m., loan 
emprunter (aprote), to borrow 
en (a), pers. pron., of him, of her, 

of it, some 
en (a), adv., away, thence, from 

there 
en (a), prep., in, into; en bas, 

down stairs; en haul, up 

stairs; en avance, ahead of 

time; en retard, behind hand; 

en route, on the way; en train 

de, in the act of ; en ville, in the 

city, down town 
enchanter (a^ate), to enchant, 

delight, fascinate 
encore (5ko:r), adv., yet, still, 

again 
encre (a:kr),/., ink 
encrier (akrie), m., inkstand 
endormir (adormi:r), to put to 

sleep; s' endormir, fall asleep 
enfance (5fa:s),/., infancy, child- 
hood 
enfant (afa), m. or/., child 
enfin (afe), adv., finally, at last 
enf oncer (afose), to sink, plunge, 

force in 
enigme (enigm), /., enigma 
enjoindre (&5we:dr), enjoignant, 

enjoint, to enjoin, order, direct 
enlever (alve), to carry away, 

run away with, rob 
ennemi (enmi), m., enemy, foe; 

adj., unfriendly, hostile 
ennui (anqi), m., tediousness; 

quel ennui! what a nuisance, 

what a bore! 
enoncer (enose), to announce 
enregistrer (5r3ist're), to register, 

record, check (baggage) 
enseigne (fisen), /., sign, mark, 

streamer 
enseigner (asene), to teach, in- 

sruct 
ensemble (asa:bl), adv., together 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



347 



ensoleile (asoleje), adj., sunny 

ensuite (astpt), adv., afterward, 
then 

entamer (atame), to begin, enter 
on, broach 

entendre (at5:dr), to hear; bien 
entendu, of course 

entier (atje), adj., entire, whole, 
total 

entierement (citjerma), adv., en- 
tirely 

entourer (ature), to surround, 
enclose 

entre (a:tra, or a:tr), prep., be- 
tween, among 

entree (dtre), /., entrance, first 
course, side dish 

entremeler (citramele), to inter- 
mingle; s' — , meddle 

entremets (atrame), m., a dainty 
dish (pudding, ices, etc.), 
served at table between the 
principal courses 

entrepot (atrapo), m., bonded 
warehouse; en — -, in bond 

entrer (atre), to enter, come in; 
Entrez! Come in! 

enveloppe (avbp), /., envelope, 
wrapper 

envelopper (avbpe), to envelop, 
wrap up 

envie (avi), /., envy, desire, in- 
clination 

envieux (ctvjo), adj. (/., envieuse), 
envious, jealous 

environ (aviro), adv., about, 
nearly, thereabouts 

s'envoler (a vole), to fly away 

envoyer (avwaje), to send, for- 
ward, throw 

epais (epe), adj. (/., epaisse), 
thick 

epargner (eparjie), to save, spare; 
caisse d'epargne, savings-bank 

epaule (epo:l),/., shoulder 

epee (epe), /., sword 

epingle (epe:gl), /., pin; — d 
cheveux, hairpin 

epitre (epitr), /., epistle, letter 

eponge (ep5:3),/., sponge 



epuiser (epqize), to exhaust, use 
up, tire out 

equerre (eke:r), /., square 

equestre (ekestr), adj., eques- 
trian 

equiper (ekipe), to equip, fit out 

erable (erabl), m., maple 

escalader (eskalade), to scale, 
climb 

escalier (eskalje), m., staircase, 
stairs 

escorte (eskort),/., escort 

Espagne (espaji), /., Spain 

espagnol (espajiol), adj., Spanish; 
un — , a Spaniard 

espece (espes), /., kind, species, 
sort 

esperer (espere), to hope, expect 

espoir (espwa:r), m., hope, expec- 
tancy; avoir V espoir de, be in 
hope of 

esprit (cspri), m., mind, intellect, 
intelligence, wit, spirit 

essaim (ese), m., swarm, host 

essayage (esejais), m., trial, try- 
ing on (a garment) 

essayer (eseje), to try, try on r 
attempt 

essuyer (esqije), to wipe, wipe 
dry; endure, go through 

estime (estim), /., esteem, re- 
gard 

et (e), conj., and 

etage (eta:s), m., story (of a 
house), floor 

etang (eta), m., pond 

etant (eta), pres. part, of etre 

Etats Unis (etazyni), m. pi., les 
— , the United States 

ete (ete), m., summer 

ete (ete), p. p. of etre 

etendard (etada:r), m., standard, 
banner, colors 

etendue (etady), /., extent, ex- 
panse 

etiquette (etiket), /., ticket. 
label; etiquette 

etoffe (etof), /., stuff, cloth, ma- 
terial 

etoile (etwal), /., star 



348 



VOCABULARY 



etouffer (etufe), stifle, suffocate, 
choke 

etrange (etra:5), adj., strange, 
odd, queer 

etranger (etrd3e), m. (/. etran- 
ger e), foreigner, stranger; a 
V etranger, abroad 

etre (e:tr), to be 

etroit (etrwa), adj., narrow, 
strait; a V etroit, narrowly 

etude (etyd), /., study 

etudiant (etydja), m. (/., etu- 
diante), student 

etudier (etydje), to study, prac- 
tice (music) 

Europe (or op), /., Europe 

eveiller (eveje), to awaken, ex- 
cite; s'- — , to wake up, be 
stirred up 

eventail (evata:j), m., fan 

evidemment (evidama), adv., 
evidently 

evier (evje), m., sink, drain 

eviter (evite), to avoid, evade, 
shun 

examen (egzame) ; m., examina- 
tion, investigation 

examiner (egzamine), to examine 

excepte (eksepte), prep., except 

excuser (ekskyze), to excuse, 
pardon 

executer (egzekyte), to execute 

exiger (egzi3e), to exact, require, 
demand 

experience (eksperja:s), /., expe- 
rience, trial, experiment 

expirer (ekspire), to expire 

explication (eksplikasjo), /., ex- 
planation 

expliquer (eksplike), to explain 

expres (ekspre), adj., positive, 
plain, clear; adv., purposely, 
expressly 

express (ekspres), m., express, 
express train 

expression (ekspres jo),/., expres- 
sion 

exprimer (eksprime), to express, 
declare 



exquis (ekski), adj. (/., exquise), 
exquisite 

exterieur (eksterjo:r), adj., ex- 
terior, external, outside, for- 
eign 



fable (fa:bl), /., fable, tale 
facade (fasad), /., facade, front 

elevation 
face (fas), /., face; en face de, 

opposite, in presence of 
facher (fa$e), to offend; se — , 

get angry, take offense 
facile (fasil), adj., easy 
facon (faso), /., style, fashion, 

manner 
facteur (fakta:r), m., postman, 

railway porter 
faible (fe:bl), adj., weak, feeble 
faim (fe),/., hunger; avoir f aim, 

to be hungry 
faire (fe:r), faisant, fait, to make, 

do; (of weather), to be; — la 

faction, to go on guard 
failoir (falwa:r), p. p., fallu, im- 

pers. verb, to be necessary 
fameux (famo), adj. (f.,fameuse), 

famous 
familier (familje), adj., familiar, 

intimate, family 
famille (fami:j), /., family 
farine (farin), /., flour 
fatiguer (fatige), to fatigue, tire 
fauteuil (fota:j), m., armchair, 

official chair 
favori (favori), adj. (/., favorite), 

favorite 
fee (fe), /., fairy 
felicitation (felisitasjo), /., con- 
gratulation 
femme (fam), /., woman, wife 
fenetre (fane:tr), /., window 
fer (fe:r), m., iron; — a repasser, 

flatiron 
ferme (ferm), /., farm 
ferme (ferm), adj., firm, steady, 

fast 
fermer (ferme), to close 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



349 



feroce (feros), adj., ferocious, 

fierce 
fete (fe:t), /., holiday, feast, 

birthday 
feter (fete), to celebrate, keep a 

holiday, feast 
feu (fo), m., fire 
feuillage (fejais), m., foliage 
feuille (fa:j),/., leaf 
feutre (fo:tr), m., felt 
fevrier (fevrie), m., February 
ficeler (fisle), to tie up with 

string 
ficelle (fisel), /., string (to tie 

small bundles) 
fidele (fidel), adj., faithful, loyal, 

true 
fier (fje:r), adj., proud, haughty 
figue (fig), /., fig 
figure (figy:r), /., face, figure 
fil (fil), m., thread 
fille (fi:j), /., girl, daughter 
fils (fis), m., son 
fin (fe), /., end; a la fin, finally; 

a fin de, in order to; a fin que, 

in order that 
fin (fe), adj., fine 
finir (fini:r), finish, cease 
fleur (fle:r), /., flower 
fleuve (fla:v), m., river (flowing 

into the sea) 
Florence (flora :s), /., Florence 

(Italian city) 
Florida (florid),/., Florida 
flute (flyt), /., flute 
foi (fwa), /., faith 
foie (fwa), m., liver 
fois (fwa), /., time; une fois, 

once; a la fois, at the same time 
fonce (fose), p. p., deep, dark (of 

colors); bleu fonce, deep or 

dark blue 
fonction (foksjo), /., function, 

action 
fontaine (foten), /., fountain 
force (fors), /., force, strength, 

power 
forcer (forse), to force, compel 
forestier (forestje), adj., forest, 

pertaining to forests 



foret (fore), /., forest 

former (forme), to form, shape, 
create 

fort (fo:r), adj., strong, able, diffi- 
cult 

fou (fu), adj. (in liaison, fol; /., 
folle), insane, crazy; foolish, 
silly 

fougere (fupe.'r), /., fern 

fouUler (fuje), to excavate, dig, 
search, rummage 

foulard (fula:r), m., silk hand- 
kerchief, foulard 

foule (ful), /., crowd 

four (fu:r), w., oven 

fourchette(fur$et),/.,fork(table) 

fourgon (furgo), m., poker, oven- 
fork 

fourmi (fur mi), /., ant 

fourneau (furno), m., cookstove, 
range 

fournir (furni:r), to furnish 

frais (fre), m. pi., expenses 

frais (fre), adj. (J.,fraiche), fresh, 
cool, recent 

fraise (fre:z),/., strawberry 

framboise (frabwa:z), /., rasp- 
berry 

franc (fra), m., franc (equivalent 
to about 20 cents) 

franc (fra), adj. (/., franche), 
frank, open 

francais (frase), m. and adj., 
French 

France (fra:s),/., France 

frapper (frape), to strike, beat, 
stamp 

frere (fre:r), m., brother 

frisson (friso), m., shivering, 
chill, thrill 

froid (frwa), m. and adj., cold- 
ness, cold; f aire froid, be cold 
(of weather); avoir froid, be 
cold (of persons) 

fromage (froma:3), m., cheese 

froncer (frose), to contract; — ■ 
les sourcils, knit the brow 

frotter (frote), to rub, polish 

fruit (frqi), m., fruit 



350 



VOCABULARY 



fruitier (frqitje), adj. (/., frui- 
tiere), fruit, fruit-bearing 

funeraire (fynere:r), adj., funeral, 
funereal 



G 



gant (ga), m., glove 

ganter (gate), to glove, fit with 
gloves 

gantier (gatje), to., glover 

garcon (garso), to., boy, waiter, 
bachelor 

garder (garde), to guard, keep, 
protect, watch 

garde-robe (gardarob), /., ward- 
robe 

gare (ga:r), /-., railway station 

garnir (garni :r), to trim, garnish, 
furnish 

garniture (garnity:r), /., trim- 
ming, furniture 

gateau (goto), to. (pi., gateaux), 
cake 

gauche (go: 5), /., left hand; a 
gauche, to the left 

gaz (ga:z), to., gas 

gazon (gazo), to., turf, grass 

geler (gale), to freeze 

general general), to. and adj., 
(pi., generaux), general 

Genes (3e:n),/., Genoa (port and 
city in Italy) 

Geneve (39ne:v),/., Geneva (city 
in Switzerland) 

genie (3eni), to., genius, talent __ 

gens (3a), to. or/, pi., people 

geographie (3eografi), /., geogra- 
phy 

geometrie (3eometri), /., geom- 
etry 

geranium (3eranjom), to., ge- 
ranium 

geste (5est), to., gesture 

gibier (sibje), to., game (hunting) 

gigot (3igo), to. (de moutori), leg 
of mutton 

gilet (3ile), to., waistcoat, vest 

glace (glas), /., ice, ice cream; 
plate-glass, mirror 



Glascow (glasko) or Glasgow 
(glazgo), to., Glasgow (city in 
Scotland) 

glissant (glisa), adj., slippery 

glisser (glise), to slip, slide, glide 

gloire (glwa:r),/., glory 

gout (gu), to., taste 

gouter (gute), to taste, relish, 
enjoy, like 

gouverneur (guvernorr), to., gov- 
ernor, tutor, manager 

grace (gra:s), /., grace, charm; 
mercy, pardon 

gracieux (grasjo), adj. (/., gra- 
cieuse), graceful, courteous, 
gracious, kind 

grade (grad), to., grade, rank 

grammaire (grame:r), /., gram- 
mar 

grand (gra), adj., great, large, 
grand, tall 

grand'mere (grams :r), /., grand- 
mother 

grandpere (grape :r), to., grand- 
father 

grange (gra 13),/., barn 

grasseyer (graseje), to roll one's 
r's 

graver (grave), to engrave 

gravir (gravi:r), to climb, clam- 
ber up 

gravure (gravy :r), /., engraving, 
cut, fashion plate 

grec (grek), adj. (/., grecque), 
Greek, Grecian 

Grece (gre:s), /., Greece 

grenat (grana), to., garnet 

grenier (granje), to., garret; 
granary 

grenouille (gr9nu:j), /., frog 

grillon (grijo), m., cricket 

grimper (grepe), to climb 

gris (gri), adj., gray 

gros (gro), adj. (/., grosse), large, 
big, thick set, stout, coarse, 
rough 

gros (gro), to., gross, bulk, mass; 
en gros, wholesale, as a whole 

groseille (graze :j), /., groseille a 
grappes, red currant, white 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



351 



currant; groseille a maquereau, 
groseille verte, gooseberry 

Grouchy (gru$i), French marshal 
(1766-1847) 

guepe (ge:p),/., wasp 

gueridon (gerido), m., little round 
table, center table, stand 

guerir (geri:r), to cure, heal 

guerison (gerizo), /., cure, heal- 
ing, recovery 

guerre (ge:r), /., war, strife 

guetre (ge:tr),/., gaiter 

gui (gi), m., mistletoe 

guichet (gi^e), m., wicket, grat- 
ing, small window (of ticket 
office) 

guide (gid), m., guide, guide- 
book 

guillotine (gijotin), /., guillotine 
(machine used in France for 
beheading condemned per- 
sons) 

guillotiner (gijotine), to guillo- 
tine 

guirlande (girla:d), /., garland, 
wreath 



(Aspirate h is indicated by h, but 
should not be pronounced) 

habillement(abijma), m., clothes, 

clothing 
habiller (abije), to dress 
habit (abi), m., coat, dress coat 
habiter (abite), to inhabit, live in 
habitude (abityd),/., habit, cus- 
tom 
haie (he), /., hedge; La Haie 
Sainte, a fortified farmhouse 
on the battlefield of Waterloo 
haine (he:n),/., hatred 
hasard (haza:r), m., chance, haz- 
ard; par hasard, by chance 
haut (ho), adj., high, tall ; haughty 
hauteur (hoto:r), /., height, alti- 
tude, hill; haughtiness 
La Haye (he), /., The Hague 
(capital of Holland) 



helas (ela:s), interj., alas! 
herbe (erb),/., grass, herb; mau- 

vaise herbe, weed 
heroique (heroik), adj., heroic 
heros (hero), m., hero 
heure (o:r), /., hour, time, 

o'clock; de bonne — ■, early; 

a la bonne — , all right, good! 

tout a V heure, presently, just 

now 
heureux (oro), adj. (/., heureuse), 

happy 
hier (je:r), adv., yesterday 
histoire (istwarr), /., history, 

story 
hiver (ive:r), m., winter 
hollandais (holade), adj., Dutch 
Hollande (hola:d),/., Holland 
hommage (oma:3), m., homage, 

respect 
homme (om), m., man; homme 

d'etat, statesman 
honneur (ono:r), m., honor 
honte (h5:t), /., shame, disgrace 
horreur (oro:r), /., horror, dread 
hortensia (ortasja), m., hydran- 
gea 
hote (o:t), m., host, landlord, 

guest; table d'hote, full course 

meal 
hotel (otel), m., town mansion, 

large house, hotel; — de ville, 

city hall 
hotellerie (otelri), /., inn, hotel, 

hostelry 
Hougoumont (ugumo), a chateau 

on the battlefield of Waterloo 
huit (hiri), adj., eight 
humble (o:bl), adj., humble, 

lowly, meek 



I 



ici (isi), adv., here; par id, this 
way 

idee (ide), /., idea 

il (il), pers. pron., he, it; il y a, 
there is, there are; il n'y a pas 
de quoi, not at all, don't men- 
tion it 



352 



VOCABULARY 



illuminer (ilymine), to illumi- 
nate, light up 

image (ima:3), /., image, like- 
ness, picture 

imaginer (ima3ine), to imagine 

immediatement (imedjatma), 
adv., immediately 

imperial (eperjal), /., roof, deck 
(of street car), outside (of 
coach) 

impertinent (epertina), adj., im- 
pertinent, saucy 

important (eporta), adj., impor- 
tant 

imposant (epoza), adj., imposing, 
impressive 

impur (epy:r), adj., impure 

inactif (inaktif), adj.' (/., inac- 
tive), inactive, out of employ- 
ment 

inalterable (inalterabl), adj., un- 
alterable, unchangeable 

inconstant (ekosta), adj., incon- 
stant, changeable 

indecis (edesi), undecided, doubt- 
ful 

Inde (e:d),/., India 

Indes Occidentales (e:dzoksi- 
datal), West Indies 

Indes Orientales (e:dzcrjatal), 
East Indies 

indicateur (edikata:r), m., rail- 
way guide, time table, indi- 
cator 

indiquer (edike), to indicate, 
show, point out 

indispensable (edispasabl), adj'., 
indispensable 

infanterie (efatri), /., infantry 

infatigable (efatigabl), adj., inde- 
fatigable, tireless 

infini (efini), adj., infinite, bound- 
less, endless 

inscrire (eskri:r), inscrivant, in- 
scrit, to inscribe, register 

insecte (esekt), m., insect 

insignifiant (esipifja), adj., insig- 
nificant 

installer (estale), to install, 
establish 



instant (esta), m., instant, mo- 
ment 

intention (etasjo), /., intention, 
purpose 

interessant (eteresa), adj., inter- 
esting 

interesser (eterese), to interest 

interet (etere), m., interest 

interieur (eterja:r), m., intericr, 
inside 

interpellation (eterpelctsjo), /., 
interpellation, summons 

interroger (eterose), to question, 
examine 

interrupteur (eterypta:r), m. and 
adj., interrupter, interrupting 

intervenir (etervsni:r), to inter- 
vene, interfere, happen 

intime (etim), adj., intimate, 
close 

inutile (inytil), useless, fruitless 

invite (evite), p. p. used as noun, 
guest 

inviter (evite), to invite 

Italie (itali), /., Italy 

italien (italje), adj. (/., italienne), 
Italian 



jacinthe (3ase:t), /., hyacinth 
Jacques (sak), m., James 
jamais (3ame), adj., never, ever; 

a jamais, forever 
Janvier (3avje), m., January 
Japon (3apo), m., Japan 
japonais (sapone), adj., Japanese 
jardin (3arde), m., garden 
jaune (30 :n), adj., yellow 
je (3a), pers. pron., I 
Jean (3a), John 
Jeanne (3an), Jane, Jennie, Joan; 

Jeanne d' Arc, Joan of Arc 
jeter (3ate), to throw, cast 
jeudi (30di), m., Thursday 
jeune (3an), adj., young 
joie (3wa), /., joy; feu de joie, 

bonfire 
joli (3oli), adj., pretty, neat, 

pleasing 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



353 



jonction (3oksjo), /., junction 

jouer (3we), to play 

jouet (3W8), m., plaything, toy 

jour (3u:r), m., day, daylight, 
light 

journal (surnal), m. (pi., jour- 
naux), newspaper, journal 

journee (sume), /., day (dura- 
tion of); toute la journee, all 
day long 

joyeux (swaje), adj. (/., joyeuse), 
joyful, merry 

juif "(sqif), adj. (/., juive), Jew, 
Jewish 

juillet (3qje, or s^ije), m., July 

juin (3118, or sqe), m., June 

jupe (syp), /., dress skirt 

jusque (sysk), prep., as far as, up 
to; jusqu'd, as far as (and in- 
cluding) ; jus qu'd ce que, until, 
till 

juste (syst), adv., just, exactly, 
accurately; com/me de juste, 
rightly enough, as it should 
be; tout juste, only just 
enough 

justement (3ystama), adv., pre- 
cisely, exactly 



Kellermann (kelermcm), a French 
general under Napoleon (1770- 
1835) 



la (la), /. of def. art., the 

la (la), pers. pron. (Jem.), her, it 

la (la), adv., there 

la-bas (laba), adv., down there, 

over there, yonder 
laboratoire (laboratwa:r), m., 

laboratory 
laborieux (laborjo), adj. (J., 
laborieuse), laborious, hard- 
working- 
lac (lak), m., lake 
lacet (lase), m., shoestring 
La Fayette (lafajet), a distin- 



guished French general and 
statesman (1757-1834). Dear 
to Americans because of his 
aid in our struggle for indepen- 
dence 

laine (len), /., wool, wool goods 

laisser (lese), to let, leave 

lait (le), m., milk 

laitue (lety), /., lettuce 

lame (lam), /., blade (of knife) 

lampe (la:p), /., lamp 

langue (la:g), /., tongue, lan- 
guage 

lapin (tape), m., rabbit 

large (lai'5), adj., broad, wide 

latin (late), m., Latin 

latitude (latityd), /., latitude 

lavabo (lavabo), m., washstand 

laver (lave), to wash 

le (la), def. art., the 

le (la), pers. pron. (mas.), him, it 

lecon (laso), /., lesson 

lecture (lekty:r), /., reading 

legume (legym), m., vegetable 

lendemain (ladme), m., morrow, 
day after 

lettre (letr), /., letter 

leur (lo:r), pers. pron., to them; 
poss. adj., their; poss. pron., 
theirs 

lever (lave), to raise, lift; se 
lever, to rise 

liberte (liberte), /., liberty, free- 
dom 

libre (libr), adj., free 

librement (libramd), adv., freely 

lierre (lje:r), m., ivy 

lieu (Ijo), m. (pi., lieux), place; 
au lieu de, in place of, instead 
of; avoir lieu, to take place 

lieutenant (ljotna), m., lieuten- 
ant 

ligne (lip), /., line 

lilas (lila), m., lilac 

limbe (le:b), m., quadrant, halo, 
border, limbo 

linge (le:5), m., linen (clothes); 
du linge blanc, clean linen; — 
de corps, underwear; — de 
maison, sheets, towels, etc. 



354 



VOCABULARY 



lingerie (le3ri), /., linen goods, 

linen trade 
liqueur (lika:r), /., liquor 
lire (li:r), lisant, lu, to read 
lis (lis),.m., lily; fleur de lis (li), 

emblem of monarchy in France 
lit (li), m., bed 
livre (li:vr), m., book 
livrer (livre), to deliver, give up; 

se livrer, to surrender 
Lobau, Comte de, Count of 

Lobau, French commander 

under Napoleon 
loi (lwa), /., law 
loin (lwe), adv., far 
Londres (lo:dr), m., London 
long (15), adj. (/., longue), long 
longtemps (lota), adv., long, a 

long while 
lorgnette (lornet), /., opera glass 
lorgnon (lorjio), m., eye-glasses 
Lorraine (lore:n), /., Lorraine 

(part of Germany, formerly of 

France) 
lorsque (lorsko), conj., when 
louer (lwe), to hire, rent 
louer (lwe), to praise 
Louis Philippe (lwifilip), King of 

France 1830-1848 
lourd (lu:r), adj., heavy 
loyal (iwajal), adj. {pi., loyaux), 

loyal 
lui (li{i), pers. pron., to him, to 

her, to it; he, him, it 
lumiere (lymje:r), /., light 
lundi (lodi), m., Monday 
lune (lyn), /., moon 
lunette (lynet),/., lens, telescope; 

pi., spectacles 
lustre (lystr), m., chandelier 
Lyon (ljo), m., Lyons (city in 

France) 



M 



ma (ma), poss.adj. (Jem.), my 
machine (ma$in), /., machine; 

— a coudre, sewing-machine; 

— a ecrire, typewriter 
madame (madam), /., Mrs., 



madam; madame votre mere, 
your mother 

Madelaine (madlen), /., Magda- 
lene (church in Paris) 

mademoiselle (madmwazel), 
Miss 

magasin (magaze), m., store, 
shop; — de nouveautes, dry 
goods store 

magnifique (majiifik), adj., mag- 
nificent 

mai (me), m., May 

maigre (me:gr), adj., thin, lean, 
meager 

maigrir (megri:r), to grow thin 

main (me), /., hand 

maintenant (metna), adv., now 

mais (me), conj., but 

mais (mais), m., maize, Indian 
corn 

maison (mezo), /., house 

Maitland, a British rear-admiral 
(1777-1839) 

majeste (maseste), /., majesty 

mal (mal), m. {pi., maux), pain, 
evil 

mal (mal), adv., badly, wrong; 
n'etre pas mal, not to be bad 
looking 

malade (malad), adj., sick, ill 

male (ma:l), m. and adj., male, 
manly 

maigre (maigre), prep., in spite 
of, notwithstanding 

'malheur (mala:r), m., misfor- 
tune, bad luck, grief 

malheureusement (malorozma), 
adv., unfortunately 

malheureux (male-ro), adj. (/., 
malheureuse) , unfortunate, un- 
happy 

malle (mal), /., trunk, box 

Maman (mama), Mamma 

manche (ma:$), /., sleeve; La 
Manche, the English Channel 

manchette (ma Set), /., cuff 

manchon (ma^o), m., muff 

manger (ma3e), to eat 

maniere (manje:r), /., manner, 
way 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



355 



manquer (make), to fail, miss, 

cut (a class) 
manteau (mfito), m. (pi., man- 

teaux), cloak, mantle 
marchand (mar$a), m., merchant 
marcher (mar$e), to walk, march, 

go 
mardi (mardi), m., Tuesday 
marechal (mare$al), m. (pi., 

marecha ux) , marshal 
marguerite (margarit), /., daisy 
mari (mari), m., husband 
Marie (mari), /., Mary 
Marie Antoinette (mariatwanet), 
wife of Louis XVI and Queen 
of France at the time of the 
Revolution 
marque (mark), /., mark, badge, 

sign 
marquer (marke), to mark, indi- 
cate 
marquis (marki), m., marquis, 

marquess 
marquise (marki :z), /., mar- 
chioness 
mars (mars), m., March 
Marseillaise (marseje:z), /., the 
Marseillaise (national song of 
France) 
Marseille (marse: j),/. Marseilles 

(southern part of France) 
masculin (maskyle), adj., mas- 
culine 
masser (mase), to mass (troops) 
matelas (matla), m., mattress 
mathematique (matematik) /., 

mathematics 
matin (mate), m., morning 
matinee (matine), /., forenoon 
mauvais (move), adj. (/., mau- 
vaise), bad; mauvaise herbe, 
weed 
me (ma), pers. pron., me 
medecin (medse), m., physician 
medecine (medsin), /., medicine 
Mediterranee (medicerane), /., 

Mediterranean Sea 
melon (malo), m., melon 
membre (ma:br), m., member 
meme (mem), adj., same; adv., 



even; de meme que, like, as 
well as 

memoire (memwa:r),/., memory 

menacer (manase), to threaten, 
menace 

menage (mena:5), m., house- 
keeping, housework 

mener (mane), to lead, conduct 

mer (me:r), /., sea 

mercerie (mersari), /., notions 

merci (mersi), m., thanks; /., 
mercy 

merer edi (merkradi), m., Wed- 
nesday 

mere (me:r), /., mother 

merite (merit), m., merit, worth 

merveille (merve:j), /., wonder, 
marvel; a merveille, admir- 
ably, wonderfully well 

merveilleux (mervejo), adj., (/., 
merveilleuse) , wonderful, mar- 
velous 

mesure (mazy:r), /., measure; 
vetements sw* — , clothing made 
to order 

mesurer (mazyre), to measure 

metropolitan! (metropolite) m., 
subway, underground railway 

mettre (metr), mettant, mis, to 
place, put, arrange, set (table) 

meuble (mabl), m., piece of fur- 
niture; des meubles, furniture 

midi (midi), m., noon 

miel (mjel), honey 

mieux (mjo), adv., better; W 
mieux, best; de son mieux, the 
best he can 

Milan (mila), Milan (city in 
northern Italy) 

Milhaud (milo), French com- 
mander under Napoleon 

milieu (miljo), m., middle; au 
milieu de, in the midst of; au 
beau milieu, in the very center 

militaire (milite:r), m. and adj., 
soldier, military 

mille (mil), adj., thousand 

mince (me:s), adj., thin, slender 

ministre (ministr), m., minister 

minuit (minui), m., midnight 



356 



VOCABULARY 



minute (minyt), /., minute 
miroir (mirwa:r), m., mirror, 

looking-glass 
mobile (mobil), adj., movable, 

variable 
mode (mod), /., fashion; a la 
mode, in style; passe de mode, 
out of style 
modele (model), m., model, pat- 
tern, design 
moderne (modern), adj., modern 
modeste (modest), adj., modest, 

unassuming 
modiste (modiste), m. or/., milli- 
ner 
moi (mwa), pers. pron., I, me 
moineau (mwano), m., sparrow 
moins (mwe), adv., less; lemoins, 
the least ; a moins de, a — que, 
unless 
mois (mwa), m., month 
moisson (mwaso),/., harvest 
molle (mol), adj., fern, of mou 
moment (moma), m., moment; 

en ce moment, just now 
mon (mo), poss. adj. mas., my 
monarque (monark), m., mon- 
arch 
mondain (mode), m., worldling, 

one devoted to society 
monde (mo:d), m., world, so- 
ciety; au monde, in the world; 
tout le monde, everybody 
monseigneur (mosenja:r), m. {pi., 
messeigneurs) , my lord, your 
Grace, your Highness 
monsieur (mosjo), m. (pi., mes- 
sieurs), Mr., sir, gentleman 
mont (mo), m., mount, mountain 
Mont Blanc (mobla), m., Mont 
Blanc (white mountain), high- 
est peak in Europe 
Mont Saint Jean (mose3&), m., a 
hill on the battlefield of Water- 
loo 
montant (mota), pres. part., 

stand-up (collars), mounting 
monte (mote), pp., mounted 
monter (mote), to go up, bring 
up, send up 



montre (mo:tr),/., watch 

montrer (motre), to show, point 
out 

monument (monyma), m., monu- 
ment 

morale (moral),/., moral, morals, 
ethics 

morceau (morso), m. (pi., mor- 
ceaux), piece 

mordre (mordr), to bite 

mort (mo:r), /., death; m., 
corpse; adj., dead 

mot (mo), m., word 

mou (mu), adj. (in liaison, mol), 
soft 

mouche (mu$), /., fly 

mouchoir (mu$wa:r), m., hand- 
kerchief 

mouille (muje), pp. as adj., wet, 
damp, moist 

moustique (mustik), m., mos- 
quito 

moutarde (mutard), /., mustard 

mouton (muto), m., sheep 

moyen (mwaje), m., means 

muet (mqe), adj. (/.,. muette), 
mute, dumb, silent 

mugir (my3i:r), to roar, bellow, 
groan 

muguet (myge), m., lily of the 
valley 

mur (my:r), m., wall 

mur (my:r), adj., ripe 

murir (myri:r), to ripen 

'murmurer (myrmyre), to mur- 
mur 

musee (myze), m., museum 

myosotis (mjozoti:s), m., forget- 
me-not 



N 



naissance (nesa:s),/., birth 
Naples (napl),/., Naples (city in 

Italy) 
Naiooleon (napoleo), m., Napo- 
leon Bonaparte (1769-1821); 
emperor of France and a mili- 
tary genius 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



357 



nappe (nap), /., cloth, table 

cloth, cover 
narcisse (narsis), m., daffodil, 

narcissus 
nation (nasjo), /., nation 
natte (nat), /., straw matting 
nature (naty:r), /., nature 
naturellement (natyrelma)., adv., 

naturally, of course 
necessaire (nesese:r), adj., neces- 
sary 
neige ( ne:3), /., snow 
neiger (nege), to snow 
nenuf ar (or nenuphar) (nenyf a :r) 

m., water lily 
nerveux (nerve), adj. (/., ner- 

veuse), nervous 
neuf (nof), adj. (/., neuve), new, 

fresh 
neuf (net),. adj., nine 
Ney (ne), m., marshal under Na- 
poleon 
nez (ne), m., nose 
nier (nje), to deny 
Noel (noel), m., Christmas 
noir (nwa:r), adj., black 
noix (nwa), /., nut, walnut 
nom (no), m., noun, name 
nombreux (nobro), adj. (/., nom- 

breuse), numerous 
nommer (nome), to name, call; 
se nommer, state one's name, 
be called 
non (no), adv., no, not; ni moi 
non plus, nor I either; non 
compris, not included 
nord (no:r), m. and adj., north 
Norvege (norve:s), /., Norway 
nos (no), poss. adj., our 
notion (nos jo), /., notion, idea 
notre (notro), poss. adj., our 
notre (no:tr), poss. pron., ours 
nourrir (nuri:r), to nourish, sup- 
port 
nous (nu), pers. pron., we, us 
nouveau (nuvo), adj. {pi., nou- 

veaux, /., nouvelle), new 
nouvelle (nuvel),/., news, tidings 
novembre (nov:br), m., Novem- 
ber 



.noyer (nwaje), to drown 
noyer (nwaje), m., walnut-tree 
nuance (nqa:s), /., shade, hue, 

tint 
nuit (niri), /., night 
nul (nyl), adj. (/., nulle), null, 

void, no; nulle part, nowhere 
numero (nymero), m., number 



obeir (obei:r), to obey; elle obeit 
a sa mere, she obeys her 
mother 
obeissant (obeisa), adj., obedient, 

pliant 
obelisque (obelisk), m., obelisk 
objecter (obsekte), to object to 
objet (obse), m., object 
obligeance (obli3a:s), /., kind- 
ness, obligingness 
obliger (oblige), to oblige, compel 
occupe (okype), pp., occupied, 

busy 
octobre (oktobr), m., October 
odeur (odo:r),/., odor, fragrance, 

smell 
ceil (a:j), m. (pi., yeux), eye 
ceillet (aje), m., carnation, pink 
officiel (ofisjel), adj. (f.,o fficielle), 

official 
offrir (ofri:r), offrant, offert, to 

offer 
oie (wa), /., goose 
oiseau (wazo), m. (pi., oiseaux), 

bird 
ombre (5:br),/., shade, shadow 
ombrelle (obrel), /., parasol 
omission (omisjo), /., omission 
omnibus (omniby:s), m., omni- 
bus 
on (o), indef. pron., one, " they " 
onde (o:d), /., wave, billow 
onze (o:z), adj., eleven 
opera (opera), /., opera, opera- 
house 
opposer (opoze), to oppose, resist 
opticien (optisje), m., optician 
or (o:r), m., gold 



358 



VOCABULARY 



or (o:r), conj., now (in reason- 
ing), well 
orage (ora:3), m., storm, thun- 
derstorm, tempest; le temps 
est a V orage, the weather is 
stormy 
l-'oraison dominicale (orezodom- 

inikal), the Lord's prayer 
orange (ora:3),/., orange 
ordinairement (crdinerma), adv., 

ordinarily 
ordre (ordr), m., order, command 
oreille (ore:j),/., ear 
oreiller (oreje), m., pillow 
organiser (organize), to organize 
Orleans (orlea), /., Orleans (city 

in France) 
orme (orm),w., elm 
ornement (ornoma), m., orna- 
ment 
os (o:s), m. (pi., os[o]), bone 
oter (ote), to take away, take off, 

remove 
ou (u), conj., or; ou . . . on, 

either, or 
ou (u), adv., where 
oublier (ublie), to forget 
ouest (west), m., west 
oui (wi), adv., yes 
ouvert (uve:r), adj., open 
ouvrier (uvrie), m., workman 
ouvrir (uvri:r), ouvrant, ouvert, 
to open 



paillasson (pajaso), m., door mat 

paille (pa:j),/., straw 

pain (pe), m., bread; petit pain, 

roll 
paire (pe:r), /., pair, couple 
palais (pale), m., palace, man- 
sion 
pale (pa:l), adj., pale, wan, pallid 
paletot (palto), m., coat, spring 

overcoat 
palir (pali:r), to turn pale 
pantalon (patalo), m., pantaloons, 
trousers 



pantoufle (patufl), /., slipper 

papier (papje), m., paper; papier 
a lettres, letter paper; papier a 
tapisser, wall paper; papier 
buvard, blotting paper ; papier 
de soie, tissue paper 

papillon (papijo), m., butterfly 

paquet (pake), m., package, par- 
cel 

par (pa:r), prep., by, through; 
par id, this way; par Id, that 
way 

paraitre (pare:tr), paraissant, 
paru, to appear, seem, look 

parapluie (paraplui), m., um- 
brella 

parasol (parasol), m., sun um- 
brella, plain parasol 

paravent (parava), m., folding 
screen 

pare (park), m., park 

parceque (paksko), conj., because 

parcourir (parkuri:r), parcourant, 
parcouru, to go over, run over, 
look through, read hurriedly 

pardessus (pardosy), mi, heavy 
overcoat 

pardon (pardo), m., pardon; beg 
pardon 

pardonner (pardone), to pardon, 
forgive 

pareil (pare:j), adj. (/., pareille), 
like, similar, such 

parent (para), m., parent, rela- 
tive 

parer (pare), to adorn, trim, 
dress; se parer, to dress well 

paresseux (pares0), adj. (/., 
paresseuse), lazy, idle 

parfait (parfe), adj., perfect, 
complete 

parfaitement (parfetma), adv., 
perfectly 

parfois (pai-fwa), adv., at times, 
occasionally 

parfumer (pai'fyme), to perfume, 
scent 

parler (parle), to speak 

part (pa:r), /., part, share, por- 
tion; faire part, to inform 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



359 



partie (parti), f-, part (of an in- 
divisible whole); party, game 
partir pairi.r), partani, parti, to 

depart, leave 
partout partu . adv.. everywhere 
parvenir (parvoniir), parvenarU, 
parvenu, to attain, arrive, suc- 
ceed 
pas (pa), adv., not; pas du tout, 

not at all 
pas (pa), to., step 
passe (pase), adj., past, gone, 
faded, worn; passe de mode, 
out of style 
passer 'pase . to pass, go by 
pasteur (postal), to., pastor, 

preacher 
pate (pa:t I, /., paste, dough 
patin ;pate . //;.. skate 
patiner (patine), to skate 
patrie (patri), /., native country 
pauvre (porvr . adj., poor 
pave (pave), to., pavement 
paye (pe:j)./., pay. payment 
payer (peje), to pay 
pays (peji), to., country, birth- 
place, home 



paysage (pejiza:- 



land- 



scape, landscape painting 
peau (po),/., skm, peel, rind 
peche (pe:$), /., peach 
pecher pe\e . to., peach-tree 
pecher ipe\e . to fish 
pecher pe\e . to sin 
peigne pen . ///., comb 
peine (pen), /., pains, trouble: 

a peine, scarcely 
peintre pe:tr . to., painter, artist 
peinture pety:r . /., painting 
pelle (pel . /., shovel; pelle aux 

ordures, dust pan 
pelote plot . /., pincushion 

(pelote a epingles) 
pelouse (pelu:z. or plu:z), /., 

lawn 
pencher (pa\e . to lean, bend, 

incline 
pendant (padci . prep., during; 

pendant que. while 
pendre (pa:dr . to hang, hang up 



pendule padyl . /.. clock 
pensee pase ./.. thought: pansy 
penser (pase . to think; penser 

a. think of 
pente (part), /., slope, incline, 

hillside 
percer (perse . to pierce, pene- 
trate 
percevoir (persavwa:r), perce- 

vant, pergu. to perceive 
perdre (perdr . to lose 
pere pe:r . ///.. father 
perle (perl . /.. pearl 
personnage persona^), to., per- 
sonage, great person 
personne (person), indef. pron., 

nobody, no one 
personne (person),/., person 
petit (poti), adj., little, small: 

petit a petit, little by little 
petrole i patrol , to., petroleum. 

oil 
peu (po), adv., little; pen a pen. 

little by little 
peu (po), to., little, few 
peuple popl . to., people 
peuplier paplije . to., poplar 
peur (porr), /., fear, dread: avoir 

peur, to be afraid; de peur que, 

lest, for fear that 
peut-etre (potertr), adv., perhaps 
phrase fra:z ./.. sentence, phrase 
physique fizik . /., physics; adj., 

physical, material 
piece (pjes), /., room, piece 
pied pie . //;.. foot 
pierre pje:r . /.. stone 
pince-nez ipesne , to., eyeglasses 
Pise (pi:z I,/., Pisa province and 

city in Italy 
pitie (pitje), /., pity, compassion 
place (plas), /., place, square of 

city 
Place de la Concorde (kokord). 

famous public square in Paris 
plafond (plafd), to., ceiling 
plaine (plen . /.. plain 
plaire ple:r . plaisant, phi, to 

please; s'il vous plait, if you 

please 



360 



VOCABULARY 



plaisir (plezi:r), m., pleasure 
Plancenoit (plasnwa), a village 

on the battlefield of Waterloo 
planche (pla :$),/., board, plank 
plancher (pla$e), m., floor 
plante (pla:t), /., plant 
plat (pla), m._, dish, plate, platter 
plateau (plato), m. (pi., pla- 
teaux), plateau; tray 
plein (pie), adj. and adv., full 
pleurer (plare), to weep, cry 
pleuvoir (plavwa:r), pleuvant, 

plu, to rain 
pli (pli), m., fold, plait, wrinkle, 

crease 
plier (plije), to fold 
plisse (plise), p. p., plaited 
pluie (plqi), /., rain 
plume (plym), /., pen, feather, 

plume 
plumeau (plymo), m. {pi., plu- 

meaux), feather duster 
plupart (plypa:r), /., majority 
plus (ply), adv., more, plus (+) 
phisieurs (pfyzjo:r), indef. pron. 

or adj., several 
plutot (ply to), adv., rather, 

sooner 
poche (po$),/., pocket 
poele (pwa:l), m., stove 
poele (pwa:l), /., frying pan 
point (pwe), m., point, period 
pointure (pwety:r), /., size (of 

gloves, shoes, etc.) 
poire (pwa:r),/., pear 
poirier (pwarje), m., pear-tree 
pois (pwa), m., pea; petits poi's, 

green peas; pois de senteur, 

sweet peas 
poison (pwazo), m., poison 
poisson (pwaso), m., fish 
poivre (pwa:vr), m., pepper 
poivriere (pwavrie:r), /., pepper- 
box 
poli (poli), adj., polite, refined, 

polished 
pomme (pom), /., apple 
pommier (pomje), m., apple-tree 
pont (po), m., bridge, deck 
port (po:r), m., port, harbor 



porte (port), /., door 

portemanteau (portmato), m., 
hall-rack 

porter (porte), to carry, wear, 
bear 

portrait (portrs), m., portrait, 
likeness 

Portugal (portygal), m., Portugal 

positif (pozitif), adj. (/., positive), 
positive, certain 

possible (posibl), adj., possible 

poste (post), /., post, post office 

postilion (postij3), m., postilion, 
post-boy 

pot (po), m., jar, crock, jug; pot 
a eau, water pot, water pit cher ; 
pot au lait, milk pitcher 

potage (pota:3), m., soup, por- 
ridge 

pouce (pus), m., thumb 

pouding (pude:g), m., pudding 

poudre (pudr), /., powder; poudre 
dentifrice, tooth powder 

poulailler (pulaje), m., hen house, 
poultry house 

poule (pul), /., hen 

poulet (puie), m., chicken 

poupee (pupe),/., doll 

pour (pu:r), prep., for, onaccount 
of, in order, to 

pourboire (purbwarr), m., tip 

pourque (purko), conj., in order 
that 

pourquoi (purkwa), conj., why 

poursuite (pursqit),/., pursuit 

pourtant (purta), adv., neverthe- 
less, however, yet 

pourvuque (purvyko), conj., pro- 
vided that 

pousser (puse), to push, shove, 
utter, sprout, cut (teeth) 

poussiere (pusje:r), /., dust 

pouvoir (puvwa:r), pouvant. pu, 
to be able, can, may; il se peut, 
it may be 

pre (pre), m., meadow 

precaution (prekosjo), /., precau- 
tion 

precedent (preseda), m., prece- 
dent; adj., preceding, former 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



361 



preche (pre:$), m., sermon (Prot- 
estant) 

precisement (presizemci), adv., 
precisely, exactly 

predicateur (predikate :r), m., 
preacher 

preferer (prefere), to prefer 

prejuge (presyse), m., prejudice 

prendre (pradr), prenant, pris, to 
take, get 

prenom (preno), m. f first name, 
Christian name 

preparatif (preparatif), m., prep- 
aration 

preparer (prepare), to prepare 

pres (pre), adv., near; pres de, 
near by, close to; a pen pres, 
very near, nearly; de pres, 
close, close at hand ; aupres de, 
in comparison with, in the esti- 
mation of, near, to 

presenter (prezdte), to present, 
offer, introduce 

presque (preska), adv., almost; 
presque jamais, hardly ever 

presse (prese), p.p., in a hurry, 
urgent; n'eut rien de plus 
presse, had nothing more 
pressing, hastened as fast as 
she could 

pret (pre), adj., ready 

pretendre (preta:dr), to pretend, 
claim 

prefer (prete), to lend 

preuve (pra:v), /., proof, evi- 
dence 

prevenir (prevni:r), to inform 
beforehand, warn; se — , to be 
prejudiced 

prevot (prevo), m., provost, mar- 
shal 

prier (prije), to pray, beg, entreat 

primevere (primve:r), /., prim- 
rose, cowslip 

prince (pre:s), to., prince 

princesse (preses), /., princess 

printemps (preta), to., spring 

priver (prive), to deprive 

prix (pri), m., price 

proces (prose), to., lawsuit, trial 



prochain (pro$e), adj., next, near- 
est; to., neighbor 

proche (pro$), adj. and adv., near 

produire (prodqi:r), produisant, 
produit, to produce 

professeur (profesa:r), to., pro- 
fessor 

profiter (profite), to profit, gain, 
avail one's self 

profond (prof 5), adj., deep, pro- 
found 

promener (promne), to take on a 
pleasure walk (ride, drive, 
etc.); promener des etr angers, 
show strangers about; se pro- 
mener en voiture, to go driving ; 
se - — en bateau, go for a boat 
ride; se — a cheval, go horse- 
back riding 

promesse (promes), /., promise 

promettre (prometr), promettant, 
promis, to promise 

prononcer (pronose), to pro- 
nounce 

propre (propr), adj., own, proper; 
clean, neat 

proprietaire (proprijete:r), to., 
' owner, proprietor 

proteger (protese), to protect, 
defend, shelter 

prune (pryn), /., plum 

pruneau (pryno), to. (pi., pru- 
neaux), prune 

Prusse (prys), /., Prussia (king- 
dom of northern Germany) 

prussien (prysje), adj. (/., prus- 
sienne), Prussian 

public (pyblik), adj. (/., pub- 
lique), public 

puis (p L i), adv., then, afterwards, 
next 

pupille (pypil), m., ward, pupil 

pur (py:r), adj., pure 



quadrille (kadri:j), to., check, 

plaid 
quadrille (kadrije), p.p., checked, 

checkered, plaid 



362 



VOCABULARY 



quadrupede (kwadryped), m., 
quadruped; adj., four-footed 

quai (ke), ra., quay, wharf, plat- 
form (where trains stop) 

qualite (kalite),/., quality, prop- 
erty 

quand (ka), conj., when 

quant (kat), adv., quant a, as for, 
with regard to, concerning 

quarante (kara:t), adj., forty 

quart (ka:r), m., quarter, fourth 

quartier (kartje), quarter, sec- 
tion; — general, headquarters ; 
— latin, Latin Quarter (stu- 
dent section of Paris) 

quatorze (kator3), adj., fourteen 

quatre (katro), adj., four 

quatre-vingts (katrave), adj., 
eighty 

que (ka), conj., that 

que (ka), rel. and interrog. pron., 
whom, that, which, what; 
qu'y a-t-ilf What's the mat- 
ter? qu'y a-t-il pour voire 
service? What can I do for 
you? What is your pleasure? 

quel (kel), interrog. adj., which, 
what 

quelconque (kslko :k) , indef. pron., 
whatever, any 

quelque (kelka), indef. adj., some 

quelque chose (kelka$o:z), some- 
thing 

quelquefois (kelkafwa), adv., 
sometimes 

quelque part (kelkapa:r), adv^ 
somewhere 

quelque temps (kelkata.), some 
time 

quelqu'un (kelka), indef. pron., 
some one 

question (kestjo), /., question 

quete (ke:t), /., collection, offer- 
tory; quest, search 

qui (ki), rel. and interrog. pron., 
who, whom, which, that 

quinzaine (kezen), /., fortnight, 
about fifteen 

quinze (ke:z), adj., fifteen 

quitter (kite), to leave, quit 



quoique (kwaka), conj., though, 
although 



rabattu (rabaty), p.p., turn down 

(collars) 
raccommoder (rakomode), to re- 
pair, mend, patch 
raconter (rakote), to relate, tell 
raisin (reze), m., grape; une 

grappe de raisins, a bunch of 

grapes 
raison (rezo), /., reason; avoir 

raison, to be right 
rameau (ramo), m. (pi., rameaux), 

bough, branch 
rappeler (raple), to recall; se — , 

recollect, remember, recall to 

mind 
rapport (rapo:r), m., relation, re- 
port 
rapporter (raporte), bring back; 

s'en — a, refer the matter to 

leave it to 
rarement (rctrma), adv., rarely, 

seldom 
raser (raze), to shave 
rassurer (rasyre), to reassure; 

se — , to be assured 
ravin (rave), ra., ravine 
ravir (ravi:r), to ravish, charm, 

delight 
faye (reje), p.p., striped 
rayon (rejo), ra., shelf, counter, 

department (of city store); 

ray, gleam 
rayonner (re j one), to radiate, 

shine, glisten 
rayure (rejy:r), /., stripe (of 

goods) 
recevoir (rasavwarr), recevant, 

regu, to receive 
rechercher (ra$er$e), to search 

for, investigate 
reclame (rekla:m), /., advertise- 
ment 
reclamer (reklame), to require, 

protest, object, claim 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



363 



recommander (rakomade), to 

recommend 
reconnaissance (rakanesci:s), /., 

gratitude, recognition 
reconnaitre (rakone:tr), recon- 

naissant, reconnu, to recog- 
nize, acknowledge 
recouvrer (rakuvre), to recover 
reculer (rakyle), to draw back, 

retreat, put off 
redingote (radegat),/., frock-coat 
redire (radi:r), to repeat; trouver 

a redire a, to find fault with 
redouter (radute), to dread, fear 
regarder (ragarde), to look, look 

at, regard 
regiment (re3ima), in., regiment 
regie (regl), /., rule, ruler 
regler (regie), to settle, arrange, 

regulate 
regne (re:ji), m., reign 
regret (ragre), m., regret 
Reille (re:j), a French marshal 

under Napoleon (1775-1860) 
Reims (re:s), /., Rheims (city in 

France) 
reine (re:n), /., queen 
re jeter (ra^te), to reject, throw 

back, drive back 
rejouir (re3wi:r), to gladden; se 

rejouir, to rejoice, make merry 
releve (ralve), in., abstract, ex- 
tract; — de potage, meat stock 

(of soup) 
relever (ralve), to relieve, raise 

up, raise again 
reluire (rahri:r), reluisant, relui, 

to shine, glitter, glisten 
remarquer (ramarke), to remark, 

observe, note 
remedier (ramedje), to remedy, 

cure, stop 
remercier (ramersje), to thank 
remerciment (ramersima), m., 

thanks 
remonter (remote), to go up, 

wind up 
remplacer (raplase), to replace, 

substitute for 



remplir (mpli:r), to fill, fulfil, dis- 
charge, perform 

rencontrer (rakotre), to meet; se 
— , to meet each other 

rendez-vous (radevu), m., meet- 
ing, appointment, place of 
meeting 

rendre (ra:dr), to render, return; 
se — , to betake one's self, go 

renseignement (rasenma), m., 
information, intelligence 

renseigner (rasejie), to give in- 
formation, show, direct; se — -, 
to get information 

rentrer (ratre), to reenter, re- 
turn home, reopen (schools) 

repartir (raparti:r), to reply, an- 
swer; set out again 

repas (rapa), m., meal, repast 

repeter (repete), to repeat, recite, 
rehearse 

repliquer (replike), to answer, 
reply 

repondre (repordr), to answer, 
reply, respond, R. S. V. P., 
repondez s'il vous plait, answer 
if you please 

reponse (rep5:s), /., response, 
answer 

repos (rapo), m., repose, rest, 
pause 

reposer (rapoze), to repose, rest 

reprendre (rapra:dr), reprenant, 
repris, to take back, take up 
again, recover 

repriser (reprize), to darn 

reseda (rezeda), in., mignonette 

respecter (respekte), to respect 

respectueux (respektqo), adj. (/., 
respectueuse) , respectful, defer- 
ential 

ressemblance (rasabla:s), /., re- 
semblance, likeness 

ressembler (resable), to resem- 
ble, be like 

restaurant (restora), m., restau- 
rant, lunch-room 

reste (rest), m., rest, remains; 
au reste, du reste, besides 

rester (reste), to remain, stay 



364 



VOCABULARY 



resultat (lezylta), m., result 
resume (rezyme), m., summary, 

epitome; en resume, to sum up 
retard (r9ta:r), m., delay; en 

retard, late, behind time 
retenir (ratni:r), retenant, retenu, 

to reserve, engage, hold, be- 
speak 
retour (rgtu:r), m., return; de 

retour, back, returned; home 
retourner (roturne), to return, go 

back 
retraite (rgtret), /., retreat, re- 
tire; en retraite, retired, on the 

retired list 
retrancher (ratra$e), to retrench, 

cut off, restrain 
reussir (reysi:r), to succeed, 

thrive 
reve (re:v), m., dream, idle fancy 
reveiller (reveje), to awake, 

rouse; se — , to wake up, be 

awakened 
revenir (ravni :r), revenant, revenu, 

to come back, amount to 
revoir (rgvwa:r), revoyant, revu, 

to see again, meet again; au 

revoir, till we meet again, 

good-bye 
rez-de-chaussee (red$ose), m., 

ground floor (on a level with 

the ground) 
Rhin (re), m., Rhine (river in 

Germany, Switzerland, and 

Holland) 
rideau (rido), m. (pi., rideaux), 

curtain 
ridicule (ridikyl), m. and adj., 

ridicule, ridiculous; lady's 

hand bag 
rien (rje), m., nothing; riens, 

trifles 
Rigi (rigi), m., famous mountain 

peak in Switzerland 
rire (ri:r), riant, ri, to laugh 
risquer (riske), to risk, hazard, 

venture 
riviere (rivje:r), /., river, stream 
Rivoli (rivoli), an important 



street in Paris, named for one 
of Napoleon's battles 

robe (rob), /., gown, robe, dress 

robinet (robine), m., faucet, 
spigot 

roi (rwa), m., king 

romain (rome), adj. (/., romaine), 
Roman 

roman (roma), m., novel, ro- 
mance; adj., Romance, Ro- 
manesque 

Rome (rom),/., Rome (capital of 
Italy) 

rompre (ro:pr), to break, blend 

rond (r5), m., ring; — de ser- 
viette, napkin-ring 

rose (ro:z), /., rose; rose tremiere, 
hollyhock 

rose (ro:z), m. and adj., pink 
(color) 

roseau (rozo), m., reed 

roti (roti), m., roast, roast meat 

rotie (roti), /., slice of toast 

rouge (ru:3), adj., red 

rouge-gorge (ru3gor3), m., robin 

ruban (ryba), m., ribbon 

rubis (rybi), m., ruby 

rue (ry), /., street 

ruisseau (rqiso), m. (pi., ruis- 
. seaux), brook, stream; gutter 

ruse (ry:z), /., trick, artifice, de- 
ceit, wile 

Russie (rysi), /., Russia 



sable (sa:bl), m., sand, gravel 
sac (sak), m., sack, bag; sac de 

voyage, traveling-bag 
sacre (sakre), adj., sacred, holy 
saint (se), m. (/., sainte)^ saint; 

Saint Gothard, mountain pass 

over the Alps 
saisir (sezi:r), to seize; se saisir 

de, to lay hold of, seize 
saison (sezo), /., season 
salade (salad), /., salad 
saliere (salje:r), /., salt-cellar 
salle (sal), /., hall, large room 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



365 



parlor; satte a mange?', dining- 
room; salle d'attente, waiting- 
room; salle de classe, class- 
room; salle des bagages, bag- 
gage-room; salle de bains, 
bath-room 

salon (salo), m., drawing-room, 
parlor, salon, exhibition (of 
paintings, etc.) 

saluer (salue), to salute, greet, 
bow to 

samedi (samdi), m., Saturday 

sandwich (sadwit$), m., sandwich 

sang (sa), m., blood 

sanglant (sagla), adj., bloody, 
outrageous 

sans (sa), prep., without; sans 
doute, without doubt, of course ; 
sans le sou, penniless 

sante (sate),/., health 

sapin (sape), m., fir-tree 

Sardaigne (sardeji), /., Sardinia 
(Italian island in the Mediter- 
ranean) 

satin (sate), m., satin 

sauf (so:f), adj. and prep., safe, 
save, except 

saule (so:l), m., willow 

sauter (sote), to jump, leap 

sauterelle (sotrel), /., locust, 
grasshopper 

sauvage (sova:3), adj., wild, sav- 
age 

savant (savd), m. and adj., schol- 
ar, learned person; learned, 
skilful 

savoir (savwa:r), sachant, su, to 
know, know how to 

savon (savo), m., soap 

Schaffhouse ($afu:z), /., Schaff- 
hausen (canton and city in 
Switzerland) 

science (sjd:s),/., science 

sculpter (skylte), to carve, sculp- 
ture 

sculpteur (skylta:r), m., sculptor 

sculpture (skylty :r) /., sculpture 

seau (so), m. (pi., seaux), pail, 
bucket 

seconde (sagord),/., second 



secouer (sakwe), to shake, shake 

off 
secte (sekt), /., sect 
Seine (se:n), /., the Seine (river 

on which Paris is situated) 
seize (se:z), adj., sixteen 
sejour (se5u:r), m., sojourn, stay 
sel (Sel), m., salt 
selon (salo), prep., according to; 

c'est selon, that depends; selon 

que, according as 
semaine (same:n), /., week 
sembler (sable), to seem, appear 
sens (sa), m., sense; sens com- 

mun, common sense; sens 

dessus dessous, topsy-turvy, in 

disorder 
sentier (satje), m., path, lane 
sentiment (sdtima), m., feeling, 

sensation, sentiment 
sentinelle (satinel), /., sentinel, 

sentrj^ 
sentir (sati:r), to smell; se sentir, 

to feel 
sept (se), adj., seven 
septembre (septa:br), m., Sep- 
tember 
serieux (serjo), adj. (/., serieuse), 

serious, earnest 
sermon (sermo), m., sermon 

(Catholic); oath, lecture 
service (servis), m., service; ser- 
vice de toilette, toilet-set 
serviette (servjet), /., napkin; 

— de dessert, doily; — de 

toilette, bedroom towel 
servir (servi:r), to serve, attend, 

wait upon, be on duty 
serviteur (servita:r), m., servant 
seul (sal), adj., alone, single, 

mere; un seul homme, one 

man, a single man; un homme 

seul, a lonely man 
seulement (selma), adv., only, 

solely 
si (si), adv., so, thus; yes; si 

fait, yes indeed; conj., if, 

whether, suppose 
Siberie (siberi), /., Siberia 
siecle (sjekl), m., century, age 



366 



VOCABULARY 



siege (sje:3), m., seat, bench, 
siege 

sieste (sjest),/., siesta, afternoon 
nap 

signal (sijial), m. (pi., signaux), 
signal, word 

signature (sijiaty:r),/., signature 

signifier (sinifje), to signify, 
mean 

sillon (sijo), m., furrow, ridge, 
wake (of a ship) 

silloner (si j one), to furrow, plow, 
cut 

simple (se:pl), adj., simple, sin- 
gle, plain, unadorned, common 

singulierement (segyljerma), adv. 
singularly, peculiarly 

six (si), adj., six 

Smohain (smoe), name of a 
brook on the battlefield of 
Waterloo 

sceur (so:r), /., sister 

sofa (sofa), m., couch, ottoman, 
sofa 

soie (swa),/., silk 

Soignies (swani), name of a 
forest on the battlefield of 
Waterloo 

soir (swa:r), m., evening 

soiree (sware), /., evening, dura- 
tion of the evening, evening 
entertainment 

soixante (swasa:t), adj., sixty 

soldat (solda), m., soldier 

soleil (sole:j), m., sun; coup de 
soleil, sunstroke 

sombre (so:pr), adj., dark, som- 
bre, dull 

somme (som),/., sum 

sommier (somje), m., sommier 
elastique, spring bed 

son (so), poss. adj., his, her, its, 
one's 

son (so), m., sound, tone; bran 

sonner (sone), to sound, ring, 
strike (of clocks) 

sort (so:r), m., lot, fate, fortune, 
chance 

sorte (sort), /., sort, kind, man- 
ner, way 



sortir (sorti:r), sortant, sorti, to 
go out, come out, take out 

sot (so), adj. (J., sotte), stupid, 
foolish 

sou (su), m., cent; gros sou, two- 
cent (ten-centime) piece 

soucoupe (sukup), /., saucer 

souffrance (sufrais),/., suffering, 
pain 

souffrant (sufra) adj., suffering, 
in pain, ill, poorly; patient 

souffrir (sufri:r), souffrant, souf- 
fert, to suffer, endure, brook, 
tolerate 

souhaiter (swete), to wish, long 
for 

Soulier (sulje), m., shoe 

souper (supe), to take supper 

sourire (suri:r), to smile 

sous (su), prep., under; sous la 
main, close at hand, handy 

soutenir (sutni:r), soutenant, sou- 
tenu, to sustain, bear, main- 
tain 

souterrain (sutere), adj., under- 
ground, subterranean 

souvenir (suvnirr), se souvenir de, 
to remember, recollect, bear in 
mind 

souvent (suva), adv., often, fre- 
quently 

Strasbourg (strazbu:r), m., Stras- 
burg (city in Germany, for- 
merly belonging to France) 

stratageme (strata3e:m), m., 
stratagem 

style (stil), m., style; vieux style 
old-fashioned 

subsister (supsiste), to subsist, 
hold good, exist, live 

sucre (sykr), m., sugar 

sucrier (sykrije), m., sugar-bowl 

sud (syd), m. and adj., south, 
southerly; du sud, southern 

Suede (sijed), /., Sweden 

suffisamment (syfizama), adv., 
sufficiently 

Suisse (sqis), /., Switzerland 5 

suivre (sui :vr),- suivant, suivi, to 
follow, result, pay attention to 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



367 



sujet (sy3E), m., subject 

superieur (syperja:r), adj., supe- 
rior 

supporter (syporte), to support, 
sustain, endure 

supposer (sypoze), to suppose, 
infer, imply ; suppose que, sup- 
pose that 

supreme (sypre:m), adj., su- 
preme, highest 

sur (sy:r), prep., on, above, 
about, concerning, after 

sur (sy:r), adj., sure, safe, secure, 
certain 

sur-le-champ (syrlaja), adv., im- 
mediately, on the spot, then 
and there 

surprendre (syrpra:dr), surpre- 
nant, surpris, to surprise 

surprise (syrpri:z), /., surprise 

surtout (syrtu), adv., above all, 
especially 

svmpathie (sepati),/., sympathy, 
interest 

symphonie (sefoni),/., symphony 

syndic (sedik), m., syndic, trus- 
tee 

systeme (siste:m), m., system, 
plan, policy 



tabac (taba), m., tobacco 
table (tabl), /., table; table a ral- 
longes, extension table; table 
d'hote, full course meal; table 
de toilette, dressing table 
tableau (tablo), m. (pi., tab- 
leaux), picture, painting, black- 
board 
tablette (tablet), /., shelf 
tabouret (tabure), m., stool, foot- 
stool 
tache (ta$), /., spot, stain; tache 
d'encre, blot; tache de rousseur, 
freckle 
tache (ta:$),/-, task, job 
tacher (ta$e), to spot, stain; se 
tacher, soil one's clothes 



tacher (tci$e), to endeavor, try, 
strive, seek 

taie (te),/., pillow-case (d'oreiller) 

taille (ta:j), /., waist (part of the 
body), stature, size; cutting, 
tally 

tandisque (tadike), conj., while, 
whilst, whereas 

tant (tu), adv., so much, so many, 
to such a degree 

tante (ta:t),/., aunt 

tapis (tapi), m., carpet, rug, 
table spread 

tapisserie (tapisri), /., tapestry, 
hangings; entapisserie, uphol- 
stered 

tard (ta:r), adv., late; plus tard, 
later, at some other time 

tarder (tarde), to delay, put off, 
tarry 

tarif (tarif), m., tariff, rate, scale 
of prices, price-list 

Tartarin de Tarascon (tartare da 
tarasko), one of Daudet's 
stories 

tartine (tartin), /., tartine de 
beurre, slice of bread and but- 
ter 

tas (ta), m., heap, pile, lot 

tasse (tas), /., cup 

taximetre (taksimetr), m., taxi- 
meter, taxicab 

tel (tel), adj. (/., telle), such, such 
a, like, similar 

tellement (telma), adv., so, in 
such a manner, so much 

temoigner (temwane), to bear 
witness, testify 

temperature (taperaty:r),/., tem- 
perature 

temple (ta:pl), m., church (Prot- 
estant), temple 

temps (ta), m., time, weather; a 
temps, on time; de temps en 
temps, from time to time; he 
Temps de Terreur, the Reign 
of Terror 

terminer (termine), to terminate, 
end, conclude, settle 

terre (te:r),/., earth, land 



368 



VOCABULARY 



tete (te:t), /., head 

the (te), to., tea, tea-party; boite 

a the, tea-caddy 
theatre (tea:tr), to., theater 
theiere (teje:r),/., tea pot 
theme (te:m), to., theme, topic, 

subject 
tiede (tjed), adj., lukewarm, 

tepid 
tilleul (tijal), to., linden-tree 
timbre (te:br), to., postage- 
stamp, call-bell 
tinter (tete), to toll, ring, tingle 
tire-bouchon (tirbu$5), to., cork- 
screw 
tirer (tire), to draw, pull, fire off 

(gun) 
tiroir (tirwa:r), to., drawer (of 

table or desk) 
titre (titr), to., title 
toile (twal), /., linen cloth; — 
d'araignee, cobweb; — ■ dree, 
oil cloth 
toilette (twalet),/., toilet; grand 

— , full dress 
tolerer (tolere), to tolerate, allow 
tombeau (tobo), to. (pi., torn- 
beaux), tomb, grave, sepulchei 
tomber (t5be), to fall 
ton (to), poss. adj., your, thy 
ton (to), to., tone, sound, pitch, 
style; bon ton, good breeding, 
fashion 
tonner (tone), to thunder 
tonnerre (tone:r), in.; thunder, 

coup de — , clap of thunder 
torchon (tor§5), to., dish-cloth, 

cloth duster 
t6t (to), adv., soon, shortly 
tou jours (tu3u:r), adv., always, 

forever; still 
tour (tu:r), to., tour, turn, trip: 

/., tower 
touriste (turist), to. or/., tourist 
tourner (turne), to turn, turn 

round, change 
tournesol (turnosol), m., sun- 
flower 
tout (tu), pron. adj., adv., all, 
every, the whole, wholly, 



quite; tous les deux, both; 
tous les deux jours, every other 
day; tout a fait, entirely ; tout 
a I'heure, presently, just now; 
tout de suite, immediately; tout 
a coup, suddenly; tout d'un 
coup, all at once, all of a sud- 
den, at a single stroke; tout de 
meme, all the same; tout le 
monde, everybody 

toutefois (tutfwa), adv., never- 
theless, yet, however 

tracer (trase), to trace, draw,, 
sketch 

train (tre), to., train 

traineau (treno), to. (pi., trai- 
neaux), sleigh; traineau 4' 'en- 
fant, sled; alter en traineau, go 
sleigh riding 

traiter (trste), to treat, manage, 
discuss 

tramway (tram we), m., street- 
car, trolley 

tranquille (trakil), adj., quiet. 
calm, still, tranquil 

transport (traspo:r), to., trans- 
port, rapture; carriage, transfer 

transporter (trasporte), to trans- 
port, convey, transfer 

travail (trava:j), to., work, labor 

travailler (travaje), to work 

travailleur (travaja:r), adj. (/., 
travailleuse) , hard-working, la- 
borious 

travers (trave:r), m., a travers, 
across, through 

traversin (traverse), m., bolster 

trefle (trefl), to., clover, sham- 
rock, trefoil 

treize (tre:z), adj., thirteen 

tremper (trape), to drench, soak, 
steep 

trente (tra:t), adj., thirty 

tres (tre), adv., very, very much 

triomphe (trio:f), to., triumph 

triste (trist), adj., sad, sorrowful, 
gloomy, dull 

tristesse (tristes), /., sadness. 
melancholy, gloom 

trois (trwa), adj., three 



FRENCH-ENGLISH 



369 



tromper (trope), to deceive; se 
tronvper, to be mistaken 

tronc (tr5), m., trunk (of tiee) 

trop (tro), adv., too, too much, 
too many 

trottoir (trotwa:r), m., sidewalk 

troubler (truble), to trouble, dis- 
turb 

troupe (trap), /., troop, band, 
crowd (of children), flock 

trouver (truve), to find 

tu (ty), pers. pron., you, thou 

tuer (tye), to kill 

Tmleries (tiiilri), /. pi., a royal 
palace formerly existing in 
Paris 

tunnel (tynel), m., tunnel 

tuyau (tqijo), m. {pi., tuyaux), 
tube, pipe, conduit, stalk 

tyrannie (tirani), /., tyranny 

U 

un (a), m., une (yn),/., indef. oil., 
a, an; adj., one 

uni (yni), adj., plain, sin pie 
level, smooth 

unique (ynik), adj., only, sole; 
V unique, the only 

universite (yniversite), /., univer- 
sity 

use (yze), adj., worn out, thread- 
bare 

utile (y til) , adj., useful 

utiliser (ytilize), to utilize, make 
use of 

V 

vacance (vaka:s), /., vacancy; 

vacances, vacation 
vache (va$), /., cow 
vague (vag), /., wave, billow 
vain (ve), adj., vain, fruitless 
vaisselle (vesel), /., dishes 
valeureux (valaro), adj. (/., valeu- 

reuse), valiant, brave 
valise (vali:z), /., valise, stachel, 

suit-case 
valoir (valwa:r), valant, valu, to 

be worth, equal, yield; valoir 

la peine, to be worth while 



vapeur (vapa:r),/., steam, vapor; 

a la — , by steam; bateau a — , 

steamboat 
varie (varje), varied, variegated, 

changeable 
veau (vo), m.{pl., veaux), calf, veal 
vedette (vadet), /., en veuelle, in 

a line by itself 
veille (ve:j),/., eve, day before 
velours (vsIu.t), m., velvet 
vendre (va:dr), to sell 
vendredi (vadradi), m., Friday 
venger (vase), to avenge; se 

venger de, be revenged on 
vengeur (vasair), m., avenger 
venir (vsni:r), venant, vcnu, to 

come 
Venise (vani:z),/., Venice 
vent (va), m., wind 
vente (va;t), /., sale, auction 
ver (ve:r), m., worm; ver a sGie, 

silkworm 
verge (vers),/., rod, wand; verge 

d'or, golden rod 
verger (verse), »?., orchard 
verre (ve:r), m., glass; vare a 

boire, drinking glass; vein, 

d'eau, glass of water 
vers (ve:r), yn., verse, line (of 

poetry) 
vers (ve:r), prep., toward, about 
Versailles (versa:j), m., Ver- 
sailles (city twelve miles from 

Paris) 
verset (verse), m., verse (of the 

Bible) 
vert (ve:r), adj., green 
verveine (verven), /., verbena 
vestibule (vestibyl), m., vesti- 
bule, lobby, hall 
veston (vesto), m., sack-coat 
vetement (vetma), m., garment, 

clothes 
vetir (veti:r), vetant, vetu, to 

clothe, dress 
veuillez (vaje), 2nd pers. pi. im- 
perative of vouloir 
viande (vja:d), /., meat 
victoire (viktwa:r), /., victory, 

conquest 



370 



VOCABULARY 



vie (vi),/., life, livelihood, living; 
gagner sa vie, to earn one's liv- 
ing; de sa vie, in all one's life, 
as long as one lives; il y irait 
de ma vie, my life would be at 
stake 

vieillard (vjeja:r), m., old man 

vieille (vje:j), /., old woman 

vieux (vjo), adj. (in liaison, vieil, 
/., vieille), old 

vif (vif), adj. (/., vive), quick, 
lively, living, live, keen 

vigne (vin), /., vine, vineyard 

vignoble (vijiobl), m., vineyard 

vilain (vile), adj., ugly, miser- 
able, homely 

village (vila:3), m., village 

ville (vil), /., city 

vin (ve), m'., wine 

vingt (ve), adj., twenty 

violette (vjolet), /., violet 

violon (vjolo), m., violin 

violoniste (vjolonist), m. or /., 
violinist 

visite (vizit), /., visit, call, in- 
spection 

visiter (vizite), to visit, call on, 
inspect, examine 

vite (vit), adj. and adv., quick, 
quickly 

vitrine (vitrin), /., shop-window, 
show-case 

vivre (vi:vr), vivant, vecu, to live; 
savoir vivre, have good manners 

voici (vwasi), adv., see here, here 
is 

voila (vwala), adv., see there, 
there is 

voile (vwal), m., veil (long) 

voilette (vwalet), /., small veil, 
face veil 

voir (vwa:r), voyant, vu, to see; 
voyons! let's see! now then! 

voisin (vwaze), m., neighbor; 
adj., neighboring, adjacent, 
next 

voiture (vwaty:r), /., carriage 

voix (vwa), /., voice 

volontiers (volotie), adv., gladly, 
with pleasure 



volubilis (volybili:s), m., morn- 
ing-glory 
votre (votra), poss. adj., your 
votre (vo:tr), poss. pron., yours 
vouloir (vulwa:r), voulant, voulu, 
to wish, will, desire; vouloir 
bien, to be quite willing; vou- 
loir dire, to mean 
vous (vu), pers. pron., you 
voyage (vwaja:3), m., voyage, 

journey, travel, trip 
voyager (vwaja3e), to travel 
vrai (vre), adj., true, real, genu- 
ine; adv., in truth, truly; m., 
truth 
vraiment (vrema), adv., truly, 

indeed 
vu (vy), m., sight, inspection; 
prep., seeing, considering;/), p. 
of voir, seen 
vue (vy),/. sight, eyesight, view 

W 

Waterloo, battle in Belgium, 
final overthrow of Napoleon 
Bonaparte, June 18, 181") 

Wellington, Duke of Wellington, 
English commander in battle 
of Waterloo 



y (i), pers. pron., to him, to her ; to 
it, by it by them, for it, for 
them; sans y penser, without 
thinking of it ; il y a, there is, 
there are 

y (i), adv., there 

Yvonne (ivon). Yvonne (French 
name of giri) 



Ziethen (ziten), a Prussian gen- 
eral, corps commander at 
Waterloo (1770-1848) 

Zurich (zyrik),. m., Zikich (can- 
ton and eitv in Switzerland) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



a, un, une; a dollar a dozen, un 
dollar la douzaine; three a 
day, trois par jour 

able, capable; to be able, pouvoir 

about, environ (adv.) 

absence, absence (/.) 

absurd, absurde 

accompany, accompagner 

accustomed, accoutume (past, 
part.); to be — , avoir coutume 

act, acte (m.); in the act of, en 
train de 

action, action (/.) 

active, actif, active 

adapt, adapter 

add, ajouter, oindre 

address, adresse (/.); adresser 

admire, admirer 

advantage, avantage (m.) 

adventure, a venture (/.) 

advertisement, reclame (/.) 

advise, conseiller 

affair, affaire (/.) 

Africa, l'Afrique (/.) 

afternoon, apres-midi (m.) 

afterward, ensuite, puis, plus 
• tard (adv.) 

again, encore (adv.) 

against, contre (prep.) 

age, age, siecle (m.); Middle 
Ages, moyen age 

ago il y a 

aid, aide (/.); aider 

aim able, aimab e 

air, air (m.) 

all, tout (m.), toute (J.), tous (m. 
pi.), toutes (/. pi.); all at once, 
tout d'un coup; all right, a la 
bonne heure; all the same, tout 
de meme 

almanac, almanach m.) 

almost, presque; (before a nu- 
meral) pres de 



alone, seul (adj.) 
already, d'ja (adv.) 
also, aussi (adv.) 
always, tou jours (adv.) 
America, l'Amerique (/.); North 
— , l'Amerique du Nord; 
South — , l'Amerique du Sud 
American, americain, americaine 
an, un, une 
and, et(conj.); better and better, 

de mieux en mieux 
angry, fache (adj.); to be angry, 

se facher 
animal, animal (m.) 
announcement, bulletin, (m.); 

annonce (/.) 
ant, fourmi (/.) 
anyway, en tout cas 
appear, parattre 
appetizing, appetissant (adj.) 
apple, pomme (/.); apple-tree, 

pommier (m.) 
apply, appliquer 
appropriate, approprie, propre, 

convenable, a propos 
April, avril (m.) 

apricot, abricot (m.); apricot- 
tree, abricotier (m.) 
ardor, ardeur (J.) 
arm, bras (ra.) 
armchair, fauteuil (m.) 
around, autour de (prep.) 
arrange, arranger 
arrive, arriver 

as, comme (conj.); as . . . as, 
auss . . . que; as for, quant a 
Asia, l'Asie (f.) 

ask, demander; inviter a; prier 
de; ask for, demander; ask a 
question, faire une question 
asleep, endormi (adj.) 
assure, assurer 
astonish, etonner, surprendre 
astronomy, astronomie (/.) 
at, a, dans; at home, chez soi; at 



372 



VOCABULARY 



Smith's, chez Smith; at peace, 
en paix; at all, du tout; at 
once, tout de suite; at the side 
of, a cote de 

Athens, Athenes (/.) 

attack, attaque (/.); attaquer 

August, aout (ra.) 

Australia, l'Australie (/.) 

author, auteur (ra.) 

autumn, automne (ra. or/.) 

avenue, avenue (/.) 

awaken, eveiller, reveiller; reflex., 
s' eveiller, se reveiller 



B 



back, dos,. derriere (m.); to be 
back, etre de retour 

bad, mauvais (adj.); that is too 
bad, c'est dommage 

badly, mal (adv.) 

bag, sac (m.); traveling-bag, sac 
de voyage 

baggage, bagage (m.); baggage- 
room, salle des bagages 

balloon, ballon (ra.) 

banana, banane (/.); banana- 
tree, bananier (m.) 

bank, banque (/.) 

banker, banquier (m.) 

barbarous, barbare (adj.) 

barber, barbier, coiffeur (m.) 

barn, grange (/.) 

bath, bain (ra.); bath room, salle 
de bains (/.), cabinet de bains 
(m.); bath tub, baignoire ("/.); 
bath towel, serviette de bains (/.) 

bathe, baigner 

battle, bataille (/.) 

be, etre 

beak, bee (m.) 

beautiful, beau [bel] (m.), belle 
(/•) [adj.] 

because, parce que, car (conj.) 

become, devenir 

bed, lit (m.); go to bed, aller se 
coucher; bedroom, chambre 
(/.); bedspread, dessus de lit 
(ra.); bedstead, bois de lit (m.) 



bee, abeille (/.) 

before, prep., (of time) avant; 

(of place) devant 
beforehand, adv., d'avance 
beg of, prier 
begin, commencer, entamer, se 

mettre a 
beginning, commencement (m.) 
behind, derriere (prep.) 
behindhand, adv., en retard 
believe, croire 
bell, (large bell, for church, city 

hall) cloche (/.); (smaller bell, 

with handle) sonnette (/.); 

(cow-bell, etc.) clochette (/.); 

(round bell, bicycle, sleigh, 

etc.) grelot (m.); (any bell 

rung by pushing or tapping, as 

an electric bell or call-bell) 

timbre (m.) 
below, sous, en dessous de 

(prep.); en bas, ici-bas (adv.) 
belt, ceinture (/.) 
bench, banc (ra.) 
benediction, benediction (/.) 
beside, a cote de (prep.) 
besides, de plus, en plus (adv.) 
best, le meilleur (adj.); le mieux 

(adv.) 
bethink one's self of, s'aviser de 
between, entre (prep.) 
bill, facture (m.) 
birch, bouleau (m.) 
birthday, (anniversary) anniver- 

saire (m.); fete (/.); jour de 

naissance (day one was born) 
bite, mordre 
black, noir 
blackboard, tableau, tableau 

noir (m.) 
blacking, cirage (m.) 
blanket, couverture (/.) 
blotter, (blotting-pad) buvard 

(m.); (blotting-paper) papier 

buvard (m.) 
blow, coup (ra.) 
blue, bleu (adj.) 
boat, bateau (m.); steamboat, 

bateau a vapeur 
bolster, traversin (ra.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



373 



bond, (goods under bond) en 

entrepot 
book, livre (m.) 
boot (man's boot) botte (/.); 

(lady's boot, high shoe) bot- 

tine (/.) 
border, border 
borrow, emprunter 
both, tous les deux 
bough, remeau (m.); branche (/.) 
boulevard, boulevard (m.) 
box, boite (/.) 
boy, fils, garcon (m.); street boy, 

gamin 
branch, branche (/.); rameau 

(m.) 
brass, cuivre jaune (m.); airain 

(m.) 
bread, pain (m.) 
break, casser; rompre 
breakfast, dejeuner (m.); petit 

dejeuner; to breakfast, de- 
jeuner 
bridge, pont (m.) 
bring, apporter (carry to) ; ame- 

ner (bring a person) 
broach, broche (/.) 
broad, large (adj.) 
bronze, bronze (m.) 
brook, ruisseau (m.) 
broom, balai (m.) 
brother, frere (m.) 
brown, brun, brune (adj.) 
brush, brosse (/.); clothes-brush, 

brosse a habits; hair-brush, 

brosse a cheveux; tooth-brush, 

brosse a dents 
buckle, boucle (/.) 
bulletin, bulletin (m.) 
bureau, bureau (m.) 
burn, bruler 
bush, buisson (m.) 
business, affaire (/.), affaires (/. 

pi.); business letter, une lettre 

d'affaires; business man, un 

homme d'affaires 
busy, occupe (adj.) 
but, mais (conj.) 
butter, beurre (m.) 
buttercup, bouton d'or (m.) 



butterfly, papillon (m.) 

button, bouton (m.); button-hole, 

boutonniere 
buy, acheter 
by, par 



cake, gateau (m.) 

calculate, calculer 

calf, veau (m.) 

California, Calif ornie (/.) 

calmly, tranquillement (adv.) 

calumniator, calomniateur (m.) 

can (to be able), pouvoir 

candle, (wax) bougie (/.); (tal- 
low) chandelle (/.) 

cannonading, canonnade (/.) 
ap, casquette (/.) 

capable, capable (adj.) 

capitulation, capitulation (/.) 

carpet, tapis (m.) 

carriage, voiture (/.) 

carry, porter, transporter 

carve, sculpter 

cast, jeter 

castle, chateau (m.) 

cat, chat (m.) 

caterpillar, chenille (/.) 

cathedral, cathedrale (/.) 

cavalry, cavalerie (/.) 

cede, ceder 

ceiling, plafond (m.) 

cellar, cave (/.) 

certain, certain, stir (adj.) 

certainly, certainement (adv.) 

chain, chaine (/.) 

chair, chaise (/); siege (m.)j (of 
a professor) chaire (/.) 

chalk, craie (/.) 

chance, chance (/.) ; hazard, sort 
(m.); by chance, par hazard 

chandelier, lustre (m.) 

change, changer, alterer 

changeable, variable, changeant, 
inconstant (adj.); varie (p. p.) 

chapter, chapitre (m.) 

character, caractere (m.) 

Charles, Charles 

chat, causer 



374 



VOCABULAEY 



cheap, a bon marche 
check, quadrille (m.) 
checked, quadrille (p. p.) ; checked 

goods, etoffe quadrillee 
cherry, cerise (/.); cherry-tree, 

cerisier (m.) 
chestnut, chataigne (/.); French 

— , marron; chestnut-tree, cha- 

taignier (m.) 
chicken, poulet (m.) 
chief, chef (m.) 
child, enfant (m. or /.) 
childhood, enfance (/.) 
chimney, cheminee (/.); (of a 

lamp) verre (m.) 
China, la Chine 
Chinese, chinois (adj.) 
chocolate, chocolat (m.) 
chocolate-pot, chocolatiere (/.) 
choose, choisir 
church, (Catholic) eglise (/.); 

(Protestant) temple (m.) 
Christmas, Noel (m.) 
citizen, (one living in a city) 

citadin (m.); (fellow citizen) 

citoyen (m.) 
city, ville (/.); (center of city, 

citadel) cite (/.) 
civilization, civilisation (/.) 
clap, (of thunder) coup (m.); to 

clap, battre des mains 
class, classe (/.) 
class-room, classe (/.); salle de 

classe (/.) 
clear, debarrasser (la table); 

clair (adj.) 
clerk, employe, commis (m.) ' 
climate, climat (m.) 
climb, grimper, monter 
cloak, manteau (m.) 
clock, pendule (/.); (town clock) 

horloge (/.) 
close, fermer 
cloth, (broadcloth) drap (m.); 

(linen) toile (/.); (dish-cloth, 

dust — ) torchon (m.) 
clothe, vetir, habiller 
clothes, vetements, habits (m. 

pl) 
cloudy, couvert (adj.) 



clover, trefle (m.) 

coal, charbon de terre (m.) ; char- 
coal, charbon de bois 

coat, habit (w.); dress-coat, 
habit; sack-coat, veston (m.); 
frock-coat, redingote (/.) ; spring 
overcoat, paletot (m.); winter 
overcoat, pardessus (m.) 

coffee, cafe (m.) 

coffee-pot, cafetiere (/.) 

collar, col (w.); (detachable col- 
lar) faux col (m.)) (stand-up 
collar) col montant or droit; 
(turn-down collar) col rabattu 
or casse; (lace or fur collar) 
collet (m.); (necklace; collar 
for animals) collier (m.) 

collection (at church), quete (/.) 

color, couleur (/.) 

comb, peigne (m.); to comb, 
peigner 

come, venir; come in, entrer 

comfortable, (of persons) a son 
aise; (of things) comfortable, 
commode 

command, commander, ordon- 
ner; commandement, ordre 
(m.) 

compare, comparer 

compete, concourir 

complete, complet (m.), complete 
(/•) [adj.] 

compose, composer 

concern, concerner 

'concert, concert (m.) 

conduct, conduire; diriger; me- 
ner 

confess, avouer; confesser 

confidence, confiance (/.) 

congratulate, feliciter, compli- 
menter 

consent, consentir 

consequently, par consequent, 
consequemment (adv.) 

consideration, consideration (f.) 

consolation, consolation (/.) 

contain, contenir 

continent, continent (m.) 

contrary, on the — , au contraire 
(m.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



375 



convenient, commode (adj.) 
conversation, conversation (/.) 
convert, convertir; trans' ormer 
cook, cuisinier (m.), cuisiniere 

(/.); to cook, cuire; faire cuire; 

faire la cuisine 
cooking, cuisine (/•) 
cordiality, cordialite (/.) 
corkscrew, tire-bouchon (m.) 
corner, coin (m.) 
cornflower, bluet or bleuet (m.) 
correct, correct, exact, juste 

(adj.); to correct, corriger 
cost, couter; (price) prix (m.) 
costume, costume (m.); street 

costume, costume de ville 
cotton, coton (m.) 
couch, sofa, canape (m.) 
could, from pouvoir 
count, compter 
counter, comptoir, rayon (m.) 
country, (as opposed to city) 

campagne (/.); (a particular 

locality, home-town) pays (m.) 

(native country) patrie (/.); 

(region) contree (/.) 



course, cours (m.): 



course (/.); 
doute, bien 



of course, sans 

entendu 
court, cour (/.) 
cover, couverture (/.); (of a ! 

table) tapis (m.); (of a sauce- j 

pan) couvercle (m.); to cover, 

couvrir 
cow, vache (/.) 
cream, creme (/.); whipped 

cream, creme fouettee; ice 

cream, glace (/.) 
credit, credit (m.) 
cricket, grillon (in.) 
cross, traverser 
crowd, foule (/.) 
crown, couronne (/.); to crown, 

couronner 
cuff, manchette (/.) 
cup, tasse (/.) 
cupboard, armoire (/.) (linen 

closet) 
cure, guerison (/.); to cure, 

guerir 



currants, des groseilles a grappes 

(f.) 

curtain, rideau (m.) 

cushion, coussin (m.); (pin- 
cushion) pelote a epingles (/.) 

custom-house, douane (/.) 

cut, couper 



daffodil, narcisse (m.), narcisse 
des pres 

dahlia, dahlia (m.) 

daisy, marguerite (/.) 

dance, danser; danse (/.), bal 
(m.) 

dandelion, dent-de-lion (f.) 

dangerous, dangereux (m.), dan- 
ger euse (/.) [adj.] 

dark, sombre (adj.); dark bine, 
bleu fonee; to be dark, faire 
sombre, faire nuit 

darn, repriser 

date, (time) date (/.); to date, 
dater 

date, (fruit) datte (/.); date-tree, 
dattier (m.) 

daughter, fille (/.) 

day, jour (m.), journee (/.); all 
day, toute la journee; the day 
after, le lendemain; day after 
to-morrow, apres-demain (adv.) 
the day before, la veille; day 
before yesterday, avant-hier 
(adv.); every day, tous les 
jours; to-day, aujourd'hui; 
good-day! bonjour! 

dear, cher (m.), chere (/.) [adj.] 

deceive, tromper 

December, decembre (m.) 

decide, decider de; se decider a 

declare, declarer 

defense, defense (/.) 

delicious, delicieux (m.), deli- 
cieuse (,/.) [adj.] 

delight, enchanter, ravir, charmer 

demand, demande (/.); de- 
mander 

Denmark, le Danemark or Dane- 
marck 



376 



VOCABULARY 



dentist, dentiste (in.) 
department, departement (in.), 

service (m.) ; (of a store) rayon 

(m.) ; manager of a department, 

chef de rayon (m.) 
departure, depart (m.) 
desk, (flat-topped) bureau (m.); 

(slanting-topped) pupitre (m.) ; 

(pulpit) chaire (/.) 
desire, desir (m.); envie (/.); to 

desire, desirer, avoir l'envie 
dessert, dessert (m.) 
detail, detail (m.); detailed, de- 

taille 
devote, devouer 
diamond, diamant (m.) 
dictionary, dictionnaire (m.) 
different, different (adj.) 
difficult, difficile (adj.) 
dine, diner 

dining-room, salle a manger (/.) 
dinner, diner (m.) 
direction, direction (/.) 
disagreeable, desagreable (adj.) 
disconcert, desorienter, troubler 
discourse, discours (m.) 
discover, decouvrir 
dish, plat (m.) 
dishcloth, torchon (m.) 
dishes, vaisselle (/.); wash the 

— , laver la vaisselle 
dishpan, bassin (m.) 
disorder, desordre, derangement 

(m.) 
distribute, distribuer 
do, faire; se porter; how do you 

do? Comment vous porte'z- 

vous? 
doctor, docteur, medecin (m.) 
dog, chien (m.) 
doll, poupee (/.) 
door, porte (/.) 
draw, (pull) tirer; (with a pencil) 

dessiner 
drawer, (of a bureau) tiroir (m.); 

(one who draws) dessinateur 

(m.) 
drawing-room, salon (m.) 
drench, tremper 
dress, robe (/.); ball-dress, robe 



de bal; street-dress, costume 
de ville; full dress, grande 
toilette 

to dress one's self, s'habiller, 
faire sa toilette 

dressmaker, couturiere (/.) 

droll, drole (adj.) 

dry goods, etoffes (/. pi.); dry- 
goods store, magasin de nou- 
veautes (m.) 

duck, canard (m.) 

during, pendant (prep.) 

dust, poussiere (/.) 

duster, (feather) plumeau (m.); 
(cloth) torchon (m.) 

dust pan, pelle a ordures (/.) 



E 



each, chaque (indef. adj.)', each 
one, chacun (m.), chacune (/.) 
[indef. pron.] 

eager, empresse, vif, ardent, 
avide (adj.) 

eagerly, avec empressement 

eagerness, empressement (m.) 

early, de bonne heure; tot 

east, est (m.) 

easy, facile (adj.) 

eat, manger 

eclipse, eclipse (/.) 

edge, bord (m.) 

Edinburg, Edinbourg (m.) 

education, education (/.) 

effort, effort (m.) 

eiderdown, (quilt) edredon (m.) 

eight, huit (adj.); eighth, hui- 
tieme 

eighteen, dix-huit (adj.); eight- 
eenth, dix-huitieme 

eighty, quatre-vingts (adj.); 
eightieth, quatre-vingtieme 

electricity, electricite (/.) 

elevator, ascenseur (m.) 

eleven, • onze (adj.); eleventh, 
onzieme 

elm, orme (m.) 

elsewhere, ailleurs; autre part 
(adv.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



377 



embarrass, gener, embarrasser, 

deranger 
emperor, empereur (ra.) 
empire, empire (ra.) 
end, (of things) bout (ra.); (aim, 

end in view) but (ra.); (of 

time, events) fin (/.); at an 

end, a bout, a sa fin 
engage, (reserve seats, etc.) 

retenir, arreter 
England, l'Angleterre (/.) 
English, anglais (adj.) 
enigma, enigme (/.) 
enough, assez (adj.) 
enter, entrer 
entirely, tout a fait ; entierement 

(adv.) 
entrance, entree (/.) 
envelope, enveloppe (/.) 
envious, envieux (ra.), envieuse 

(/•) [adj.] 
epistle, epitre (/.) 
equal, egal (pi., egaux); pareil 

(m.), pareille (/.) [adj.] 
errand, course (/.); do an — , 

faire une course; commission 

(/•) 
escape, echapper (a) ; eviter; se 

sauver 
especially, surtout, specialement 

(adv.) 
estrangement, eloignement (m.); 

alienation (/.) 
Europe, l'Europe (/.) 
European, europeen (adj.) 
eve, veille (/.) 
even, meme (adv.) 
evening, soir (w.); soiree (/.) 
event, evenement (ra.) 
everybody, tout le monde; cha- 

cun 
everywhere, partout (adv.) 
evidently, evidemment (adv.) 
exactly, justement; juste; ex- 

actement (adv.) 
exammation, examen (m.); writ- 
ten examination, epreuve 

ecrite (/.) 
excite, excite; animer 
execute, executer 



exhaust, epuiser 

exist, exister 

expect, attendre; s'attendre a; 

esperer; compter sur 
experience, experience (/.) 
explam, expliquer 
explanation, explication (/.) 
extension table, table a rallonges 

eye-glasses, pince-nez; lorgnon 



face, visage (m.); figure (/.) 

fairy, fee (/.) 

faith, foi (/.) 

faithful, fidele (adj.) 

fall, (autumn) automne (m.); to 

fall, tomber; (a fall) une chute 
family, famille (/.) 
famous, fameux (m.), fameuse 

(/•) [adj.] 
fan, eventail (m.) 
far, loin (adv.); as far as, aussi 

loin que, jusqu'a; by far, de 

beaucoup 
farm, ferme (/.) 
farmer, fermier (m.) 
fashion, mode (/.); in — , a la 

mode; out of — , passe de 

mode 
fashion-plate, gravure (/.) 
father, pere (f.) 
fatigue, fatigue (/.); to fatigue, 

fatiguer, lasser 
faucet, robinet (m.) 
fault, faute (f.); defaut (m.); 

find fault with, trouver a redire 

a 
favorite, favori (m.), favorite (/.) 

[adj.] 
fear, peur, crainte (/.); to fear, 

avoir peur; craindre 
feather, plume (/.) 
feather-duster, plumeau (ra.) 
February, fevrier (ra.) 
feel, se sentir 
feelmg, sentiment (ra.) 
fern, fougere (/.) 



378 



VOCABULARY 



field, champ (to.) 

fifteen, quinze (adj.); fifteenth, 

quinzieme 
fifty, cinquante (adj.)'; fiftieth, 

cinquantieme 
fig, figue (/.); fig-tree, figuier (to.) 
finally, enfin, finalement (adv.) 
find, trouver; find fault with, 

trouver a redire a 
fine, fin, delicat (adj.) ; fine arts, 

beaux-arts; the weather is fine, 

il fait beau 
finish, finir 
fire, feu (m.); incendie (m.); to 

fire, (firearms) tirer 
firing, feu (to.) 
fire-place, cheminee (/.) 
first, premier; unieme (adj.); at 

first, d'abord, au commence- 
ment 
fir-tree, sapin (to.) 
fish, poisson; to fish, pecher 
fit, (of clothes) aller a; to be fit- 
ting, etre convenable 
five, cinq (adj.); fifth, cinquieme 
flat, (apartment) appartement 

(m.); plat (adj.); (music) 

bemol (to.) 
flat-iron, fer a repasser (to.) 
flight, fuite (/.); vol (m.); essor 

(to.) ; (flight of stairs) escalier 

(to.) 
floor, plancher (to.) 
flour, farine (/.) 
flow, couler, s'ecouler; overflow, 

inonder, deborder 
flower, fleur (/.) 
flute, flute (/.) 
fly, (a) mouche (/.) 
fly, (to) voler; (flee) fuir, s'enfuir, 

se sauver 
fold, plisser; plier, ployer; fold 

one's arms, croiser les bras 
foliage, feuillage (to.) 
follow, suivre 
foot, pied (to.); (paw) patte (/.); 

footwear, chaus ure (/.) 
for, pour (prep.); for a month, 

depuis un mois; but for him, 

sans lui 



force, force (/.); to force, forcer 

foreign, etrange (adj.); a for- 
eigner, un etranger, une etran- 
gere 

forenoon, matinee (/.) 

forest, foret (/.); forestier (adj.) 

forget, oublier 

forget-me-not, myosotis (m.) 

fork, fourchette (/.) 

former, celui-la (demons, pron.); 
precedent (adj.) 

formerly, autrefois; jadis; an- 
ciennement (adv.) 

fortnight, quinzaine (/.); quinze 
jours (to.) 

forty, quarante (adj.); fortieth, 
quarantieme 

four, quatre (adj.); fourth, qua- 
trieme; (of kings and dates) 
quatre; fourth, part, le quart 

fourteen, quatorze (adj.); four- 
teenth, quatorzieme; (of kings 
and dates) quatorze 

fragrance, odeur (/.); parfum 
(to.) 

frame, (of picture) cadre (to.); 
(of building) charpeute (/.) 

franc, franc (to.), about 20 cents, 
French standard of money 

France, France (/.) 

frank, franc (to.), franche (/.') 
[adj.] 

Frederick, Frederic 

freeze, geler 

French, francais (to.), francaise 
(/■) [adj.] 

fresh, frais (to.), fraiche (/.) 
[adj.] 

Fr day, vendredi (to.) 

friend, ami (to-), amie (/.) 

friendship, amitie (/.) 

frog, grenouille (/.) 

front, devant (to.); (front eleva- 
tion) facade (/.); (of a store) 
devanture (/.) 

frown, froncer les sourcils (to.) 

fruit, fruit (to.); fruitier (to.), 
fruit iere (/.) [adj.] 

frying-pan, poele (/.) 

fuchsia, fuchsia (to.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



379 



fuel, chauffage (m.) 

fully, tout a fait; entiereanent 

(adv.) 
funeral, enterrement (m.); fune- 

railles, obseques (/. pi.); fune- 

raire (adj.) 
funny, drole, comique (adj.) 
furnace, fournaise (/.) 
furnish, fournir; (a house) meu- 

bler, garnir 
furnishings, ameublement (m.); 

garniture (/.) 
furniture, des meubles (m.); (a 

piece of — ), un meuble; (a set 

of — ), un ameublement 



gaiter, gu§tre (/.) 

garden, jardin (m.) 

garment, vetement; habit (m.) 

garnet, grenat (m.) 

garret, grenier (m.); mansarde 

gas, gaz (m.) 

gay, gai, joyeux, rejoui (adj.); (of 

streets, gay with bunting) 

pavoise 
general, general (m.); general 

(adj.) 
gentleman, monsieur (m.) 
geography, geographie (/.) 
geometry, geometrie (/.) 
geranium, geranium (m.) 
German, allemand (m.), alle- 

mande (f.) [adj.] 
Germany, l'Allemagne (/.) 
ghost, esprit (m.); ombre (/.); 

fantome (m.) 
gilded, dore 

girl, fille (/.); jeune fille 
gad, content, bien aise (adj.) 
gladly, volontiers (adv.); avec 

plaisir 
glance, coup d'oeil (m.) 
glass, verre (m.); (window) 

vitre; (mirror) miroir (m.), 

glace (/.) 
glove, gant (m.) 
glover, gantier (m.) 



go, aller; go up, monter; go 
down, descendre; go back, 
retourner ; go on guard, f aire la 
faction; go to sleep, s'endormir; 
go to bed, aller se coucher; go 
out, sortir; go in, entrer 

God, Dieu (m.) 

gold, or (m.) 

goldenrod, verge d'or (/.) 

good, bon (m.), bonne (/.) [adj.\; 
good morning, bon jour; good 
evening, bonsoir; good-bye, 
adieu! au re voir! 

goods, etoffe (/.) 

goose, oie (/.) 

gooseberry, groseille (a maque- 
reau) (/.); gooseberry bush, 
groseillier (m.) 

government, gouvernement (m.); 
govern, gouverner, regir, diriger 

graceful, gracieux (m.), gracieuse 
(f.) [adj.] 

grain, ble (m.) 

grammar, grammaire (/.) 

grandfather, grandpere (m.) 

grandmother, grand'mere (/.) 

grape, raisin (m.) 

grass, herbe (/.); (turf) gazon 
(m.) 

grasshopper, cigale; sauterelle 

(/•) 
gray, gns (adj.) 
great, grand; gros (m.), grosse 

(/•) [adj.] 
Greece, la Grece 
Greek, grec (m.), grecque (/.) 

[adj.] 
green, vert (adj.) 
ground, terre (/.); terrain, sol 

(m.) 
ground - floor, rez -de - chaussee 

(m.) 
grow, croitre; (grow tall) gran- 

dir; (grow large) grossir; (of 

grass, etc.) pousser 
guard, garde (/.); to guard, 

garder, defendre, proteger 
guess, deviner 
guest, nvite; guest-chamber, 

chambre d'amis (/.) 



380 



VOCABULARY 



guillotine, guillotine (/.); to guil- 
lotine, guillotiner 
gun, fusil (in.) 



H 



habit, habitudo; coutume (/.) 
hair, cheveu (m.); head of hair, 

cheveux (m. -pi.), chevelure (/.) 
hair-dresser, coiffeur (m.) 
hal', moitie (/.) ; demi (m.), demie 

(/•) [adj.] 
hall, corridor (m.) ; (entrance — •) 

vestibule (m.) 
hall-rack, porte-manteau (m.) 
hang, hang up, pendre 
hand, main (/.) 
handkerchief, mou choir (m.) 
happen, arriver; se passer 
happy, heureux (m.), heureuse 

(/.)• content (adj.) 
harvest, moisson; recolte (/.) 
hat, chapeau (m.); felt hat, cha- 

peau de feutre; straw hat, 

chapeau de paillo; tall (silk) 

hat, chapeau haut de forme 
hatter, chapelier (m.) 
have, avoir 
Havre, Le Havre 
he, il, lui 
head, (part of the body) tete (/.); 

(chief) chef (m.) 
headquarters, quartier general 

(m.) 
health, sante (/.) 
hear, entendre; hear tell, entendre. 

parler; a hear-say, un ou'i-dire 
heart, coeur (m.) 
heat, chaleur (/.); to heat, chauf- 
fer 
heather, bruyere (/.) 
heavy, lourd (adj.) 
hedge, haie (/.) 
hen, poule (/.) 
hen-house, poulailler (mi) 
her, elle, la, lui (pers. pron.); 

son, sa, ses (poss. adj.) 
here, ici; par ici; here and there, 

ca et la 



h'gh, haut; eleve (adj.) 
highway, le grand cliemin; la 

grande route 
hill, colline (/.); cote (/.); coteau 

(m.); vutte (f.) 
hinder, empecher; gener; retar- 

der 
his, son, sa, ses (poss. adj.); le 

sien, la sienne, etc. (poss. 

pron.) 
history, histoire (f.) 
hole, trou (m.) 
hollyhock, rose tremiere (f.) 
home, chez soi; logis, interieur 

(in.); maison, demeure (/.) 
honey, miel (m.) 
honeysuckle, chevrefeuille (m.) 
hook, crochet (m.) 
hook and eye, agrafe et porte (/.) 
hope, espoir (m.); esperance (/.); 

to hope, esperer 
horse, cheval (pi., chevaux) (m.) 
host, hote (in.) 
hostess, hotesse (/.) 
hotel, hotel (m.) 
hour, heure (/.) 
house, maison (/.) 
housework, menage (m.) 
how? comment? 
how! comme! 
however, cependant, pourtant, 

neanmoins (adv.) 
how many, combien (adv.) 
how much, combien (adv.) 
hundred, cent (adj.); centaine (/.) 
hunting, la chasse 
hurry, se depecher, se hater; to 

be in a hurry, etre, presse 
husband, man (m.) 
hyacinth, jacinthe (/.) 
hydrangea, hortensia (m.) 
hymn, cantique jn.) 



I 



I, je, moi pers. pron.) 

idea, idee (/. 

if, si (conj.j 

ill, souffrant, malade (adj.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



381 



illuminate, illuminer 

imagination, imagination (/.) 

imagine, imaginer; se figurer 

immediately, tout de suite; sur- 
le-champ; immediatement 
(adv.) 

importance, importance (/.) 

important, important (adj.) 

imposing, imposant (adj.) 

in, dans, en, a (prep.) 

in front of, devant (prep.) 

inactive, inactif (m.), inactive 
(/•) [adj.] 

incident, incident (to.) 

inconvenient, incommode (adj.) 

indecisive, indccis; irresolu (adj.) 

indicate, indiquer; designer 

India, l'lnde (/.) 

Indies, East Indies, les Indes 
Orientales; West — , les Indes 
Occidentales 

infantry, infanterie (/.) 

information, renseignement (to.); 
bureau of — , bureau de ren- 
seignement s 

ink, encre (/•) 

inn, auberge (/.) 

inquire, demander; s'informer de 

inscription, inscription (/.) 

insect, insecte (to.) 

inside, dedans, interieur (to.); 
dans, en dedans de, a l'inte- 
rieur de (prep.); en dedans, a 
l'interieur (adv.); interieur 
(adj.) 

insist, tenira; maintenir; insister 

install, installer 

instant, instant (to.) ; this instant, 
a 1' instant, tout de suite (adv.) 

intend, avoir l'intention de, se 
proposer de 

intention, intention (/.) 

interest, interet (m.); to be inter- 
ested in, s'interesser a 

interesting, interessant (adj.) 

interrupt, interrompre 

intimate, intime (adj.) 

into, dans, en (prep.) 

introduce, (persons) presenter, 
faire connaitre 



invite, inviter 

Ireland, 1'Irlande (/.) 

iron, fer (to.) 

is, est (from etre) 

island, ile (/.) 

it, il (m.) } elle (/.), le, la, lui, ce, 

Italy,' l'ltalie (/.) 

Italian, italien (in.), italienne (/.) 

[adj.] 
its, son, sa, ses (poss. adj.) 
.vy, lierre (to.) 



James, Jacques 

Jane, Jeanne 

janitor, concierge (to. or/.) 

January, Janvier (to.) 

Japan, le Japon 

Japanese, japonais (m.), japo- 

naise (/•) [adj.] 
jet, (gas) bee (to.); (of water, 

fountain) jet d'eau (m.) 
jewel, bijou (m.) 
jeweler, bijoutier (m.) 
John, Jean 
journey, voyage (m.) 
joy, joie (/.) 
joyful, joveux (?n.), joveuse (/.) 

[adj.] 
judge, juger 

jug, cruche (/.); broc (m.) 
July, juillet \m.) 
jump, sau;er 
June, juin (m.) 
just, juste (adj. or adv.) 



keep, garder; keep on, continuer; 

keep still, se taire; garder 

silence 
key, clef (/.) 
kid, chevreau (m.) 
kill, tuer 
kind, (n.) sorte, espece (/.); genre 

(m.) 
kind, (adj.) aimable; bon; plein 



382 



VOCABULARY 



de bonte ; will you be so kind as 

to, voulez-vous avoir la bonte 

de? 
kindle, allumer 
kindness, bonte (/.) 
k ng, roi (to.) 
kitchen, cuisine (/.); kitchen 

utensils, la batterie de cuisine 
knife, (table) couteau (to.); (pen) 

canif (to.) 
know, (a fact) savoir; (a person) 

connaitre 



label, billet (to.) 
laboratory, laboratoire (to.) 
laborious, laborieux (to.), labo- 

rieuse (/.) ; travailleur, travail- 

leuse (adj.) 
lace, dentelle (/.) 
lady, dame (f.) 
lake, lac (to.) 
lamb, agneau (to.) 
lamp, lampe (/.) 
lamp-shade, abat-jour (to.) 
land, terre (/.); to land, de- 

barquer 
language, langue (/.) 
large, (of surfaces) grand; (of 

bodies) gros (adj.) 
last, dernier (m.); derniere (/.) 

[adj.]] (verb) durer; at last, 

enfin (adv.) 
late, tard; it is late, il est tard; 

he is late, il est en retard; .at 

latest, au plus tard; of late, 

dernierement, recemment; the 

late (dead), feu 
Latin, latin (to.) 
latitude, latitude (/.) 
laugh, rire 
lawn, pelouse (/.) 
lazy, paresseux (to.), paresseuse 

(/.); faineant (adj.) 
leaf, feuille (/.); (of a door) 

battant (m.); (of a table) 

rallonge (/.) 
lean, pencher, s'appuyer, s'in- 



cliner: lean against, s'adosser 
contre 

learn, apprendre; learn by heart, 
apprendre par coeur 

least, le moins (adv.)', at least, au 
moins, du moino 

leather, cuir (m.) 

leave, laisser; quitter; partir 
(de); take leave, quitter; dis- 
continue, cesser; leave out, 
supprimer, omettre, oublier ; 
/ leave that to you, je m'en 
rapporte a vous; leave alone, 
laisser seul, laisser tranquille; 
there is some sugar left, il reste 
du sucre 

lecture, (in a university, etc.) 
cours (m.); (popular) confe- 
rence (/.); give a lecture, faire 
un cours, une conference 

left, gauche (adj.) 

lemon, citron (m.) 

lend, preter; (on hire) louer; 
(lend a hand) aider 

less, moins (ad .) 

lesson, lecon (/.) 

let, (allow), laisser, permettre; 
(rent) louer 

letter, lettre (/.) 

letter-carrier, facteur m.) 

letter-paper, papier a lettes (m.) 

librarian, bibliothecaire m.) 

library, bibliotheque (/.) 

life, vie (/.) 

.light, lumiere (/.); clair (adj.); 
to light (kindle), allumer; (give 
light) eclairer; to be li ht, faire 
clair 

lightning, eclair (to.); struck by 
lightning, frappe de la foudre 

like, aimer; semblable, pareil 
(/., pareille [adj.] 

lilac, lilas (to.) 

lily, lis (m. 

lily-of-the-valley, muguet (to.) 

linden-t;ee, tilleul (to.) 

line, ligne (/.); (rope) ficelle, 
corde (/.); send me . line, 
ecrivez-moi un mot 

line, (verb) doubler 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



383 



linen, toile (/.); (clothes) linge 

(m.)' f clean clothes, du linge 

blanc 
linen-goods, lingerie (/.) 
lining, doublure (/.) 
lip, levre (/.) 
literature, litterature (/.) 
little petit (adj.); peu (adv.) 
live, vivre (reside) demeurer, 

habiter 
Liverpool, Liverpool 
loan, preter; a loan, un emprunt 
locality, pays (in. I 
locust, sauterelle (/.) 
locust-tree, acacia; caroubier 

(ra.) 
London, Londres (ra.) 
long, long (m.), longue (/.) [adj.]; 

a long time, long while, long 

temps (adv.); long-waisted, 

long de taille 
look, regarder; look for, chercher 
Lord, Seigneur (ra.); the Lord's 

Prayer, l'oraison dominicale; 
' the Lord's Supper, la Cene 
lord, my lord (to a nobleman), 

monseigneur (m.) 
lose, perdre 
loud, haut (adj.); aloud, a haute 

voix 
love, amour (ra.); to love, aimer, 

cherir 
low, bas (ra.), basse (/.) [adj.]; 

in a low tone, a voix basse 
luggage, bagages, effets (ra. pi.) 
lunch, dejeuner; second dejeu- 
ner; goiiter (ra.) 
Lyons, Lyon (ra.) 



M 



su- 



magnificent, magnifique ; 

perbe (adj.) 
mahogany, acajou (ra.) 
maid, (servant) bonne (/.) 
mail, courrier (ra.) 
majority, plupart; majorite (/.) 
make, faire; clothing made to 

order, vetements sur mesure 



Mamma, maman, mere (/.) 
man, homme (ra.) 
Manila, Alanine (/.) 
manner, maniere (/.); in a man- 
ner, en quelque sorte 
many, beaucoup de; as many as, 

autant que; too many, trop; 

so many, tant 
maple, erable (ra.) 
March, mars (m.) 
march, marcher 
St. Mark, Saint Marc (ra.) 
market, marche (m.); halle (/.) 
marvelous, merveilleux adj.); 

marvelously well, admirably, a 

merv ille 
Mary, Marie 
at, (door-mat) paillasson, essuie- 

pieds (ra.); (for a picture) 

passe-partout 
match, allumette (/.) 
material, etoffe (/.); materials, 

materiel (ra.) 
mathematics, mathematique (/.) 
matting, (straw) une matte 
mattress, matelas (ra.j 
May, mai (ra.) 
maybe, peutetre (adv.); it may 

be, il se peut 
meadow, pre (m.); prairie (/.) 
meanwhile, en attendant 
measure, mesure (/.); to measure, 

mesurer, prendre mesure a 
medicine, medecine (J.) 
meet, rencontrer; se rencontrer; 

go to meet; aller au-devant de 
meeting, reunion; fonction; ren- 
contre (/.) 
melon, melon (ra.) 
member, membre (m.) 
mend, racommoder, reparer 
merchant, marchand (ra.) 
merry, joyeux (ra.), joyeuse (/.) 

[adj. | 
meler, metre (ra.) 
midnight, minuit (ra.) 
mignonette, reseda (wi.) 
milk, lait (ra.) 

milk pitcher, pot ou lait (ra.) 
milliner, modiste (/.) 



384 



VOCABULARY 



mind, esprit (m.) 

minister, (political) ministre (m.) ; 
pasteur (m.) 

minute, minute (/.) ; instant (m.) 

mirror, miroir (m.), glace (/.) 

Miss, Mademoiselle 

missionary, missionnaire (m.) 

mistake, se tromper (be mis- 
taken); meprise, erreur, faute 

mistletoe, gui (m.) 

model, modele (m.) 

modern, moderne [adj.) 

moment, moment, instant (m.) 

Monday, lundi 

money, argent (m.); (coin) mon- 

naie (/.) 
month, mois (m.) 
monument, monument (m.) 
more, plus; encore; davantage; 

more and more, de plus en plus 
morning, matin (m.) 
morning-glory, volubilis (m.) 
mosquito, moustique (m.) 
most, le plus; at most, au plus 
mother, mere (/.) 
motto, devise (/.) 
move, mouvoir; move in, s'em- 

menager; move out, demenager 
Mr.,- Monsieur (m.) 
Mrs., Madame (/.) 
much, beaucoup de; as much, 

autant; too much, trop; so 

much, tant 
mud, boue, bourbe, vase (/.) 
muddy, boueux; bourbeux; 

(dirty) crotte 
muff, manchon (m.) 
museum, musee (m.) 
must, il faut 
mustard, moutarde (/.) 
my, mon, ma, mes (p:ss. adj.) 



N 



name, nom (m.); to name, nom- 
mer, appeler; what is your 
name? comment vous appelez- 
vous? 



nap, somme (m.); afternoon nap, 

sieste (/.) 
napkin, serviette (/.) 
napkin-ring, rond de serviette 

(w.) 
narcissus, narcisse (m.) 
narrow, etroit (adj.) 
nasturtium, capucine (/.) 
national, national (adj.) ; national 

debt, dette publique (/.) 
naturally, naturellement (adv.) 
nature, nature (/.) 
near, pres, pres de, aupres de, de 

pres; near relative, proche 

parent 
neat, propre; net (m.), nette (/.) 

[adj.] 
necessary, necessaire (adj.); to 

be necessary, falloir 
neck, cou (m.) 
necklace, collier (m.) 
need, besoin (m.); to need, avoir 

besoin de 
needle, aiguille (/.); eye of a 

needle, trou d' aiguille (in.) 
nephew, neveu (m.) 
nervous, nerveux (m.), nerveuse 

(/•) [adj.] 
never, jamais, ne . . . amais 

(adv.) 
new, neuf, nouveau (adj.); new 

book, (not used) livre neuf, 

(newly out) livre nouveau, 

(different one) nouveau livre 
newspaper, journal (m.) 
'next, prochain; le plus proche, 

voisin (adj.); next to, a cote 

de 
next day, le lendemain 
night, night (/.); good night! bon 

soir! bonne nuit! 
nine, neuf (adj.); ninth, neu- 

vieme 
nineteen, dix-neuf (adj.); nine- 
teenth, dix-neuvieme 
ninety, quatre-vingt-dix ; nine- 
tieth, quatre-vingt-dixieme 
no, non; no more, pas davantage 
no one, personne (m.) 
noon, midi (m.)' 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



385 



north, nord (ra.); north star, 

etoile polaire (/.) 
Norway, la Norvege 
not, ne . . . pas, ne . . . point, 

non; not at all, pas du tout, 

point du tout 
notebook, cahier (m.) 
nothing, rien, ne . . . rien (in- 

def. pron.' 
notice, remarquer 
notions, (in dry goods store) la 

mercerie 
nove , roman (w.) 
November, novembre (m.) 
now, maintenant; a present, ac- 

tuellement; just now, tout a 

l'heure, a l'instant; till now, 

;usqu'ici; now and then, de 

temps en temps, de temps a 

autre; now then! eh bien! 
nowhere, nulle part (adv.) 
number, nombre (m.), quant ite 

(/.); (of things in succession) 

numero (m.) 
numerous, nombreux (m.), nom- 

breuse (/.) [adj.] 
nut, noix (f.) 



oak, chene (m.) 

obelisk, obelisque (m.) 

object, objet (m.) 

oblige, obliger 

October, octobre (ra.) 

odd, bizarre, drole, etrange, sin- 

gulier (adj.) 
odor, odeur (/.) 
of, de; of late, dernierement 

(adv.) 
offense, offense (/.); outrage 

(m.)', give offense, choquer, 

offenser 
office, (apartment) bureau; (pri- 
vate) cabinet (m.); post office, 

bureau de poste 
officer, omcier (m.); (of state) 

dignitaire; (of police) agent; 

fonctionnaire (m.) 
often, souvent (adv.) 



old, vieux (m.), vieille (/.); age; 
ancien, ancienne; antique 
(adj.); how old are you? quel 
age avez-vous; I am fifteen 
years old, j'ai quinze ans; a 
boy ten years old, a garcon age 
de dix ans; an old man, un 
vieillard; an old lady, une 
vieille; grow old, vieillir 

on, sur (prep.); (above) dessus 
(adv.); on foot, a pied; on pur- 
pose, expres; and so on, et 
ainsi de suite 

once, une fois; autrefois, jadis; 
at once, sur-le-champ, tout de 
suite; all at once, tout d'un 
coup 

one, un (numeral); on (indef. 
pron.) 

only, seulement; ne . . . que 
(adv.); seul, unique (adj.) 

open, ouvrir 

opera, opera (m.); opera-house, 
opera (m.) 

opera-glass, lorgnette; jumelle 
(/•) 

opinion, opinion (/.); avis, senti- 
ment (ra.) 

opposite, en face (de), vis-a-vis 
(adj. and prep.) 

optician, opticien (in.) 

or, ou; either — or, ou . . . ou 

orange, orange (/.) 

orchard, verger (ra.) 

order, ordre (ra.); to order, or- 
donner, (goods) commander; 
in order to, a fin de; in order 
that, a fin que 

ordinarily, ordinairement, d'ordi- 
naire (adv.) 

Orient, l'Orient (m.) 

original, original (adj.) 

other, autre, autrui; every other 
day, tous les deux jours 

ought, devoir 

our, notre, notre nos (poss. adj.); 
ours, le notre, la ndtre, les 
notres (poss. pron.) 

out, out of doors, dehors (adv.); 
outside, a l'exterieur 



386 



VOCABULARY 



oven, four (m.) 

owe, devoir; owing to, a cause 

de, grace a 
own, propre, a soi (adj.) ; to own, 

avouer, confesser; (possess) 

posseder 



package, paquet; colis (m.) 

pail, seau (m.) 

paint, peindre 

painter, peintre (m.) 

painting, peinture (/.); tableau 
(m.) 

pair, paire (/.) 

palace, palais (m.) 

pan, (dish pan) bassin (m.); 
(basin) bassine; (sauce pan, 
stew pan) casserole (/.); (fry- 
ing pan) poete (/.) ; (an earthen 
pan) terrine (/.) 

pansy, pensee (/.) 

paper, papier (m.) 

parasol, (plain) parasol (m.); 
(fancy) ombrelle (/.) 

parent, parent (m.) 

park, pare (m.) 

parlor, salon (m.) 

part, part (/.); (of an indivisible 
whole) partie (/.) 

pass, passer 

past, passe, dernier (adj.) 

pastor, pasteur (m.) 

path, sentier (m.) 

patience, patience (/.) 

pavement, pave (m.) 

pay, paye (/.); (of soldiers) solde 
(/.); (of a servant) gages (m. 
pi.); to pay, payer 

peach, peche (/.); peach-tree, 
pecher (m.) 

pear, poire (/.); pear-tree, poirier 
(m.) 

pearl, perle (/.) 

pen, plume (/.) 

pencil, crayon (m.) 

penknife, canif (m.) 

penniless, sans le sou 

people, gens (m. pi.); on; monde 



(m.); personnes (/. pi.); (com- 
mon) peuple (m.) 
pepper, poivre (m); pepper-box, 

poivriere (/.) 
perfect, parfait (adj.) 
perfume, embaumer, pafumer; 

le parfum 
perhaps, peut-etre; il se peut 
person, personne (/.); person- 

nage (m.) 
petroleum, petrole (m.) 
physician, medecin (m.) 
picture, image, peinture (/.); 

tableau, portrait (m.) 
piece, morceau (m.); piece of 

baggage, colis (m.) 
pillow, oreiller (m.) 
pillow-case, taie d'oreiller (/.) 
pin, epingle (/.) ; hair pin, epingle 

a cheveux 
pincushion, pelote a epingles 

pineapple, ananas (m.) 

pink, oeillet (m.); (color) rose 

(m. and adj.) 
pipe, (to smoke) pipe (/.); (long 

tube) tuyau (m.) 
pitcher, cruche (/.); pot a eau, 

pot au lait (m.) 
pity, pitie (/.); it is a pity, e'est 

dommage 
place, place (/.); endroit, lieu 

(m.); to take place, avoir lieu 
plain, uni; simple (adj.) 
plaited, plisse (p. p.) 
plant, plante (/.); to plant, 

planter 
plate, assiette (/.) 
platform, (where trains stop) 

quai (m.) 
play, jouer; play the piano, jouer 

du piano, toucher le piano 
pleasant, agreable, charmant ; 

aimable, gracieux (adj.) 
please, plaire; faire plaisir; if 

you please, s'il vous plait 
pleasure, plaisir, agrement, 

charme (m.); what is your 

pleasure? qu'y a-t-il pour 

votre service? 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



387 



plum, prune (/.); plum-tree, 
prunier (w.) 

plus, ( + ) plus 

pocket, poche (/.) 

poker, fourgon; tisonnier (m.) 

polite, poli, elegant, courtois 
(adj.) 

pond, etang (ra.) 

poplar, peuplier (ra.) 

poppy, (wild, red) coquelicot (in.) 
(cultivated) pavot (ra.) 

porter, (railways) facteur; (boats 
and docks) portefaix; (on the 
streets) commissionnaire; 
(warehouse) garcon de maga- 
sin; (door-keeper) portier, con- 
cierge (ra.) 

portrait, portrait (m.); (full 
length) portrait en pied; (half- 
length) portrait en buste 

position, position (/.); in a posi- 
tion to, en position de, en ctat 
de 

possible, possible (adj.) 

postilion, postilion (?n.) 

post office, poste (m.), bureau de 
poste (ra.) 

pray, prier; / pray you, je vous 
en prie; pray be seated, veuillez 
vous asseoir 

preacher, predicateur; precheur 
(ra.) 

prefer, preferer; aimer mieux 

prejudice, prevenir; donner des 
prejuges a 

preparation, preparatifs, apprets 
(ra. pi.); preparation (/.) 

present, cadeau, don (ra.); at 
present, a present, actuelle- 
ment ; for the present, pour 
le moment ; to be present, 
assister 

presently, tout a l'heure; bientot 
(adv.) 

preserve, preserver; conserver; 
garder 

preserves, des confitures (/. pi.) 

president, president (ra.); pre- 
sidente (/.) 

press, presser; serrer 



pretty, joli; beau, belle; gentil, 
gentille (adj.) 

prevent, empecher; prevenir 

price, prix (m.); market price, 
prix courant; lowest price, le 
dernier prix; under price, a 
vil prix, au rabais; all at one 
price, au choix; high price, 
prix eleve ; at any price, a tout 
prix, coute que coiite 

primrose, prime vere (/.) 

principal, principal (ra. and adj.) 

principle, principe (ra.) 

probably, probablement (adv.) 

professor, professeur (ra.) 

progress, progres (ra.); to make 
progress (in knowledge), faire 
des progres; business is pro- 
gressing, l'affaire marche 

pronounce, prononcer; to be pro- 
nounced, se prononcer 

proprietor, proprietaire (ra.) 

protest, protester 

proud, fier, here; orgueilleux, 
orgueilleuse; superbe; hau- 
tain; to be proud of, etre fier 
de, s'enorgueillir de 

prune, pruneau (ra.) 

Prussia, la Prusse 

Prussian, prussien (ra.), prus- 
ienne (/.) [adj.] 

pudding, pouding (ra.) 

pulpit, chaire; tribune (/.) 

punishment, chatiment, supplice 
(ra.); punition, peine (/.); 
capital punishment, peine de 
mort 

pupil, eleve (ra. or/.) 

purchase, (extensive real estate, 
etc.) achat (ra.); (small, at a 
store) emplette (/.); to pur- 
chase, faire l'achat de; faire 
des emplettes (go shopping) 

pure, pur (adj.); purely, pure- 
ment (adv.) 

purse, bourse (/.); porte-mon- 
naie (ra.) 

pursue, poursuivre; suivre; cher- 
cher 

pursuit, poursuite ; profession ; 



388 VOCABULARY 

recherche (/.) ; in pursuit of, 
la poursuite de 
push, pousser 



quality, qualite (/.) 

quarter, (\i) quart; (of a city, 
etc.) quartier (m.); Latin 
Quarter, Quartier Latin 

quay, quai (m.) 

question, question, demande (/.) ; 
ask a question, faire une ques- 
tion 

quick, quickly (adv.), vite; be 
quick, depechez-vous 

quilt, courtepointe (/.) 

quotation, citation (/.) 



rabbit, lapin (m.) 

railroad, chemin de fer (m.); 

railroad guide, indicateur (m.) 
rain, phiie (/.); to rain, pleuvoir; 

it looks like rain, le temps est a 

la pluie 
range, (cook-stove) fourneau(w.) ; 

(of mountains) chaine (/.) 
rap, frapper 
rarely, rarement {adv.) 
raspberry, framboise (/.); rasp- 
berry-bush, framboisier (m.) 
rather, (sooner) plutot; (quite) 

assez (adv.); I would rather, 

j'aimerais mieux, je voudrais 

plutot 
read, lire 

reading, la lecture 
ready, pret (adj.); ready-made, 

tout fait, confectionne 
really, en effet; en realite; re- 

"ellement (adv.) 
reason, raison (/.) 
receive, recevoir 
recover, (from sickness) se re- 

tahlir, se guerir, se remettre; 

(trans.) recouvrer, retrouvers 
red, rouge (adj.) 
regard, regarder, considerer; with 



regard to, par rapport a, a 

l'egard de, quant a 
regards, amities, compliments 

(/. pi.); give my regards to, 

elites mille choses de ma part 

a, faites mes amities a 
regiment, regiment (m.) 
register, enregistrer; s'inscrire; 

registered letter, lettre recom- 

mandee 
regret, regret (m..); regretter 
Reign of Terror, (in French 

Revolution) le Temps de 

Terreur 
relate, raconter 

relative, parent (m.), parente (/.) 
remain, rester 
remark, remarque, observation 

(/.); to remark, remarquer, 

observer 
remedy, remede (m.); past rem- 
edy, sans remede 
remember, se souvenir de, se 

rappeler 
rent, louer 
repast, repas (m.) 
repeat, repeter; repetition (/.); 

(in music) reprise (/.) 
repeatedly, a plusieurs reprisesj 

bien des fois 
reply, reponse (/.); to reply, 

repondre, repliquer 
repose, repos (m.); to repose, 

reposer 
represent, representer 
republic, republique (/.) 
resemblance, ressemblance (/.) 
resemble, ressembler a; resemble 

each other, se ressembler 
rest, repos (m.); to rest, se re- 
poser; (the remainder) reste 

(m.); (others) les autres 
result, resultat (in.), consequence 

(/.); to result, resulter; — in, 

aboutir a 
retreat, retraite (/.) ; to retreat, se 

retirer, battre en retraite 
return, (go back) retourner, ren- 

trer; retour (m.); (comeback) 

revenir, rentrer; rentree (/.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



389 



revolution, revolution (/.) 

ribbon, ruban (m.) 

right, droit; juste (adj.); that is 

right, c'est bien, c'est cela; you 

are right, vous avez raison; to 

the right, a droite 
ring, (finger) bague (/.); (nap- 
kin) rond (m.); (curtain, etc.) 

anneau (m.) 
ring, sonner, tinter ; ring for the 

chambermaid, sonner la femme 

de chambre 
ripe, mur (adj.) ; to ripen, 

murir 
river, (large river, flowing into 

the sea) fleuve (m.) ; (branch) 

riviere (/.) 
road, chemin (m.); route (/.); 

chaussee, voie (/.); roads and 

bridges, ponts et chaussees; 

the Milky Way, la voie lactee; 

on the road, en route, en 

chemin 
roast, roti (m.); to roast, rotir, 

faire rotir 
robin, rouge-gorge (m.) 
*ocking-chair, chaise a bascule 

roll, (bread) petit pain (m.) 
Roman, romain (m.), romaine 
(/•) [adj.] 

f roman (m.), ro- 

Romance, j mane </•) ^ & 

Romanesque, Romanc * lan ~ 

^ ' guages, langues 

( romanes 
Rome, Rome (/.) 
room, salle (/.); (bedroom) 

chambre (/.); (of a suite) 

piece (/.); (space) espace (m.); 

place (/.) 
rose, rose (/.) 
ruby, rubis (m.) 
rug, tapis (m.) 
rule, regie (/.); reglement (m.); 

(government) gouvernement 

(m.) 
rule, regler, gouverner, regir; 

rule over, regner sur 
ruler, (instrument) regie (/.); 



(person) gouverneur, souve- 

rain (m.) 
Russia, la Russie 
Russian, russe 



sad, triste (adj.) 

safe, sur; souf (adj.); it is not 
safe to, il n'est pas prudent de 
sale, vente (/.) 
salt, sel (m.); salt-cellar, saliere 

(/•) 
sample, echantillon (m.) 
sandwich, sandwich (/.) 
satin,, satin (m.) 
satisfy, satisfaire; contenter 
Saturday, samedi (m.) 
saucer, soucoupe (/.) 
say, dire 
scarcely, a peine; presque pas; 

scarcely ever, presque jamais 
scarf, echarpe (/.) 
school, ecole (/.) 
scissors, ciseaux (m. pi.) 
Scotland, l'Ecosse (/.) 
screen, ecran (m.); (folding) 

paravent (m.) 
sculptor, sculpt eur (m.) 
sculpture, sculpture (/.) 
sea, mer (/.); beyond the sea, 

outre mer; sea-gull, mouette 

(/.); seashore, le bord de la 

mer, le rivage; seasickness, 

mal de mer (m.) 
seal, sceller; (letters, etc.) cache- 

ter 
search, chercher 
season, saison (/.) 
seat, banc (m.); siege (m.); take 

a seat, s'asseoir 
second, second, deuxieme (adj.) 
second, (of time) seconde (/.) 
secret, secret (m. and adj.) 
seem, sembler; paraitre; avoir 

l'air 
sell, vendre; for sale, a vendre 
send, envoyer; expedier; send 

up, faire monter 
sentence, phrase (/.) 



390 



VOCABULARY 



sentinel, sentinelle (/.); faction- 
naire (m.) 

September, septembre (in.) 

serious, serieux (m.), serieuse 
(/.); grave (adj.) 

sermon, (Protestant) preche (m.) ; 
(Catholic) sermon (m.) 

service, service (m.) 

set, (the table) mettre; set up, 
eriger 

seven, sept (adj.); seventh, sep- 
tieme 

seventeen, dix-sept (adj.) ; seven- 
teenth, dix-septieme 

seventy, soixante-dix (adj.); sev- 
entieth, soixante-dixieme 

several, plusieurs (indef. adj. and 
pron.) 

sew, coudre 

sewing, couture (/.); sewing- 
machine, machine a coudre (/.) 

shade, ombre (/.); (of a lamp) 
abat-jour (in.); (of color) 
nuance (/.); (of a window) 
store (m.); (of a cap) visiere 
(/.); (for the eyes) garde- vue 
(m.) 

shake, secouer 

shave, raser; (shear an animal) 
tondre 

she, elle (pers. pron.) 

sheep, mouton (m.); brebis (/.) 

sheet, (for a bed) drap (m.); (of 
paper ( feuille (/.) 

shelf, tablette (/.) 

shepherd, berger; patre; pasteur 
(m. 

shine, luire; reluire; briller; the 
sun shines, il fait du soleil; the 
moon shines, il fait clair de 
lune 

shoe, (low) Soulier (m.); (high) 
bottine (/.); (man's boot) 
botte (/.); (wooden shoe) 
sabot (m.) 

shoemaker, cordonnier; bottler 
(bootmaker) (m.) 

shoestring, lacet, cordon de 
Soulier (m.) 

shop, magasin (m.); boutique 



(/.); (workshop) atelier (m.); 

to go shopping, aller faire des 

emplettes 
shore, bord (m.); rivage (m.); 

cote (/.); along the shore, le 

long de la cote 
short, court (adj.) 
shovel, pelle (/.) 
show,montrer; show-case, vitrine 

sick, malade (adj.) 

side, cote (m.); at the side of, a 

cote de; side by side, cote a 

cote 
sideboard, buffet (m.) 
sidewalk, trottoir (m.) 
siege, siege (m.) 
siesta, sieste (/.) 
sight, vue (/.) 
silk, soie (f.); silk handkerchief, 

foulard (m.) 
silver, argent (m.) 
similar, pareil (m.); pareille (/.); 

semblable (adj.) 
simple, simple (adj.) 
sink, (in a kitchen) evier (m.); 

(sewer) egout (m.) 
sing, chanter 
sister, soeur (/.) 
sit, s'asseoir, etre assis; sitting, 

assis 
site, emplacement (m.) 
situation, situation (/.); place 

.six, six (adj.); sixth, sixieme; (of 

kings and days of month) six 
sixteen, seize (adj.); sixteenth, 

seizieme; (of kings and days 

of month) seize 
sixty, soixante (adj.); sixtieth, 

soixantieme 
size, grandeur, taille, grosseur 

(/.); (of gloves and shoes) 

pointure (/.) 
skate, patin (m.); to skate, 

pa iner 
skin, peau (/.) 
skirt, (of a gown) jupe (/.) 
sled, traineau d'enfant (m.) 
sleeve, manche (/.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



391 



sleigh, traineau (m.); go 

ing, aller (or faire une prom- 
enade) en traineau 

slice, tranche (/.); slice of bread 
and butter, une tartine de 
beurre 

slip, glisser; slide, glissade (/.); 
slippery, glissant (adj.) 

slipper, pantoufle (/.) 

small, petit (adj.) 

snow, neige (/.); to snow, neiger 

so, ainsi; si; tenement .(adv.); so 
much, so many, tant 

soap, savon (?n.); soap-dish, 
boite a savon (/.) 

sofa, canape, sofa (m.) 

soft, mou (mol), (m.), molle (/.) 
[adj.] 

sojourn, sejour (m.) 

soldier, soldat (m.) 

some, quelque (indef. adj.); some 
one, quelqu'un: something 
quelque chose; sometimes, 
quelquefois; somewhere, quel- 
que part; some (partitive), du, 
de la, des; some bread, du pain 

son, fils (w.) 

song, chanson (/.) 

soon, bientot; (early) tot; too 
soon, trop tot; as soon as, 
aussitot que 

sorry, fache; I am sorry for it, 
j'en suis fache 

sort, sorte, espece (/.) 

sound, (noise) son (m.) 

south, sud, midi (m.) 

Spain, l'Espagne (/.) 

Spanish, espagnol (adj.) 

sparrow, moineau (m.) 

speak, parler 

special, special, particulier, ex- 
pres (adj.) 

species, espece (/.) 

spectacles, lunettes; besides (/. 
pl.) 

spend, depenser 

spider, araignee (/.) 

spoil, abimer, gater 

spool, bobine (/.) ; spool of thread, 
bobine de fil ♦ 



spoon, cuiller, euillere (/.) 

spot, tache (/. ); to spot or stain, 
tacher 

spring, (season) printemps (to.); 
(metal) ressort (m.); spring- 
bed, sommier etastique (?n.) 

sprinkle, arroser 

square, earre (m.); (on cloth) 
carreau (to.); (of a carpenter) 
equerre (/.); (of a city) place 

squirrel, ecureuil (m.) 

stain, tache (/.); to stain, tacher 

stair, degre (m.); marche (/.); 
stairs, staircase, escalier (m.)) 
down stairs, en bas; up stairs. 
en haut 

stamp, (postage) timbre, timbre- 
post e (m.) 

stand, (small table) gueridon 

standing, debout (ado.) 
stately, imposant (adj.) 
statesman, homme d'etat (m.) 
station, (railway) gare (/.) 
statue, statue (/.) 
steam, vapeur (/.); steam heat, 

chauffage a vapeur (m.) 
stew pan, casserole (/.) 
stiff, dur, ferme, raide, rigide 

(adj.); stiff neck, torticolis 

(m.) 
still, tranquille, calme, paisible 

(adj.); encore, tou jours 

(adv.) 
stocking, bas (m.) 
stool, tabouret, escabeau (m.) 
stop, arreter; s'arreter; suspen- 

dre 
store, magasin (m.) 
storm, orage (m.); (at sea) tem- 

pete (/.); take by storm, pren- 
dre d'assaut 
story, (of a house) etage (m.); 

(of a book) histoire (/.), conte 

(m.) 
stove, (for sitting-room) poele 
. (m.); (cook stove) fourneau 

(m.); (hot-air stove), calori- 

fere (m.) 



392 



VOCABULARY 



strange, etrange; singulier; bi- 
zarre; extraordinaire (adj.) 
stranger, etranger (m.), etran- 
gere (/.) ; he is a stranger to me, 
il n'est inconnu; you are quite 
a stranger, on ne vous voit plus 
stratagem, stratageme (m.) 
straw, paille (/.); straw-hat, cha- 
peau de paille (m.) ; straw mat- 
ting, natte (/.) 
strawberry, f raise (/.) 
street, rue (/.) 
street-car, tramway (m.) 
street-costume, costume de ville 

(m.) 
street-lamp, reverbere (m.) 
string, ficelle, corde (/.); (of a 

shoe) lacet, cordon (m.) 
stripe, (of goods) rayure (/.) ; (on 
soldier's sleeve) chevron (m.); 
(on trousers of uniform) galou 
(m.) 
striped, (goods) rays (p. p.) 
stroke, coup (m.); (in writing) 
baton (m.); (touch) trait (m.), 
touche (/.) 
strong, fort, ferme {adj.) 
student, etudiant (m.), etudiante 
(/.); medical student, etudiant 
en medecine 
study, etude '(/.) ; to study, etudier 
stupid, bete; stupide; sot (adj.) 
style, style (m.); mode (/.); in 
style, a la mode; out of style, 
passe de mode 
subject, sujet (m.) 
succeed, reussir; parvenir 
such, tel (m.), telle (/.) [pron. and 
adj.]; (in such a manner) 
tellement (adv.) 
suddenly, tout a coup ; soudaine- 

ment; subitement (adv.) 
suffer, souffrir; supporter; (per- 
mit) laisser, perme*ttre; (to 
undergo) subir; (to sustain) 
eprouver 
suffering, souff ranee, douleur (/.) 
sugar, sucre (m.); sugar-bowl, 

sucrier (m.) 
suit, (of clothes) habillement 



complet, vetement complet 

complet (m.) 
suitable, convenable (adj.) 
summer, ete (m.) 
summit, sommet, faite, comble 

(m.); cime (/.) 
sun, soleil (m.) 
Sunday, dimanche (m.) 
sunflower, tournesol (m.) 
supper, souper (m.); the Lord's 

Supper, la Cene 
support, supporter; soutenir; 

entretenir 
supreme, supreme; souverain 

(adj.) 
sure, sur, certain, assure; be sure 

of, etre stir de 
surely, certainement, assure- 

ment, surement, en verite 
surprise, surprise (/.); to sur- 
prise, surprendre ; be surprised 

at, etre surpris de 
swarm, essaim (m.); (crowd) 

multitude, nuee (/.) 
Sweden, la Suede 
sweep, balayer; (a chimney) 

ramoner 
sweet, doux (m.), douce (/.); 

sucre (e) 
Swiss, Suisse (m.), suisesse (/.) 
Switzerland, la Suisse 
system, systeme (m.) 



table, table (/.) 

table-cloth, nappe (/.) 

tailor, tailleur (m.) 

take, prendre; (convey) con- 
duire, mener; (carry) porter; 
(take away) emmener; (bring, 
take with) amener; take care, 
prendre garde; take place, 
avoir lieu 

tapestry, tapisserie (/.) 

tariff, tarif (m.) 

taste, gout (m.); to taste, gouter 

taximeter, taximetre (m.) 

tea, the (m.) 

teakettle, bouilloire (/.) 



ENGLISH-FRENCH 



393 



teapot, theiere (/.) 

teach, enseigner 

tell, dire 

ten, dix (adj.); tenth, dixieme, 

(of kings and days of month) 

dix 
text, texte (m.) 

than, que; (with a numeral) de 
thank, remercier; / thank you, 

je vous remercie; merci bien 
that, que, ce, celui-la, cela, lequel, 

qui 
theatre, theatre (ra.) 
their, leur, leurs (poss., adj.) 
then, alors; puis (adv.) 
there, la, 3^ (adv.) 
they, ils, elles, ceux, celles, eux; 

they say, on dit 
thick, epais (m.), epaisse (/.) 

[adj.] 
thimble, de (m.) 
thin, mince (adj.) 
thing, chose (/.) 
think, penser 
third, troisieme; third estate, 

tiers etat (m.) 
thirteen, treize; thirteenth, treiz- 

ieme, (of kings and day of 

month) treize 
thirty, trente; thirtieth, tren- 

tieme, (of kings and day of 

month) trente 
this, celui-ci, ceci, ce 
thistle, chardon (ra.) 
though, quoique, bien que; as 

though, comme si 
thought, pensee (/.) 
thousand, mille; (date) mil; 

thousandth, millieme 
thread, fil (ra.) 
threaten, menacer 
three, trois 
through, a travers; au travers 

de; par (prep.) 
throw, jeter 

thunder, tonnerre (m.); to thun- 
der, tonner 
Thursday, jeudi (ra.) 
ticket, billet (m.); return ticket, 

billet d'aller et retour 



ticket-office, (window) guichet 

(ra.) 
tie, (necktie) cravate (/.) 
tie up, (a package) ficeler 
time, temps (m.) ; (of day) heure 
(/.); (one time) une fois; in 
time, a temps; at the same 
time, en meme temps; at times, 
parfois 
time-table, indicateur (m.) 
tire, fatiguer; tired, fatigue 
tissue-paper, papier de soie 

(m.) 
toad, crapaud (m.) 
to-day, aujourd'hui (adv.) 
together, ensemble (adv.) 
toilet, (dress) toilette (/.); toilet- 
room, cabinet de toilette (m.); 
toilet-set, garniture de toilette 
(/.); toilet-table, toilette, table 
de toilette (/.) 
to-morrow, demain (adv.) 
tone, ton (m,); speak in a low 

tone, parler a voix basse 
tongue, langue (/.) 
too, (also) aussi, de meme, egale- 
ment; too much, too many, 
trop, trop de; too bad, (a pity) 
dommage 
tooth, dent (/.) 
tooth-pick, cure-dent (m.) 
tooth-powder, poudre dentifrice 

topsy-turvy, sens dessus dessous 

toward, vers (prep.) 

towel, serviette de toilette (/.); 

kitchen-towel, essuie-main (m.) 
toy, jouet (m.) 
train, train (m.) 
transport, transporter 
travel, voyager 
tree, arbre (m.) 
trick, tour (jn.), ruse (/.); play a 

trick on, jouer un tour a, faire 

une niche a 
trifle, bagatelle (/.) 
trinket, bibelot (m.) 
trip, tour (m.) 
Triumphal Arch of the Star, Arc 

de Triomphe de l'Etoile (m.) 



394 



VOCABULARY 



trouble, difficulty peine (/.); to 
trouble, trembler, deranger 

trousers, pantalon (m.) 

true, vrai; true to, fidele a 

truly, vraiment, veritablement ; 
yours truly, tout a vous, bien a 
vous 

trunk, (for clothing) malle (/.), 
coffre (m.); (of a tree) tronc 
(m.) ; to -pack a trunk, faire une 
malle; to unpack — , defaire 
une malle 

try, tacher, essay er 

tube, tuyau (m.) [pi., tuyaux] 

Tuesday, mardi (m.); on Tues- 
days, les mardis 

tulip, tulipe (/.) 

turf, gazon (m.) 

turkey, dhidon (m.) 

turn, tour (m.); by turns, tour a 
tour; to turn, tourner, se 
tourner; turn-down (collar), 
rabattu {adj.) 

tutor, instituteur, precepteur, 
gouverneur (m.) 

twelve, douze; twelfth, douzieme 

twenty, vingt; twentieth, ving- 
tieme 

two, deux 



U 



umbrella, parapluie (m.); sun- 
umbrella, parasol (m.) 

unchangeable, inalterable (adj.) 

under, sous (prep.) 

understand, comprendre ; to make 
one's self understood, se faire 
comprendre 

unfortunate, malheureux (/.. mal- 
heureuse) [n. and adj.] 

unfortunately, malheureusement 
(adj.) 

unhappy, malheureux, mecon- 
tent (adj.) 

United States, les Etats-Unis (in. 

pl.) 
university, university (/.); uni- 
versity man, universitaire 
(m). 



unknown, inconnu; unbeknown 

to me, a mon insu 
until, jusque, jusqu'a (prep.) 
unveil, devoiler, decouvrir 
upholstered, en tapisserie 
us, nous 

use, employer, utiliser 
useful, utile (adj.) 
usual, as usual, comme d'habi- 

tude, comme d'ordinaire 



vacant, libre (adj.) 
vacation, vacances (/. pl.) 
vanguard, avant-garde (/.) 
variegated, varie (p. p.) 
vegetable, (food) legume (m.); 

vegetal (adj.) 
veil, (long veil) voile (m.); (for 

the face) voilette (/.) 
Venice, Venise (/.) 
verbena, verveine (/.) 
verse, (line of poetry) vers (in.)] 

(in the Bible) verset (m.); (of a 

song) couplet (m.) 
very, tres, bien (adv.) 
vest, gilet (m.) 
vestibule, vestibule (m.), anti- 

chambre (/.) 
victory, victoire (/.) 
vineyard, vignoble (in.), vigne 

(/■) 
violet, (flower) violette (/.); 

(color) violet (in.) 
violin, violon (m.) 
visit, visite (/.); to visit, visiter 



W 

waist, (part of body) taille (/.); 

(part of dress) corsage (m . ) ; 

(shirt-waist) blouse (/.) 
wait, attendre; (at table) servir; 

wait, for, attendre 
waiter, garcon (m.) 
waiting-room, salle d'attente (/.) 
wake, eveiller; wake up, s'eveiller 



EXGLISH-FREXCH 



395 



Wales, Galles (m.), le Pavs de 

Galles 
walk, (sidewalk) trottoir (m.); 

to walk, marcher; go for a walk, 

se promener, aller se promener 
wall, mur (m.) 
wall-paper, papier a tapisser, 

papier de tenture (in.) 
walnut, noix (/.); walnut-tree, 

noyer (in.) 
want, desirer, vouloir 
wardrobe, garderobe, armoire 

(f.) ; (in schools) vestiaire 

(m.) 
wash, laver; (bathe) baigner; 

(linen) blanchir; wash one's 

hands, se laver les mains 
wash-bowl, wash-basin, cuvette 

wash-stand, lavabo (m.) 
Washington, Washington 
wasp, guepe (/.) 
watch, montre (/.); to watch, 

veiller; watch for, attendre 
water, eau (/.) 
water-bottle, carafe (/.) 
water-lily, nenuf ar (or, nenuphar) 

(m.) 
water-pitcher, cruche a eau (/.), 

pot a eau (m.) 
Waterloo, Waterloo 
way, chemin (to.) ; route, voie (/.) ; 

this way, par ici; that way, par 

la 
we, nous 

weak, faible (adj.) 
wear, porter 
weather, temps (m.); it is fine 

weather, il fait beau temps 
Wednesday, mercredi (to.); Ash 

Wednesday, mercredi des cen- 

dres 
weed, mauvaise herbe (/.) 
week, semaine (/.); a week from 

to-day, d'aujourd'hui en nuit; 

a week ago to-day, il y a au- 

jourd'hui huit jours 
weep, pleurer 
well, bien (adv.) 
west, Fouest (in.) 



what, quoi, ce qui, qu'est ce que, 

quel 
wheat, froment, ble (to.) 
when, quand, lors que (conj.) 
where, ou (adv) 
whether, si, que, soit (conj.); 

whether she goes or not, qu'elle 

aille ou non; the question is 

whether, il s'agit de savoir si 
which, qui, que, lequel, quel 
while, pendant que, tandis que 

(conj.); a little while, un peude 

temps 
white, blanc(/. blanche) [adj.] 
who, qui, lequel 
whose, a qui, de qui 
why? pour quoi? (adv.) ; why not? 

pourquoi pas? 
why! mais! (inter j.); eh bien! 

ma foi! 
wide, large (adj.) 
wife, femme (/.) 
wild, sauvage (adj.) 
willing, to be willing, vouloir 
willow, saule (in.) 
wind, vent (m.); breath, haleine 

(/■) 
wind, wind up (a time-piece), 

remonter 

window, fenetre, croisee (/.); 
(of a shop) vitrine (/.); (of a 
church) vitrail (rn.) 

wine, vin (in.) 

winter, hiver (m.) 

wipe, essuyer 

wise, sage, prudent (adj.); wise 
man, homme sense; the Wise 
Men of the East, les Mages 

wish, souhaiter, desirer, vouloir 

with, avec, de, aupres de; in the 
house of, chez 

withdraw, retirer 

without, sans (prep.); outside, 
dehors (adv.) 

woman, femme (/.) 

wood, bois (m.); foret (/.) 

wool, laine (/.) 

work, travail, ouvrage, labeur 
(m.); to work, travailler ; hard- 
working, travailleux 



396 



VOCABULARY 



world, monde (m.) 

worn out, (of clothes) use; (of 

persons) extenue 
wrap, couverture (/.); to wrap 

up, envelopper 
wreath, couronne (/.) 
wreck, debris (m.) 
wrinkle, pli (m.) 
write, ecrire 



year, an (m.)\ annee (/.) 
yellow, jaune (adj. and mas. 
noun) 



yes, oui; (to a question put 

negatively) si, si fait 

(adv.) 
yesterday, hier (adv.) 
yet, encore, deja, toujours (adv.); 

not yet, pas encore 
yonder, la-bas (adv.) 
you, vous; tu, te, toi 
young, jeune , a young lady, une 

jeune fille, une demoiselle; a 

young man, un eune homme; 

young people, les jeunes gens 

(m. pi.) 
your, votre, vos; ton, ta, tes 



INDEX. 



(Numerals refer to paragraphs unless otherwise indicated.) 



a, sounds of, 3, I, 1, 2, and 

note 1 

a (prep.), relations ex- 
pressed, 367; denoting 
possession after etre, 
Lesson VIII, vocab., 
note; place where, 98, 
1, 2; with infinitive, 95, 
4; 249 

abbreviations, Lesson X, 
vocab., note 

obsoudre, 194 

accents, 2, 2 

accroire, 195 

acquerir, 147 

active verb, 133 A, 1 

acute accent, 2, 3 

adjective, 304-332; classi- 
fication, 304; qualificatif 
(descriptive), 305-324; 
feminine, 53; 306, 307; 
plural, 48; 308, 309; 
agreement, 18; 316-320; 
position, 19; 54; 321- 
323; comparison, 56; 
310-315; determinative, 
325-332; numeral, 30; 
34; 326-329; demon- 
strative, 25; 330; pos- 
sessive, 28; 331; indefi- 
nite, 85; 332; interroga- 
tive, 20; proper, 9, 2 

adverb. 348-361; classifi- 
cation, 349; comparison, 
57; position, 360; of 
quantity, 33, notes 1, 2; 



244; 353; of negation, 
355-357; of affirmation, 
354; of place, 350; of 
manner, 352; of time, 
351 ; adverbial expres- 
sions, 361 

adverbial pronouns, 63; 
336 

a fin que, with subjunctive, 
101, II, B, 1 

agreement, of verb with 
subject, 240-244; of 
past part., 71; 257-261; 
of art., 287; of adjec- 
tive, 18; 316-320 

ai, sound of, 3, I, C, 1 

aleul, plural, 279, 1 

aigle, gender, 274, a 

all, plural, 279, 2 

ail, plural of nouns in, 278, 
4 

ailleurs vs. d'ailleurs, 350, 
Rem. 1 

aim, ain, sound of, 3, I, B, 
2 

aimer, conjugation, 109; 
without prep., 247; with 
a, 249 

al, plural of nouns and 
adj. in, 48, 3; 278, 3; 
309, 1 

aller, conjugation, 145; 
secondary auxiliary, 239, 
2 

alphabet, 1 

am, an, sound of, 3, I, B, 1 

a moins que, with subjunc- 
tive, 101, II, B, 3 



amour, gender, 274, b 

anteriority, subjunctive, 
101, II, B, 6 

apparoir, conjugation, 178 

apprehender, with ne, 357, 
1 

approuve, agreement of 
past part., 258, 2 

apostrophe, 2, 8 

article, 284-303; definite, 
13; 284; 286-303; for 
poss. adj., 28, note 5; 
295; in partitive con- 
structions, 39; 292, 293; 
omitted in partitive 
constructions, 39, 2; 
294; with name of lan- 
guage, Lesson XI, vo- 
cab., note 1 ; with proper 
nouns, 99, 1,2; 300-303; 
with titles, 297; in com- 
parison, 296; repetition, 
289; definite for indefi- 
nite, 298; omission, 299; 
indefinite, 22; 285; 290 

assaillir, conjugation, 148 

(s')asseoir, conjugation, 
179 

au, sound of, 3, I, C, 2; 
contraction, 38; 286; 
plural of nouns in, 48, 2; 
278, 2; au printemps, 
Lesson VII, vocab., 
note 2 

aucun, 85; 86, note a 

aussi, comparison of equal- 
ity, 56; 353, Rem. 1 

autant, 353, Rem. 2 



398 



INDEX 



autre, 85; with ne, 357, 1, 

V autre, 86, note a; 347; 

6, 7 
autrement, with ne, 357, 1 
autrui, 86, note b; 347, 1 
aux, 38; 286 
auxiliary verbs, 70; 126; 

236-239; secondary 

auxs., 239 
avant que, 357, 2, b 
avoir, conjugation, 107; 

auxiliary, 70, 1; 71, 1; 

127; 236-238; idioms, 73 



battre, conjugation, 196 
beau, fem. belle, 53, 8; 307, 

9 ' 
beaucoup, 33, notes 1, 2; 
353, Rem. 3; compari- 
son, 57, note; agree- 
ment of verb, 244 
bel, for beau, Lesson X, 

. vocab., note 2 
benin, fem. benigne, 53, 8; 

307, 9 
benir, 149 

bien, comparison, 57, note; 

-Me with art., 294, 4, d; 

adv. of manner, 352, 2, 

Rem. 1 

bien que, with subjunctive, 

101, II, B, 4 
boire, conjugation, 197 
bon, comparison, 56, note a 
bouillir, conjugation, 150 
braire, conjugation, 198 
bruire, conjugation, 199 



c, soft or hard, 4, 1 

c, feminine of adjectives 

in, 53, 5; 307, 5 
ca, iorcela, 79, 6; 339, 7, a 
ca (adv.), 250, 2 
ca\ (interjection), 378 
capitals, 9 



cardinals, 30; 327; for 
ordinals, 34, 4 

ce (demons, adj.), 25; 330 

ce (demons, pron.), 79, 2; 
339, 2-4; agreement of 
verb, 243, 1; +etre, 339, 
2; -{-devoir, pouvoir, etc., 
339, 3; idioms, 339, 4; 
impersonal, 243; -f- rela- 
tive pron., 343, 5; ce 
n'est pas que, with sub- 
junctive, 101, II, B, 5 

ceci, 79, 6; 339, 5, 6 

cedilla, 2, 7 

cela, 79, 6; 339, 5-7 

celle, celles, 79 

celui, 79, 4; 339, 1 

celui-ci, 79, 5 

celui-la, 79, 5; 339, 1 

cent(s), 31 

cer, verbs in, 140 

certain, 85, note a; 86, note 
a 

ces, 25 

cet, 25, 1, note 

cette, 25 

ceux, 79 

chacun, 86; 332; 347, 5 

chaque, 85; 332 

choir, conjunction, 180 

chose, 274, c 

ci, 25, 2; 79, 3; 350, 4 

del, plural of, 48, 4; 279, 3 

circumflex accent, 2, 5 

classification* of verbs, 
133; of nouns, 262; of 
adjectives, 304; of pro- 
nouns, 333; of adverbs, 
349; of prepositions, 
363; of conjunctions, 
375 

clore, conjunction, 200 

coi, fem. coite, 307, 9 

collective noun, 244; 260, 2 

colors, gender, Lesson 
XXVIII, note 1 

combien, 33, notes 1, 2 

comme, for que in compari- 
son, 312, c 

comparison, of adjectives, 



56; 310-315; of adverbs, 
57; comparative degree, 
56, 2 
complement, of adj., 324 
complet, fem., 53, 2; 307, 2 
compound nouns, 275; 
282; compound subject, 
242; compound adjec- 
tives, 319; compound 
tenses, 119, 120 
concession, subjunctive, 

101, II, B, 4 
conclure, conjugation, 201 
concret, fem., 53, 2; 307, 2 
conditional mode, 91, 2; 
92; 121; conditional sen- 
tences, 93; with sub- 
junctive, 101, II, B, 3 
! conduire, conjugation, 202 
i confire, conjugation, 203 
1 conjugations, four, 46 and 
; footnote; 109-112; de- 
fined, 128; living and 
dead, 129 
conjunction, 373-376; con- 
junctive expressions 
j with subjunctive, 101, 

i ii, b 

I conjunctive personal pro- 

, nouns, 62; position, 64, 
65; 337 

; connaitre, conjugation, 204 

' consonants, 4; final, 7, 

i note 3 
contraction, 38; 286 

, correlatives, 44 

i coudre, conjugation, 205 
couple, 274, d 
courir, conjugation, 151 
craindre, conjugation, 206 
croire, conjugation, 207 
croitre, conjugation, 208 
cueillir, conjugation, 152 



d in liaison, 7, note 1 
davantage, 353, Rem. 4 
" day of month, 34, 4 



INDEX 



399 



days of week, 9, 3; Lesson 
. VII, vocab. and note 1 

de, partitive, 39; with 
infin., 95, 3; 248; rela- 
tions and uses, 368 

dechoir, 181 

de crainte que, with sub- 
junctive, 101, II, B, 1 

defendre, with ne, 357, 2, b 

definite article, 13; 284; 
286-303; for poss. adj., 
28, n, 5; 295; in partitive 
const., 39; 292, 293; 
omitted in partitive 
const., 39, 2; 294; with 
name of language, Les- 
son XI, vocab., note 1; 
with proper nouns, 99, 
1, 2; 300-303; with 
titles, 297; in compari- 
son, 296; repeated, 289; 
for indefinite art., 298; 
omission, 299 

delice, 274, e 

demi, agreement, 35 

demonstrative adjective, 
25; 330 

demonstrative pronoun, 
79; 338, 339 

de peur que, with subjunc- 
tive, 101, II, B, 1 

depuis que, 356, 8 

dernier, with subj., 101, II, 
C, 1, note 

des, 2, 4; 38; 286 

des, 2, 4; 364 

determinative adjectives, 
325-332 

devoir, 239, 1, 2 

diaeresis, 2, 6 

digraphs, 3, I, C 

diphthongs, 3, I, D 

dire, 209 

discret, fem., 53, 2; 307, 2 

disjunctive pronouns, 76 

divisions of time, Lesson 
VII, vocab. 

dix, 30, note 1 

dont, 81; 83, 4 

dormir, 153 



douter, with ne, 357, 2 

du, 38; 286 

du, agreement, 261, 4 



e, sounds of, 3, I, A, 3, 4, 

and notes 2, 3 
e, accents, 3, I, A, note 2 
e, final, 3, I, A, note 3; 

feminine, 16; 51 A; in 

monosyllables, 3, I, A, 

note 3, b; in body of 

word, 3, I, A, note 3, 

b (1) 
e=e, 3, I, A, note 3, b (2), 

(3) ; becomes e, 41, note 

1; 130, Rem. b 
eau, plural of adj. iD, 48, 

2; 309, 2 
echoir, 182 
eclore, 210 
ecrire, 211 
ed, ef, er, ez, final, 3, I, A, 

note 3, b (2) 
eer, verbs in, 144 
ei, sound of, 3, I, C, 3 
eim, ein, sound of, 3, I, B, 

. 2 
either— or, 42, 2 
el, eil, etc., adjectives in, 

53, 1; 307, 1 
eler, eter, verbs in, 61, 1, 2, 

note a 
elision, 6 
elle, 77; 335, 7 
elles, 77; 335, 14 
em, en, sound of, 3, I, B, 1, 

and note 
emotion, expression of, 

101, II, A, 2 
empecher, with ne, 357, 1 
en, pronominal adverb, 40, 

2; 62, 2; 63; 336, 1; 

agreement of past part., 

261, 6 
en (prep.), 369; en hiver, 

etc., Lesson VII, vocab., 

note 2; with pres. part., 



95, 1, A; with names of 
countries, 98, 1 

en can que, with subjunc- 
tive, 101, II, B, 3 

envoyer, 146 

er, ier, fem. of nouns in, 
51, A, 1; fem. of adjec- 
tives in, 53, 2; 307, 2 

es, final, 3, I, A, note 3, a 
(2) 

es=en les, 286, b 

esse, fem. ending, 51, A, 4; 
276, A, 4 

est-ce que?, 43; 245, 1, b; 
2, b 

et, no liaison, 7, note 2 

etre, conjugation, 108; vs. 
il y a, 36; as auxiliary, 
70, 2, and a; 71, 2; 237, 
238 

eu, sounds of, 3, I, A, 9, 10, 
11 

eu, plural of nouns in, 48, 
2; 278, 2; pL of adjec- 
tives in, 48; 309, 3 

eur, fem. of nouns in, 51, 
A, 5; 276, A, 5; fem. of 
adjectives in, 53, 7; 307, 
7 

eux, 77; 335, 15 

eviter, with ne, 357, 1 

excepte, 258, 2 



/, feminine of adjectives in, 
53, 4; 307, 4 

faillir, 154 

faire, conjugation, 212; 
idioms, 74; secondary 
auxiliary, 239; +infin., 
261, 2 

fait (past part.), agree- 
ment, 261, 2 

falloir, 183; 239; 247 

faut, 90; 247; 101, II, A, 3 

favori, fem. favorite, 53, 8; 
307, 9 

feminine of adjectives, 53; 
306, 307 



400 



INDEX 



feminine of nouns, 16; 51; 

276 
ferir, 155 
feu, 320, 7 

final consonants, 7, note 3 
final e, 3, I, A, note 3 
final ed, ef, er, ez, 3, I, A, 

note 3, b (2) 
final es, 3, I, A, note 3, a 

(2) 
finir, 110 
fleurir, 156 

fou, fem. folle, 53, 8; 307, 9 
foudre, 274, f 
fractions, 35 
frais, 319, 5 
franc de port, 320, 8 
frire, 213 
fuir, 157 
future perfect (futur ante- 

rieur), 89; 120, 8 
future tense, 88; 120, 4 



g, feminine of adjectives 
in, 53, 6; 307, 6 

g, soft or hard, 4, 1 

g, in liaison, 7, note 1 

garde, avoir — , with ne, 
356, 9 

garde, in compounds, 282, 
6, c 

gender of adjectives, 53; 
306, 307 

gender of nouns, 11, 1, 2; 
268-276; by endings, 
270; by meaning, 271; 
of compound nouns, 
275; formation of femi- 
nine, 16; 51; 276; nouns 
of one gender, 51, B, 2 
and C; of double gender, 
272-274 

general noun, 49; 291 

gens, 274, g 

ger, verbs in, 141 

gerund, 254, 3, a 

gesir, 158 

gn, sound of, 4, 5 



goutte, with ne, 355 

grave accent, 2, 4 

gu, fem. of adjectives in, 

307, 8 
guere, with ne, 45 

H 

h, aspirate or silent, 4, 2 

hair, 159 

hebreu, hebra'ique, 307, 10, 

c; 309, 3 
homonyms, 379, 380 
hymne, gender, 274, h 
hyphen, 2, 9 



i, sound of, 3, I, A, 5 

ici, 23 

idiomatic present, 72 

idioms with avoir, 73 

idioms with faire, 74 

ieme, ordinals, 48, 1, 2 

ier, verbs in, 144 

il, 335, 6; neuter, 335, 9, b; 
impersonal, 243, 2; il y 
a, 36; 37; il faut, 90; 
247; 101, II, A, 3; il 
semble, 101, II, A, 3, 
note; il y a que, 356, 8; 
ilsepeut, 101, II, A, 3 

illustrissime, 315, 1, b 

Us, 335, 13 . 

im, in, sound of, 3, I, B, 2 

imperative mode, 66; 122; 
retention of s in 2nd 
sing, before en or y, 66, 
2, note 

imperfect (indicative), 75; 
120, 2; in conditional 
sentences, 93; (subjunc- 
tive), 104; 123, 2 

impersonal verbs, 133, B, 
2; 138; with subjunc- 
tive, 101, II, A, 3; with 
infin., 247; agreement, 
243 

importer, with ne, 356, 9 



indefinite adjective, 85; 

304; 332 
indefinite article, 22; 285; 

use, 290, 1; before ab- 
stract nouns, 290, 2; 

def. for indef., 298; 

omission, 299 
indefinite pronouns, 86; 

333; 346, 347 
indicative mode, 91, 1; 

120; in conditional sen- 
tences, 93 
indirect object, 62, 1, 2; 

335, 3, 8, 9, 16 
infinitive, 46; 68, 1; 94; 

124; uses, 95 and note 1 ; 

substantive, 95, 1; 246; 

without prep., 95, 2; 

247; withde, 95, 3; 248; 

with a, 95, 4; 249 
inquiet, fem., 52, 2; 307, 2 
interjection, 377,. 378 
international phonetic 

symbols, 5 
interrogation, 15; 21; word 

order, 245 
interrogative adjective, 20 ; 

85, noteb; 84, 6; 299, 4 
interrogative pronoun, 84; 

333; 344, 345 
interrogative sentences, 

15; 21; 245 
intransitive verbs, 133, B 
inverted order, 15; 245, 1, 

a, 3, a, b, note 
irregular verbs, 145-235 
issime, superlative ending, 

315, b 
issir, 160 

J 

3, sound of, 4, 3 

jamais, with ne, 45 

je, 9, 1 ; 335, 1 

joindre, 214 

jumeau, fem. jumelle, 53, 

8; 307, 9 
jurer, 247, 248 
jusque, 264; jusqu'a ce gut , 

374 



INDEX 



401 



/ or 11, sound of, 4, 4 

la (adverb), 23; 27, 1; 

position, 27, note b; 

with demons, adj., 25, 2; 

with demons, pron., 79, 

3; 350, 5 
la-bas, la-haut, 350, 5 
laisser, with infin., 95, 2; 

247; with d+infin., 249 
se lasser, -\-de with infin., 

248 
le, la, les (def. art.), 13; 

284; 286-303; see "arti- 
cle" or "definite" 
le, la, les (pers. pron.), 40, 

1; 62,2; 333; 335,9,17 
length of vowels, 3, 1 
lequel (relative), 81; 83, 5; 

333; 342 
lequel (interrogative), 84, 

4; 333; 345, 1, 2 . 
les, see le 
" less," 56, 1; 312 
leur (poss. adj.), 28; 304 

331 
leur (poss. pron.), 80; 333 

340 
leur (pers. pron.), 62, 2 

333; 335, 16 
se lever, accent, 61, 2 
liaison, 7 

linking, see liaison 
lire, 215 
loin que, with subjunctive, 

101, II, B, 5 
lui, 62, 2; 77; 333; 335, 8 
luire, 216 
I'un, 86; 333; 346 
Vun V autre, 86; 333; 347, 

6, 7 

M 

madame, mesdames, Lesson 

X, vocab., note 
mademoiselle, mesdemoi- 

selles, Lesson X, vocab., 
note, maint, 85; 304 



mal, comparison, 57; note, 
with pas, 352, 2, Rem. 3 

malfaire, 217 

malgre que, with subjunc- 
tive, 101, II, B, 4 

malin, fern, maligne, 53, 8; 
307, 9 

maniere, de — que, indie, or 
subj., 101, II, B, 2 

manquer, + infin. with de, 
248; + infin. with d, 249 

masculine, see "gender" 

mauvais, comparison, 56, 
note a; 314 

me, 62, 2; 333; 335, 2, 3 

meilleur, 56, note a; 314 

meme, 85; 304; 332, 2 

mentir, 161 

mettre, 218 

mi, agreement, 320, 6 

mien, mienne, 80; 333; 
340, 341 

mieux, 57, note; 352, 2, 
Rem. 2 
I mil, in dates, 32 
, mille, 32 
i " mine," 341, 4 

minime, 315, 1, a 

mode, 91; 117; indie, 91, 
1; 117, 1; cond., 91, 2; 
92; 117, 2; 121; imper., 
66; 117, 3; 122; subj., 
100; 101; 117, 4; 123; 
infin., 94, 95; 117, 5; 124 

moi, 77; 333; 335, 2-4 

moindre, 56, note a 

moins, 56, 57; 312; moins 
de deux, 244, 2, a 

mon, ma, mes, 28; 304; 
331; mon for ma, 28, 
note 2 

monsieur, messieurs, Les- 
son X, vocab., note 

months, 9, 3; Lesson VII, 
vocab. and note 1 

mou (mol), fern, molle, 53, 
8; 307, 9 

moudre, 219 

mourir, 162 

mouvoir, 184 



multiplicative adjectives, 
329 



N 

n, fern, of nouns in, 51, A, 

2, 3 
naitre, 220 

nasal vowels, 3, I, B; long 
or short, 3, I, B, note 1; 
nasal effect destroyed, 

3, I, B, note 2 
n'avoir garde, 356, 9 

ne alone as negative, 356 

ne pleonastic, 357 

negation, 14; adverbs of, 
355-357; subjunctive, 
101, II, A, 1, and notes 
a, b; 101, II, B, 5; 101, 
II, C, 2 

negatives, 45; position, 69, 
note b; with infin., 95, 
note 3; 355, 356 

" neither — nor," 42, 1 

neuter verb, 133, B, 1; 139 

ni — ni, 42, 1; 356, 1 

n'importe, 356, 9 

nonobstant que, 374; with 
subjunctive, 101, II, B, 
4 

non que, with subjunctive, 
101, II, B, 5 

notre (poss. adj.), 28; 304; 
331 

ndtre (poss. pron.), 80; 
333; 340, 341 

noun, 262-283 ; classes, 
262-266; gender, 11; 16; 
51; 268-176; number, 
12; 17; 48; 277-283; in- 
variable, 280; com- 
pound, 282; proper, 283; 
of number, 33 

nous, 62, 2; 77; 333; 335, 
11 

nouveau (jiouvel) , fern, nou- 
velle, 53, 8; 307, 9 

nu, agreement, 320, 5 

nuire, 221 



402 



INDEX 



nul, 85; 86, note a; 304; 
332, 3; with we, 356, 1 

nullement, with ne, 356, 1 

number, of nouns, 12; 17; 
48; 277-283; of adjec- 
tives, 48; 308, 309; of 
verbs, 115; agreement 
with subject, 240-244 

numerals, cardinals, 30; 
ordinals, 34; multiplica- 
tives, 329; fractions, 35 



O 

o, sounds of, 3, I, A, 6, 7, 

and note 1 
object, direct and indirect, 

62; 64, 65; 335, 3, 8, 9, 

16, 17 
obliger, -\- de with infin., 

248; + d with infin., 249 
s'occuper, -\- de, with infin., 

248; +d with infin., 249 
ceil, plural, 48, 4; 279, 4 
ceuvre, 274, i 
offrir, 163 ; + de with infin., 

248; s' offrir + a with in- 
fin., 249 
om, on, sound of, 3, I, B, 3 
on (Von), 86; 333; 347, 1-4 
ordinals, 34; use, 34, 4; 

304; 328 
orge, gender, 274, j 
orgue, gender, 274, k 
orthographic signs, 2 
oser, +infin., 247; with ne 

alone, 356, 9 
ou, sound of, 3, I, A, 8 
ou, plural of nouns in, 278, 

2; pi. of adjectives in, 

309, 3 
ou — ou, 42, 2 
OM, 2, 4; 350; as rel. pron., 

83, 6; 343, 10; as inter- 

rog. pron., 84, 5 
oui, 45 (bis) ; 354 
ouir, 164; +hmn., 247 
ouvrir, 165 
ownership, 80, note b 



paitre, 222 

Pdque(s), 274, 1 

paraitre, 223; +infin., 247 

parce que, 376, 2 

parler, article, Lesson XI, 

vocab., note 1 
paronyms, 381 
participles, see " past par- 
ticiple," etc. 
partir, 166 
partitives, 39; 292, 293; 

article omitted, 39, 2; 

294; in comparisons, 

Lesson XXVIII, note 2 
pas, with ne, 14; position, 

69, note b; 95, note 3; 

alone, 43, note; 355; 

356, 8 
passive verb, 133, A, 2; 

passive voice, 135; 136 
past anterior (parfait ante- 

rieur), 103; 120, 7 
past definite {parfait de- 

fini), 102; 120, 3 
past indefinite (parfait in- 

defini), 69; 120, 5 
past participle (participe 
passe), 68, 3; 69, note c; 

125, 2; agreement, 71; 

257-261 
past perfect, 103; 120, 6, 7 
peindre, 224 
penser, + infin., 247; + a 

with infin.' 249 
perfect imperative, 122, 2 
perfect participle (par- 
ticipe parfait), 97; 125, 3 
periode, 274, m 
person of verbs, 116 
personal pronouns, 62; 76; 

333; 334-337 
personne, 86, note c; with 

ne, 45; 356, 1 
petit, comparison, 56, note 

a 
peu, comparison, 57, note; 

le peu, agreement of 

past part., 261, 8 



peur, de — que, with subj., 

101, II, B, 1 
pire, 56, note a; 314 
pis, 57, note 
place where, 98 
plaire, 225 
pleuvoir, 185 
plupart, 294, 4, c 
pluperfect (plus-que-par- 

fait), indie, 103; 120, 6; 

subj., 105 and note a; 

sequence, 106 
plural, of nouns, 12; 17, 1, 

2; 48; 277-283; of adjec- 
tives, 48; 308, 309; of 

verbs, 115; 240-244 
plus, in comparison, adj., 

56; adv., 57; plus vs. 

davantage, 353, 4; plus 

d'un, 244, 2, a 
plusieurs, 85; 86, note a 
plutot vs. plus tot, 351, 

Rem. 2 
point, with ne, 45; 355; 

356,8 
position of adjectives, 19; 

54; 321-323 
possessive adjectives, 28; 

repeated, 28, note 4; 

304; 331 
possessive nouns, 29 
possessive pronouns, 80; 

333; 340, 341 
pour que, with subj., 101, 

II, B, 1 
pourvu que, with subj., 

101, II, B, 3 
pouvoir, 186; secondary 

auxiliary, 239; with in- 
fin., 95, 2; 247; with ne 

alone, 356, 9 
premier, 34, 3; with subj., 

101, II, C, 1, note 
prendre, 226; prendre garde 

+de with infin., 248; +d 

with infinitive, 249; 

with subj., 101, II, A, 2 
preposition, 362-372; with 

infin., 95, 1, a; 95, 3, 4 
pres de vs. aupres de, 371 



INDEX 



403 



present, indicative (of 4 
conj.), 47; 120, 1; idio- 
matic, 72; cond., 92, 
121; imper., 66; 122; 
subj., 100; 101; 123, 1; 
infin., 46; 68, 1; 94, 95; 
124; 246-249; part., 68, 
2; 96; 125, 1; 252; vs. 
verbal adj., 253-256 

pretendre, with infin., 247; 
with d +infin., 249 

prier, with infin., 247; with 
d+infin., 249 

principal parts of verbs, 68 

promouvoir, 187 

pronominal adverbs, 63 ; 
336 

pronoun, 333-347; conj. 
pers., 62; disj. pers., 76; 
pers., 333, 334-337; 
demons., 79; 333; 338, 
339; poss., 80; 333; 340, 
341; rel., 81; 333; 342, 
343; interrog., 84; 344, 
345;indef., 86; 346, 347 

pronunciation, 3-8; of car- 
dinals, 30, notes 1, 2, 3, 
4 

proper adjectives, 9, 2 

proper nouns, plural of, 
283; use of article with, 
99 

pu, agreement of past 
part., 261, 4 

puis, 186; 351 

puisque, 374 

punctuation, 10 

purpose, subj., 101, II, B, 
1; 101, II, C, 4 . 



qu, sound of, 4, 6 
quand vs. quant d, 376, 4 
quart, 35 

quatre-vingt(s), 31 
que (relative pron.), 81; 

83, 1; 333; 343, 4-6 
que? (interrogative pron.), 

84, 2; 333; 345, 1-3 



que!, 345, 3 

que (conj.), 376, 1; with 
subj., 100, II, A; replac- 
ing other conj., 101, II, 
B, note; in comparison, 
" than," " as," 56, note 
b; 312, d; with ne, 45; 
356, 3, 4 

quel?, 20; 84,6; 85, note b 

quelconque, 85; 304; 332 

quelque, 85; 304; 332, 4 

quelqu'un, 86; 333 

querir, 167 

qui (relative pron.), 81; 83, 
1; 333; 343, 1-3; after 
prep., 83, 2; 343, 3 

qui? (interrog. pron.), 84, 
1; 333; 345, 1-3 

quiconque, 347, 8 

quoi (rel. pron.), 81; 83, 3; 
333; 343, 7-9 

quoi (interrog. pron.), 84, 
3; 333; 345, 4, 5 

quoique, with subj., 101, 
II, B, 4; vs. quoi que, 
376, 3 



radical, 114 
recevoir, 111 
reciprocal verbs, 59, 3 
reflexive verbs, 59; 133, A, 

3; 137; auxiliary of, 70, 

2; agreement of past 

part., 71, 2, a 
refuser, + de with subj., 

248; +d with subj., 249 
relative clauses, take subj., 

101, II, C 
relative pronoun, 81; 333; 

agreement, 82; use, 83; 

343 
religions, 9, 4 
remarks on verbs, 113 
se repentir, 137 
repetition, of conjunction, 

101, II, B, note; of poss. 

adj., 28, 4; of prep., 336; 

of qui, 343, 2 



replet, fern., 53, 2; 307, 2 
resondre, 227; -J- de with 

infin., 248; + d with 

infin., 249 
restrictive clauses, take 

subj., 101, II, C, 3 
result clauses, take subj., 

101, II, B, 2 
revenir, 67, note 
rien, 86, note d; 333; 347, 9 
rire, 228 
rompre, 112 



S 



s, sound of, 4, 7; in liaison, 

7, note 1 
s, plural of nouns and ad- 
jectives in, 17, 2; 48, 1; 

308; fern, of adjs. in, 53, 

1; 307, 1 
j saillir, 168 
sans, with infin., 95, 1, a; 

sans que, with subj., 

101, II, B, 5 
savoir, 188; with ne alone, 

356, 9; with infin., 247 
schools of philosophy, 9, 4 
se, reflex, pron., 62, 2; 333; 

335, 18 
seasons, Lesson VII, vo- 

cab. and note 1 
second, 34, 3 

secondary auxiliaries, 239 
secret, fern., 53, 2; 307, 2 
sembler, il semble, constr., 

101, II, A, 3, note 
semi-vowel, 4, 10 
sentir, 169 
seoir, 189 

sequence of tenses, 106 
serrir, 170 
seul, with subj., 101, II, C, 

1, note 
si (adv.), 45 (bis) and note 
si (conj.), 376, 5; with ne, 

356, 6, a 
sien, sienne, 80 
six, 30, note 1 
" so " =le, 335, 9, b 



404 



INDEX 



soi, 77; uses, 78 

soit que . . . soit que, with 
subj., 101, II, B, 4 

son, sa, ses, 28; 304; son 
for sa, 28, note 2; son = 
" his " or " her," 28, 
note 1 

sorte, de — que, indie, or 
subj., 101, II, B, 2 

sortir, 171 

souffrir, 172 

souloir, 190 

sounds, of French vowels, 
3; of consonants, 4; in- 
ternational phonetic sys- 
tem of marking, 5 

stem of verb, 47, note 1; 
stem vowel e or e, 61; 
143 

subjunctive mode, 100; 
uses, 101, in indepen- 
dent clauses, 101, I; in 
subordinate clauses, 101, 
II; in relative cl., 101, 
II, C; present subj., 100, 
1, notes a, b; imperfect, 
104; 123, 2; pluperfect, 
105 

substantive verb, 133, B, 3 

suffire, 229 ; 4- d with infin., 

249 
suivre, 230 

superlative degree of adjs., 
56, 3; 313; relative, 313, 
1; absolute, 313, 2; with 
subj., 101, II, C, 1 

suppose que, en supposant 
que, with subj., 101, II, 
B, 3 

syllables, 8 

synonyms, 382 



t, euphonic, 26, note 2; 

130, Rem. c 
t, fern, of nouns in, 51, A, 

2; 276, A, 2; of adjs., 53, 

1; 307, 1 



taire, 231 

tant, 353, Rem. 2, b 

te, 62, 2; 333; 335, 5 

tel, 85; 86, note a; 347, 10 

temoin, 280, 2 

temporal conj., 101, II, B, 
6 

tenir, 173 

tenses, 118; simple and 
compound, 119; of in- 
die, 120, 1-8; of cond., 
121; of imper., 122; of 
subj., 123; tense se- 
quence, 106 

terminaison, 114 

teur, fern., 53, 7, d; 307, 7, 
d 

th, sound of, 4, 8 . 

" than " in comparison, 
56, note b; 312, d, e 

thinking or saying, verbs 
of, 101, II, A, 1 

tien, tienne, 80; 333; 341 

tiers, 35; fem. tierce, 53, 8; 
'307, 9 

tistre, 232 

toi, 77; 333; 335, 5 

ton, ta, tes, 28 and note 3; 
304; 331; ton for ta, 28, 
note 2 

tout, 48, 4, a; 85; 86, note 
a; 309, 3, a; 332, 5; 347, 
11 

traire, 233 

transir, 174 » 

transitive verb, 133, A 

travail?- 279, 5 

travers, a — , au — , 372 

trembler, -\- de with infin., 
248; +dwith infin., 249 

tressaillir, 175 

tu, 26, note 1; 333; 335, 5 



U 

u, sound of, 3, I, A, 12 
um, un, sound of, 3, I, B, 4 
un (indef. art.), 22; 285; 
290 



un (numeral), 30 
Vun (indef. pron.), 86 
Vun V autre, 86; 347, 6; 

Vun et I'autre, 347, 7 
unieme, 34, 3 
Vunique, 101, II, C, 1, note 



vaincre, 234 

valoir, 171; agreement of 
past part., 260, 6; valoir 
mieux, 4-infin., 247 

venir, 176; with infin., 95, 
note 2; 239, 3 

verb, 107-261; first conj., 
109, 129; second conj., 
110; 128, Rem.; third 
conj., Ill; fourth, 112; 
verbs conjugated inter- 
rogatively, 130; nega- 
tively, 131; interrog. 
and neg., 132; irregular 
verbs, 145-235; auxil- 
iaries, 107, 108; 70; 126; 
236-239; secondary 
auxs., 239 ; passive voice, 
135, 136; impersonals, 
138, 139; reflexives, 59; 
133, A, 3; 137; aux. of 
reflex., 70, 2; agreement 
of past part., 71; 257- 
261; agreement of verb 
with subject, 240-244 

verbal adjective, 253-256 

vStir, 117 

vieux, 53, 3, c; 307, 3, b 

vingt(s), 31 

vivre, 235; agreement of 
past part., 260, 7 

void, 24 

voila, 24; 37 

voir, 192 

votre, vos (poss. adj.), 28; 
304; for ton, etc., 28, 
note 3 

vdtre (poss. pron.), 80; 333; 
340, 341; for tien, etc., 
80, note a 



INDEX 



405 



touloir, 193; 239; +infin., 

247 
voulu, agreement, 261, 4 
vous, 333; 335, 12; for tu, 

26, note 1; conjunctive, 

62, 2; disjunctive, 77; 

335, 12 
vowels, 3; long and short, 

3, 1; open and closed, 3, 

2; table, 3, 3; pure, 3, I, 

A; nasal, 3, I, B 
tu, agreement, 258, 2 



W 

sound of, 4, 



will, expressions of, 101, 
II, A, 2 



x, in liaison, 7, note 1 

x, plural of nouns in, 17, 2; 

278; of adjs. in, 48, 1; 

308; fern, of adjs. in, 53, 

3; 307, 3 



y, sound of, 4, 10 

y, semi-vowel or semi- 



consonant, 4, 10; =*ii, 

4, 10, note 
y (adverb), 27, 2; y = 

" here," 27, note a; 

position, 27, note b 
y (prom, adv.), 62, 2; 63; 

333; 336, 2; position, 

64, 65; 337 
y, il y a, 37; 350, 6 
yer, verbs in, 142 
ym, yn, sound of, 3, I, B, 2 



z, plural of nouns in, 17, 2; 
48, 1 



bfv 



